WO2021166719A1 - Method for manufacturing cut article, and layered body - Google Patents

Method for manufacturing cut article, and layered body Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021166719A1
WO2021166719A1 PCT/JP2021/004622 JP2021004622W WO2021166719A1 WO 2021166719 A1 WO2021166719 A1 WO 2021166719A1 JP 2021004622 W JP2021004622 W JP 2021004622W WO 2021166719 A1 WO2021166719 A1 WO 2021166719A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
mass
preferable
meth
compound
photosensitive layer
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/004622
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
洋行 海鉾
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2022501812A priority Critical patent/JPWO2021166719A1/ja
Priority to CN202180007985.9A priority patent/CN114901442A/en
Publication of WO2021166719A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021166719A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B26HAND CUTTING TOOLS; CUTTING; SEVERING
    • B26DCUTTING; DETAILS COMMON TO MACHINES FOR PERFORATING, PUNCHING, CUTTING-OUT, STAMPING-OUT OR SEVERING
    • B26D1/00Cutting through work characterised by the nature or movement of the cutting member or particular materials not otherwise provided for; Apparatus or machines therefor; Cutting members therefor
    • B26D1/01Cutting through work characterised by the nature or movement of the cutting member or particular materials not otherwise provided for; Apparatus or machines therefor; Cutting members therefor involving a cutting member which does not travel with the work
    • B26D1/12Cutting through work characterised by the nature or movement of the cutting member or particular materials not otherwise provided for; Apparatus or machines therefor; Cutting members therefor involving a cutting member which does not travel with the work having a cutting member moving about an axis
    • B26D1/14Cutting through work characterised by the nature or movement of the cutting member or particular materials not otherwise provided for; Apparatus or machines therefor; Cutting members therefor involving a cutting member which does not travel with the work having a cutting member moving about an axis with a circular cutting member, e.g. disc cutter
    • B26D1/24Cutting through work characterised by the nature or movement of the cutting member or particular materials not otherwise provided for; Apparatus or machines therefor; Cutting members therefor involving a cutting member which does not travel with the work having a cutting member moving about an axis with a circular cutting member, e.g. disc cutter coacting with another disc cutter
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B26HAND CUTTING TOOLS; CUTTING; SEVERING
    • B26DCUTTING; DETAILS COMMON TO MACHINES FOR PERFORATING, PUNCHING, CUTTING-OUT, STAMPING-OUT OR SEVERING
    • B26D3/00Cutting work characterised by the nature of the cut made; Apparatus therefor
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B26HAND CUTTING TOOLS; CUTTING; SEVERING
    • B26DCUTTING; DETAILS COMMON TO MACHINES FOR PERFORATING, PUNCHING, CUTTING-OUT, STAMPING-OUT OR SEVERING
    • B26D7/00Details of apparatus for cutting, cutting-out, stamping-out, punching, perforating, or severing by means other than cutting
    • B26D7/27Means for performing other operations combined with cutting
    • B26D7/32Means for performing other operations combined with cutting for conveying or stacking cut product
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B38/00Ancillary operations in connection with laminating processes
    • B32B38/18Handling of layers or the laminate
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B7/00Layered products characterised by the relation between layers; Layered products characterised by the relative orientation of features between layers, or by the relative values of a measurable parameter between layers, i.e. products comprising layers having different physical, chemical or physicochemical properties; Layered products characterised by the interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/02Physical, chemical or physicochemical properties
    • B32B7/023Optical properties
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials

Definitions

  • This disclosure relates to a method for producing a cut product and a laminate.
  • the electrode pattern corresponding to the sensor of the visual recognition part, the peripheral wiring part, and the wiring of the take-out wiring part are wired.
  • a conductive layer pattern such as is provided inside the touch panel.
  • the number of steps for obtaining the required pattern shape is small, so that a layer of a photosensitive composition provided on an arbitrary substrate using a photosensitive transfer member is used.
  • a method of developing after exposure through a mask having a desired pattern is widely used.
  • Patent Document 1 As a conventional film cutting method, the one described in Patent Document 1 is known.
  • a continuously traveling film is inserted between an upper blade and a lower blade that rotate so that one side surface of each blade edge is in sliding contact with each other, and along the traveling direction.
  • a method for cutting a film so as to be divided in the width direction wherein the upper blade has a cutting edge angle of 80 to 90 ° in sliding contact with the lower blade, and the lower blade is the upper blade.
  • a method for cutting a film is described, wherein a blade having a blade edge angle of 80 to 90 ° in sliding contact with the blade is used.
  • An object to be solved by one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a method for producing a cut product capable of suppressing a dent failure in the obtained cut product. Further, an object to be solved by another embodiment of the present invention is to provide a laminated body having few dent failures.
  • Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
  • a method for producing a cut product which comprises a step of sandwiching and cutting a laminate having a photosensitive layer between an upper blade and a lower blade, and a clearance between the cutting edge of the upper blade and the cutting edge of the lower blade is 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the chamfering angle ⁇ 1 which is an inclination angle of the lower blade side at the cutting edge of the upper blade in a cross section perpendicular to the feed direction of the laminated body of the upper blade is 3 ° or less.
  • ⁇ 3> The method for producing a cut product according to ⁇ 1> or ⁇ 2>, wherein the cutting edge angle ⁇ 2 of the upper blade is 33 ° or less in a cross section perpendicular to the feeding direction of the laminated body of the upper blade.
  • ⁇ 4> The method for producing a cut product according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, wherein the thickness of the entire laminate is 50 ⁇ m or less.
  • ⁇ 5> The method for producing a cut product according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, wherein the thickness of the photosensitive layer is 1 ⁇ m to 20 ⁇ m.
  • ⁇ 6> The method for producing a cut product according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, wherein the laminated body is a laminated body having a support, the photosensitive layer, and a cover film.
  • ⁇ 7> The method for producing a cut product according to ⁇ 6>, wherein the thickness of the support and the cover film are independently 10 ⁇ m to 20 ⁇ m.
  • ⁇ 8> The method for producing a cut product according to ⁇ 6> or ⁇ 7>, wherein the arithmetic mean roughness Ra value of the surface of the support on the photosensitive layer side is 0.05 ⁇ m or less.
  • ⁇ 9> The method for producing a cut product according to any one of ⁇ 6> to ⁇ 8>, wherein the arithmetic average roughness Ra value of the surface of the cover film on the photosensitive layer side is 0.1 ⁇ m or less.
  • the method for producing a cut product according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 9> which comprises a step of winding at least a part of the cut product of the obtained laminated body after the cutting step.
  • ⁇ 11> A laminate having a photosensitive layer, wherein the laminate has at least a cut surface, and the number of cracks per 10 cut surface portions having a cut surface width of 50 ⁇ m is 3 or less.
  • ⁇ 12> A laminate having a photosensitive layer, wherein the laminate has a cut surface formed by at least being cut, and the number of dent failures in the laminate is 60 / m 2 or less. ..
  • the present invention it is possible to provide a method for producing a cut product capable of suppressing a dent failure in the obtained cut product. Further, according to another embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a laminated body having few dent failures.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example of an upper blade and a lower blade of a disk-shaped rotary slitter used in the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of the layer structure of the photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of an example of an end portion of a cut surface obtained by cutting a laminate having a support, a photosensitive layer, and a cover film.
  • the numerical range represented by using “-" in the present specification means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
  • “(meth) acrylic” represents both acrylic and methacrylic, or either
  • “(meth) acrylate” represents both acrylate and methacrylate, or either.
  • the amount of each component in the composition is the sum of the plurality of applicable substances present in the composition unless otherwise specified, when a plurality of substances corresponding to each component are present in the composition. Means quantity.
  • the term "process” is included in this term not only as an independent process but also as long as the intended purpose of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes.
  • substitution and non-substitution includes those having no substituent as well as those having a substituent.
  • the "alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • exposure as used herein includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as an electron beam and an ion beam.
  • the light used for exposure generally includes the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and active rays (active energy rays) such as electron beams. Can be mentioned. Further, the chemical structural formula in the present specification may be described by a simplified structural formula in which a hydrogen atom is omitted. In the present disclosure, “% by mass” and “% by weight” are synonymous, and “parts by mass” and “parts by weight” are synonymous. Further, in the present disclosure, a combination of two or more preferred embodiments is a more preferred embodiment.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) in the present disclosure use columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, and TSKgel G2000HxL (all trade names manufactured by Toso Co., Ltd.). It is a molecular weight converted by detecting with a solvent THF (tetrahydrofuran) and a differential refractometer by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer and using polystyrene as a standard substance.
  • the content of the metal element is a value measured using an inductively coupled plasma (ICP) spectroscopic analyzer.
  • the refractive index is a value measured using an ellipsometer at a wavelength of 550 nm.
  • the hue is a value measured using a color difference meter (CR-221, manufactured by Minolta Co., Ltd.).
  • alkali-soluble means that the solubility of sodium carbonate having a liquid temperature of 22 ° C. in 100 g of a 1% by mass aqueous solution is 0.1 g or more.
  • water-soluble means that the solubility in 100 g of water having a liquid temperature of 22 ° C. and a pH of 7.0 is 0.1 g or more.
  • the water-soluble resin is intended to be a resin that satisfies the above-mentioned solubility conditions.
  • the "solid content" of the composition means a component forming a layer produced by using the composition, and when the composition contains a solvent (organic solvent, water, etc.), the solvent is removed. Means all ingredients. Further, if the component forms the above layer, the liquid component is also regarded as a solid content.
  • the layer thickness of each layer included in the photosensitive transfer member is based on an observation image obtained by observing a cross section in a direction perpendicular to the main surface of the photosensitive transfer member with a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The thickness of each layer is measured at an arbitrary 5 points or more, and the average value thereof is calculated to measure the thickness.
  • the method for producing a cut product according to the present disclosure includes a step of sandwiching and cutting a laminate having a photosensitive layer between an upper blade and a lower blade, and the clearance between the upper blade and the lower blade is 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • a resist material such as a photosensitive transfer member to narrow the gap between the mask and the resist material in order to form a resist faithful to the patterning mask by exposure.
  • the narrower the gap the shorter the optical path length, the less affected by diffraction and scattering, and the more faithful the resist to the mask can be realized.
  • the gap distances are noticeable and it is important to control them. Since the dry film is exposed through the support from the viewpoint of preventing mask contamination, it is necessary to reduce the thickness of the support, and the total film thickness is decreasing accordingly. It cannot be cut well under the conventional cutting conditions, and many chips are generated. When the chips adhere to the cut laminate (cut piece) having the photosensitive layer, a dent failure occurs. The present inventor has found that it occurs.
  • chips adhere to a laminate having a photosensitive layer, and then the cut pieces are stacked for storage, resulting in a dent failure. Further, when the laminate having the photosensitive layer is wound in a roll shape, a dent failure occurs due to the inclusion of chip pieces.
  • the present inventor has found that dent failure in the obtained cut product can be suppressed by adopting the method for producing the cut product having the above configuration.
  • the clearance between the cutting edge of the upper blade and the cutting edge of the lower blade is 5 ⁇ m or less, so that chips are formed when the laminate having the photosensitive layer is cut. It is presumed that the generation of dents can be suppressed and the dent failure caused by the adhesion of chips to the laminate can be suppressed.
  • the laminate having the photosensitive layer is preferably a photosensitive transfer member.
  • the photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure is preferably a negative type photosensitive transfer member. A preferred embodiment of the laminate having the photosensitive layer will be described later.
  • the method for producing a cut product according to the present disclosure includes a step of sandwiching and cutting a laminate having a photosensitive layer between an upper blade and a lower blade, and a clearance between the cutting edge of the upper blade and the cutting edge of the lower blade is 5 ⁇ m.
  • the cutting means having an upper blade and a lower blade used in the present disclosure is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a cutting machine and a slitter.
  • the cutting means is preferably a rotary slitter, and more preferably a disk-shaped rotary slitter, from the viewpoint that it can be continuously cut and can be wound in a roll shape.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example of the upper blade and the lower blade of the disk-shaped rotary slitter used in the present disclosure, and shows a cross section in a direction perpendicular to the cut surface of the laminated body.
  • the upper blade 102 is a blade having a chamfering angle ⁇ 1 and a cutting edge angle ⁇ 2, and has a chamfering length R1.
  • the lower blade 104 is a blade having a chamfering angle ⁇ 3 and has a chamfering length R2.
  • the clearance CL between the cutting edge 102a of the upper blade 102 and the cutting edge 104a of the lower blade 104 shown in FIG. 1 is a value of R1 + R2.
  • the laminate having the photosensitive layer (not shown) is sandwiched between the upper blade 102 and the lower blade 104 according to the penetration depth T of the upper blade 102 with respect to the lower blade 104 to have the photosensitive layer.
  • the laminate is cut. In FIG. 1, it is sandwiched between the upper blade 102 and the lower blade 104, and the laminated body having the photosensitive layer is cut so as to be separated into the left and right.
  • the clearance CL between the cutting edge 102a of the upper blade 102 and the cutting edge 104a of the lower blade 104 is 5 ⁇ m or less, preferably 1 ⁇ m or more and 5 ⁇ m or less, and 2 ⁇ m or more and 4.5 ⁇ m or less from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects. Is more preferable, and it is more preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or more and 4.0 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or more and 3.5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the chamfer length R1 of the upper blade 102 is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more and 3 ⁇ m or less from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects. It is more preferably 5 ⁇ m or more and 2.5 ⁇ m or less, further preferably 0.8 ⁇ m or more and 2.0 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 0.8 ⁇ m or more and 1.5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the chamfer length R2 of the lower blade 104 is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more and 3 ⁇ m or less from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects. It is more preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or more and 2.5 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 1.5 ⁇ m or more and 2.5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the chamfer angle ⁇ 1 which is the inclination angle of the lower blade side of the cutting edge 102a of the upper blade 102 shall be 15 ° or less from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects. Is more preferable, 10 ° or less is more preferable, 3 ° or less is further preferable, and 1 ° or more and 3 ° or less is particularly preferable. Further, the chamfer angle ⁇ 1 is preferably an angle exceeding 0 ° from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects.
  • the cutting edge angle ⁇ 2 of the upper blade 102 is preferably 45 ° or less, more preferably 40 ° or less, from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects. , 33 ° or less, and particularly preferably 20 ° or more and 33 ° or less. Further, the cutting edge angle ⁇ 2 is preferably an angle of 2 times or more of the chamfering angle ⁇ 1, more preferably 5 times or more of the chamfering angle ⁇ 1, and 10 of the chamfering angle ⁇ 1 from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects. It is particularly preferable that the angle is double or more.
  • the cutting edge angle ⁇ 3 of the lower blade 104 is preferably 75 ° or more and 120 ° or less, and 80 ° or more and 110 ° or less from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects. It is more preferably 85 ° or more and 105 ° or less, and particularly preferably 90 ° or more and 100 ° or less.
  • the materials of the upper blade 102 and the lower blade 104 are not particularly limited, and known materials can be used.
  • high-speed tool steel (SKH), alloy tool steel (for example, SKD), cemented carbide and the like are preferable. It is appropriately set depending on the thickness of the laminated body, cutting conditions, and the like. Further, the shapes of the upper blade 102 and the lower blade 104 other than those described above such as the thickness of the upper blade 102 and the thickness of the lower blade 104 can be appropriately set according to the thickness of the laminated body and the like.
  • the upper blade 102 is preferably located above the lower blade 104 in the direction of gravity.
  • the penetration depth T of the upper blade 102 with respect to the lower blade 104 at the time of cutting in the above-mentioned cutting step is not particularly limited as long as it can be cut, but from the viewpoint of cutting speed and suppression of dent defects, the rotary slitter Is preferably 0.4 mm to 0.6 mm. Further, in the rotary slitter, it is preferable that the upper blade 102 and the lower blade 104 in the cutting step are in sliding contact with each other at least in a part.
  • the shape and size of the cut product obtained by cutting the laminated body are not particularly limited, and may be cut into a desired shape and size. Further, the materials and sizes of the upper blade and the lower blade can be appropriately selected according to the laminated body and the obtained cut piece. Further, in the cutting step, it is preferable to cut the laminated body in the thickness direction.
  • the cutting speed in the above-mentioned cutting step is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected as desired.
  • the method for producing a cut product according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step of winding at least a part of the obtained cut product of the laminated body after the cutting step.
  • the winding method is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used, but in the winding step, it is preferable to wind the cut piece in a roll shape.
  • the method for producing a cut product according to the present disclosure may include any step (other steps) other than the above-mentioned steps. Examples of other steps include known steps.
  • the cutting device used in the present disclosure is not particularly limited, and the upper blade and the lower blade can be adjusted within the above range and used in a known cutting device.
  • a preferable cutting device is, for example, a cutting device including a disk-shaped rotary slitter, which has a rotating shaft of an upper blade and a rotating shaft of a lower blade arranged in parallel with each other, and each rotation. A circular upper blade and a lower blade are fixed to the shaft, respectively. At the time of cutting, the laminated body is cut while one side surfaces of the upper and lower blades are in sliding contact with each other. Further, each rotation shaft is configured to rotate in a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism, and the upper blade and the lower blade rotate respectively.
  • the laminate having a photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a laminate having two or more layers having a photosensitive layer, but it is a laminate having at least a support and a photosensitive layer. Is preferable, and a laminate having a support, a photosensitive layer, and a cover film is more preferable.
  • the laminate having the photosensitive layer is preferably a photosensitive transfer member.
  • the support and the photosensitive layer may be directly laminated without interposing another layer, or may be laminated through another layer. Further, another layer may be laminated on the surface of the photosensitive layer opposite to the surface facing the support. Examples of layers other than the support and the photosensitive layer include a thermoplastic resin layer, an intermediate layer, a refractive index adjusting layer, and a cover film. Further, each layer may be a single layer or a plurality of layers or more.
  • the thickness of the entire laminate is preferably 50 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 42 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 20 ⁇ m or more and 42 ⁇ m or less, from the viewpoint of further exerting the effects in the present disclosure.
  • the photosensitive layer is preferably a negative photosensitive layer. It is also preferable that the photosensitive layer is a colored resin layer.
  • the laminate having a photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure may be used as a photosensitive transfer material member for a wiring protective film or as a photosensitive transfer member for an etching resist, as will be described later.
  • the structure of the laminated body is preferably, for example, the above-mentioned structure (1) or (2).
  • the structure of the laminated body is preferably, for example, the above-mentioned structures (2) to (4).
  • the laminate in the case of a configuration in which another layer is further provided on the side opposite to the support side of the photosensitive layer, the laminate is arranged on the side opposite to the support side of the photosensitive layer.
  • the total thickness of the layers is preferably 0.1% to 30%, more preferably 0.1% to 20%, based on the thickness of the photosensitive layer.
  • the maximum width of the waviness of the laminate having the photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure is preferably 300 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 200 ⁇ m or less, and 60 ⁇ m or less. It is more preferable to have.
  • the lower limit of the maximum width of the waviness of the photosensitive transfer member is 0 ⁇ m or more, preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or more, and more preferably 1 ⁇ m or more.
  • the maximum width of the waviness of the laminate having the photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure is a value measured by the following procedure.
  • the laminate is cut in a direction perpendicular to the main surface so as to have a size of 20 cm in length ⁇ 20 cm in width to prepare a test sample.
  • the cover film is peeled off.
  • the test sample is placed on a stage having a smooth and horizontal surface so that the surface of the support faces the stage.
  • the surface of the test sample was scanned with a laser microscope (for example, VK-9700SP manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION) for a range of 10 cm square at the center of the test sample to obtain a three-dimensional surface image, and the obtained three-dimensional image was obtained.
  • a laser microscope for example, VK-9700SP manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION
  • the laminate of the following embodiment A has a configuration that can be suitably used for a photosensitive transfer member for an etching resist
  • the laminate of the following embodiment B is suitably used for a photosensitive transfer member for a wiring protective film. It is a configuration that can be done.
  • the laminate used in the present disclosure preferably has a support.
  • the photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure has a support.
  • the support is a support that supports a photosensitive layer or a laminated body including the photosensitive layer and can be peeled off.
  • the support preferably has light transmission property from the viewpoint of enabling exposure of the photosensitive layer through the support when pattern-exposing the photosensitive layer.
  • “having light transmittance” means that the transmittance of light of the wavelength used for pattern exposure is 50% or more.
  • the support preferably has a light transmittance of 60% or more, preferably 70% or more, at a wavelength (more preferably 365 nm) used for pattern exposure. More preferred.
  • the transmittance of the layer included in the photosensitive transfer member refers to the light emitted through the layer with respect to the intensity of the incident light when the light is incident in the direction perpendicular to the main surface of the layer (thickness direction). It is a ratio of the intensity of light emission, and is measured using MCPD Series manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
  • the support may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure.
  • the material constituting the support include a glass substrate, a resin film and paper, and a resin film is preferable from the viewpoint of strength, flexibility and light transmission.
  • the resin film include polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film, cellulose triacetate film, polystyrene film and polycarbonate film. Among them, a PET film is preferable, and a biaxially stretched PET film is more preferable.
  • the thickness (layer thickness) of the support is not particularly limited, and the strength as the support, the flexibility required for bonding to the circuit wiring forming substrate, and the light transmission required in the first exposure step are not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of sex, it may be selected according to the material.
  • the thickness of the support is preferably in the range of 5 ⁇ m to 100 ⁇ m, more preferably in the range of 10 ⁇ m to 50 ⁇ m, further preferably in the range of 10 ⁇ m to 20 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably in the range of 10 ⁇ m to 16 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of ease of handling and versatility. preferable.
  • the average thickness of the support is preferably 50 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 25 ⁇ m or less, from the viewpoint of resolution and linearity when exposed through the support.
  • Examples of the support include a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 16 ⁇ m, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 12 ⁇ m, and a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 9 ⁇ m.
  • the film used as the support has no deformation such as wrinkles, scratches, defects and the like.
  • the number of fine particles, foreign substances, defects, precipitates, etc. contained in the support is small.
  • the number of the above fine particles and foreign matter and defect diameter 1 ⁇ m is preferably 50/10 mm 2 or less, more preferably 10/10 mm 2 or less, further preferably 3/10 mm 2 or less , 0 pieces / 10 mm 2 is particularly preferable.
  • Preferred embodiments of the support include, for example, paragraphs 0017 to 0018 of JP2014-85643, paragraphs 0019 to 0026 of JP2016-27363, and paragraphs 0041 to 0057 of International Publication No. 2012/081680. It is described in paragraphs 0029 to 0040 of International Publication No. 2018/179370 and paragraphs 0012 to 0032 of JP-A-2019-101405, and the contents of these publications are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the arithmetic mean roughness Ra value of the surface of the support on the photosensitive layer side is preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or less, from the viewpoint of more exerting the effect in the present disclosure. It is preferably 0.05 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 0.05 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit of the Ra value of the surface of the support in contact with the photosensitive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.001 ⁇ m or more.
  • the Ra value on the surface of the support and the cover film is measured by the following method. Using a three-dimensional optical profiler (New View7300, manufactured by Zygo), the surface of the support or cover film is measured under the following conditions to obtain a surface profile of the optical film. As the measurement / analysis software, Microscope Application of MetroPro ver 8.3.2 is used. Next, the Surface Map screen is displayed with the above analysis software, and histogram data is obtained in the Surface Map screen. From the obtained histogram data, the arithmetic mean roughness is calculated, and the Ra value of the surface of the support or the cover film is obtained. When the support or cover film is attached to the photosensitive layer or the like, the support or cover film may be peeled from the photosensitive layer, and the Ra value of the surface on the peeled side may be measured.
  • a three-dimensional optical profiler As the measurement / analysis software, Microscope Application of MetroPro ver 8.3.2 is used.
  • the Surface Map screen is displayed with the above analysis software, and histogram data is obtained in the
  • a layer containing fine particles may be provided on the surface of the support.
  • the lubricant layer may be provided on one side of the support or on both sides.
  • the diameter of the particles contained in the lubricant layer is preferably 0.05 ⁇ m to 0.8 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the lubricant layer is preferably 0.05 ⁇ m to 1.0 ⁇ m.
  • the laminate used in the present disclosure has a photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure has a photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive layer is preferably a negative photosensitive layer in which the solubility of the exposed portion in the developing solution is reduced by exposure and the non-exposed portion is removed by development.
  • the photosensitive layer is not limited to the negative photosensitive layer, and may be a positive photosensitive layer in which the solubility of the exposed portion in the developing solution is improved by exposure and the exposed portion is removed by development.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound and a binder polymer, more preferably contains a polymerizable compound, a binder polymer, and a photopolymerization initiator, and contains the polymer A, the polymerizable compound, and light. It is particularly preferable to include a polymerization initiator.
  • the photosensitive layer is based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer, and the binder polymer: 10% by mass to 90% by mass; the polymerizable compound: 5% by mass to 70% by mass; and the photopolymerization initiator: 0.01% by mass to It preferably contains 20% by mass.
  • each component will be described in order.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a binder polymer.
  • the binder polymer is not particularly limited, and for example, a known binder polymer used for an etching resist is preferably used.
  • a binder polymer an alkali-soluble polymer can be mentioned.
  • the alkali-soluble polymer is preferably an alkali-soluble polymer having an acid group.
  • the binder polymer the polymer A described later is preferable.
  • the binder polymer preferably contains the polymer A.
  • the polymer A is preferably an alkali-soluble polymer.
  • Alkali-soluble polymers include polymers that are easily soluble in alkaline substances.
  • the acid value of the polymer A is preferably 220 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably less than 200 mgKOH / g, and less than 190 mgKOH / g, from the viewpoint of better resolution by suppressing the swelling of the photosensitive layer due to the developing solution. Is more preferable.
  • the lower limit of the acid value of the polymer A is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of better developability, 60 mgKOH / g or more is preferable, 120 mgKOH / g or more is more preferable, 150 mgKOH / g or more is further preferable, and 170 mgKOH / g or more is preferable. Especially preferable.
  • the acid value is the mass [mg] of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize 1 g of the sample.
  • the unit is described as mgKOH / g.
  • the acid value can be calculated, for example, from the average content of acid groups in the compound.
  • the acid value of the polymer A may be adjusted according to the type of the structural unit constituting the polymer A and the content of the structural unit containing an acid group.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer A is preferably 5,000 to 500,000. It is preferable that the weight average molecular weight is 500,000 or less from the viewpoint of improving the resolution and developability.
  • the weight average molecular weight is more preferably 100,000 or less, further preferably 60,000 or less, and particularly preferably 50,000 or less.
  • setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more is preferable from the viewpoint of controlling the properties of the developed aggregate and the properties of the unexposed film such as edge fuse property and cut chip property.
  • the weight average molecular weight is more preferably 10,000 or more, further preferably 20,000 or more, and particularly preferably 30,000 or more.
  • the edge fuse property refers to the degree to which the photosensitive layer easily protrudes from the end face of the roll when the photosensitive transfer member is wound in a roll shape.
  • the cut chip property refers to the degree of ease with which the chip flies when the unexposed film is cut with a cutter. If this chip adheres to the upper surface of the photosensitive transfer member or the like, it will be transferred to the mask in a later exposure step or the like, causing a defective product.
  • the dispersity of the polymer A is preferably 1.0 to 6.0, more preferably 1.0 to 5.0, and even more preferably 1.0 to 4.0. It is more preferably 0.0 to 3.0.
  • the molecular weight is a value measured using gel permeation chromatography.
  • the degree of dispersion is the ratio of the weight average molecular weight to the number average molecular weight (weight average molecular weight / number average molecular weight).
  • the polymer A preferably has an aromatic hydrocarbon group, and has a structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, from the viewpoint of suppressing line width thickening and deterioration of resolution when the focal position is deviated during exposure. Is more preferable.
  • aromatic hydrocarbon group include a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group and a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group.
  • the content ratio of the structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group in the polymer A is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymer A, and is 40%. It is more preferably mass% or more, particularly preferably 45 mass% or more, and most preferably 50 mass% or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 95% by mass or less, and more preferably 85% by mass or less.
  • the content ratio of the structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is determined as a weight average value.
  • Examples of the monomer forming the structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group include a monomer having an aralkyl group, styrene, and a polymerizable styrene derivative (for example, methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, tert-butoxystyrene, acetoxy). Styrene, 4-vinyl benzoic acid, styrene dimer, styrene trimer, etc.) can be mentioned. Of these, a monomer having an aralkyl group or styrene is preferable.
  • the content ratio of the structural unit derived from styrene is 20 based on the total mass of the polymer A. It is preferably mass% to 50% by mass, more preferably 25% by mass to 45% by mass, further preferably 30% by mass to 40% by mass, and 30% by mass to 35% by mass. Is particularly preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer contains a plurality of types of polymers A, the content of the structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is determined as a weight average value.
  • aralkyl group examples include a substituted or unsubstituted phenylalkyl group, and a substituted or unsubstituted benzyl group is preferable.
  • Examples of the monomer having a phenylalkyl group other than the substituted or unsubstituted benzyl group include phenylethyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
  • a (meth) acrylate having a substituted or unsubstituted benzyl group for example, benzyl (meth) acrylate, chlorobenzyl (meth) acrylate, etc.
  • vinyl monomers eg, vinylbenzyl chloride, vinylbenzyl alcohol, etc.
  • benzyl (meth) acrylate is preferable.
  • the content ratio of the structural unit derived from the benzyl (meth) acrylate is the polymer A. It is preferably 50% by mass to 95% by mass, more preferably 60% by mass to 90% by mass, further preferably 70% by mass to 90% by mass, and 75% by mass, based on the total mass of the above. It is particularly preferably% to 90% by mass.
  • the polymer A having a structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, at least one of the first monomers described later, and / or a second single amount described later. It is preferably obtained by polymerizing with at least one of the bodies.
  • the polymer A having no structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably obtained by polymerizing at least one of the first monomers described later, and at least one of the first monomers. It is more preferable to obtain it by copolymerizing with at least one of the second monomers described later.
  • the first monomer is a monomer having a carboxy group in the molecule.
  • the first monomer include (meth) acrylic acid, fumaric acid, cinnamic acid, crotonic acid, itaconic acid, 4-vinylbenzoic acid, maleic anhydride, maleic acid semiester and the like.
  • (meth) acrylic acid is preferable.
  • the content ratio of the structural unit derived from the first monomer in the polymer A is preferably 5% by mass to 50% by mass, preferably 10% by mass to 40% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymer A. It is more preferable, and it is further preferable that it is 15% by mass to 30% by mass.
  • the content ratio of the structural unit derived from the first monomer is preferably 10% by mass to 50% by mass based on the total mass of the polymer A.
  • the copolymerization ratio of 10% by mass or more is preferable from the viewpoint of exhibiting good developability and controlling edge fuseability, more preferably 15% by mass or more, still more preferably 20% by mass or more. .. It is preferable that the content ratio is 50% by mass or less from the viewpoint of high resolution of the resist pattern and the shape of the resist pattern, and further from the viewpoint of chemical resistance of the resist pattern, and from these viewpoints, it is 35% by mass or less. Is more preferable, 30% by mass or less is further preferable, and 27% by mass or less is particularly preferable.
  • the second monomer is a monomer that is non-acidic and has at least one ethylenically unsaturated group in the molecule.
  • Examples of the second monomer include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and isobutyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the content ratio of the constituent unit derived from the second monomer in the polymer A is preferably 5% by mass to 60% by mass, preferably 15% by mass to 50% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymer A. It is more preferably 20% by mass to 45% by mass.
  • the polymer A contains at least one structural unit selected from the group consisting of a structural unit having an aralkyl group and a structural unit derived from styrene, when the focal position at the time of exposure is deviated. It is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing the line width thickening and the deterioration of the resolution.
  • a copolymer containing methacrylic acid, benzyl methacrylate and styrene a copolymer containing methacrylic acid, methyl methacrylate, benzyl methacrylate and styrene and the like are preferable.
  • the polymer A contains 25% by mass to 40% by mass of a structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, 20% by mass to 35% by mass of a structural unit derived from the first monomer, and a second. It is preferable that the polymer contains 30% by mass to 45% by mass of the structural unit derived from the monomer of. In another embodiment, the polymer contains 70% by mass to 90% by mass of a structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group and 10% by mass to 25% by mass of a structural unit derived from the first monomer. Is preferable.
  • the polymer A may have any of a linear structure, a branched structure, and an alicyclic structure in the side chain.
  • a branched structure or an alicyclic structure can be introduced into the side chain of the polymer A by using a monomer having a group having a branched structure in the side chain or a monomer containing a group having an alicyclic structure in the side chain. ..
  • the alicyclic structure may be a monocyclic structure or a polycyclic structure.
  • the monomer containing a group having a branched structure in the side chain examples include i-propyl (meth) acrylate, i-butyl (meth) acrylate, s-butyl (meth) acrylate, and t (meth) acrylate.
  • i-propyl (meth) acrylate, i-butyl (meth) acrylate, or t-butyl methacrylate are preferable, and i-propyl methacrylate or t-butyl methacrylate are more preferable.
  • the monomer having a group having an alicyclic structure in the side chain include a monomer having a monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and a monomer having a polycyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • a (meth) acrylate having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms (carbon atoms) can be mentioned.
  • More specific examples include (meth) acrylic acid (bicyclo [2.2.1] heptyl-2), (meth) acrylic acid-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid-2-adamantyl, (meth). -3-Methyl-1-adamantyl acrylate, -3,5-dimethyl-1-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, -3-ethyladamantyl (meth) acrylate, -3-methyl-5-methyl (meth) acrylate Ethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid-3,5,8-triethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid-3,5-dimethyl-8-ethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid 2 -Methyl-2-adamantyl, 2-ethyl-2-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, 3-hydroxy-1-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, o
  • (meth) acrylic acid esters (meth) acrylic acid cyclohexyl, (meth) acrylic acid (nor) boronyl, (meth) acrylic acid isobornyl, (meth) acrylic acid-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid- 2-adamantyl, fentyl (meth) acrylate, -1-mentyl (meth) acrylate or tricyclodecane (meth) acrylate are preferred, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, (nor) bornyl (nor) acrylate, ( More preferred are isobornyl acrylate, -2-adamantyl (meth) acrylate or tricyclodecane (meth) acrylate.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain the polymer A alone or in combination of two or more.
  • two kinds of the polymer A having an aromatic hydrocarbon group are mixed and used, or the polymer A having an aromatic hydrocarbon group and the polymer A having no aromatic hydrocarbon group are not used. It is preferable to use the polymer A in combination.
  • the content ratio of the polymer A having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymer A. It is more preferably 80% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 90% by mass or more.
  • a radical polymerization initiator such as benzoyl peroxide or azoisobutyronitrile is prepared by diluting the one or more monomers described above with a solvent such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone or isopropanol. Is preferably added in an appropriate amount and heated and stirred. In some cases, the synthesis is carried out while dropping a part of the mixture into the reaction solution. After completion of the reaction, a solvent may be further added to adjust the concentration to a desired level. As the synthesis means, bulk polymerization, suspension polymerization, or emulsion polymerization may be used in addition to solution polymerization.
  • the glass transition temperature Tg of the polymer A is preferably 30 ° C. or higher and 135 ° C. or lower.
  • the Tg of the polymer A is more preferably 130 ° C. or lower, further preferably 120 ° C. or lower, and particularly preferably 110 ° C. or lower.
  • the polymer A having a Tg of 30 ° C. or higher from the viewpoint of improving the edge fuse resistance.
  • the Tg of the polymer A is more preferably 40 ° C. or higher, further preferably 50 ° C. or higher, particularly preferably 60 ° C. or higher, and most preferably 70 ° C. or higher. ..
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a resin other than the polymer A.
  • Resins other than polymer A include acrylic resins, styrene-acrylic copolymers (however, those having a styrene content of 40% by mass or less), polyurethane resins, polyvinyl alcohols, polyvinyl formal, polyamide resins, polyester resins, and polyamides. Examples thereof include resins, epoxy resins, polyacetal resins, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polyimide resins, polybenzoxazole resins, polysiloxane resins, polyethyleneimines, polyallylamines, and polyalkylene glycols.
  • the content of the structural unit formed from methacrylic acid in the binder polymer is 40% by mass with respect to the total mass of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of the resolution of the obtained etching pattern and the residue suppression property during development. It is preferably 5% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less, more preferably 10% by mass or more and 35% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 15% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less. preferable.
  • the acid value of the binder polymer is preferably 100 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g from the viewpoint of the resolution of the obtained etching pattern and the residue inhibitory property during development.
  • the binder polymer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the ratio of the binder polymer to the total mass of the photosensitive layer is preferably in the range of 10% by mass to 90% by mass, more preferably 30% by mass to 70% by mass, and further preferably 40% by mass to 60% by mass. %. It is preferable that the ratio of the binder polymer to the photosensitive layer is 90% by mass or less from the viewpoint of controlling the developing time. On the other hand, it is preferable that the ratio of the binder polymer to the photosensitive layer is 10% by mass or more from the viewpoint of improving the edge fuse resistance.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
  • a polymerizable compound means a compound that polymerizes under the action of a polymerization initiator described later, and is different from the binder polymer described above.
  • an ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferable.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound is a component that contributes to the photosensitivity (that is, photocurability) of the negative photosensitive layer and the strength of the cured film.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound is a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated groups.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound as the ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  • the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound means a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule.
  • a (meth) acryloyl group is more preferable.
  • As the ethylenically unsaturated compound a (meth) acrylate compound is preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound having a polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group contained in the polymerizable compound is not particularly limited as long as it is a group involved in the polymerization reaction, and has, for example, an ethylenically unsaturated group such as a vinyl group, an acryloyl group, a methacryloyl group, a styryl group and a maleimide group. Groups; and groups having a cationically polymerizable group such as an epoxy group and an oxetane group can be mentioned.
  • the polymerizable group a group having an ethylenically unsaturated group is preferable, and an acryloyl group or a metaacryloyl group is more preferable.
  • a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated groups is preferable in that the photosensitive layer is more photosensitive, and two or more ethylenically in one molecule.
  • a compound having an unsaturated group is more preferable.
  • the number of ethylenically unsaturated groups contained in one molecule of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 6 or less, more preferably 3 or less, and 2 or less in terms of excellent resolution and peelability. More preferred.
  • the photosensitive layer is bifunctional or trifunctional ethylenically having two or three ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule in that the photosensitive layer has a better balance of photosensitivity, resolution and peelability. It is preferable to contain an unsaturated compound, and more preferably to contain a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having two ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule.
  • the content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound in the photosensitive layer with respect to the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 60% by mass or more, more preferably more than 70% by mass, and more preferably 90% by mass or more from the viewpoint of excellent peelability. Is more preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited and may be 100% by mass. That is, all the polymerizable compounds contained in the photosensitive layer may be bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds. Further, as the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a (meth) acrylate compound having a (meth) acryloyl group as a polymerizable group is preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound B1 having an aromatic ring and two ethylenically unsaturated groups.
  • the polymerizable compound B1 is a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having one or more aromatic rings in one molecule among the above-mentioned polymerizable compounds.
  • the mass ratio of the content of the polymerizable compound B1 to the content of the polymerizable compound in the photosensitive layer is preferably 40% by mass or more, preferably 50% by mass or more, from the viewpoint of better resolution. Is more preferable, 55% by mass or more is further preferable, and 60% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of peelability, 99% by mass or less is preferable, 95% by mass or less is more preferable, 90% by mass or less is further preferable, and 85% by mass or less is particularly preferable.
  • aromatic ring contained in the polymerizable compound B1 examples include aromatic hydrocarbon rings such as benzene ring, naphthalene ring and anthracene ring, thiophene ring, furan ring, pyrrole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring and pyridine ring. Heterocycles and fused rings thereof are mentioned, and aromatic hydrocarbon rings are preferable, and benzene rings are more preferable.
  • the aromatic ring may have a substituent.
  • the polymerizable compound B1 may have only one aromatic ring, or may have two or more aromatic rings.
  • the polymerizable compound B1 preferably has a bisphenol structure from the viewpoint of improving the resolution by suppressing the swelling of the photosensitive layer due to the developing solution.
  • the bisphenol structure include a bisphenol A structure derived from bisphenol A (2,2-bis (4-hydroxyphenyl) propane) and a bisphenol derived from bisphenol F (2,2-bis (4-hydroxyphenyl) methane).
  • examples thereof include an F structure and a bisphenol B structure derived from bisphenol B (2,2-bis (4-hydroxyphenyl) butane), and a bisphenol A structure is preferable.
  • Examples of the polymerizable compound B1 having a bisphenol structure include a compound having a bisphenol structure and two polymerizable groups (preferably (meth) acryloyl groups) bonded to both ends of the bisphenol structure. Both ends of the bisphenol structure and the two polymerizable groups may be directly bonded or may be bonded via one or more alkyleneoxy groups. As the alkyleneoxy group added to both ends of the bisphenol structure, an ethyleneoxy group or a propyleneoxy group is preferable, and an ethyleneoxy group is more preferable. The number of alkyleneoxy groups added to the bisphenol structure is not particularly limited, but 4 to 16 per molecule is preferable, and 6 to 14 is more preferable.
  • the polymerizable compound B1 having a bisphenol structure is described in paragraphs 0072 to 0080 of JP-A-2016-224162, and the contents described in this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the polymerizable compound B1 a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a bisphenol A structure is preferable, and 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acryloxypolyalkoxy) phenyl) propane is more preferable.
  • 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acryloxipolyalkoxy) phenyl) propane examples include 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxydiethoxy) phenyl) propane (FA-324M, Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • the polymerizable compound B1 has the following general formula (I):
  • R 1 and R 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • A is C 2 H 4
  • B is C 3 H 6
  • n 1 and n 3 are independent, respectively.
  • n 1 + n 3 is an integer of 2 to 40
  • n 2 and n 4 are independently integers of 0 to 29, and n 2 + n 4 is an integer of 0 to 30.
  • the sequence of repeating units of-(AO)-and-(BO)- may be random or block. In the case of a block, either ⁇ (A—O) ⁇ or ⁇ (BO) ⁇ may be on the bisphenyl group side.
  • The compound represented by is used.
  • n 1 + n 2 + n 3 + n 4 is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 16, and even more preferably 4 to 12. Further, n 2 + n 4 is preferably 0 to 10, more preferably 0 to 4, further preferably 0 to 2, and particularly preferably 0.
  • the polymerizable compound B1 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound B1 in the photosensitive layer is preferably 10% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of more excellent resolution.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 70% by mass or less, preferably 60% by mass or less, from the viewpoint of transferability and edge fusion (a phenomenon in which components in the photosensitive layer, particularly binder polymer, etc., exude from the end of the transfer member). Is more preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a polymerizable compound other than the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1.
  • the polymerizable compound other than the polymerizable compound B1 is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from known compounds.
  • a compound having one ethylenically unsaturated group in one molecule monoofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound
  • a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having no aromatic ring and a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound. Examples include compounds.
  • Examples of the monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound include ethyl (meth) acrylate, ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl succinate, polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, and polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate. , And phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having no aromatic ring include alkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polyalkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, urethane di (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane diacrylate. Be done.
  • Examples of the alkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate include tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate (A-DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and tricyclodecanedimethanol dimethacrylate (DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
  • 1,9-Nonandiol diacrylate (A-NOD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), 1,6-Hexanediol diacrylate (A-HD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • Ethylene glycol dimethacrylate 1,10-decanediol diacrylate
  • neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate examples of the polyalkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate include polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, dipropylene glycol diacrylate, tripropylene glycol diacrylate, and polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate.
  • urethane di (meth) acrylate examples include propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate, and ethylene oxide and propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate.
  • 8UX-015A manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • UA-32P manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • UA-1100H manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compounds include dipentaerythritol (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol (tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane tri (meth).
  • examples thereof include acrylates, ditrimethylolpropane tetra (meth) acrylates, trimethylolethanetri (meth) acrylates, tri (meth) acrylates of isocyanurates, glycerintri (meth) acrylates, and modified alkylene oxides thereof.
  • (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate) is a concept including tri (meth) acrylate, tetra (meth) acrylate, penta (meth) acrylate, and hexa (meth) acrylate.
  • (Tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate” is a concept that includes tri (meth) acrylate and tetra (meth) acrylate.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1 and a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound, and the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1 and two or more trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compounds. More preferably, it contains a compound.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1 and two or more trifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds.
  • alkylene oxide-modified product of the trifunctional or higher-functional ethylenically unsaturated compound examples include caprolactone-modified (meth) acrylate compound (KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. and A manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). -9300-1CL, etc.), alkylene oxide-modified (meth) acrylate compound (KAYARAD RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ATM-35E and A-9300 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., EBECRYL manufactured by Daicel Ornex Co., Ltd.
  • caprolactone-modified (meth) acrylate compound (KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. and A manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). -9300-1CL, etc.)
  • the polymerizable compound other than the polymerizable compound B1 the polymerizable compound having an acid group described in paragraphs 0025 to 0030 of JP-A-2004-239942 may be used.
  • the value of the ratio Mm / Mb of the content Mm of the polymerizable compound and the content Mb of the binder polymer in the photosensitive layer is 1.0 from the viewpoint of the resolution of the obtained etching pattern and the residue suppression property during development. It is preferably less than or equal to, more preferably 0.9 or less, and particularly preferably 0.5 or more and 0.9 or less.
  • the polymerizable compound in the photosensitive layer preferably contains a (meth) acrylic compound from the viewpoint of curability and the resolution of the obtained etching pattern.
  • the polymerizable compound in the photosensitive layer contains a (meth) acrylic compound and is contained in the photosensitive layer from the viewpoint of curability, resolution of the obtained etching pattern, and residue suppression during development. It is more preferable that the content of the acrylic compound with respect to the total mass of the (meth) acrylic compound is 60% by mass or less.
  • the polymerizable compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound in the photosensitive layer is preferably 10% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 20% by mass to 60% by mass, and 20% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. More preferred.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymerizable compound containing the polymerizable compound B1 is preferably 200 to 3,000, more preferably 280 to 2,200, and even more preferably 300 to 2,200.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain components other than the binder polymer and the polymerizable compound.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is a compound that initiates the polymerization of a polymerizable compound by receiving active rays such as ultraviolet rays, visible rays and X-rays.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, and a known photopolymerization initiator can be used. Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include a photoradical polymerization initiator and a photocationic polymerization initiator, and a photoradical polymerization initiator is preferable.
  • Examples of the photoradical polymerization initiator include a photopolymerization initiator having an oxime ester structure, a photopolymerization initiator having an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone structure, a photopolymerization initiator having an ⁇ -hydroxyalkylphenone structure, and an acylphosphine oxide. Examples thereof include a photopolymerization initiator having a structure and a photopolymerization initiator having an N-phenylglycine structure.
  • the photosensitive layer is a 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer as a photoradical polymerization initiator from the viewpoints of photosensitivity, visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, and resolvability, and a dimer thereof. It preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of derivatives.
  • the two 2,4,5-triarylimidazole structures in the 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer and its derivatives may be the same or different.
  • Derivatives of the 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer include, for example, 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-di.
  • the photoradical polymerization initiator for example, the polymerization initiator described in paragraphs 0031 to 0042 of JP2011-95716A and paragraphs 0064 to 0081 of JP2015-14783 may be used.
  • photoradical polymerization initiator examples include ethyl dimethylaminobenzoate (DBE, CAS No. 10287-53-3), benzoin methyl ether, anisyl (p, p'-dimethoxybenzyl), and TAZ-110 (trade name:).
  • Midori Kagaku Co., Ltd. Benzoinone, TAZ-111 (trade name: Midori Kagaku Co., Ltd.), IrgacureOXE01, OXE02, OXE03, OXE04 (BASF), Omnirad 651 and 369 (trade name: IGM Resins B.V.) , And 2,2'-bis (2-chlorophenyl) -4,4', 5,5'-tetraphenyl-1,2'-biimidazole (manufactured by Tokyo Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.) Be done.
  • photoradical polymerization initiators examples include 1- [4- (phenylthio) phenyl] -1,2-octanedione-2- (O-benzoyloxime) (trade name: IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE-.
  • a photocationic polymerization initiator is a compound that generates an acid by receiving active light.
  • a compound that is sensitive to active light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably a wavelength of 300 to 450 nm and generates an acid is preferable, but its chemical structure is not limited.
  • a photocationic polymerization initiator that is not directly sensitive to active light with a wavelength of 300 nm or more is also a sensitizer if it is a compound that is sensitive to active light with a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. Can be preferably used in combination with.
  • a photocationic polymerization initiator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less is preferable, a photocationic polymerization initiator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less is more preferable, and an acid having a pKa of 2 or less is used.
  • the generated photocationic polymerization initiator is particularly preferable.
  • the lower limit of pKa is not particularly defined, but is preferably -10.0 or higher, for example.
  • Examples of the photocationic polymerization initiator include an ionic photocationic polymerization initiator and a nonionic photocationic polymerization initiator.
  • Examples of the ionic photocationic polymerization initiator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts.
  • the ionic photocationic polymerization initiator described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 may be used.
  • nonionic photocationic polymerization initiator examples include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds.
  • trichloromethyl-s-triazines the diazomethane compound and the imide sulfonate compound
  • the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP2011-221494 may be used.
  • the oxime sulfonate compound the compounds described in paragraphs 0084 to 0088 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 may be used.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a photoradical polymerization initiator, and more preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimers and derivatives thereof.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain one type of photopolymerization initiator alone, or may contain two or more types of photopolymerization initiators.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator in the photosensitive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and 1.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. % Or more is more preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive layer has a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development from the viewpoints of visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, pattern visibility after development, and resolution.
  • the dye N is contained, the detailed mechanism is unknown, but the adhesion to the adjacent layer (for example, the support and the intermediate layer) is improved, and the resolution is more excellent.
  • the term "the maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base or a radical” means that the dye in a color-developing state is decolorized by an acid, a base or a radical, and the dye in a decolorized state is an acid. It may mean any aspect of a mode in which a color is developed by a base or a radical, or a mode in which a dye in a color-developing state changes to a color-developing state of another hue.
  • the dye N may be a compound that changes from the decolorized state by exposure to develop a color, or may be a compound that changes from the decolorized state by exposure to decolorize.
  • the dye may change the state of color development or decolorization by generating and acting on the acid, base or radical in the photosensitive layer by exposure, and the state in the photosensitive layer by the acid, base or radical (for example). It may be a dye whose color development or decolorization state changes by changing pH). Further, it may be a dye that changes the state of color development or decolorization by directly receiving an acid, a base or a radical as a stimulus without exposure.
  • the dye N is preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid or a radical, and more preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by a radical.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains both a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by radicals as dye N and a photoradical polymerization initiator. ..
  • the dye N is preferably a dye that develops color by an acid, a base, or a radical.
  • a photoradical polymerization initiator, a photocationic polymerization initiator (photoacid generator) or a photobase generator is added to the photosensitive layer, and photoradical polymerization is started after exposure.
  • a radical-reactive dye, an acid-reactive dye or a base-reactive dye for example, a leuco dye
  • a radical-reactive dye, an acid-reactive dye or a base-reactive dye for example, a leuco dye
  • the dye N preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength of 550 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, more preferably 550 nm to 700 nm. It is more preferably about 650 nm. Further, the dye N may have only one maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, or may have two or more. When the dye N has two or more maximum absorption wavelengths in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, the maximum absorption wavelength having the highest absorbance among the two or more maximum absorption wavelengths may be 450 nm or more.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength of the dye N is transmitted by a solution containing the dye N (liquid temperature 25 ° C.) in the range of 400 nm to 780 nm using a spectrophotometer: UV3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) in an atmospheric atmosphere. It is obtained by measuring the spectrum and detecting the wavelength at which the light intensity becomes the minimum (maximum absorption wavelength).
  • Examples of the dye that develops or decolorizes by exposure include leuco compounds.
  • Examples of dyes that are decolorized by exposure include leuco compounds, diarylmethane dyes, oxazine dyes, xanthene dyes, iminonaphthoquinone dyes, azomethine dyes and anthraquinone dyes.
  • As the dye N a leuco compound is preferable from the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion.
  • the leuco compound examples include a leuco compound having a triarylmethane skeleton (triarylmethane dye), a leuco compound having a spiropylan skeleton (spiropylan dye), a leuco compound having a fluorane skeleton (fluorane dye), and a diarylmethane skeleton.
  • leuco compounds having leuco compounds include leuco auramine dyes.
  • leuco auramine dyes include leuco compounds having leuco compounds (leuco auramine dyes).
  • a triarylmethane dye or a fluorane dye is preferable, and a leuco compound having a triphenylmethane skeleton (triphenylmethane dye) or a fluorane dye is more preferable.
  • the leuco compound preferably has a lactone ring, a surujin ring, or a sultone ring from the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion.
  • the lactone ring, sultin ring, or sulton ring of the leuco compound is reacted with the radical generated from the photoradical polymerization initiator or the acid generated from the photocationic polymerization initiator to change the leuco compound into a ring-closed state.
  • the color can be decolorized or the leuco compound can be changed to an open ring state to develop a color.
  • the leuco compound preferably has a lactone ring, a sultone ring or a sultone ring, and the lactone ring, the sultone ring or the sultone ring is opened by a radical or an acid to develop a color.
  • a compound in which the lactone ring is opened to develop color is more preferable.
  • Examples of the dye N include the following dyes and leuco compounds. Specific examples of dyes among dyes N include brilliant green, ethyl violet, methyl green, crystal violet, basic fuxin, methyl violet 2B, quinaldine red, rose bengal, methanyl yellow, timol sulfophthalein, xylenol blue, and methyl.
  • leuco compound among the dyes N include p, p', p "-hexamethyltriaminotriphenylmethane (leucocrystal violet), Pergascript Blue SRB (manufactured by Ciba Geigy), crystal violet lactone, and malakite green lactone.
  • the dye N is preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by radicals from the viewpoints of visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, pattern visibility after development, and resolution, and is a dye that develops color by radicals. Is more preferable.
  • As the dye N leuco crystal violet, crystal violet lactone, brilliant green, or Victoria pure blue-naphthalene sulfonate is preferable.
  • the dye N may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the dye N is preferably 0.1% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer from the viewpoints of visibility of the exposed and non-exposed areas, pattern visibility after development, and resolution. , 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1% by mass to 5% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.1% by mass to 1% by mass.
  • the content of the dye N means the content of the dye when all of the dye N contained in the photosensitive layer is in a colored state.
  • a method for quantifying the content of dye N will be described by taking a dye that develops color by radicals as an example. Two kinds of solutions in which 0.001 g and 0.01 g of the dye are dissolved in 100 mL of methyl ethyl ketone are prepared. A photoradical polymerization initiator Irgacure OXE01 (trade name, BASF Japan Co., Ltd.) is added to each of the obtained solutions, and radicals are generated by irradiating with light of 365 nm to bring all the dyes into a colored state.
  • Irgacure OXE01 trade name, BASF Japan Co., Ltd.
  • the absorbance of each solution having a liquid temperature of 25 ° C. is measured using a spectrophotometer (UV3100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation), and a calibration curve is prepared.
  • UV3100 UV3100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation
  • the absorbance of the solution in which all the dyes are colored is measured by the same method as above except that 3 g of the photosensitive layer is dissolved in methyl ethyl ketone instead of the dye. From the absorbance of the obtained solution containing the photosensitive layer, the content of the dye contained in the photosensitive layer is calculated based on the calibration curve.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a heat-crosslinkable compound from the viewpoint of the strength of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film.
  • the heat-crosslinkable compound having a polymerizable group described later is not treated as a polymerizable compound, but is treated as a heat-crosslinkable compound.
  • the heat-crosslinkable compound include a methylol compound and a blocked isocyanate compound. Of these, a blocked isocyanate compound is preferable from the viewpoint of the strength of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound reacts with a hydroxy group and a carboxy group, for example, when the binder polymer and / or the polymerizable compound has at least one of the hydroxy group and the carboxy group, the hydrophilicity of the formed film becomes There is a tendency for the function to be enhanced when a film obtained by lowering and curing the photosensitive layer is used as a protective film.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound refers to "a compound having a structure in which the isocyanate group of isocyanate is protected (so-called masked) with a blocking agent".
  • the dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 ° C. to 160 ° C., more preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
  • the dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate means "the temperature of the endothermic peak associated with the deprotection reaction of the blocked isocyanate when measured by DSC (Differential scanning calorimetry) analysis using a differential scanning calorimeter".
  • DSC Different scanning calorimeter
  • a differential scanning calorimeter model: DSC6200 manufactured by Seiko Instruments Inc. can be preferably used.
  • the differential scanning calorimeter is not limited to this.
  • the blocking agent having a dissociation temperature of 100 ° C. to 160 ° C. examples include active methylene compounds [malonic acid diester (dimethyl malonate, diethyl malonate, din-butyl malonate, di2-ethylhexyl malonate, etc.)] and oxime compounds.
  • the blocking agent having a dissociation temperature of 100 ° C. to 160 ° C. preferably contains, for example, an oxime compound from the viewpoint of storage stability.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound preferably has an isocyanurate structure, for example, from the viewpoint of improving the brittleness of the membrane and improving the adhesion to the transferred material.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound having an isocyanurate structure can be obtained, for example, by isocyanurate-forming and protecting hexamethylene diisocyanate.
  • a compound having an oxime structure using an oxime compound as a blocking agent is more likely to have a dissociation temperature in a preferable range than a compound having no oxime structure, and has a smaller development residue. It is preferable from the viewpoint of ease.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound may have a polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group is not particularly limited, and a known polymerizable group can be used, and a radical polymerizable group is preferable.
  • the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated group such as a (meth) acryloxy group, a (meth) acrylamide group and a styryl group, and a group having an epoxy group such as a glycidyl group.
  • an ethylenically unsaturated group is preferable
  • a (meth) acryloxy group is more preferable
  • an acryloxy group is further preferable.
  • blocked isocyanate compound a commercially available product can be used.
  • examples of commercially available blocked isocyanate compounds include Karenz (registered trademark) AOI-BM, Karenz (registered trademark) MOI-BM, Karenz (registered trademark) MOI-BP (all manufactured by Showa Denko KK), and block.
  • Duranate series of types for example, Duranate (registered trademark) TPA-B80E, Duranate (registered trademark) WT32-B75P, etc., manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemicals Co., Ltd.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound a compound having the following structure can also be used.
  • the heat-crosslinkable compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the heat-crosslinkable compound is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity.
  • the surfactant include anionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, nonionic (nonionic) surfactants, and amphoteric surfactants, and nonionic surfactants are preferable.
  • nonionic surfactant examples include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkylphenyl ethers, polyoxyethylene glycol higher fatty acid diesters, silicone-based nonionic surfactants, and fluorine-based nonionics. Examples include sex surfactants.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a fluorine-based nonionic surfactant from the viewpoint of being more excellent in resolution. It is considered that the photosensitive layer contains a fluorine-based nonionic surfactant to suppress the penetration of the etching solution into the photosensitive layer and reduce the side etching. Examples of commercially available fluorine-based nonionic surfactants include Megafuck F-551-A, F-552 and F-554 (all manufactured by DIC Corporation).
  • surfactant examples include the surfactant described in paragraphs 0120 to 0125 of International Publication No. 2018/179640, the surfactant described in paragraph 0017 of Japanese Patent No. 45027884, and JP-A-2009-237362.
  • the surfactants described in paragraphs 0060 to 0071 can also be used.
  • a nonionic surfactant, a fluorine-based surfactant or a silicone-based surfactant is preferable.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant has a molecular structure having a functional group containing a fluorine atom, and when heat is applied, the portion of the functional group containing the fluorine atom is cut and the fluorine atom is volatilized.
  • fluorine-based surfactants include Megafuck (trade name) DS series manufactured by DIC Corporation (The Chemical Daily (February 22, 2016), Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun (February 23, 2016)).
  • Megafuck (trade name) DS-21 can be mentioned.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant it is also preferable to use a polymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound.
  • a block polymer can also be used as the fluorine-based surfactant.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant has a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and two or more (preferably five or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups) (meth).
  • a fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a structural unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used.
  • fluorine-based surfactant a fluorine-containing polymer having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain can also be used. Megafuck (trade name) RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K, RS-72-K (all manufactured by DIC Corporation) and the like can be mentioned.
  • fluorine-based surfactant for example, a compound having a linear perfluoroalkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms may be used.
  • PFOA perfluorooctanoic acid
  • PFOS perfluorooctanesulfonic acid
  • Nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, and their ethoxylates and propoxylates (eg, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, and the like.
  • silicone-based surfactant examples include a linear polymer composed of a siloxane bond and a modified siloxane polymer in which an organic group is introduced into a side chain or a terminal.
  • silicone-based surfactants include DOWNSIL (trade name) 8032 ADDITIVE, Torre Silicone DC3PA, Torre Silicone SH7PA, Torre Silicone DC11PA, Torre Silicone SH21PA, Torre Silicone SH28PA, Torre Silicone SH29PA, Torre Silicone SH30PA, Torre Silicone SH8400.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain one type of surfactant alone or two or more types.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a known additive, if necessary.
  • the additive include a radical polymerization inhibitor, a sensitizer, a plasticizer, a heterocyclic compound, benzotriazoles, carboxybenzotriazoles, a resin other than polymer A, and a solvent.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain each additive alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a radical polymerization inhibitor.
  • the radical polymerization inhibitor include the thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0018 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784. Of these, phenothiazine, phenothiazine or 4-methoxyphenol is preferable.
  • examples of other radical polymerization inhibitors include naphthylamine, cuprous chloride, nitrosophenylhydroxyamine aluminum salt, diphenylnitrosamine and the like. It is preferable to use a nitrosophenylhydroxyamine aluminum salt as a radical polymerization inhibitor so as not to impair the sensitivity of the photosensitive layer.
  • benzotriazoles include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 1-chloro-1,2,3-benzotriazole, bis (N-2-ethylhexyl) aminomethylene-1,2,3-benzotriazole, and the like. Examples thereof include bis (N-2-ethylhexyl) aminomethylene-1,2,3-tolyltriazole and bis (N-2-hydroxyethyl) aminomethylene-1,2,3-benzotriazole.
  • carboxybenzotriazoles examples include 4-carboxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole, 5-carboxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole, and N- (N, N-di-2-ethylhexyl) aminomethylene. Examples thereof include carboxybenzotriazole, N- (N, N-di-2-hydroxyethyl) aminomethylene carboxybenzotriazole, N- (N, N-di-2-ethylhexyl) aminoethylene carboxybenzotriazole and the like.
  • a commercially available product such as CBT-1 (Johoku Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., trade name) can be used.
  • the total content of the radical polymerization inhibitor, benzotriazols, and carboxybenzotriazols is preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass when the total mass of the photosensitive layer is 100% by mass. Yes, more preferably 0.05% by mass to 1% by mass. It is preferable that the content is 0.01% by mass or more from the viewpoint of imparting storage stability to the photosensitive layer. On the other hand, it is preferable to set the content to 3% by mass or less from the viewpoint of maintaining the sensitivity and suppressing the decolorization of the dye.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a sensitizer.
  • the sensitizer is not particularly limited, and known sensitizers, dyes and pigments can be used.
  • Examples of the sensitizer include dialkylaminobenzophenone compounds, pyrazoline compounds, anthracene compounds, coumarin compounds, xanthone compounds, thioxanthone compounds, acridone compounds, oxazole compounds, benzoxazole compounds, thiazole compounds, benzothiazole compounds, and triazole compounds (for example, 1,2,4-triazole), stillben compounds, triazine compounds, thiophene compounds, naphthalimide compounds, triarylamine compounds, and aminoaclydin compounds.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain one kind of sensitizer alone or two or more kinds.
  • the content of the sensitizer can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, but from the viewpoint of improving the sensitivity to the light source and improving the curing rate by balancing the polymerization rate and the chain transfer. , 0.01% by mass to 5% by mass is preferable, and 0.05% by mass to 1% by mass is more preferable with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain at least one selected from the group consisting of a plasticizer and a heterocyclic compound.
  • a plasticizer and a heterocyclic compound include the compounds described in paragraphs 097 to 0103 and 0111 to 0118 of International Publication No. 2018/179640.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a solvent.
  • the solvent may remain in the photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive layer includes metal oxide particles, antioxidants, dispersants, acid growth agents, development accelerators, conductive fibers, thermal radical polymerization initiators, thermal acid generators, ultraviolet absorbers, thickeners, etc. It may further contain known additives such as cross-linking agents and organic or inorganic anti-precipitation agents. Additives contained in the photosensitive layer are described in paragraphs 0165 to 0184 of JP-A-2014-85643, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the thickness (layer thickness) of the photosensitive layer is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m to 300 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.2 ⁇ m to 100 ⁇ m, further preferably 0.5 ⁇ m to 50 ⁇ m, further preferably 0.5 ⁇ m to 30 ⁇ m, and 1 ⁇ m to 1 ⁇ m. 20 ⁇ m is particularly preferable, and 2 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m is most preferable. As a result, the developability of the photosensitive layer can be improved, and the resolvability can be improved.
  • the thickness of each layer included in the photosensitive transfer member was obtained by observing a cross section in a direction perpendicular to the main surface of the laminate or the photosensitive transfer member with a scanning electron microscope (SEM). It is measured by measuring the thickness of each layer at 10 points or more based on the image and calculating the average value thereof.
  • SEM scanning electron microscope
  • the transmittance of light having a wavelength of 365 nm in the photosensitive layer is preferably 10% or more, preferably 30% or more, and more preferably 50% or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 99.9% or less.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a predetermined amount of impurities.
  • impurities include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, manganese, copper, aluminum, titanium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, zinc, tin, halogen and ions thereof.
  • halide ions, sodium ions, and potassium ions are likely to be mixed as impurities, so the content is preferably as follows.
  • the content of impurities in the photosensitive layer is preferably 80 ppm or less, more preferably 10 ppm or less, still more preferably 2 ppm or less on a mass basis.
  • the content of impurities in the photosensitive layer can be 1 ppb or more or 0.1 ppm or more on a mass basis.
  • the impurities can be quantified by known methods such as ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) emission spectroscopy, atomic absorption spectroscopy, and ion chromatography.
  • ICP Inductively Coupled Plasma
  • the content of compounds such as benzene, formaldehyde, trichlorethylene, 1,3-butadiene, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, and hexane in the photosensitive layer should be low. Is preferable.
  • the content of these compounds in the photosensitive layer is preferably 100 ppm or less, more preferably 20 ppm or less, still more preferably 4 ppm or less on a mass basis.
  • the lower limit is based on mass and can be 10 ppb or more, and can be 100 ppb or more.
  • the content of these compounds can be suppressed in the same manner as the above-mentioned metal impurities. Moreover, it can be quantified by a known measurement method.
  • the water content in the photosensitive layer is preferably 0.01% by mass to 1.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05% by mass to 0.5% by mass, from the viewpoint of improving reliability and laminateability.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain residual monomers corresponding to each structural unit of the binder polymer described above.
  • the content of the residual monomer is preferably 5,000 mass ppm or less, more preferably 2,000 mass ppm or less, and 500 mass ppm or less, based on the total mass of the binder polymer, from the viewpoint of patterning property and reliability. Is more preferable.
  • the lower limit is not particularly limited, but 1 mass ppm or more is preferable, and 10 mass ppm or more is more preferable.
  • the residual monomer of each structural unit of the binder polymer is preferably 3,000 mass ppm or less, more preferably 600 mass ppm or less, and more preferably 100 mass ppm or less, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of patterning property and reliability. More preferably, the mass is ppm or less.
  • the lower limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 mass ppm or more, and more preferably 1 mass ppm or more.
  • the amount of residual monomer of the monomer when synthesizing the binder polymer by the polymer reaction is also preferably in the above range.
  • the content of glycidyl acrylate is preferably in the above range.
  • the amount of residual monomer can be measured by a known method such as liquid chromatography and gas chromatography.
  • the method for forming the photosensitive layer is not particularly limited as long as it is a method capable of forming a layer containing the above components.
  • a method for forming the photosensitive layer for example, a photosensitive composition containing a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound and a solvent is prepared, the photosensitive composition is applied to the surface of a support or the like, and the photosensitive composition is applied. Examples thereof include a method of forming the film by drying it.
  • Examples of the photosensitive composition used for forming the photosensitive layer include a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound, and a composition containing the above-mentioned optional components and a solvent.
  • the photosensitive composition preferably contains a solvent in order to adjust the viscosity of the photosensitive composition and facilitate the formation of the photosensitive layer.
  • the solvent contained in the photosensitive composition is not particularly limited as long as the binder polymer, the polymerizable compound and the above optional components can be dissolved or dispersed, and known solvents can be used.
  • the solvent include an alkylene glycol ether solvent, an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent, an alcohol solvent (methanol, ethanol, etc.), a ketone solvent (acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, etc.), an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent (toluene, etc.), and an aprotonic polar solvent.
  • the photosensitive transfer member including a support, a thermoplastic resin layer, an intermediate layer and a photosensitive layer
  • the photosensitive composition is at least one selected from the group consisting of an alkylene glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent. It preferably contains seeds.
  • a mixed solvent containing at least one selected from the group consisting of an alkylene glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent and at least one selected from the group consisting of a ketone solvent and a cyclic ether solvent is more preferable.
  • a mixed solvent containing at least one selected from the group consisting of a glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent, a ketone solvent, and at least three cyclic ether solvents is more preferable.
  • alkylene glycol ether solvent examples include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether, ethylene glycol dialkyl ether, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, propylene glycol dialkyl ether, diethylene glycol dialkyl ether, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether and dipropylene glycol dialkyl ether. ..
  • alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent examples include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate and dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate.
  • the solvent described in paragraphs 0092 to 0094 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 and the solvent described in paragraph 0014 of JP-A-2018-177789 may be used, and the contents thereof are described in the present specification. Incorporated into the book.
  • the photosensitive composition may contain one type of solvent alone, or may contain two or more types of solvent.
  • the content of the solvent when the photosensitive composition is applied is preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass, preferably 100 parts by mass to 900 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive composition. More preferred.
  • the method for preparing the photosensitive composition is not particularly limited.
  • a photosensitive composition is prepared by preparing a solution in which each component is dissolved in the above solvent in advance and mixing the obtained solution in a predetermined ratio. There is a way to do it.
  • the photosensitive composition is preferably filtered using a filter having a pore size of 0.2 ⁇ m to 30 ⁇ m before forming the photosensitive layer.
  • the method for applying the photosensitive composition is not particularly limited, and the photosensitive composition may be applied by a known method. Examples of the coating method include slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating and inkjet coating. Further, the photosensitive layer may be formed by applying the photosensitive composition on a cover film described later and drying it.
  • the laminate may have a thermoplastic resin layer.
  • the photosensitive transfer member may have a thermoplastic resin layer.
  • the photosensitive transfer member preferably includes a thermoplastic resin layer between the support and the photosensitive layer.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer contains an alkali-soluble resin as the thermoplastic resin.
  • alkali-soluble means that the solubility of sodium carbonate in 100 g of a 1% by mass aqueous solution at 22 ° C. is 0.1 g or more.
  • alkali-soluble resin include acrylic resin, polystyrene resin, styrene-acrylic copolymer, polyurethane resin, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl formal, polyamide resin, polyester resin, polyamide resin, epoxy resin, polyacetal resin, and polyhydroxystyrene resin.
  • examples thereof include polyimide resins, polybenzoxazole resins, polysiloxane resins, polyethyleneimines, polyallylamines and polyalkylene glycols.
  • an acrylic resin is preferable from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to an adjacent layer.
  • the acrylic resin was selected from the group consisting of a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid, a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester, and a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid amide. It means a resin having at least one structural unit.
  • the acrylic resin the total content of the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid, the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester, and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid amide is that of the acrylic resin. It is preferably 50% by mass or more with respect to the total mass.
  • the total content of the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester is preferably 30% by mass to 100% by mass with respect to the total mass of the acrylic resin. , 50% by mass to 100% by mass, more preferably.
  • the alkali-soluble resin is preferably a polymer having an acid group.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group and a phosphonic acid group, and a carboxy group is preferable.
  • the alkali-soluble resin is more preferably an alkali-soluble resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more, and further preferably a carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more.
  • the upper limit of the acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is not particularly limited, but is preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, and more preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from known resins and used.
  • an alkali-soluble resin which is a carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more, described in paragraphs 0033 to 0052 of JP2010-237589.
  • Acrylic resin can be mentioned.
  • the copolymerization ratio of the structural unit having a carboxy group in the carboxy group-containing acrylic resin is preferably 5% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass to 40% by mass, and 12 by mass, based on the total mass of the acrylic resin. More preferably, it is by mass% to 30% by mass.
  • an acrylic resin having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to an adjacent layer.
  • the alkali-soluble resin may have a reactive group.
  • the reactive group may be any addition-polymerizable group, and an ethylenically unsaturated group; a polycondensable group such as a hydroxy group and a carboxy group; and a polyadditive reactive group such as an epoxy group and a (block) isocyanate group are used. Can be mentioned.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 1,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 to 100,000, and even more preferably 20,000 to 50,000.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer may contain one kind of alkali-soluble resin alone or two or more kinds.
  • the content of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 10% by mass to 99% by mass, preferably 20% by mass to 90% by mass, based on the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to the adjacent layer. Is more preferable, 40% by mass to 80% by mass is further preferable, and 50% by mass to 70% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer contains a dye (also simply referred to as "dye B") having a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development and whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base, or a radical. It is preferable to do so.
  • the preferred embodiment of the dye B is the same as the preferred embodiment of the dye N except for the points described later.
  • the dye B is preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid or a radical, and more preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid. ..
  • the thermoplastic resin layer is both a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength changes depending on the acid as the dye B and a compound that generates an acid by light, which will be described later, from the viewpoint of visibility and resolution of the exposed part and the non-exposed part. Is preferably contained.
  • the dye B may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the dye B is preferably 0.2% by mass or more, preferably 0.2% by mass to 6% by mass, based on the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed part and the non-exposed part. More preferably, 0.2% by mass to 5% by mass is further preferable, and 0.25% by mass to 3.0% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the content of the dye B means the content of the dye when all the dyes B contained in the thermoplastic resin layer are in a colored state.
  • a method for quantifying the content of dye B will be described by taking a dye that develops color by radicals as an example.
  • a solution in which 0.001 g and 0.01 g of the dye are dissolved in 100 mL of methyl ethyl ketone is prepared.
  • a photoradical polymerization initiator Irgacure OXE01 (trade name, BASF Japan Co., Ltd.) is added to each of the obtained solutions, and radicals are generated by irradiating with light of 365 nm to bring all the dyes into a colored state.
  • the absorbance of each solution having a liquid temperature of 25 ° C. is measured using a spectrophotometer (UV3100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation), and a calibration curve is prepared.
  • UV3100 UV3100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation
  • the absorbance of the solution in which all the dyes are colored is measured by the same method as above except that 0.1 g of the thermoplastic resin layer is dissolved in methyl ethyl ketone instead of the dye. From the absorbance of the obtained solution containing the thermoplastic resin layer, the amount of the dye contained in the thermoplastic resin layer is calculated based on the calibration curve.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer may contain a compound that generates an acid, a base, or a radical by light (also simply referred to as “Compound C”).
  • a compound that generates an acid, a base, or a radical by receiving active rays such as ultraviolet rays and visible rays is preferable.
  • a known photoacid generator, photobase generator, and photoradical polymerization initiator (photoradical generator) can be used. Of these, a photoacid generator is preferred.
  • thermoplastic resin layer preferably contains a photoacid generator from the viewpoint of resolution.
  • the photoacid generator include a photocationic polymerization initiator that may be contained in the above-mentioned photosensitive layer, and the preferred embodiments are the same except for the points described below.
  • the photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound and an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and preferably contains sensitivity, resolution and resolution. From the viewpoint of adhesion, it is more preferable to contain an oxime sulfonate compound. Further, as the photoacid generator, a photoacid generator having the following structure is also preferable.
  • thermoplastic resin layer may contain a photoradical polymerization initiator (photoradical polymerization initiator).
  • photoradical polymerization initiator include a photoradical polymerization initiator that may be contained in the photosensitive layer described above, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
  • thermoplastic resin layer may contain a photobase generator.
  • the photobase generator is not particularly limited as long as it is a known photobase generator, and for example, 2-nitrobenzylcyclohexylcarbamate, triphenylmethanol, O-carbamoyl hydroxylamide, O-carbamoyloxime, [[(2,2).
  • the thermoplastic resin layer may contain the compound C alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of compound C is preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, preferably 0.5% by mass, based on the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of visibility and resolution of the exposed and unexposed areas. More preferably, it is by mass% to 5% by mass.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer preferably contains a plasticizer from the viewpoints of resolution, adhesion to adjacent layers, and developability.
  • the plasticizer preferably has a smaller molecular weight (weight average molecular weight (Mw) in the case of an oligomer or polymer) than the alkali-soluble resin.
  • the molecular weight of the plasticizer (weight average molecular weight (Mw)) is preferably 200 to 2,000.
  • the plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with the alkali-soluble resin and exhibits plasticity, but from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity, the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule, and is a polyalkylene glycol. Compounds are more preferred.
  • the alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer more preferably has a polyethyleneoxy structure or a polypropyleneoxy structure.
  • the plasticizer preferably contains a (meth) acrylate compound from the viewpoint of resolution and storage stability.
  • the alkali-soluble resin is an acrylic resin and the plasticizer contains a (meth) acrylate compound.
  • the (meth) acrylate compound used as a plasticizer include the (meth) acrylate compound described as the polymerizable compound contained in the photosensitive layer described above.
  • both the thermoplastic resin layer and the photosensitive layer contain the same (meth) acrylate compound. This is because the thermoplastic resin layer and the photosensitive layer contain the same (meth) acrylate compound, respectively, so that the diffusion of components between the layers is suppressed and the storage stability is improved.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer contains a (meth) acrylate compound as a plasticizer
  • the (meth) acrylate compound used as a plasticizer is a polyfunctional compound having two or more (meth) acryloyl groups in one molecule from the viewpoints of resolution, adhesion to adjacent layers, and developability.
  • a (meth) acrylate compound is preferred.
  • a (meth) acrylate compound having an acid group or a urethane (meth) acrylate compound is also preferable.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer may contain one type of plasticizer alone, or may contain two or more types of plasticizer.
  • the content of the plasticizer is preferably 1% by mass to 70% by mass and 10% by mass to 60% by mass with respect to the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of resolution, adhesion to adjacent layers and developability. By mass% is more preferable, and 20% by mass to 50% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity.
  • the surfactant include surfactants that may be contained in the above-mentioned photosensitive layer, and the preferred embodiment is the same.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer may contain one type of surfactant alone or two or more types.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass, based on the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer may contain a sensitizer.
  • the sensitizer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a sensitizer that may be contained in the above-mentioned photosensitive layer.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer may contain one type of sensitizer alone or two or more types.
  • the content of the sensitizer can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, but from the viewpoint of improving the sensitivity to the light source and the visibility of the exposed and non-exposed areas, 0.01 mass with respect to the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer.
  • the range of% to 5% by mass is preferable, and the range of 0.05% by mass to 1% by mass is more preferable.
  • thermoplastic resin layer may contain known additives, if necessary. Further, the thermoplastic resin layer is described in paragraphs 0189 to 0193 of JP-A-2014-85643, and the contents described in this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the layer thickness of the thermoplastic resin layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 2 ⁇ m or more, from the viewpoint of adhesion to adjacent layers.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of developability and resolution, 20 ⁇ m or less is preferable, 10 ⁇ m or less is more preferable, and 5 ⁇ m or less is further preferable.
  • the method for forming the thermoplastic resin layer is not particularly limited as long as it is a method capable of forming a layer containing the above components.
  • a method for forming the thermoplastic resin layer for example, a thermoplastic resin composition containing the above components and a solvent is prepared, the thermoplastic resin composition is applied to the surface of a support or the like, and the thermoplastic resin composition is formed. Examples thereof include a method of forming the coating film by drying.
  • the thermoplastic resin composition preferably contains a solvent in order to adjust the viscosity of the thermoplastic resin composition and facilitate the formation of the thermoplastic resin layer.
  • thermoplastic resin composition is not particularly limited as long as the above-mentioned components contained in the thermoplastic resin layer can be dissolved or dispersed.
  • solvent contained in the thermoplastic resin composition include solvents that may be contained in the above-mentioned photosensitive composition, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the solvent contained in the thermoplastic resin composition may be one kind alone or two or more kinds.
  • the content of the solvent when the thermoplastic resin composition is applied is preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass, preferably 100 parts by mass to 900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the thermoplastic resin composition.
  • the portion is more preferable.
  • thermoplastic resin composition and the formation of the thermoplastic resin layer may be carried out according to the method for preparing the photosensitive composition and the method for forming the photosensitive layer described above.
  • a solution in which each component contained in the thermoplastic resin layer is dissolved in the above solvent is prepared in advance, and the obtained solution is mixed at a predetermined ratio to prepare a thermoplastic resin composition.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer is formed by applying the obtained thermoplastic resin composition to the surface of the support and drying the coating film of the thermoplastic resin composition. Further, after forming the photosensitive layer and the intermediate layer on the cover film described later, the thermoplastic resin layer may be formed on the surface of the intermediate layer.
  • the laminate may have an intermediate layer between the thermoplastic resin layer and the photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive transfer member has an intermediate layer between the thermoplastic resin layer and the photosensitive layer. Is preferable.
  • the intermediate layer is preferably a water-soluble layer from the viewpoint of developability and suppressing mixing of components during application of the plurality of layers and storage after application.
  • water-soluble means that the solubility in 100 g of water having a liquid temperature of 22 ° C. and a pH of 7.0 is 0.1 g or more.
  • the intermediate layer examples include an oxygen blocking layer having an oxygen blocking function, which is described as a “separation layer” in JP-A-5-72724.
  • the intermediate layer is an oxygen blocking layer, the sensitivity at the time of exposure is improved, the time load of the exposure machine is reduced, and the productivity is improved, which is preferable.
  • the oxygen blocking layer used as the intermediate layer may be appropriately selected from the known layers described in the above publications and the like. Of these, an oxygen blocking layer that exhibits low oxygen permeability and is dispersed or dissolved in water or an alkaline aqueous solution (1% by mass aqueous solution of sodium carbonate at 22 ° C.) is preferable.
  • the intermediate layer preferably contains a resin.
  • the resin contained in the intermediate layer include polyvinyl alcohol-based resin, polyvinylpyrrolidone-based resin, cellulose-based resin, acrylamide-based resin, polyethylene oxide-based resin, gelatin, vinyl ether-based resin, polyamide resin, and their common weights. Examples include resins such as coalescence.
  • a water-soluble resin is preferable.
  • the resin contained in the intermediate layer includes the polymer A contained in the photosensitive layer and the thermoplastic resin (alkali-soluble resin) contained in the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of suppressing the mixing of the components between the plurality of layers. ), It is preferable that the resin is different from any of the above.
  • the intermediate layer preferably contains polyvinyl alcohol from the viewpoint of oxygen blocking property and suppressing mixing of components during application of the plurality of layers and storage after application, and contains both polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinylpyrrolidone. It is more preferable to contain it.
  • the intermediate layer may contain the above resin alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the resin in the intermediate layer is not particularly limited, but is based on the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of oxygen blocking property and suppressing the mixing of components during application of the plurality of layers and storage after application. , 50% by mass to 100% by mass, more preferably 70% by mass to 100% by mass, further preferably 80% by mass to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 90% by mass to 100% by mass.
  • the intermediate layer may contain an additive such as a surfactant, if necessary.
  • the layer thickness of the intermediate layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m, and more preferably 0.5 ⁇ m to 3 ⁇ m.
  • the oxygen blocking property is not lowered, the mixing of the components at the time of applying the plurality of layers and at the time of storage after application can be suppressed, and the intermediate during development. This is because an increase in layer removal time can be suppressed.
  • the method for forming the intermediate layer is not particularly limited, and for example, an intermediate layer composition containing the above resin and any additive is prepared and applied to the surface of the thermoplastic resin layer or the photosensitive layer to form the intermediate layer composition.
  • a method of forming an intermediate layer by drying the coating film of the above can be mentioned.
  • the intermediate layer composition preferably contains a solvent in order to adjust the viscosity of the intermediate layer composition and facilitate the formation of the intermediate layer.
  • the solvent contained in the intermediate layer composition is not particularly limited as long as the above resin can be dissolved or dispersed, and at least one selected from the group consisting of water and a water-miscible organic solvent is preferable, and water or water or water is preferable.
  • a mixed solvent of water and a water-miscible organic solvent is more preferable.
  • the water-miscible organic solvent include alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, acetone, ethylene glycol and glycerin, and alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms are preferable, and methanol or ethanol is more preferable.
  • the laminate preferably has a cover film in contact with a surface of the photosensitive layer that does not face the support.
  • the photosensitive transfer member preferably has a cover film in contact with a surface of the photosensitive layer that does not face the support.
  • first surface the surface of the photosensitive layer facing the support
  • second surface the surface opposite to the first surface
  • Examples of the material constituting the cover film include a resin film and paper, and a resin film is preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility.
  • Examples of the resin film include a polyethylene film, a polypropylene film, a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Of these, a polyethylene film, a polypropylene film, or a polyethylene terephthalate film is preferable.
  • the thickness (layer thickness) of the cover film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 ⁇ m to 100 ⁇ m, more preferably 10 ⁇ m to 50 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 10 ⁇ m to 20 ⁇ m.
  • the arithmetic mean roughness Ra value of the surface of the cover film in contact with the photosensitive layer (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “the surface of the cover film”) is preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or less from the viewpoint of excellent resolution. It is more preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 0.05 ⁇ m or less. It is considered that when the Ra value on the surface of the cover film is within the above range, the uniformity of the layer thickness of the photosensitive layer and the formed resin pattern is improved.
  • the lower limit of the Ra value on the surface of the cover film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.001 ⁇ m or more.
  • the photosensitive transfer member may include a layer other than the above-mentioned layer (hereinafter, also referred to as “other layer”).
  • Other layers include, for example, a contrast enhancement layer.
  • the contrast enhancement layer is described in paragraph 0134 of WO 2018/179640. Further, other layers are described in paragraphs 0194 to 0196 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-85643. The contents of these publications are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the total thickness of each layer of the photosensitive transfer member excluding the support and the cover film is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, and 8 ⁇ m or less from the viewpoint of further exerting the effects in the present disclosure. It is more preferably 2 ⁇ m or more and 8 ⁇ m or less. Further, the total thickness of the photosensitive layer, the intermediate layer and the thermoplastic resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, from the viewpoint of further exerting the effects in the present disclosure. It is more preferably 8 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 2 ⁇ m or more and 8 ⁇ m or less.
  • the laminate having a photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure is The breaking elongation of the cured film obtained by curing the photosensitive layer at 120 ° C. is 15% or more.
  • the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the support on the photosensitive layer side is 50 nm or less.
  • the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the cover film on the photosensitive layer side is preferably 150 nm or less.
  • the laminate having a photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure preferably satisfies the following formula (R1).
  • X ⁇ Y ⁇ 1,500 formula (R1) X represents the value (%) of the elongation at break at 120 ° C. of the cured film obtained by curing the photosensitive layer, and Y is the arithmetic mean of the surface of the support on the photosensitive layer side. Represents the value of roughness Ra (nm).
  • X ⁇ Y is more preferably 750 or less.
  • the breaking elongation at 120 ° C. is twice or more larger than the breaking elongation at 23 ° C. of the cured film obtained by curing the photosensitive layer.
  • the elongation at break was determined by exposing a photosensitive layer having a thickness of 20 ⁇ m to 120 mJ / cm 2 with an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp and curing it, then further exposing it to 400 mJ / cm 2 with a high pressure mercury lamp and heating it at 145 ° C. for 30 minutes. Measured by a tensile test using the cured film of.
  • the laminate having a photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure preferably satisfies the following formula (R2).
  • R2 Y ⁇ Z formula (R2)
  • Y represents the arithmetic mean roughness Ra value (nm) of the surface of the support on the photosensitive layer side
  • Z is the arithmetic of the surface of the cover film on the photosensitive layer side. It represents the value (nm) of the average roughness Ra.
  • the method for producing the photosensitive transfer member (laminate having the photosensitive layer) used in the present disclosure is not particularly limited, and a known production method, for example, a known method for forming each layer can be used.
  • a method for manufacturing the photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure is not limited to the one having the configuration shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of the configuration of the photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure.
  • the photosensitive transfer member 100 shown in FIG. 2 has a structure in which a support 10, a thermoplastic resin layer 12, an intermediate layer 14, a photosensitive layer 16, and a cover film 18 are laminated in this order.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer 12 is formed by applying the thermoplastic resin composition to the surface of the support 10 and then drying the coating film of the thermoplastic resin composition. And the step of applying the intermediate layer composition to the surface of the thermoplastic resin layer 12 and then drying the coating film of the intermediate layer composition to form the intermediate layer 14, and the step of forming the intermediate layer 14 and the binder on the surface of the intermediate layer 14. Examples thereof include a method including a step of applying a photosensitive composition containing a polymer and a polymerizable compound, and then drying a coating film of the photosensitive composition to form a photosensitive layer 16.
  • thermoplastic resin composition containing at least one selected from the group consisting of an alkylene glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent, and a water- and water-mixable organic solvent.
  • An intermediate layer composition containing at least one of the above, and a photosensitive composition containing at least one selected from the group consisting of a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound, and an alkylene glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent. It is preferable to use.
  • the components contained in the thermoplastic resin layer 12 during the application of the intermediate layer composition to the surface of the thermoplastic resin layer 12 and / or the storage period of the laminate having the coating film of the intermediate layer composition can be suppressed, and the coating of the photosensitive composition on the surface of the intermediate layer 14 and / or the storage period of the laminate having the coating film of the photosensitive composition.
  • the mixing of the component contained in the intermediate layer 14 and the component contained in the photosensitive layer 16 can be suppressed.
  • the photosensitive transfer member 100 is manufactured by pressing the cover film 18 onto the photosensitive layer 16 of the laminate manufactured by the above manufacturing method.
  • the method for manufacturing the photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure includes a step of providing a cover film 18 so as to be in contact with the second surface of the photosensitive layer 16, thereby including a support 10, a thermoplastic resin layer 12, and an intermediate layer. 14. It is preferable to manufacture the photosensitive transfer member 100 including the photosensitive layer 16 and the cover film 18.
  • the photosensitive transfer member 100 in the form of a roll may be manufactured and stored by winding the photosensitive transfer member 100.
  • the roll-type photosensitive transfer member can be provided as it is for bonding with a substrate in a roll-to-roll method.
  • the photosensitive transfer member obtained by the method for manufacturing a cut product according to the present disclosure can be suitably used for manufacturing a circuit wiring and a display device such as a touch panel.
  • the photosensitive transfer member obtained by the method for producing a cut product according to the present disclosure can be suitably used for various applications requiring precision microfabrication by photolithography.
  • the photosensitive layer may be used as a coating for etching, or electroforming may be performed mainly by electroplating.
  • the cured film obtained by patterning may be used as a permanent film, or may be used as, for example, an interlayer insulating film, a wiring protective film, a wiring protective film having an index matching layer, or the like.
  • the photosensitive transfer member obtained by the method for manufacturing a cut product according to the present disclosure includes various wiring forming applications for semiconductor packages, printed circuit boards, sensor substrates, touch panels, electromagnetic wave shielding materials, conductive films such as film heaters, and the like. It can be suitably used for applications such as formation of structures in the fields of liquid crystal sealing materials, micromachines or microelectronics.
  • the photosensitive layer is a colored resin layer containing a pigment
  • the colored resin layer is used for, for example, a liquid crystal display (LCD) and a color used for a solid-state image sensor [for example, a CCD (charge-coupled device) and a CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor)]. It is suitable for forming colored pixels such as filters or a black matrix.
  • the liquid crystal display window of an electronic device may be provided with a cover glass having a black frame-shaped light-shielding layer formed on the peripheral edge of the back surface of a transparent glass substrate or the like in order to protect the liquid crystal display window. be.
  • a colored resin layer can be used to form such a light-shielding layer. Aspects other than the pigment in the colored resin layer are the same as those described above.
  • the pigment used for the colored resin layer may be appropriately selected according to a desired hue, and can be selected from black pigments, white pigments, and chromatic pigments other than black and white. Above all, when forming a black pattern, a black pigment is preferably selected as the pigment.
  • the black pigment a known black pigment (organic pigment, inorganic pigment, etc.) can be appropriately selected as long as the effect in the present disclosure is not impaired.
  • examples of the black pigment include carbon black, titanium oxide, titanium carbide, iron oxide, titanium oxide and graphite, and carbon black is particularly preferable.
  • carbon black from the viewpoint of surface resistance, carbon black in which at least a part of the surface is coated with a resin is preferable.
  • the particle size of the black pigment is preferably 0.001 ⁇ m to 0.1 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.01 ⁇ m to 0.08 ⁇ m in terms of number average particle size.
  • the particle size refers to the diameter of a circle when the area of the pigment particles is obtained from a photographic image of the pigment particles taken with an electron microscope and a circle having the same area as the area of the pigment particles is considered, and the number average particle size. Is an average value obtained by obtaining the above particle size for any 100 particles and averaging the obtained 100 particle sizes.
  • the white pigment described in paragraphs 0015 and 0114 of JP-A-2005-007765 can be used as the white pigment.
  • the white pigments as the inorganic pigment, titanium oxide, zinc oxide, lithopone, light calcium carbonate, white carbon, aluminum oxide, aluminum hydroxide, or barium sulfate is preferable, and titanium oxide or zinc oxide is more preferable.
  • titanium oxide is even more preferred.
  • rutile-type or anatase-type titanium oxide is more preferable, and rutile-type titanium oxide is particularly preferable.
  • the surface of titanium oxide may be subjected to silica treatment, alumina treatment, titania treatment, zirconia treatment, or organic matter treatment, or may be subjected to two or more treatments.
  • the catalytic activity of titanium oxide is suppressed, and heat resistance, fading property, etc. are improved.
  • at least one of alumina treatment and zirconia treatment is preferable as the surface treatment of the surface of titanium oxide, and both alumina treatment and zirconia treatment are particularly preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer is a colored resin layer
  • the photosensitive layer further contains a chromatic pigment other than the black pigment and the white pigment from the viewpoint of transferability.
  • a chromatic pigment is contained, the particle size of the chromatic pigment is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 0.08 ⁇ m or less, in that the dispersibility is more excellent.
  • chromatic pigments include Victoria Pure Blue BO (Color Index (hereinafter CI) 42595), Auramine (CI41000), Fat Black HB (CI26150), and Monolite.
  • CI Color Index
  • CI41000 Permanent Yellow GR
  • Permanent Yellow HR Permanent Yellow HR
  • Pigment Red 146 Hoster Balm Red ESB (CI Pigment Violet 19), Permanent Ruby FBH (CI Pigment Red 11), Fastel Pink B Supra (CI Pigment) Red 81), Monastral First Blue (CI Pigment Blue 15), Monolite First Black B (CI Pigment Black 1) and Carbon, C.I. I. Pigment Red 97, C.I. I. Pigment Red 122, C.I. I. Pigment Red 149, C.I. I. Pigment Red 168, C.I. I. Pigment Red 177, C.I. I. Pigment Red 180, C.I. I. Pigment Red 192, C.I. I. Pigment Red 215, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, C.I. I.
  • Pigment Blue 15 1, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 4, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 22, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 60, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 64, and C.I. I. Pigment Violet 23 and the like. Above all, C.I. I. Pigment Red 177 is preferred.
  • the content of the pigment is preferably more than 3% by mass and 40% by mass or less, more preferably more than 3% by mass and 35% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. It is more preferably more than 5% by mass and 35% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 10% by mass or more and 35% by mass or less.
  • the content of the pigment other than the black pigment is preferably 30% by mass or less, preferably 1% by mass to 20% by mass, based on the black pigment.
  • the mass% is more preferable, and 3% by mass to 15% by mass is further preferable.
  • the black pigment (preferably carbon black) is introduced into the photosensitive composition in the form of a pigment dispersion.
  • the dispersion liquid may be prepared by adding a mixture obtained by premixing a black pigment and a pigment dispersant to an organic solvent (or vehicle) and dispersing it with a disperser.
  • the pigment dispersant may be selected according to the pigment and the solvent, and for example, a commercially available dispersant can be used.
  • the vehicle refers to the portion of the medium in which the pigment is dispersed when the pigment is dispersed, and is a liquid, a binder component that holds the black pigment in a dispersed state, and a solvent component that dissolves and dilutes the binder component. (Organic solvent) and.
  • the disperser is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include known dispersers such as a kneader, a roll mill, an attritor, a super mill, a dissolver, a homomixer, and a sand mill. Further, it may be finely pulverized by mechanical grinding using frictional force.
  • disperser and fine pulverization the description in "Encyclopedia of Pigments" (Kunizo Asakura, First Edition, Asakura Shoten, 2000, 438, 310) can be referred to.
  • the photosensitive transfer member has a photosensitive layer.
  • a pattern can be formed on the transfer target by transferring the photosensitive layer onto the transfer target and then exposing and developing the photosensitive layer.
  • the components that can be contained in the photosensitive layer will be described in detail.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a binder polymer.
  • the binder polymer include (meth) acrylic resin, styrene resin, epoxy resin, amide resin, amide epoxy resin, alkyd resin, phenol resin, ester resin, urethane resin, and the reaction of epoxy resin with (meth) acrylic acid. Examples thereof include the obtained epoxy acrylate resin and the acid-modified epoxy acrylate resin obtained by reacting the epoxy acrylate resin with the acid anhydride.
  • the binder polymer is preferably an alkali-soluble resin.
  • the binder polymer is a (meth) acrylic resin in that it is excellent in alkali developability and film forming property.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin means a resin having a structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound.
  • the content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, still more preferably 90% by mass or more, based on all the structural units of the (meth) acrylic resin. ..
  • the (meth) acrylic resin may be composed of only structural units derived from the (meth) acrylic compound, or may have structural units derived from a polymerizable monomer other than the (meth) acrylic compound. .. That is, the upper limit of the content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is 100% by mass or less with respect to all the structural units of the (meth) acrylic resin.
  • Examples of the (meth) acrylic compound include (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid ester, (meth) acrylamide, and (meth) acrylonitrile.
  • Examples of the (meth) acrylic acid ester include (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid tetrahydrofurfuryl ester, (meth) acrylic acid dimethylaminoethyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid diethylaminoethyl ester, and (meth) acrylic acid ester.
  • Acrylic acid glycidyl ester (meth) acrylic acid benzyl ester, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl (meth) acrylate, and 2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropyl (meth) acrylate.
  • Meta) Acrylic acid alkyl esters are preferred.
  • (meth) acrylamide include acrylamide such as diacetone acrylamide.
  • Examples of the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate, and (meth).
  • (meth) acrylic acid ester a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable, and methyl (meth) acrylate or ethyl (meth) acrylate is more preferable.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin may have a structural unit other than the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound.
  • the polymerizable monomer forming the above-mentioned structural unit is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound other than the (meth) acrylic compound that is copolymerizable with the (meth) acrylic compound, and is, for example, styrene, vinyltoluene, and ⁇ .
  • -Styrene compounds such as methylstyrene which may have a substituent at the ⁇ -position or aromatic ring, vinyl alcohol esters such as acrylonitrile and vinyl-n-butyl ether, maleic acid, maleic acid anhydride, monomethyl maleate, maleic acid Examples thereof include monoethyl and maleic acid monoesters such as monoisopropyl maleate, fumaric acid, silicic acid, ⁇ -cyanosilicic acid, itaconic acid, and crotonic acid. These polymerizable monomers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin preferably has a structural unit having an acid group from the viewpoint of improving the alkali developability.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, and a phosphonic acid group.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin more preferably has a structural unit having a carboxy group, and further preferably has a structural unit derived from the above-mentioned (meth) acrylic acid.
  • the content of the constituent unit having an acid group (preferably the constituent unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid) in the (meth) acrylic resin is excellent in developability with respect to the total mass of the (meth) acrylic resin. 10% by mass or more is preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less, in terms of excellent alkali resistance.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin has a structural unit derived from the above-mentioned (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester.
  • the content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester in the (meth) acrylic resin is preferably 50% by mass to 90% by mass, preferably 60% by mass or more, based on all the structural units of the (meth) acrylic resin. 90% by mass is more preferable, and 65% by mass to 90% by mass is further preferable.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin a resin having both a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable, and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid are preferable.
  • a resin composed only of structural units derived from the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is more preferable.
  • an acrylic resin having a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid, a structural unit derived from methyl methacrylate, and a structural unit derived from ethyl acrylate is also preferable.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin preferably has at least one selected from the group consisting of a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid alkyl ester from the viewpoint of resolvability, and methacrylic acid. It is preferable to have both a structural unit derived from an acid and a structural unit derived from an alkyl methacrylate ester.
  • the total content of the methacrylic acid-derived structural unit and the methacrylic acid alkyl ester-derived structural unit in the (meth) acrylic resin is 40 with respect to all the structural units of the (meth) acrylic resin from the viewpoint of resolution. It is preferably mass% or more, and more preferably 60% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, and may be 100% by mass or less, preferably 80% by mass or less.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin is derived from at least one selected from the group consisting of a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid alkyl ester from the viewpoint of resolution, and acrylic acid. It is also preferable to have at least one selected from the group consisting of a structural unit and a structural unit derived from an acrylic acid alkyl ester. From the viewpoint of resolution, the total content of the structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and the structural unit derived from methacrylic acid alkyl ester is the total content of the structural unit derived from acrylic acid and the structural unit derived from acrylic acid alkyl ester.
  • the mass ratio is preferably 60/40 to 80/20 with respect to the amount.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin preferably has an ester group at the terminal because it is excellent in the developability of the photosensitive layer after transfer.
  • the terminal portion of the (meth) acrylic resin is composed of a site derived from the polymerization initiator used in the synthesis.
  • a (meth) acrylic resin having an ester group at the terminal can be synthesized by using a polymerization initiator that generates a radical having an ester group.
  • the binder polymer is preferably, for example, a binder polymer having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more from the viewpoint of developability.
  • the binder polymer is, for example, a resin having a carboxy group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more (so-called carboxy group-containing resin) from the viewpoint that it is easily crosslinked with a crosslinked component by heating to form a strong film. More preferably, it is a (meth) acrylic resin having a carboxy group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more (so-called carboxy group-containing (meth) acrylic resin).
  • the binder polymer is a resin having a carboxy group
  • the three-dimensional crosslink density can be increased by adding a thermally crosslinkable compound such as a blocked isocyanate compound and thermally crosslinking the binder polymer.
  • a thermally crosslinkable compound such as a blocked isocyanate compound
  • the carboxy group of the resin having a carboxy group is anhydrous and hydrophobized, the wet heat resistance can be improved.
  • the carboxy group-containing (meth) acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more is not particularly limited as long as the above acid value conditions are satisfied, and can be appropriately selected from known (meth) acrylic resins.
  • carboxy group-containing acrylic resins having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more among the polymers described in paragraphs 0025 of JP2011-095716A, carboxy group-containing acrylic resins having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more, and the polymers described in paragraphs 0033 to 0052 of JP2010-237589A.
  • a carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more can be preferably used.
  • the binder polymer is a styrene-acrylic copolymer.
  • the styrene-acrylic copolymer refers to a resin having a structural unit derived from a styrene compound and a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylic compound, and a structural unit derived from the styrene compound.
  • the total content of the structural units derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, based on all the structural units of the copolymer.
  • the content of the structural unit derived from the styrene compound is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and further preferably 5% by mass to 80% by mass, based on all the structural units of the copolymer. preferable.
  • the content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, and 20% by mass to 95% by mass, based on all the structural units of the copolymer. Mass% is more preferred.
  • the binder polymer preferably has an aromatic ring structure, and more preferably has a structural unit having an aromatic ring structure, from the viewpoint of moisture permeability and strength of the obtained cured film.
  • the monomer forming a structural unit having an aromatic ring structure include styrene compounds such as styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, and ⁇ -methylstyrene, and benzyl (meth) acrylate. Of these, styrene compounds are preferable, and styrene is more preferable.
  • the binder polymer more preferably has a structural unit (constituent unit derived from styrene) represented by the following formula (S) from the viewpoint of moisture permeability and strength of the obtained cured film.
  • the content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure is 5 with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of the moisture permeability and strength of the obtained cured film. It is preferably from mass% to 90% by mass, more preferably from 10% by mass to 70% by mass, and even more preferably from 20% by mass to 60% by mass.
  • the content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure in the binder polymer is preferably 5 mol% to 70 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of the moisture permeability and strength of the obtained cured film. 10 mol% to 60 mol% is more preferable, and 20 mol% to 60 mol% is further preferable.
  • the content of the structural unit represented by the above formula (S) in the binder polymer is 5 mol% to 70 mol with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of the moisture permeability and strength of the obtained cured film. % Is preferable, 10 mol% to 60 mol% is more preferable, 20 mol% to 60 mol% is further preferable, and 20 mol% to 50 mol% is particularly preferable.
  • the content of the "constituent unit” is defined by the molar ratio
  • the above “constituent unit” is synonymous with the "monomer unit".
  • the above-mentioned "monomer unit” may be modified after polymerization by a polymer reaction or the like. The same applies to the following.
  • the binder polymer preferably has an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure from the viewpoint of suppressing development residue, strength of the obtained cured film, and adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film. That is, the binder polymer preferably has a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure. Above all, it is more preferable that the binder polymer has a ring structure in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused.
  • Examples of the ring constituting the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in the structural unit having the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure include a tricyclodecane ring, a cyclohexane ring, a cyclopentane ring, a norbornane ring, and an isoborone ring.
  • a ring in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused is preferable, and a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring is preferable, from the viewpoints of suppressing the development residue, the strength of the obtained cured film, and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film.
  • Tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] decan ring is more preferable.
  • the monomer forming a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure examples include dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, and isobornyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the binder polymer more preferably has a structural unit represented by the following formula (Cy) from the viewpoint of suppressing development residue, strength of the obtained cured film, and adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film. It is more preferable to have a structural unit represented by the above formula (S) and a structural unit represented by the following formula (Cy).
  • R M represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R Cy represents a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure
  • R M in the formula (Cy) is preferably a methyl group.
  • One R Cy in Formula (Cy), which has developed residual ⁇ system, strength of the obtained cured film, and, in view of the tackiness of the uncured film obtained, an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure having 5 to 20 carbon atoms It is preferably a valent group, more preferably a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure having 6 to 16 carbon atoms, and more preferably a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure having 8 to 14 carbon atoms. It is more preferable that it is a group of.
  • Aliphatic hydrocarbon cyclic structure in the R Cy of formula (Cy) can be a single ring structure or may be a polycyclic structure. Further, the aliphatic hydrocarbon cyclic structure in the R Cy of formula (Cy), the development residue ⁇ system, strength of the obtained cured film, and, in view of the tackiness of the uncured film obtained, a cyclopentane ring, cyclohexane It is preferably a ring structure, a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring structure, a norbornane ring structure, or an isoborone ring structure, more preferably a cyclohexane ring structure or a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring structure, and a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring structure.
  • aliphatic hydrocarbon cyclic structure in the R Cy of formula (Cy), the development residue ⁇ system, strength of the obtained cured film, and, in view of the tackiness of the uncured film obtained bicyclic or more aliphatic A ring structure in which the hydrocarbon ring is fused is preferable, and a ring in which 2 to 4 aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused is more preferable.
  • R Cy in the formula (Cy), the intensity of the development residual ⁇ system resistance, the resulting cured film, and, in view of the tackiness of the uncured film obtained, -C in the formula (Cy) ( O) O-
  • the group in which the oxygen atom of the above and the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure are directly bonded that is, an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group is preferable, and a cyclohexyl group or a dicyclopentanyl group is more preferable. It is more preferably a pentanyl group.
  • the binder polymer may have one type of structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure alone, or may have two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure is the development residue inhibitory property, the strength of the obtained cured film, and the obtained uncured film. From the viewpoint of film adhesiveness, 5% by mass to 90% by mass is preferable, 10% by mass to 80% by mass is more preferable, and 20% by mass to 70% by mass is further preferable, based on all the constituent units of the binder polymer.
  • the content of the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in the binder polymer is the total of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of suppressing the development residue, the strength of the obtained cured film, and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film.
  • the constituent unit 5 mol% to 70 mol% is preferable, 10 mol% to 60 mol% is more preferable, and 20 mol% to 50 mol% is further preferable.
  • the content of the structural unit represented by the above formula (Cy) in the binder polymer is determined from the viewpoint of the inhibitory property of developing residue, the strength of the obtained cured film, and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film.
  • 5 mol% to 70 mol% is preferable, 10 mol% to 60 mol% is more preferable, and 20 mol% to 50 mol% is further preferable.
  • the binder polymer has a structural unit having an aromatic ring structure and a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure
  • the total content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure and the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure is developed.
  • the strength of the obtained cured film, and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film 10% by mass to 90% by mass is preferable, and 20% by mass to 80% by mass, based on all the constituent units of the binder polymer.
  • the mass% is more preferable, and 40% by mass to 75% by mass is further preferable.
  • the total content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure and the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in the binder polymer is the development residue inhibitory property, the strength of the obtained cured film, and the adhesion of the obtained uncured film. From the viewpoint of properties, 10 mol% to 80 mol% is preferable, 20 mol% to 70 mol% is more preferable, and 40 mol% to 60 mol% is further preferable with respect to all the constituent units of the binder polymer. Further, the total content of the structural unit represented by the above formula (S) and the structural unit represented by the above formula (Cy) in the binder polymer is the present development residue inhibitory property, the strength of the obtained cured film, and the obtained.
  • the molar amount nS of the structural unit represented by the above formula (S) and the molar amount nCy of the structural unit represented by the above formula (Cy) in the binder polymer are the development residue inhibitory property and the strength of the obtained cured film.
  • the binder polymer preferably has a structural unit having an acid group from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to the substrate.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group, and a carboxy group is preferable.
  • the structural unit having the acid group the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid, which is shown below, is preferable, and the structural unit derived from methacrylic acid is more preferable.
  • the binder polymer may have one type of structural unit having an acid group alone or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit having an acid group is 5% by mass with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to the substrate. % To 50% by mass is preferable, 5% by mass to 40% by mass is more preferable, and 10% by mass to 30% by mass is further preferable.
  • the content of the constituent unit having an acid group in the binder polymer is preferably 5 mol% to 70 mol% with respect to all the constituent units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to the substrate.
  • mol% to 50 mol% More preferably, mol% to 50 mol%, still more preferably 20 mol% to 40 mol%.
  • the content of the (meth) acrylic acid-derived structural unit in the binder polymer is 5 mol% to 70 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to the substrate. Is preferable, 10 mol% to 50 mol% is more preferable, and 20 mol% to 40 mol% is further preferable.
  • the binder polymer preferably has a reactive group, and more preferably has a structural unit having a reactive group, from the viewpoint of curability and the strength of the obtained cured film.
  • a reactive group a radically polymerizable group is preferable, and an ethylenically unsaturated group is more preferable.
  • the binder polymer preferably has a structural unit having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain.
  • the "main chain” represents a relatively longest binding chain among the molecules of the polymer compound constituting the resin, and the "side chain” refers to an atomic group branched from the main chain. show.
  • an ethylenically unsaturated group an allyl group or a (meth) acryloxy group is more preferable.
  • the structural unit having a reactive group include, but are not limited to, those shown below.
  • the binder polymer may have one type of structural unit having a reactive group alone or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit having a reactive group is relative to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of curability and the strength of the obtained cured film. 5, 70% by mass is preferable, 10% by mass to 50% by mass is more preferable, and 20% by mass to 40% by mass is further preferable.
  • the content of the structural unit having a reactive group in the binder polymer is 5 mol% to 70 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of curability and the strength of the obtained cured film.
  • 10 mol% to 60 mol% is more preferable, and 20 mol% to 50 mol% is further preferable.
  • a reactive group into a binder polymer functional groups such as a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, an acetoacetyl group, and a sulfo group, an epoxy compound, and a blocked isocyanate are used.
  • a compound such as a compound, an isocyanate compound, a vinyl sulfone compound, an aldehyde compound, a methylol compound, and a carboxylic acid anhydride.
  • a preferable example of the means for introducing a reactive group into a binder polymer is that a polymer having a carboxy group is synthesized by a polymerization reaction and then glycidyl (meth) acrylate is added to a part of the carboxy groups of the obtained resin by the polymer reaction.
  • a binder polymer having a (meth) acryloxy group in the side chain can be obtained.
  • the polymerization reaction is preferably carried out under a temperature condition of 70 ° C. to 100 ° C., and more preferably carried out under a temperature condition of 80 ° C. to 90 ° C.
  • an azo-based initiator is preferable, and for example, V-601 (trade name) or V-65 (trade name) manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd. is more preferable.
  • the polymer reaction is preferably carried out under temperature conditions of 80 ° C. to 110 ° C.
  • a catalyst such as an ammonium salt.
  • the binder polymer the following resins are preferable from the viewpoints of developability, curability, and strength of the obtained cured film.
  • the content ratios (a to d) and the weight average molecular weight Mw of each of the structural units shown below can be appropriately changed according to the purpose.
  • a is preferably 20% by mass to 60% by mass
  • b is preferably 10% by mass to 50% by mass
  • c is preferably 5.0% by mass to 25% by mass
  • d is preferably 10% by mass to 50% by mass. ..
  • a is preferably 20% by mass to 60% by mass
  • b is preferably 10% by mass to 50% by mass
  • c is preferably 5.0% by mass to 25% by mass
  • d is preferably 10% by mass to 50% by mass. ..
  • a is 30% by mass to 65% by mass
  • b is 1.0% by mass to 20% by mass
  • c is 5.0% by mass to 25% by mass
  • d is 10% by mass to 50% by mass. Is preferable.
  • a is 1.0% by mass to 20% by mass
  • b is 20% by mass to 60% by mass
  • c is 5.0% by mass to 25% by mass
  • d is 10% by mass to 50% by mass. Is preferable.
  • the binder polymer may contain a polymer having a structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure (hereinafter, also referred to as “polymer X”).
  • the carboxylic acid anhydride structure may be either a chain carboxylic acid anhydride structure or a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure, but a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure is preferable.
  • a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure As the ring having a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure, a 5-membered ring to a 7-membered ring is preferable, a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring is more preferable, and a 5-membered ring is further preferable.
  • the structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure is a structural unit containing a divalent group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the compound represented by the following formula P-1 in the main chain, or the following formula P-1. It is preferable that the monovalent group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the represented compound is a structural unit bonded to the main chain directly or via a divalent linking group.
  • R A1a represents a substituent
  • n 1a R A1a may be the same or different
  • Examples of the substituent represented by RA1a include an alkyl group.
  • Z 1a an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable, an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkylene group having 2 carbon atoms is further preferable.
  • n 1a represents an integer of 0 or more.
  • Z 1a represents an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms
  • n 1a is preferably an integer of 0 to 4, more preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and even more preferably 0.
  • a plurality of RA1a may be the same or different. Further, the plurality of RA1a may be bonded to each other to form a ring, but it is preferable that they are not bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • a structural unit derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid anhydride is preferable, a structural unit derived from an unsaturated cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride is more preferable, and an unsaturated aliphatic cyclic carboxylic acid is preferable.
  • a structural unit derived from an acid anhydride is more preferable, a structural unit derived from maleic anhydride or itaconic anhydride is particularly preferable, and a structural unit derived from maleic anhydride is most preferable.
  • Rx represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a CH 2 OH group, or CF 3 groups
  • Me represents a methyl group.
  • the structural unit having the carboxylic acid anhydride structure in the polymer X may be one kind alone or two or more kinds.
  • the total content of the structural units having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure is preferably 0 mol% to 60 mol%, more preferably 5 mol% to 40 mol%, and 10 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the polymer X. It is more preferably ⁇ 35 mol%.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain only one type of polymer X, or may contain two or more types of polymer X.
  • the content of the polymer X is preferably 0.1% by mass to 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer from the viewpoint of resolution and developability. , 0.2% by mass to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.5% by mass to 20% by mass, further preferably 1% by mass to 20% by mass.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the binder polymer is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 or more, further preferably 10,000 to 50,000, and 20, from the viewpoint of improving resolution and developability. 000 to 30,000 is particularly preferable.
  • the acid value of the binder polymer is preferably 10 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 60 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g, further preferably 60 mgKOH / g to 150 mgKOH / g, and particularly preferably 60 mgKOH / g to 110 mgKOH / g.
  • the acid value of the binder polymer is a value measured according to the method described in JIS K0070: 1992.
  • the dispersity (weight average molecular weight / number average molecular weight) of the binder polymer is preferably 1.0 to 6.0, more preferably 1.0 to 5.0, and 1.0 to 4.0 from the viewpoint of developability. Is more preferable, and 1.0 to 3.0 is particularly preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain only one kind of binder polymer, or may contain two or more kinds of binder polymers.
  • the content of the binder polymer is preferably 10% by mass to 90% by mass, more preferably 20% by mass to 80% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer from the viewpoint of photosensitivity, resolution and developability. , 30% by mass to 70% by mass is more preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a polymerizable compound.
  • a polymerizable compound is a compound having a polymerizable group. Examples of the polymerizable group include a radically polymerizable group and a cationically polymerizable group, and a radically polymerizable group is preferable.
  • the polymerizable compound preferably contains a polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “ethylenically unsaturated compound”).
  • ethylenically unsaturated compound a polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group
  • a (meth) acryloxy group is preferable.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound in the present specification is a compound other than the binder polymer, and preferably has a molecular weight of less than 5,000.
  • preferred embodiments of the ethylenically unsaturated compound used in the second embodiment include preferred embodiments of the ethylenically unsaturated compound used in the first embodiment described above.
  • a compound represented by the following formula (M) (simply also referred to as “Compound M”) can be mentioned.
  • Q 2 -R 1 -Q 1 formula (M) Q 1 and Q 2 each independently represent a (meth) acryloyloxy group, and R 1 represents a divalent linking group having a chain structure.
  • Q 1 and Q 2 in the formula (M) from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis, it is preferred that Q 1 and Q 2 are the same group. Further, Q 1 and Q 2 in the formula (M) are preferably acryloyloxy groups from the viewpoint of reactivity.
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a chain structure at least in part, and the portion other than the chain structure is not particularly limited, and is, for example, branched chain, cyclic, or having 1 to 1 to carbon atoms. It may be any of 5 linear alkylene groups, arylene groups, ether bonds, and combinations thereof, and alkylene groups or groups in which two or more alkylene groups and one or more arylene groups are combined are preferable. , The alkylene group is more preferable, and the linear alkylene group is further preferable.
  • the above L 1 independently represents an alkylene group, preferably an ethylene group, a propylene group, or a butylene group, and more preferably an ethylene group or a 1,2-propylene group.
  • p represents an integer of 2 or more, and is preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
  • the atomic number of the connecting chain of the shortest for connecting the Q 1, Q 2 in the compound M is developing residual ⁇ system resistance, rust resistance, from the viewpoint of bending resistance of the obtained cured film, 3 to 50 Is preferable, 4 to 40 pieces are more preferable, 6 to 20 pieces are further preferable, and 8 to 12 pieces are particularly preferable.
  • the "Q 1, Q atoms linking chain shortest connecting between the 2" connecting the atoms in R 1 be linked to Q 1 to atom in R 1 be linked to Q 2 It is the shortest number of atoms.
  • the compound M examples include 1,3-butanediol di (meth) acrylate, tetramethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, and 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate.
  • the ester monomer can also be used as a mixture.
  • 1,9-Nonandiol di (meth) acrylate and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate, more preferably 1,9-nonane. More preferably, it is at least one compound selected from the group consisting of diol di (meth) acrylate and 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate.
  • a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound can be mentioned.
  • the term "bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound” means a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule.
  • a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable.
  • a (meth) acrylate compound is preferable.
  • the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known compounds.
  • Examples of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound other than the compound M include tricyclodecanedimethanol di (meth) acrylate and 1,4-cyclohexanediol di (meth) acrylate.
  • NK ester A-DCP tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate
  • NK ester A-DCP tricyclodecanedimenanol dimethacrylate
  • NK ester DCP manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate (trade name: NK ester A-NOD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • 1,6 -Hexanediol diacrylate (trade name: NK ester A-HD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) can be mentioned.
  • the trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known compounds.
  • Examples of trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compounds include dipentaerythritol (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol (tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples thereof include ditrimethylolpropane tetra (meth) acrylate, isocyanuric acid (meth) acrylate, and (meth) acrylate compound having a glycerin tri (meth) acrylate skeleton.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include caprolactone-modified compounds of (meth) acrylate compounds (KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., etc.).
  • (Meta) acrylate compound alkylene oxide-modified compound (KAYARAD (registered trademark) RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ATM-35E, A-9300 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., EBECRYL manufactured by Daicel Ornex Co., Ltd. (Registered trademark) 135, etc.), ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate (NK ester A-GLY-9E, etc. manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) can also be mentioned.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include urethane (meth) acrylate compounds.
  • examples of the urethane (meth) acrylate include urethane di (meth) acrylate, and examples thereof include propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate, and ethylene oxide and propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate.
  • a urethane (meth) acrylate having trifunctionality or higher can also be mentioned.
  • As the lower limit of the number of functional groups 6-functionality or more is more preferable, and 8-functionality or more is further preferable.
  • the upper limit of the number of functional groups is preferably 20 functional or less.
  • trifunctional or higher functional urethane (meth) acrylates include 8UX-015A (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), UA-32P (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and U-15HA (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). ), UA-1100H (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), AH-600 (trade name) manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd., and UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, UA-510H. , And UX-5000 (both manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • One of the preferred embodiments of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group.
  • the acid group include a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, and a carboxy group.
  • the carboxy group is preferable as the acid group.
  • ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group a trifunctional to tetrafunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group [pentaerythritol tri and tetraacrylate (PETA) having a carboxy group introduced into the skeleton (acid value: 80 mgKOH) / G to 120 mgKOH / g)], a pentafunctional to hexafunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group (dipentaerythritol penta and hexaacrylate (DPHA)) with a carboxy group introduced into the skeleton [acid value: 25 mgKOH / g] ⁇ 70 mgKOH / g)] and the like.
  • PETA pentafunctional to hexafunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group
  • DPHA dipentaerythritol penta and hexaacrylate
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group at least one selected from the group consisting of a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxy group and a carboxylic acid anhydride thereof is preferable.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group is at least one selected from the group consisting of a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxy group and a carboxylic acid anhydride thereof, the developability and film strength are higher. Increase.
  • the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxy group is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known compounds.
  • Examples of the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxy group include Aronix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Aronix (registered trademark) M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • Aronix (registered trademark) M-510 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. can be mentioned.
  • the polymerizable compound having an acid group described in paragraphs 0025 to 0030 of JP-A-2004-239942 is preferable, and the contents described in this publication are incorporated in the present specification. Is done.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include a compound obtained by reacting a polyhydric alcohol with an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated carboxylic acid, and a compound obtained by reacting a glycidyl group-containing compound with an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated carboxylic acid.
  • Urethane monomers such as (meth) acrylate compounds with urethane bonds, ⁇ -chloro- ⁇ -hydroxypropyl- ⁇ '-(meth) acryloyloxyethyl-o-phthalate, ⁇ -hydroxyethyl- ⁇ '-(meth) acryloyl Examples thereof include phthalic acid compounds such as oxyethyl-o-phthalate and ⁇ -hydroxypropyl- ⁇ '-(meth) acryloyloxyethyl-o-phthalate, and (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters. These are used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Examples of the compound obtained by reacting a polyvalent alcohol with ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated carboxylic acid include 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acryloxypolyethoxy) phenyl) propane and 2,2-bis.
  • Bisphenol A-based (meth) acrylate compounds such as (4-((meth) acryloxypolypropoxy) phenyl) propane and 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acryloxypolyethoxypolypropoxy) phenyl) propane , Polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate having 2 to 14 ethylene oxide groups, polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate having 2 to 14 propylene oxide groups, and 2 to 14 ethylene oxide groups.
  • an ethylene unsaturated compound having a tetramethylolmethane structure or a trimethylolpropane structure is preferable, and a tetramethylolmethanetri (meth) acrylate, a tetramethylolmethanetetra (meth) acrylate, a trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, or a di (Trimethylolpropane) Tetraacrylate is more preferable.
  • ethylenically unsaturated compound examples include caprolactone-modified compounds of ethylenically unsaturated compounds (for example, KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., etc. ), Ethylene unsaturated compound alkylene oxide-modified compound (for example, KAYARAD RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ATM-35E, A-9300 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., EBECRYL manufactured by Daicel Ornex Co., Ltd. (Registered trademark) 135, etc.), ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate (A-GLY-9E, etc. manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and the like can also be mentioned.
  • KAYARAD registered trademark
  • DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co.
  • ethylenically unsaturated compound those containing an ester bond are also preferable from the viewpoint of excellent developability.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound containing an ester bond is not particularly limited as long as it contains an ester bond in the molecule, but from the viewpoint of excellent curability and developability, ethylene having a tetramethylolmethane structure or a trimethylolpropane structure is used.
  • Unsaturated compounds are preferred, and tetramethylolmethanetri (meth) acrylates, tetramethylolmethanetetra (meth) acrylates, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylates, or di (trimethylolpropane) tetraacrylates are more preferred.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound includes an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms and the above-mentioned ethylene unsaturated compound having a tetramethylol methane structure or a trimethylol propane structure. It preferably contains a compound.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic structure having 6 or more carbon atoms include 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate, and tricyclodecanedimethanoldi. Examples include (meth) acrylate.
  • One of the preferred embodiments of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure (preferably a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound).
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound is ethylenically having a ring structure in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused (preferably a structure selected from the group consisting of a tricyclodecane structure and a tricyclodecene structure).
  • Unsaturated compounds are preferable, bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds having a ring structure in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused are more preferable, and tricyclodecanedimethanol di (meth) acrylate is further preferable.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure includes a cyclopentane structure, a cyclohexane structure, a tricyclodecane structure, and a tricyclodecene from the viewpoints of the moisture permeability and bending resistance of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film.
  • a structure, a norbornane structure, or an isoborone structure is preferable.
  • the molecular weight of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 200 to 3,000, more preferably 250 to 2,600, further preferably 280 to 2,200, and particularly preferably 300 to 2,200.
  • the ratio of the content of the ethylenically unsaturated compound having a molecular weight of 300 or less to the content of all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the photosensitive layer is based on the content of all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the photosensitive layer. It is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 25% by mass or less, and even more preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound, and more preferably contains a trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound. It is more preferable to contain a tetrafunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  • the photosensitive layer comprises a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure and a binder polymer having a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring. It is preferable to include it.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a compound represented by the formula (M) and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and 1,9-nonane. It is more preferable to contain a diol diacrylate, a tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, and a polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group, and 1,9-nonane diol diacrylate and a tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate. More preferably, it contains an acrylate and a succinic acid-modified form of dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate.
  • the photosensitive layer contains a compound represented by the formula (M), an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and a thermally crosslinkable compound described later. It is more preferable to contain the compound represented by the formula (M), an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and a blocked isocyanate compound described later.
  • the photosensitive layer is a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound (preferably a bifunctional (meth)) from the viewpoint of suppressing development residue and preventing rust. It is preferable to contain an acrylate compound) and a trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound (preferably a trifunctional or higher (meth) acrylate compound).
  • the mass ratio of the contents of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound and the trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 10:90 to 90:10, more preferably 30:70 to 70:30.
  • the content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 20% by mass to 80% by mass, more preferably 30% by mass to 70% by mass, based on the total amount of all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds.
  • the content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound in the photosensitive layer is preferably 10% by mass to 60% by mass, more preferably 15% by mass to 40% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains compound M and a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure from the viewpoint of rust prevention. .. Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer is composed of compound M and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group from the viewpoints of substrate adhesion, development residue inhibitory property, and rust prevention property.
  • compound M a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and more preferably compound M, an aliphatic hydrocarbon. It is more preferable to contain a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a ring structure, a trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound, and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and the compound M has an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure.
  • the photosensitive layer is composed of 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate, from the viewpoints of substrate adhesion, development residue inhibitory property, and rust prevention.
  • a polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate, tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, and a polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group. It preferably contains a compound, more preferably 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate, tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group.
  • 9-Nonandiol diacrylate 9-Nonandiol diacrylate, tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, an ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group, and a urethane acrylate compound are particularly preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound as the ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  • the content of the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound in the ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 60% by mass to 100% by mass with respect to the total content of all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the photosensitive layer. , 80% by mass to 100% by mass, more preferably 90% by mass to 100% by mass.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the ethylenically unsaturated compound in the photosensitive layer is preferably 1% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 70% by mass, and 5% by mass to 60% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • the mass% is more preferable, and 5% by mass to 50% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a polymerization initiator.
  • a photopolymerization initiator is preferable.
  • Preferred embodiments of the polymerization initiator used in the B embodiment include preferred embodiments of the polymerization initiator used in the above-described embodiment A.
  • the polymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the polymerization initiator is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. It is more preferable to have.
  • the upper limit of the value is preferably 10% by mass or less, and more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a heterocyclic compound.
  • the heterocycle contained in the heterocyclic compound may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic heterocycle.
  • Examples of the hetero atom contained in the heterocyclic compound include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom.
  • the heterocyclic compound preferably has at least one atom selected from the group consisting of a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom, and more preferably has a nitrogen atom.
  • heterocyclic compound examples include a triazole compound, a benzotriazole compound, a tetrazole compound, a thiadiazol compound, a triazine compound, a rhonin compound, a thiazole compound, a benzothiazole compound, a benzoimidazole compound, a benzoxazole compound, and a pyrimidine compound.
  • the heterocyclic compound at least one selected from the group consisting of a triazole compound, a benzotriazole compound, a tetrazole compound, a thiadiazol compound, a triazine compound, a rhonin compound, a thiazole compound, a benzoimidazole compound, and a benzoxazole compound.
  • heterocyclic compound A preferable specific example of the heterocyclic compound is shown below.
  • examples of the triazole compound and the benzotriazole compound include the following compounds.
  • Examples of the tetrazole compound include the following compounds.
  • thiadiazole compounds include the following compounds.
  • Examples of the triazine compound include the following compounds.
  • Examples of the loadonine compound include the following compounds.
  • Examples of the thiazole compound include the following compounds.
  • benzothiazole compound examples include the following compounds.
  • Examples of the benzimidazole compound include the following compounds.
  • benzoxazole compound examples include the following compounds.
  • the heterocyclic compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the heterocyclic compound is preferably 0.01% by mass to 20.0% by mass, preferably 0.10% by mass to 10% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. 0.0% by mass is more preferable, 0.30% by mass to 8.0% by mass is further preferable, and 0.50% by mass to 5.0% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain an aliphatic thiol compound.
  • the photosensitive layer contains an aliphatic thiol compound, the aliphatic thiol compound undergoes an en-thiol reaction with an ethylenically unsaturated compound, so that the curing shrinkage of the formed film is suppressed and the stress is relaxed.
  • NS aliphatic thiol compound
  • aliphatic thiol compound a monofunctional aliphatic thiol compound or a polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound (that is, a bifunctional or higher functional aliphatic thiol compound) is preferable.
  • a polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion of the formed pattern (particularly, adhesion after exposure).
  • the term "polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound” means an aliphatic compound having two or more thiol groups (also referred to as "mercapto groups”) in the molecule.
  • the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound a low molecular weight compound having a molecular weight of 100 or more is preferable. Specifically, the molecular weight of the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound is more preferably 100 to 1,500, and even more preferably 150 to 1,000.
  • the number of functional groups of the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound is, for example, preferably bifunctional to 10 functional, more preferably bifunctional to 8 functional, and further preferably bifunctional to 6 functional, from the viewpoint of adhesion of the formed pattern. preferable.
  • polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound examples include trimethylolpropanthris (3-mercaptobutyrate), 1,4-bis (3-mercaptobutyryloxy) butane, pentaerythritol tetrakis (3-mercaptobutyrate), and the like.
  • the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compounds include trimethylolpropane tris (3-mercaptobutyrate), 1,4-bis (3-mercaptobutyryloxy) butane, and 1,3,5-tris. At least one compound selected from the group consisting of (3-mercaptobutyryloxyethyl) -1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6 (1H, 3H, 5H) -trione is preferred.
  • Examples of the monofunctional aliphatic thiol compound include 1-octanethiol, 1-dodecanethiol, ⁇ -mercaptopropionic acid, methyl-3-mercaptopropionate, 2-ethylhexyl-3-mercaptopropionate, and n-. Examples thereof include octyl-3-mercaptopropionate, methoxybutyl-3-mercaptopropionate, and stearyl-3-mercaptopropionate.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain one type of aliphatic thiol compound alone, or may contain two or more types of aliphatic thiol compounds.
  • the content of the aliphatic thiol compound is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass to 50% by mass, 5% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. It is more preferably from mass% to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably from 8% by mass to 20% by mass.
  • the photosensitive layer preferably contains a heat-crosslinkable compound from the viewpoint of the strength of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film.
  • a heat-crosslinkable compound used in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment B
  • the above-mentioned heat-crosslinkable compound is preferably used in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment A.
  • the heat-crosslinkable compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the heat-crosslinkable compound is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a surfactant.
  • the surfactant used in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment B the above-mentioned surfactant is preferably used in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment A.
  • the surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.01% by mass to 3.0% by mass, preferably 0.01% by mass to 1% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. .0% by mass is more preferable, and 0.05% by mass to 0.80% by mass is further preferable.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a radical polymerization inhibitor.
  • the radical polymerization inhibitor used in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment B the radical polymerization inhibitor described above is preferably used in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment A.
  • the radical polymerization inhibitor may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the radical polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass, preferably 0.05% by mass to 1% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. More preferably by mass.
  • the content is 0.01% by mass or more, the storage stability of the photosensitive layer is more excellent.
  • the content is 3% by mass or less, the maintenance of sensitivity and the suppression of dye decolorization are more excellent.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a hydrogen donating compound.
  • the hydrogen-donating compound has actions such as further improving the sensitivity of the photopolymerization initiator to active light and suppressing inhibition of polymerization of the polymerizable compound by oxygen.
  • Examples of the hydrogen donating compound include amines and amino acid compounds.
  • Examples of amines include M.I. R. "Journal of Polymer Society" by Sander et al., Vol. 10, p. 3173 (1972), Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 44-020189, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-082102, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 52-134692, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 59-138205 Examples thereof include the compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 60-084305, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 62-018537, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 64-033104, Research Disclosure No. 33825, and the like.
  • 4,4'-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone tris (4-dimethylaminophenyl) methane (also known as leucocrystal violet), triethanolamine, p-dimethylaminobenzoic acid ethyl ester, p-formyl.
  • examples thereof include dimethylaniline and p-methylthiodimethylaniline.
  • the amines are at least one selected from the group consisting of 4,4'-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone and tris (4-dimethylaminophenyl) methane. Seeds are preferred.
  • amino acid compound examples include N-phenylglycine, N-methyl-N-phenylglycine, and N-ethyl-N-phenylglycine.
  • N-phenylglycine is preferable as the amino acid compound from the viewpoint of sensitivity, curing rate, and curability.
  • Examples of the hydrogen donating compound include an organometallic compound (tributyltin acetate, etc.) described in JP-A-48-042465, a hydrogen donor described in JP-A-55-0344414, and JP-A-6. Sulfur compounds (Tritian and the like) described in JP-A-308727 are also mentioned.
  • the hydrogen donating compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the hydrogen donating compound is 0 with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer in terms of improving the curing rate due to the balance between the polymerization growth rate and the chain transfer. It is preferably 0.01% by mass to 10.0% by mass, more preferably 0.01% by mass to 8.0% by mass, and even more preferably 0.03% by mass to 5.0% by mass.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a predetermined amount of impurities.
  • the impurities in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment B are the same as in the preferred embodiment of the impurities described above in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment A.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain residual monomers corresponding to each structural unit of the binder polymer described above.
  • the residual monomer corresponding to each structural unit of the binder polymer in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment B is the same as the preferred embodiment of the residual monomer corresponding to each structural unit of the binder polymer described above in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment A. ..
  • the photosensitive layer may contain components other than the components described above (hereinafter, also referred to as “other components”).
  • Other components include, for example, colorants, antioxidants, and particles (eg, metal oxide particles).
  • other additives described in paragraphs 0058 to 0071 of JP-A-2000-310706 can also be mentioned.
  • metal oxide particles are preferable.
  • the metal in the metal oxide particles also includes metalloids such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
  • the average primary particle size of the particles is preferably 1 nm to 200 nm, more preferably 3 nm to 80 nm, for example, from the viewpoint of transparency of the cured film.
  • the average primary particle size of the particles is calculated by measuring the particle size of 200 arbitrary particles using an electron microscope and arithmetically averaging the measurement results. When the shape of the particle is not spherical, the longest side is the particle diameter.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain only one type of metal type and particles having different sizes and the like, or may contain two or more types.
  • the photosensitive layer does not contain particles, or when the photosensitive layer contains particles, the content of the particles is preferably more than 0% by mass and 35% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. It is more preferable that the particles are not contained or the content of the particles is more than 0% by mass and 10% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer, and the particles are not contained or the content of the particles is photosensitive.
  • More than 0% by mass and 5% by mass or less is more preferable with respect to the total mass of the layer, and particles are not contained or the content of particles is more than 0% by mass and 1% by mass or less based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. It is more preferable, and it is particularly preferable that it does not contain particles.
  • the photosensitive layer may contain a colorant (pigment, dye, etc.), but for example, from the viewpoint of transparency, it is preferable that the photosensitive layer contains substantially no colorant.
  • the content of the colorant is preferably less than 1% by mass, more preferably less than 0.1% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
  • the antioxidant examples include 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidone (also known as phenidone), 1-phenyl-4,4-dimethyl-3-pyrazolidone, and 1-phenyl-4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-.
  • 3-Pyrazoridones such as 3-pyrazolidone; polyhydroxybenzenes such as hydroquinone, catechol, pyrogallol, methylhydroquinone, and chlorhydroquinone; paramethylaminophenol, paraaminophenol, parahydroxyphenylglycine, and paraphenylenediamine. Be done.
  • 3-pyrazolidones are preferable, and 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidone is more preferable as the antioxidant from the viewpoint of storage stability and curability.
  • the content of the antioxidant is preferably 0.001% by mass or more, more preferably 0.005% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. 01% by mass or more is more preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1% by mass or less.
  • the thickness (layer thickness) of the photosensitive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 30 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, further preferably 15 ⁇ m or less, particularly preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, from the viewpoint of developability and resolvability. Most preferably, it is 0.0 ⁇ m or less. As the lower limit, 0.60 ⁇ m or more is preferable, and 1.5 ⁇ m or more is more preferable, because the strength of the film obtained by curing the photosensitive layer is excellent.
  • the refractive index of the photosensitive layer is preferably 1.47 to 1.56, more preferably 1.49 to 1.54.
  • the photosensitive layer is preferably achromatic. Specifically, the total reflection (incident angle 8 °, light source: D-65 (2 ° field of view)) has an L * value of 10 to 90 in the CIE1976 (L * , a * , b * ) color space.
  • the a * value is preferably ⁇ 1.0 to 1.0
  • the b * value is preferably ⁇ 1.0 to 1.0.
  • the pattern (cured film of the photosensitive layer) obtained by curing the photosensitive layer is preferably achromatic.
  • the total reflection (incident angle 8 °, light source: D-65 (2 ° field of view)) has a pattern L * value of 10 to 90 in the CIE1976 (L * , a * , b * ) color space.
  • the a * value of the pattern is preferably ⁇ 1.0 to 1.0
  • the b * value of the pattern is preferably ⁇ 1.0 to 1.0.
  • Moisture permeability in the layer thickness 40 ⁇ m pattern obtained by curing the photosensitive layer (cured film of the photosensitive layer), from the viewpoint of corrosion resistance, is preferably 500g / (m 2 ⁇ 24hr) or less, more preferably 300g / (m 2 ⁇ 24hr) or less, still more preferably 100g / (m 2 ⁇ 24hr) or less.
  • the moisture permeability is measured with a cured film obtained by curing the photosensitive layer by exposing the photosensitive layer with an i-line at an exposure amount of 300 mJ / cm 2 and then performing post-baking at 145 ° C. for 30 minutes. do.
  • the laminate preferably has a refractive index adjusting layer.
  • a known refractive index adjusting layer can be applied.
  • the material contained in the refractive index adjusting layer include a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound, a metal salt, and particles.
  • the method of controlling the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is not particularly limited, and for example, a method of using a resin having a predetermined refractive index alone, a method of using a resin and particles, and a method of using a composite of a metal salt and a resin. There is a method using.
  • binder polymer and the polymerizable unsaturated compound examples include the binder polymer and the polymerizable unsaturated compound described in the above section "Photosensitive layer”.
  • the particles include metal oxide particles and metal particles.
  • the type of the metal oxide particles is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include known metal oxide particles.
  • the metal in the metal oxide particles also includes metalloids such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
  • the average primary particle size of the particles is preferably 1 nm to 200 nm, more preferably 3 nm to 80 nm, for example, from the viewpoint of transparency of the cured film.
  • the average primary particle size of the particles is calculated by measuring the particle size of 200 arbitrary particles using an electron microscope and arithmetically averaging the measurement results. When the shape of the particle is not spherical, the longest side is the particle diameter.
  • the metal oxide particles include zirconium oxide particles (ZrO 2 particles), Nb 2 O 5 particles, titanium oxide particles (TiO 2 particles), silicon dioxide particles (SiO 2 particles), and a composite thereof. At least one selected from the group consisting of particles is preferable. Among these, as the metal oxide particles, for example, at least one selected from the group consisting of zirconium oxide particles and titanium oxide particles is more preferable from the viewpoint that the refractive index can be easily adjusted.
  • metal oxide particles include fired zirconium oxide particles (manufactured by CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., product name: ZRPGM15WT% -F04) and fired zirconium oxide particles (manufactured by CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., product name: ZRPGM15WT% -F74).
  • the particles may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of particles in the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 1% by mass to 95% by mass, more preferably 20% by mass to 90% by mass, and 40% by mass to 85% by mass with respect to the total mass of the refractive index adjusting layer. More preferred.
  • the content of the titanium oxide particles is preferably 1% by mass to 95% by mass, more preferably 20% by mass to 90% by mass, based on the total mass of the refractive index adjusting layer. , 40% by mass to 85% by mass is more preferable.
  • the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably higher than that of the photosensitive layer.
  • the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 1.50 or more, more preferably 1.55 or more, further preferably 1.60 or more, and particularly preferably 1.65 or more.
  • the upper limit of the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 2.10 or less, more preferably 1.85 or less, and particularly preferably 1.78 or less.
  • the thickness of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 50 nm to 500 nm, more preferably 55 nm to 110 nm, and even more preferably 60 nm to 100 nm.
  • the method for producing the photosensitive transfer member (laminated body having a photosensitive layer) of the embodiment B is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used.
  • the method for forming the photosensitive composition and the photosensitive layer in the embodiment B is the same as the method for forming the photosensitive composition and the photosensitive layer described above in the embodiment A, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
  • the support and the cover film are the same as the manufacturing method in the A embodiment, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
  • the composition for forming the refractive index adjusting layer preferably contains various components forming the above-mentioned refractive index adjusting layer and a solvent.
  • the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total solid content of the composition is the same as the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total mass of the refractive index adjusting layer described above. be.
  • the solvent is not particularly limited as long as the components contained in the refractive index adjusting layer can be dissolved or dispersed, and at least one selected from the group consisting of water and a water-miscible organic solvent is preferable, and water or water and water.
  • a mixed solvent with a water-miscible organic solvent is more preferable.
  • the water-miscible organic solvent include alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, acetone, ethylene glycol, and glycerin. Alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms are preferable, and methanol or ethanol is more preferable.
  • the solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the solvent is preferably 50 parts by mass to 2,500 parts by mass, more preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass, and 100 parts by mass to 900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the composition.
  • the portion is more preferable.
  • the method for forming the refractive index adjusting layer is not particularly limited as long as it can form a layer containing the above components, and examples thereof include known coating methods (slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, inkjet coating, etc.). Be done.
  • the photosensitive transfer member of Embodiment B can be manufactured.
  • the method of attaching the cover film to the refractive index adjusting layer is not particularly limited, and known methods can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the device for attaching the cover film to the refractive index adjusting layer include a vacuum laminator and a known laminator such as an auto-cut laminator. It is preferable that the laminator is provided with an arbitrary heatable roller such as a rubber roller and can be pressurized and heated.
  • the first embodiment of the laminate according to the present disclosure is a laminate having a photosensitive layer, wherein the laminate has a cut surface formed by at least being cut, and a cut surface portion having a cut surface width of 50 ⁇ m. The number of cracks per 10 locations is 3 or less.
  • a second embodiment of the laminate according to the present disclosure is a laminate having a photosensitive layer, wherein the laminate has at least a cut surface formed by cutting, and the number of dent failures in the laminate is large. , 60 pieces / m 2 or less.
  • laminate according to the present disclosure refers to both the first embodiment and the second embodiment.
  • photosensitive layer or the like is simply used, the photosensitive layers and the like of both the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described.
  • a preferred embodiment of the laminate having a photosensitive layer in the laminate according to the present disclosure is a preferred embodiment of the laminate having a photosensitive layer used in the method for producing a cut product according to the present disclosure, except as described later. The same is true.
  • the number of cracks per 10 cut surface portions having a cut surface width of 50 ⁇ m is 3 or less, and from the viewpoint of defect suppression, it is 2 or less. It is preferably 1 or less, more preferably 0.5 or less, and particularly preferably 0.1 or less.
  • the number of cracks per 10 cut surface portions having a cut surface width of 50 ⁇ m is preferably 3 or less, preferably 2 or less, from the viewpoint of defect suppression. The number is more preferable, the number is more preferably 1 or less, the number is particularly preferably 0.5 or less, and the number is most preferably 0.1 or less.
  • FIG. 3 shows an example of cracks generated on the cut surface of the laminated body.
  • FIG. 3 is an enlarged view at the end of a cut surface obtained by cutting the laminate having the support 10, the photosensitive layer 16 and the cover film 18, and in the cut surface of FIG. 3, a crack CR of a part of the support 10 is taken. Can be confirmed.
  • the number of cracks in the present disclosure shall be measured as follows. Arbitrary 10 points on the cut surface of the cut laminate are collected, and the cut surface portion of the cut surface is observed with a scanning electron microscope (SEM) having a cut surface width of 50 ⁇ m. The conditions were an acceleration voltage of 3 kV and an observation magnification of 1,700 times. Of the 10 locations, any layer of the support, the photosensitive layer, and the cover film, which has cracks regardless of the number, is counted as one, and among the 10 locations of the cut surface portion having a cut surface width of 50 ⁇ m. Evaluate by the number of cracks (number of cracks).
  • the number of dent failures in the laminate is 60 / m 2 or less, and preferably 45 / m 2 or less from the viewpoint of defect suppression. , 30 pieces / m 2 or less, and particularly preferably 10 pieces / m 2 or less.
  • the number of dent failures in the laminate is preferably 60 / m 2 or less, and 45 / m 2 or less, from the viewpoint of defect suppression. More preferably, it is more preferably 30 pieces / m 2 or less, and particularly preferably 10 pieces / m 2 or less.
  • the number of dent failures in the laminate in the present disclosure shall be measured as follows. Visually observe the surface of the laminate for 6 m 2 or more, measure the number of dents (dents), and calculate the number of dent failures per 1 m 2.
  • Example 1 to 12 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 ⁇ Manufacturing of photosensitive transfer member> -Formation of photosensitive layer-
  • a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having the thickness shown in Table 2 was prepared.
  • the photosensitive composition A-1 shown in Table 1 was applied to the surface of the support using a slit-shaped nozzle so that the coating width was 1.0 m and the layer thickness after drying was the thickness shown in Table 2. It was applied.
  • the coating film of the photosensitive composition A-1 was dried at 80 ° C. for 40 seconds to form a photosensitive layer.
  • Mm / Mb in Table 1 represents the value of the ratio Mm / Mb of the content Mm of the polymerizable compound and the content Mb of the binder polymer in the photosensitive layer, and “content of the acrylic compound” is the photosensitive layer. It represents the content of the acrylic compound with respect to the total mass of the (meth) acrylic compound contained in the layer, and the unit is mass%.
  • BPE-500 Ethoxylation (10 molar equivalents) Bisphenol A dimethacrylate (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • SR-502 Ethoxylation (9 molar equivalents) Trimethylolpropane triacrylate (manufactured by Arkema)
  • A-9300-CL1 ⁇ -caprolactone-modified tris- (2-acryloxyethyl) isocyanurate (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • B-CIM 2,2'-bis (2-chlorophenyl) -4,4', 5,5'-tetraphenyl-1,2'-bisimidazole (polymerization initiator, manufactured by Kurogane Kasei Co., Ltd.)
  • SB-PI 701 4,4'-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone (sensitizer, manufactured by Sanyo Trading
  • the large roll of the photosensitive transfer member A was cut by using a disk-shaped rotary slitter having an upper blade 102 and a lower blade 104 having a cross section shown in FIGS. 1 and 2.
  • the parameters of the upper blade 102 used are R1, the chamfer angle ⁇ 1 and the cutting edge angle ⁇ 2 shown in Table 2, and the parameters of the lower blade 104 used are R2 of 2 ⁇ m and the cutting edge angle of ⁇ 3 of 90. Fixed at °. Further, the penetration depth T of the upper blade 102 with respect to the lower blade 104 at the time of cutting was 0.5 mm.
  • the radii of the disk-shaped upper blade 102 and the lower blade 104 were each about 100 mm, and the cutting speed was 100 m / min.
  • the cut photosensitive transfer member A was rewound into a small roll.
  • the rotary slitter was used to cut a large roll of the photosensitive transfer member A having a width of 1,580 mm and a tape measure of 4,000 m into a small roll of the photosensitive transfer member A having a width of 500 mm and a length of 100 m.
  • the number of dents (dents) was visually investigated by pulling out 2 m from the small roll of the cut photosensitive transfer member A.
  • the small rolls used in the above evaluation are three small rolls from the width direction of the large rolls and two small rolls from the longitudinal direction of the large rolls, for a total of six. This is the main part, and these were investigated and the maximum number was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
  • the base materials used as the support or cover film shown in Table 2 are as follows.
  • the methods for producing the cut products of Examples 1 to 12 can suppress dent failures in the obtained cut products as compared with the methods for producing the cut products of the comparative example.
  • the dropping liquid (1) As the preparation of the dropping liquid (1), 107.1 g of methacrylic acid (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd., trade name Acryester M), methyl methacrylate (manufactured by Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Company, trade name MMA) (5.46 g). , And cyclohexyl methacrylate (manufactured by Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Company, Inc., trade name CHMA) (231.42 g) were mixed and diluted with PGM-Ac (60 g) to obtain a dropping liquid (1).
  • methacrylic acid manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd., trade name Acryester M
  • methyl methacrylate manufactured by Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Company, trade name MMA
  • CHMA cyclohexyl methacrylate
  • dimethyl 2,2'-azobis (2-methylpropionate) (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., trade name V-601) (9.637 g) was added to PGM-Ac.
  • the dropping liquid (2) was obtained by dissolving with (136.56 g).
  • the dropping liquid (1) and the dropping liquid (2) are simultaneously added dropwise to the above-mentioned 2,000 mL flask (specifically, a 2,000 mL flask containing a liquid heated to 90 ° C.) over 3 hours. bottom.
  • the container of the dropping liquid (1) was washed with PGM-Ac (12 g), and the washing liquid was dropped into the 2,000 mL flask.
  • the container of the dropping liquid (2) was washed with PGM-Ac (6 g), and the washing liquid was dropped into the above 2000 mL flask.
  • the reaction solution in the 2,000 mL flask was kept at 90 ° C. and stirred at a stirring speed of 250 rpm. Further, as a post-reaction, the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. for 1 hour.
  • V-601 (2.401 g) was added to the reaction solution after the post-reaction as the first additional addition of the initiator. Further, the container of V-601 was washed with PGM-Ac (6 g), and the washing liquid was introduced into the reaction liquid. Then, the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. for 1 hour.
  • V-601 (2.401 g) was added to the reaction solution as the second additional addition of the initiator. Further, the container of V-601 was washed with PGM-Ac (6 g), and the washing liquid was introduced into the reaction liquid. Then, the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. for 1 hour. Next, V-601 (2.401 g) was added to the reaction solution as the third additional addition of the initiator. Further, the container of V-601 was washed with PGM-Ac (6 g), and the washing liquid was introduced into the reaction liquid. Then, the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. for 3 hours.
  • glycidyl methacrylate manufactured by NOF CORPORATION, trade name Blemmer G (76.03 g) was added dropwise to the reaction solution over 1 hour.
  • the container of Blemmer G was washed with PGM-Ac (6 g), and the washing liquid was introduced into the reaction liquid. Then, as an addition reaction, the mixture was stirred at 100 ° C. for 6 hours.
  • the reaction solution was cooled and filtered through a mesh filter (100 mesh) for removing dust to obtain a solution of polymer D (1,158 g) (solid content concentration: 36.3% by mass).
  • the obtained polymer P-1 had a weight average molecular weight of 27,000, a number average molecular weight of 15,000, and an acid value of 95 mgKOH / g.
  • V-601 was added three times every hour. After that, it was reacted for another 3 hours. Then, it was diluted with 58.4 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and 11.7 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether. The temperature of the reaction solution was raised to 100 ° C. under an air flow, and 0.53 g of tetraethylammonium bromide and 0.26 g of p-methoxyphenol were added. To this, 25.5 g of glycidyl methacrylate (Blemmer GH manufactured by NOF Corporation) was added dropwise over 20 minutes. This was reacted at 100 ° C.
  • glycidyl methacrylate (Blemmer GH manufactured by NOF Corporation) was added dropwise over 20 minutes. This was reacted at 100 ° C.
  • the solid content concentration of the obtained solution was 36.5%.
  • the weight average molecular weight in terms of standard polystyrene in GPC was 17,000, the dispersity was 2.4, and the acid value of the polymer was 94.5 mgKOH / g.
  • the amount of residual monomer measured by gas chromatography was less than 0.1% by mass with respect to the polymer solid content in any of the monomers.
  • V-601 was added three times every hour. After that, it was reacted for another 3 hours. Then, it was diluted with 160.7 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and 233.3 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether. The temperature of the reaction solution was raised to 100 ° C. under an air flow, and 1.8 g of tetraethylammonium bromide and 0.86 g of p-methoxyphenol were added. 71.9 g of glycidyl methacrylate (Blemmer G manufactured by NOF CORPORATION) was added dropwise thereto over 20 minutes. This was reacted at 100 ° C.
  • the solid content concentration of the obtained solution was 36.2%.
  • the weight average molecular weight in terms of standard polystyrene in GPC was 18,000, the dispersity was 2.3, and the acid value of the polymer was 124 mgKOH / g.
  • the amount of residual monomer measured by gas chromatography was less than 0.1% by mass with respect to the polymer solid content in any of the monomers.
  • compositions B-1 to B-4 for forming a refractive index adjusting layer were prepared with the compositions shown in Table 4 below.
  • the numerical values in Table 4 represent "parts by mass”.
  • Polymer A in Table 4 was synthesized as follows.
  • 1-Methylenepropanol manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • 270.0 g was introduced into a 1 L three-necked flask, and the temperature was raised to 70 ° C. under a nitrogen stream while stirring.
  • allyl methacrylate (45.6 g) (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) and methacrylic acid (14.4 g) (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) are 1-methoxypropanol (Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
  • Filtration was carried out by introducing a turbid solution in Nutche with a filter paper, and the filtered material was further washed with ion-exchanged water to obtain a wet powder. It was dried by blowing air at 45 ° C., and it was confirmed that the amount became constant, and polymer A was obtained as a powder in a yield of 70%.
  • the ratio of methacrylic acid / allyl methacrylate of the obtained polymer A was 76/24% by mass.
  • the weight average molecular weight Mw was 38,000.
  • the coating amount is adjusted so that the film thickness after drying becomes the film thickness shown in Table 5, the film is applied onto the photosensitive layer layer, and then dried at a drying temperature of 80 ° C. , A refractive index adjusting layer was formed.
  • a protective film (Lumirror 16KS40, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) was pressure-bonded onto the refractive index adjusting layer to prepare transfer films 1 to 16.
  • the methods for producing the cut products of Examples 13 to 28 can suppress dent failures and crack failures in the obtained cut products.

Landscapes

  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Forests & Forestry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides: a method for manufacturing a cut article, the method including a step in which a layered body having a photosensitive layer is clamped between an upper blade and a lower blade and cut, and the clearance between the edge of the upper blade and the edge of the lower blade is 5 μm or less; a layered body having a photosensitive layer, wherein the layered body has at least a surface that has been formed through cutting, and the cut surface has no more than three cracks per ten sites in cut surface portions that measure 50 μm in width; and a layered body having a photosensitive layer, wherein the layered body has at least a surface that has been formed through cutting, and the layered body has no more than 60 dent defects/m2.

Description

切断物の製造方法、及び、積層体Manufacturing method of cut material and laminated body
 本開示は、切断物の製造方法、及び、積層体に関する。 This disclosure relates to a method for producing a cut product and a laminate.
 静電容量型入力装置などのタッチパネルを備えた表示装置(有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)表示装置及び液晶表示装置など)では、視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン、周辺配線部分及び取り出し配線部分の配線などの導電層パターンがタッチパネル内部に設けられている。
 一般的にパターン化した層の形成には、必要とするパターン形状を得るための工程数が少ないといったことから、感光性転写部材を用いて任意の基板上に設けた感光性組成物の層に対して、所望のパターンを有するマスクを介して露光した後に現像する方法が広く使用されている。
In display devices equipped with a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device (organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, liquid crystal display device, etc.), the electrode pattern corresponding to the sensor of the visual recognition part, the peripheral wiring part, and the wiring of the take-out wiring part are wired. A conductive layer pattern such as is provided inside the touch panel.
Generally, in forming a patterned layer, the number of steps for obtaining the required pattern shape is small, so that a layer of a photosensitive composition provided on an arbitrary substrate using a photosensitive transfer member is used. On the other hand, a method of developing after exposure through a mask having a desired pattern is widely used.
 また、従来のフィルムの裁断方法としては、特許文献1に記載されたものが知られている。
 特開2010-228023号公報には、連続的に走行されるフィルムを、互いの刃先の一側面を摺接させるようにして回転する上刃と下刃との間に挿入し、走行方向に沿ってかつ幅方向に分割するように裁断するフィルムの裁断方法であって、上記上刃として、上記下刃に摺接する刃先角が80~90°であるものを用い、上記下刃として、上記上刃に摺接する刃先角が80~90°であるものを用いる、ことを特徴とするフィルムの裁断方法が記載されている。
Further, as a conventional film cutting method, the one described in Patent Document 1 is known.
In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-228023, a continuously traveling film is inserted between an upper blade and a lower blade that rotate so that one side surface of each blade edge is in sliding contact with each other, and along the traveling direction. A method for cutting a film so as to be divided in the width direction, wherein the upper blade has a cutting edge angle of 80 to 90 ° in sliding contact with the lower blade, and the lower blade is the upper blade. A method for cutting a film is described, wherein a blade having a blade edge angle of 80 to 90 ° in sliding contact with the blade is used.
 本発明の一実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、得られる切断物におけるへこみ故障を抑制することができる切断物の製造方法を提供することである。
 また、本発明の他の実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、へこみ故障の少ない積層体を提供することである。
An object to be solved by one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a method for producing a cut product capable of suppressing a dent failure in the obtained cut product.
Further, an object to be solved by another embodiment of the present invention is to provide a laminated body having few dent failures.
 上記課題を解決するための手段には、以下の態様が含まれる。
<1> 感光性層を有する積層体を上刃及び下刃により挟み込んで切断する工程を含み、上記上刃の刃先と上記下刃の刃先とのクリアランスが、5μm以下である切断物の製造方法。
<2> 上記上刃の上記積層体の送り方向に垂直な断面において、上記上刃の刃先における上記下刃側の傾斜角度である面取り角度θ1が、3°以下である<1>に記載の切断物の製造方法。
<3> 上記上刃の上記積層体の送り方向に垂直な断面において、上記上刃の刃先角度θ2が、33°以下である<1>又は<2>に記載の切断物の製造方法。
<4> 上記積層体全体の厚さが、50μm以下である<1>~<3>のいずれか1つに記載の切断物の製造方法。
<5> 上記感光性層の厚さが、1μm~20μmである<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の切断物の製造方法。
<6> 上記積層体が、支持体、上記感光性層、及び、カバーフィルムを有する積層体である<1>~<5>のいずれか1つに記載の切断物の製造方法。
<7> 上記支持体及び上記カバーフィルムの厚さがそれぞれ独立に、10μm~20μmである<6>に記載の切断物の製造方法。
<8> 上記支持体の上記感光性層側の面の算術平均粗さRa値が、0.05μm以下である<6>又は<7>に記載の切断物の製造方法。
<9> 上記カバーフィルムの上記感光性層側の面の算術平均粗さRa値が、0.1μm以下である<6>~<8>のいずれか1つに記載の切断物の製造方法。
<10> 上記切断する工程の後、得られた上記積層体の切断物の少なくとも一部を巻き取る工程を含む<1>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の切断物の製造方法。
<11> 感光性層を有する積層体であって、上記積層体が、少なくとも切断されてなる切断面を有し、上記切断面幅50μmの切断面部分10箇所あたりのクラック数が、3個以下である積層体。
<12> 感光性層を有する積層体であって、上記積層体が、少なくとも切断されてなる切断面を有し、上記積層体におけるへこみ故障の数が、60個/m以下である積層体。
Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
<1> A method for producing a cut product, which comprises a step of sandwiching and cutting a laminate having a photosensitive layer between an upper blade and a lower blade, and a clearance between the cutting edge of the upper blade and the cutting edge of the lower blade is 5 μm or less. ..
<2> The chamfering angle θ1 which is an inclination angle of the lower blade side at the cutting edge of the upper blade in a cross section perpendicular to the feed direction of the laminated body of the upper blade is 3 ° or less. Method of manufacturing cut pieces.
<3> The method for producing a cut product according to <1> or <2>, wherein the cutting edge angle θ2 of the upper blade is 33 ° or less in a cross section perpendicular to the feeding direction of the laminated body of the upper blade.
<4> The method for producing a cut product according to any one of <1> to <3>, wherein the thickness of the entire laminate is 50 μm or less.
<5> The method for producing a cut product according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the thickness of the photosensitive layer is 1 μm to 20 μm.
<6> The method for producing a cut product according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein the laminated body is a laminated body having a support, the photosensitive layer, and a cover film.
<7> The method for producing a cut product according to <6>, wherein the thickness of the support and the cover film are independently 10 μm to 20 μm.
<8> The method for producing a cut product according to <6> or <7>, wherein the arithmetic mean roughness Ra value of the surface of the support on the photosensitive layer side is 0.05 μm or less.
<9> The method for producing a cut product according to any one of <6> to <8>, wherein the arithmetic average roughness Ra value of the surface of the cover film on the photosensitive layer side is 0.1 μm or less.
<10> The method for producing a cut product according to any one of <1> to <9>, which comprises a step of winding at least a part of the cut product of the obtained laminated body after the cutting step.
<11> A laminate having a photosensitive layer, wherein the laminate has at least a cut surface, and the number of cracks per 10 cut surface portions having a cut surface width of 50 μm is 3 or less. Laminated body.
<12> A laminate having a photosensitive layer, wherein the laminate has a cut surface formed by at least being cut, and the number of dent failures in the laminate is 60 / m 2 or less. ..
 本発明の一実施形態によれば、得られる切断物におけるへこみ故障を抑制することができる切断物の製造方法を提供することができる。
 また、本発明の他の実施形態によれば、へこみ故障の少ない積層体を提供することができる。
According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a method for producing a cut product capable of suppressing a dent failure in the obtained cut product.
Further, according to another embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a laminated body having few dent failures.
図1は、本開示に用いられる円盤状回転式スリッターの上刃及び下刃の一例を示す模式断面図である。FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example of an upper blade and a lower blade of a disk-shaped rotary slitter used in the present disclosure. 図2は、本開示に用いられる感光性転写部材の層構成の一例を示す概略図である。FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of the layer structure of the photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure. 図3は、支持体、感光性層及びカバーフィルムを有する積層体を切断した切断面の端部の一例における拡大図である。FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of an example of an end portion of a cut surface obtained by cutting a laminate having a support, a photosensitive layer, and a cover film.
 以下、本開示の内容について説明する。なお、添付の図面を参照しながら説明するが、符号は省略する場合がある。
 また、本明細書において「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 また、本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリル」はアクリル及びメタクリルの双方、又は、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリレート」はアクリレート及びメタクリレートの双方、又は、いずれかを表す。
 更に、本明細書において組成物中の各成分の量は、組成物中に各成分に該当する物質が複数存在する場合、特に断らない限り、組成物中に存在する該当する複数の物質の合計量を意味する。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけでなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であっても工程の所期の目的が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含するものである。例えば「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた描画も含む。また、露光に用いられる光としては、一般的に、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等の活性光線(活性エネルギー線)が挙げられる。
 また、本明細書における化学構造式は、水素原子を省略した簡略構造式で記載する場合もある。
 本開示において、「質量%」と「重量%」とは同義であり、「質量部」と「重量部」とは同義である。
 また、本開示において、2以上の好ましい態様の組み合わせは、より好ましい態様である。
 また、本開示における重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、特に断りのない限り、TSKgel GMHxL、TSKgel G4000HxL、TSKgel G2000HxL(何れも東ソー(株)製の商品名)のカラムを使用したゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)分析装置により、溶剤THF(テトラヒドロフラン)、示差屈折計により検出し、標準物質としてポリスチレンを用いて換算した分子量である。
 本明細書において、特段の断りがない限り、金属元素の含有量は、誘導結合プラズマ(ICP:Inductively Coupled Plasma)分光分析装置を用いて測定した値である。
 本明細書において、特段の断りがない限り、屈折率は、波長550nmでエリプソメーターを用いて測定した値である。
 本明細書において、特段の断りがない限り、色相は、色差計(CR-221、ミノルタ(株)製)を用いて測定した値である。
 本明細書において、「アルカリ可溶性」とは、液温が22℃である炭酸ナトリウムの1質量%水溶液100gへの溶解度が0.1g以上であることを意味する。
 本明細書において「水溶性」とは、液温が22℃であるpH7.0の水100gへの溶解度が0.1g以上であることを意味する。したがって、例えば、水溶性樹脂とは、上述の溶解度条件を満たす樹脂を意図する。
 本明細書において、組成物の「固形分」とは、組成物を用いて作製する層を形成する成分を意味し、組成物が溶剤(有機溶剤、水等)を含む場合、溶剤を除いたすべての成分を意味する。また、上記層を形成する成分であれば、液体状の成分も固形分とみなす。
 本明細書において、感光性転写部材が備える各層の層厚は、感光性転写部材の主面に対し垂直な方向の断面を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)により観察し、得られた観察画像に基づいて各層の厚みを任意の5点以上計測し、その平均値を算出することにより、測定される。
The contents of the present disclosure will be described below. Although the description will be given with reference to the attached drawings, the reference numerals may be omitted.
In addition, the numerical range represented by using "-" in the present specification means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
Further, in the present specification, "(meth) acrylic" represents both acrylic and methacrylic, or either, and "(meth) acrylate" represents both acrylate and methacrylate, or either.
Further, in the present specification, the amount of each component in the composition is the sum of the plurality of applicable substances present in the composition unless otherwise specified, when a plurality of substances corresponding to each component are present in the composition. Means quantity.
In the present specification, the term "process" is included in this term not only as an independent process but also as long as the intended purpose of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes.
In the notation of a group (atomic group) in the present specification, the notation that does not describe substitution and non-substitution includes those having no substituent as well as those having a substituent. For example, the "alkyl group" includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
Unless otherwise specified, the term "exposure" as used herein includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as an electron beam and an ion beam. The light used for exposure generally includes the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and active rays (active energy rays) such as electron beams. Can be mentioned.
Further, the chemical structural formula in the present specification may be described by a simplified structural formula in which a hydrogen atom is omitted.
In the present disclosure, "% by mass" and "% by weight" are synonymous, and "parts by mass" and "parts by weight" are synonymous.
Further, in the present disclosure, a combination of two or more preferred embodiments is a more preferred embodiment.
Unless otherwise specified, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) in the present disclosure use columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, and TSKgel G2000HxL (all trade names manufactured by Toso Co., Ltd.). It is a molecular weight converted by detecting with a solvent THF (tetrahydrofuran) and a differential refractometer by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer and using polystyrene as a standard substance.
In the present specification, unless otherwise specified, the content of the metal element is a value measured using an inductively coupled plasma (ICP) spectroscopic analyzer.
In the present specification, unless otherwise specified, the refractive index is a value measured using an ellipsometer at a wavelength of 550 nm.
In the present specification, unless otherwise specified, the hue is a value measured using a color difference meter (CR-221, manufactured by Minolta Co., Ltd.).
As used herein, the term "alkali-soluble" means that the solubility of sodium carbonate having a liquid temperature of 22 ° C. in 100 g of a 1% by mass aqueous solution is 0.1 g or more.
As used herein, the term "water-soluble" means that the solubility in 100 g of water having a liquid temperature of 22 ° C. and a pH of 7.0 is 0.1 g or more. Therefore, for example, the water-soluble resin is intended to be a resin that satisfies the above-mentioned solubility conditions.
In the present specification, the "solid content" of the composition means a component forming a layer produced by using the composition, and when the composition contains a solvent (organic solvent, water, etc.), the solvent is removed. Means all ingredients. Further, if the component forms the above layer, the liquid component is also regarded as a solid content.
In the present specification, the layer thickness of each layer included in the photosensitive transfer member is based on an observation image obtained by observing a cross section in a direction perpendicular to the main surface of the photosensitive transfer member with a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The thickness of each layer is measured at an arbitrary 5 points or more, and the average value thereof is calculated to measure the thickness.
[切断物の製造方法]
 本開示に係る切断物の製造方法は、感光性層を有する積層体を上刃及び下刃により挟み込んで切断する工程を含み、上記上刃と上記下刃とのクリアランスが、5μm以下である。
[Manufacturing method of cut pieces]
The method for producing a cut product according to the present disclosure includes a step of sandwiching and cutting a laminate having a photosensitive layer between an upper blade and a lower blade, and the clearance between the upper blade and the lower blade is 5 μm or less.
 感光性転写部材等のレジスト材は、露光でパターニング用マスクに忠実なレジストを形成するためにはマスクとレジスト材料のギャップを狭くすることが原理的に有利である。ギャップが狭くなるほど、光路長が減り、回折や散乱による影響を受けにくく、マスクに忠実なレジストが実現できる。高解像度ではギャップの距離が顕著に現れ、これらを制御することが重要である。ドライフィルムでは露光の際にマスク汚染防止の観点から支持体越しに行うため、支持体の厚みを薄くすることが必要となり、それに伴い、トータルの膜厚が薄くなってきている。従来の切断条件ではうまく切断できずに、切りくず片が多く生じ、この切りくず片が切断された上記感光性層を有する積層体(切断物)に付着することにより、デント(へこみ)故障が生じることを本発明者は見出した。例えば、感光性層を有する積層体に切りくず片が付着し、その後、切断物を保管のため重ねたりすることにより、デント(へこみ)故障が生じる。また、感光性層を有する積層体をロール状に巻き取った場合に、切りくず片を巻き込むことでデント故障が生じる。 In principle, it is advantageous for a resist material such as a photosensitive transfer member to narrow the gap between the mask and the resist material in order to form a resist faithful to the patterning mask by exposure. The narrower the gap, the shorter the optical path length, the less affected by diffraction and scattering, and the more faithful the resist to the mask can be realized. At high resolutions, the gap distances are noticeable and it is important to control them. Since the dry film is exposed through the support from the viewpoint of preventing mask contamination, it is necessary to reduce the thickness of the support, and the total film thickness is decreasing accordingly. It cannot be cut well under the conventional cutting conditions, and many chips are generated. When the chips adhere to the cut laminate (cut piece) having the photosensitive layer, a dent failure occurs. The present inventor has found that it occurs. For example, chips adhere to a laminate having a photosensitive layer, and then the cut pieces are stacked for storage, resulting in a dent failure. Further, when the laminate having the photosensitive layer is wound in a roll shape, a dent failure occurs due to the inclusion of chip pieces.
 本発明者は鋭意検討を重ねた結果、上記構成の切断物の製造方法とすることにより、得られる切断物におけるへこみ故障を抑制することができることを見出した。
 詳細な上記効果の発現機構は不明であるが、上記上刃の刃先と前記下刃の刃先とのクリアランスが、5μm以下であることにより、感光性層を有する積層体の切断時において、切りくずの発生を抑制することができ、切りくずが上記積層体に付着して生じるへこみ故障を抑制することができると推定している。
As a result of diligent studies, the present inventor has found that dent failure in the obtained cut product can be suppressed by adopting the method for producing the cut product having the above configuration.
Although the detailed mechanism for exhibiting the above effects is unknown, the clearance between the cutting edge of the upper blade and the cutting edge of the lower blade is 5 μm or less, so that chips are formed when the laminate having the photosensitive layer is cut. It is presumed that the generation of dents can be suppressed and the dent failure caused by the adhesion of chips to the laminate can be suppressed.
 上記感光性層を有する積層体は、感光性転写部材であることが好ましい。
 本開示に用いられる感光性転写部材は、ネガ型感光性転写部材であることが好ましい。
 上記感光性層を有する積層体の好ましい態様については、後述する。
The laminate having the photosensitive layer is preferably a photosensitive transfer member.
The photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure is preferably a negative type photosensitive transfer member.
A preferred embodiment of the laminate having the photosensitive layer will be described later.
<切断する工程>
 本開示に係る切断物の製造方法は、感光性層を有する積層体を上刃及び下刃により挟み込んで切断する工程を含み、上記上刃の刃先と上記下刃の刃先とのクリアランスが、5μm以下である。
 本開示に用いられる上刃及び下刃を有する切断手段としては、特に制限はなく、例えば、裁断機、スリッター等が挙げられる。連続的に切断可能であり、また、ロール状に巻き取り可能である点から、切断手段は、回転式スリッターであることが好ましく、円盤状回転式スリッターであることがより好ましい。
<Cut process>
The method for producing a cut product according to the present disclosure includes a step of sandwiching and cutting a laminate having a photosensitive layer between an upper blade and a lower blade, and a clearance between the cutting edge of the upper blade and the cutting edge of the lower blade is 5 μm. It is as follows.
The cutting means having an upper blade and a lower blade used in the present disclosure is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a cutting machine and a slitter. The cutting means is preferably a rotary slitter, and more preferably a disk-shaped rotary slitter, from the viewpoint that it can be continuously cut and can be wound in a roll shape.
 図1は、本開示に用いられる円盤状回転式スリッターの上刃及び下刃の一例を示す模式断面図であり、上記積層体の切断面に垂直な方向の断面を示す。
 上刃102は、面取り角度θ1、及び、刃先角度θ2を有する刃であり、面取り長さR1を有している。
 下刃104は、面取り角度θ3を有する刃であり、面取り長さR2を有している。
 また、図1に示す上刃102の刃先102aと下刃104の刃先104aとのクリアランスCLは、R1+R2の値となる。
 更に、切断時には、下刃104に対する上刃102の侵入深さTに応じて、感光性層を有する積層体(不図示)を上刃102及び下刃104により挟み込むことにより、感光性層を有する積層体が切断される。図1においては、上刃102及び下刃104により挟み込まれ、感光性層を有する積層体が左右に分離するように切断される。
FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example of the upper blade and the lower blade of the disk-shaped rotary slitter used in the present disclosure, and shows a cross section in a direction perpendicular to the cut surface of the laminated body.
The upper blade 102 is a blade having a chamfering angle θ1 and a cutting edge angle θ2, and has a chamfering length R1.
The lower blade 104 is a blade having a chamfering angle θ3 and has a chamfering length R2.
Further, the clearance CL between the cutting edge 102a of the upper blade 102 and the cutting edge 104a of the lower blade 104 shown in FIG. 1 is a value of R1 + R2.
Further, at the time of cutting, the laminate having the photosensitive layer (not shown) is sandwiched between the upper blade 102 and the lower blade 104 according to the penetration depth T of the upper blade 102 with respect to the lower blade 104 to have the photosensitive layer. The laminate is cut. In FIG. 1, it is sandwiched between the upper blade 102 and the lower blade 104, and the laminated body having the photosensitive layer is cut so as to be separated into the left and right.
 上刃102の刃先102aと下刃104の刃先104aとのクリアランスCLは、5μm以下であり、へこみ欠陥抑制の観点から、1μm以上5μm以下であることが好ましく、2μm以上4.5μm以下であることがより好ましく、2.5μm以上4.0μm以下であることが更に好ましく、2.5μm以上3.5μm以下であることが特に好ましい。 The clearance CL between the cutting edge 102a of the upper blade 102 and the cutting edge 104a of the lower blade 104 is 5 μm or less, preferably 1 μm or more and 5 μm or less, and 2 μm or more and 4.5 μm or less from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects. Is more preferable, and it is more preferably 2.5 μm or more and 4.0 μm or less, and particularly preferably 2.5 μm or more and 3.5 μm or less.
 上記積層体の送り方向に垂直な面での上刃102の断面において、上刃102の面取り長さR1は、へこみ欠陥抑制の観点から、0.5μm以上3μm以下であることが好ましく、0.5μm以上2.5μm以下であることがより好ましく、0.8μm以上2.0μm以下であることが更に好ましく、0.8μm以上1.5μm以下であることが特に好ましい。
 また、上記積層体の送り方向に垂直な面での下刃104の断面において、下刃104の面取り長さR2は、へこみ欠陥抑制の観点から、0.5μm以上3μm以下であることが好ましく、1.0μm以上2.5μm以下であることがより好ましく、1.5μm以上2.5μm以下であることが特に好ましい。
In the cross section of the upper blade 102 on the plane perpendicular to the feed direction of the laminated body, the chamfer length R1 of the upper blade 102 is preferably 0.5 μm or more and 3 μm or less from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects. It is more preferably 5 μm or more and 2.5 μm or less, further preferably 0.8 μm or more and 2.0 μm or less, and particularly preferably 0.8 μm or more and 1.5 μm or less.
Further, in the cross section of the lower blade 104 on the plane perpendicular to the feed direction of the laminated body, the chamfer length R2 of the lower blade 104 is preferably 0.5 μm or more and 3 μm or less from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects. It is more preferably 1.0 μm or more and 2.5 μm or less, and particularly preferably 1.5 μm or more and 2.5 μm or less.
 上刃102の上記積層体の送り方向に垂直な断面において、上刃102の刃先102aにおける上記下刃側の傾斜角度である面取り角度θ1は、へこみ欠陥抑制の観点から、15°以下であることが好ましく、10°以下であることがより好ましく、3°以下であることが更に好ましく、1°以上3°以下であることが特に好ましい。
 また、面取り角度θ1は、へこみ欠陥抑制の観点から、0°を超える角度であることが好ましい。
In the cross section of the upper blade 102 perpendicular to the feed direction of the laminated body, the chamfer angle θ1 which is the inclination angle of the lower blade side of the cutting edge 102a of the upper blade 102 shall be 15 ° or less from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects. Is more preferable, 10 ° or less is more preferable, 3 ° or less is further preferable, and 1 ° or more and 3 ° or less is particularly preferable.
Further, the chamfer angle θ1 is preferably an angle exceeding 0 ° from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects.
 上刃102の上記積層体の送り方向に垂直な断面において、上刃102の刃先角度θ2は、へこみ欠陥抑制の観点から、45°以下であることが好ましく、40°以下であることがより好ましく、33°以下であることが更に好ましく、20°以上33°以下であることが特に好ましい。
 また、刃先角度θ2は、へこみ欠陥抑制の観点から、面取り角度θ1の2倍以上の角度であることが好ましく、面取り角度θ1の5倍以上の角度であることがより好ましく、面取り角度θ1の10倍以上の角度であることが特に好ましい。
In the cross section of the upper blade 102 perpendicular to the feed direction of the laminated body, the cutting edge angle θ2 of the upper blade 102 is preferably 45 ° or less, more preferably 40 ° or less, from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects. , 33 ° or less, and particularly preferably 20 ° or more and 33 ° or less.
Further, the cutting edge angle θ2 is preferably an angle of 2 times or more of the chamfering angle θ1, more preferably 5 times or more of the chamfering angle θ1, and 10 of the chamfering angle θ1 from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects. It is particularly preferable that the angle is double or more.
 下刃104の上記積層体の送り方向に垂直な断面において、下刃104の刃先角度θ3は、へこみ欠陥抑制の観点から、75°以上120°以下であることが好ましく、80°以上110°以下であることがより好ましく、85°以上105°以下であることが更に好ましく、90°以上100°以下であることが特に好ましい。 In the cross section of the lower blade 104 perpendicular to the feed direction of the laminated body, the cutting edge angle θ3 of the lower blade 104 is preferably 75 ° or more and 120 ° or less, and 80 ° or more and 110 ° or less from the viewpoint of suppressing dent defects. It is more preferably 85 ° or more and 105 ° or less, and particularly preferably 90 ° or more and 100 ° or less.
 上刃102及び下刃104の材質は、特に制限はなく、公知の材質を用いることができ、例えば、高速度工具鋼(SKH)、合金工具鋼(例えば、SKD)、超硬合金等が好ましく挙げられ、上記積層体の厚さや切断条件等により適宜設定される。また、上刃102の厚さ及び下刃104の厚さ等の上述した以外の上刃102及び下刃104の形状についても、上記積層体の厚さ等によりそれぞれ適宜設定することができる。
 また、上記切断する工程において、上刃102は、下刃104よりも重力方向上部に位置することが好ましい。
The materials of the upper blade 102 and the lower blade 104 are not particularly limited, and known materials can be used. For example, high-speed tool steel (SKH), alloy tool steel (for example, SKD), cemented carbide and the like are preferable. It is appropriately set depending on the thickness of the laminated body, cutting conditions, and the like. Further, the shapes of the upper blade 102 and the lower blade 104 other than those described above such as the thickness of the upper blade 102 and the thickness of the lower blade 104 can be appropriately set according to the thickness of the laminated body and the like.
Further, in the cutting step, the upper blade 102 is preferably located above the lower blade 104 in the direction of gravity.
 上記切断する工程における切断時の下刃104に対する上刃102の侵入深さTは、切断可能であれば、特に制限はないが、切断速度、及び、へこみ欠陥抑制の観点から、回転式スリッターにおいては、0.4mm~0.6mmであることが好ましい。
 また、回転式スリッターにおいては、上記切断する工程における上刃102と下刃104とは、少なくとも一部において、摺接していることが好ましい。
The penetration depth T of the upper blade 102 with respect to the lower blade 104 at the time of cutting in the above-mentioned cutting step is not particularly limited as long as it can be cut, but from the viewpoint of cutting speed and suppression of dent defects, the rotary slitter Is preferably 0.4 mm to 0.6 mm.
Further, in the rotary slitter, it is preferable that the upper blade 102 and the lower blade 104 in the cutting step are in sliding contact with each other at least in a part.
 上記切断する工程において、上記積層体を切断した切断物の形状及び大きさは、特に制限はなく、所望の形状及び大きさに切断すればよい。
 また、上記上刃及び上記下刃の材質及び大きさについても、上記積層体及び得られる切断物に応じ、適宜選択することができる。
 また、上記切断する工程においては、上記積層体を厚さ方向に切断することが好ましい。
In the above-mentioned cutting step, the shape and size of the cut product obtained by cutting the laminated body are not particularly limited, and may be cut into a desired shape and size.
Further, the materials and sizes of the upper blade and the lower blade can be appropriately selected according to the laminated body and the obtained cut piece.
Further, in the cutting step, it is preferable to cut the laminated body in the thickness direction.
 また、上記切断する工程における切断速度は、特に制限はなく、所望に応じ適宜選択することができる。 Further, the cutting speed in the above-mentioned cutting step is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected as desired.
<巻き取る工程>
 本開示に係る切断物の製造方法は、上記切断する工程の後、得られた上記積層体の切断物の少なくとも一部を巻き取る工程を含むことが好ましい。
 上記切断物を巻き取る場合、切りくずの付着に由来するへこみ欠陥が生じやすいため、本開示に係る効果をより発揮することができる。
 巻き取り方法としては、特に制限はなく、公知の方法を用いることができるが、上記巻き取る工程においては、上記切断物をロール状に巻き取ることが好ましい。
<Rolling process>
The method for producing a cut product according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step of winding at least a part of the obtained cut product of the laminated body after the cutting step.
When the cut piece is wound up, dent defects due to the adhesion of chips are likely to occur, so that the effect according to the present disclosure can be further exerted.
The winding method is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used, but in the winding step, it is preferable to wind the cut piece in a roll shape.
<その他の工程>
 本開示に係る切断物の製造方法は、上述した工程以外の任意の工程(その他の工程)を含んでもよい。その他の工程としては、公知の工程が挙げられる。
<Other processes>
The method for producing a cut product according to the present disclosure may include any step (other steps) other than the above-mentioned steps. Examples of other steps include known steps.
 本開示に用いられる切断装置としては、特に制限はなく、公知の切断装置において、上刃及び下刃を上記範囲に調整し、用いることができる。
 好ましい切断装置としては、例えば、円盤状回転式スリッターを備える切断装置であって、上刃の回転軸及び下刃の回転軸として、互いに平行に配置された回転軸を有しており、各回転軸に、円形状をなした上刃及び下刃がそれぞれ固設されている。切断時においては、上刃及び下刃の互いの刃先の一側面同士が摺接しつつ上記積層体を切断する。また、各回転軸は、駆動機構で所定方向に回転するように構成され、上刃及び下刃がそれぞれ回転するようになっている。
The cutting device used in the present disclosure is not particularly limited, and the upper blade and the lower blade can be adjusted within the above range and used in a known cutting device.
A preferable cutting device is, for example, a cutting device including a disk-shaped rotary slitter, which has a rotating shaft of an upper blade and a rotating shaft of a lower blade arranged in parallel with each other, and each rotation. A circular upper blade and a lower blade are fixed to the shaft, respectively. At the time of cutting, the laminated body is cut while one side surfaces of the upper and lower blades are in sliding contact with each other. Further, each rotation shaft is configured to rotate in a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism, and the upper blade and the lower blade rotate respectively.
 以下、本開示に用いられる感光性層を有する積層体について、詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, the laminate having a photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure will be described in detail.
<感光性層を有する積層体>
 本開示に用いられる感光性層を有する積層体としては、感光性層を有する2層以上の積層体であれば、特に制限はないが、支持体及び感光性層を少なくとも有する積層体であることが好ましく、支持体、感光性層、及び、カバーフィルムを有する積層体であることがより好ましい。
 また、上記感光性層を有する積層体は、感光性転写部材であることが好ましい。
 感光性転写部材は、支持体と感光性層とが他の層を介さずに直接積層されていてもよいし、他の層を介して積層されていてもよい。また、感光性層の支持体に対向する面とは反対側の面に他の層が積層していてもよい。
 支持体及び感光性層以外の他の層としては、例えば、熱可塑性樹脂層、中間層、屈折率調整層及びカバーフィルムが挙げられる。
 また、各層は、単層であっても、2層以上の複層であってもよい。
<Laminate with photosensitive layer>
The laminate having a photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a laminate having two or more layers having a photosensitive layer, but it is a laminate having at least a support and a photosensitive layer. Is preferable, and a laminate having a support, a photosensitive layer, and a cover film is more preferable.
Further, the laminate having the photosensitive layer is preferably a photosensitive transfer member.
In the photosensitive transfer member, the support and the photosensitive layer may be directly laminated without interposing another layer, or may be laminated through another layer. Further, another layer may be laminated on the surface of the photosensitive layer opposite to the surface facing the support.
Examples of layers other than the support and the photosensitive layer include a thermoplastic resin layer, an intermediate layer, a refractive index adjusting layer, and a cover film.
Further, each layer may be a single layer or a plurality of layers or more.
 上記積層体全体の厚さは、本開示における効果をより発揮する観点から、50μm以下であることが好ましく、42μm以下であることがより好ましく、20μm以上42μm以下であることが特に好ましい。 The thickness of the entire laminate is preferably 50 μm or less, more preferably 42 μm or less, and particularly preferably 20 μm or more and 42 μm or less, from the viewpoint of further exerting the effects in the present disclosure.
 本開示に用いられる感光性層を有する積層体の態様の一例を以下に示すが、これに制限されない。
(1)「支持体/感光性層/屈折率調整層/カバーフィルム」
(2)「支持体/感光性層/カバーフィルム」
(3)「支持体/中間層/感光性層/カバーフィルム」
(4)「支持体/熱可塑性樹脂層/中間層/感光性層/カバーフィルム」
 なお、上記各構成において、感光性層は、ネガ型感光性層であることが好ましい。また、感光性層が着色樹脂層であることも好ましい。本開示に用いられる感光性層を有する積層体は、後述するように配線保護膜用感光性転写材部材として使用されてもよいし、エッチングレジスト用感光性転写部材として使用されてもよい。
 配線保護膜用感光性転写部材とする場合、上記積層体の構成としては、例えば、上述した(1)又は(2)の構成であることが好ましい。
 また、エッチングレジスト用感光性転写部材とする場合、上記積層体の構成としては、例えば、上述した(2)~(4)の構成であることが好ましい。
An example of the embodiment of the laminate having a photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure is shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) "Support / Photosensitive layer / Refractive index adjustment layer / Cover film"
(2) "Support / Photosensitive layer / Cover film"
(3) "Support / Intermediate layer / Photosensitive layer / Cover film"
(4) "Support / Thermoplastic resin layer / Intermediate layer / Photosensitive layer / Cover film"
In each of the above configurations, the photosensitive layer is preferably a negative photosensitive layer. It is also preferable that the photosensitive layer is a colored resin layer. The laminate having a photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure may be used as a photosensitive transfer material member for a wiring protective film or as a photosensitive transfer member for an etching resist, as will be described later.
When the photosensitive transfer member for a wiring protective film is used, the structure of the laminated body is preferably, for example, the above-mentioned structure (1) or (2).
Further, in the case of a photosensitive transfer member for an etching resist, the structure of the laminated body is preferably, for example, the above-mentioned structures (2) to (4).
 本開示に用いられる感光性層を有する積層体において、感光性層の支持体側とは反対側に他の層を更に有する構成の場合、感光性層の支持体側とは反対側に配置される他の層の合計厚みは、感光性層の層厚に対して、0.1%~30%であることが好ましく、0.1%~20%であることがより好ましい。 In the case of the laminate having the photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure, in the case of a configuration in which another layer is further provided on the side opposite to the support side of the photosensitive layer, the laminate is arranged on the side opposite to the support side of the photosensitive layer. The total thickness of the layers is preferably 0.1% to 30%, more preferably 0.1% to 20%, based on the thickness of the photosensitive layer.
 貼り合わせ時における気泡発生抑止の観点から、本開示に用いられる感光性層を有する積層体のうねりの最大幅は、300μm以下であることが好ましく、200μm以下であることがより好ましく、60μm以下であることが更に好ましい。なお、感光性転写部材のうねりの最大幅の下限値としては、0μm以上であり、0.1μm以上が好ましく、1μm以上がより好ましい。
 本開示に用いられる感光性層を有する積層体のうねりの最大幅は、以下の手順により測定される値である。
 まず、上記積層体を縦20cm×横20cmのサイズとなるように主面に垂直な方向に裁断し、試験サンプルを作製する。なお、上記積層体がカバーフィルムを有する場合には、カバーフィルムを剥離する。次いで、表面が平滑で且つ水平なステージ上に、上記試験サンプルを支持体の表面がステージに対向するように静置する。静置後、試験サンプルの中心10cm角の範囲について、試験サンプルの表面をレーザー顕微鏡(例えば、(株)キーエンス製VK-9700SP)で走査して3次元表面画像を取得し、得られた3次元表面画像で観察される最大凸高さから最低凹高さを引き算する。上記操作を10個の試験サンプルについて行い、その算術平均値を「感光性転写部材のうねり最大幅」とする。
From the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of air bubbles during bonding, the maximum width of the waviness of the laminate having the photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure is preferably 300 μm or less, more preferably 200 μm or less, and 60 μm or less. It is more preferable to have. The lower limit of the maximum width of the waviness of the photosensitive transfer member is 0 μm or more, preferably 0.1 μm or more, and more preferably 1 μm or more.
The maximum width of the waviness of the laminate having the photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure is a value measured by the following procedure.
First, the laminate is cut in a direction perpendicular to the main surface so as to have a size of 20 cm in length × 20 cm in width to prepare a test sample. When the laminate has a cover film, the cover film is peeled off. Next, the test sample is placed on a stage having a smooth and horizontal surface so that the surface of the support faces the stage. After standing, the surface of the test sample was scanned with a laser microscope (for example, VK-9700SP manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION) for a range of 10 cm square at the center of the test sample to obtain a three-dimensional surface image, and the obtained three-dimensional image was obtained. Subtract the minimum concave height from the maximum convex height observed in the surface image. The above operation is performed on 10 test samples, and the arithmetic mean value thereof is defined as the "maximum width of waviness of the photosensitive transfer member".
 以下において、本開示に用いられる感光性層を有する積層体について説明する。なお、以下の実施形態Aの積層体は、エッチングレジスト用感光性転写部材に好適に使用できる構成であり、以下の実施形態Bの積層体は、配線保護膜用感光性転写部材に好適に使用できる構成である。 Hereinafter, the laminate having a photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure will be described. The laminate of the following embodiment A has a configuration that can be suitably used for a photosensitive transfer member for an etching resist, and the laminate of the following embodiment B is suitably used for a photosensitive transfer member for a wiring protective film. It is a configuration that can be done.
〔〔実施形態Aの積層体〕〕
 以下において、実施形態Aの積層体について、説明する。
[[Laminate of Embodiment A]]
Hereinafter, the laminated body of the embodiment A will be described.
〔支持体〕
 本開示に用いられる上記積層体は、支持体を有することが好ましい。
 本開示に用いられる感光性転写部材は、支持体を有する。
 支持体は、感光性層又は感光性層を含む積層体を支持し、且つ、剥離可能な支持体である。
[Support]
The laminate used in the present disclosure preferably has a support.
The photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure has a support.
The support is a support that supports a photosensitive layer or a laminated body including the photosensitive layer and can be peeled off.
 支持体は、感光性層をパターン露光する際に、支持体を介した感光性層の露光が可能になる観点から、光透過性を有することが好ましい。なお、本明細書において「光透過性を有する」とは、パターン露光に使用する波長の光の透過率が50%以上であることを意味する。
 支持体は、感光性層の露光感度向上の観点から、パターン露光に使用する波長(より好ましくは波長365nm)の光の透過率が60%以上であることが好ましく、70%以上であることがより好ましい。
 なお、感光性転写部材が備える層の透過率とは、層の主面に垂直な方向(厚さ方向)に光を入射させたときの、入射光の強度に対する層を通過して出射した出射光の強度の比率であり、大塚電子(株)製MCPD Seriesを用いて測定される。
The support preferably has light transmission property from the viewpoint of enabling exposure of the photosensitive layer through the support when pattern-exposing the photosensitive layer. In addition, in this specification, "having light transmittance" means that the transmittance of light of the wavelength used for pattern exposure is 50% or more.
From the viewpoint of improving the exposure sensitivity of the photosensitive layer, the support preferably has a light transmittance of 60% or more, preferably 70% or more, at a wavelength (more preferably 365 nm) used for pattern exposure. More preferred.
The transmittance of the layer included in the photosensitive transfer member refers to the light emitted through the layer with respect to the intensity of the incident light when the light is incident in the direction perpendicular to the main surface of the layer (thickness direction). It is a ratio of the intensity of light emission, and is measured using MCPD Series manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
 支持体は、単層構造であっても、複層構造であってもよい。
 支持体を構成する材料としては、例えば、ガラス基板、樹脂フィルム及び紙が挙げられ、強度、可撓性及び光透過性の観点から、樹脂フィルムが好ましい。
 樹脂フィルムとしては、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET:polyethylene terephthalate)フィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム及びポリカーボネートフィルムが挙げられる。中でも、PETフィルムが好ましく、2軸延伸PETフィルムがより好ましい。
The support may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure.
Examples of the material constituting the support include a glass substrate, a resin film and paper, and a resin film is preferable from the viewpoint of strength, flexibility and light transmission.
Examples of the resin film include polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film, cellulose triacetate film, polystyrene film and polycarbonate film. Among them, a PET film is preferable, and a biaxially stretched PET film is more preferable.
 支持体の厚さ(層厚)は、特に制限されず、支持体としての強度、回路配線形成用基板との貼り合わせに求められる可撓性、及び、最初の露光工程で要求される光透過性の観点から、材質に応じて選択すればよい。
 支持体の厚さは、5μm~100μmの範囲が好ましく、取扱い易さ及び汎用性の点から、10μm~50μmの範囲がより好ましく、10μm~20μmの範囲が更に好ましく、10μm~16μmの範囲が特に好ましい。
 また、支持体の平均厚さは、支持体を介して露光する場合における解像度及び直線性の観点から、50μm以下であることが好ましく、25μm以下であることがより好ましい。
The thickness (layer thickness) of the support is not particularly limited, and the strength as the support, the flexibility required for bonding to the circuit wiring forming substrate, and the light transmission required in the first exposure step are not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of sex, it may be selected according to the material.
The thickness of the support is preferably in the range of 5 μm to 100 μm, more preferably in the range of 10 μm to 50 μm, further preferably in the range of 10 μm to 20 μm, and particularly preferably in the range of 10 μm to 16 μm from the viewpoint of ease of handling and versatility. preferable.
The average thickness of the support is preferably 50 μm or less, more preferably 25 μm or less, from the viewpoint of resolution and linearity when exposed through the support.
 支持体としては、例えば、膜厚16μmの2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、膜厚12μmの2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、及び、膜厚9μmの2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが挙げられる。 Examples of the support include a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 16 μm, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 12 μm, and a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 9 μm.
 また、支持体として使用するフィルムには、シワ等の変形、傷、欠陥などがないことが好ましい。
 支持体を介するパターン露光時のパターン形成性、及び、支持体の透明性の観点から、支持体に含まれる微粒子、異物、欠陥、析出物などの数は少ない方が好ましい。直径1μm以上の微粒子や異物や欠陥の数は、50個/10mm以下であることが好ましく、10個/10mm以下であることがより好ましく、3個/10mm以下であることが更に好ましく、0個/10mmであることが特に好ましい。
Further, it is preferable that the film used as the support has no deformation such as wrinkles, scratches, defects and the like.
From the viewpoint of pattern formation during pattern exposure via the support and transparency of the support, it is preferable that the number of fine particles, foreign substances, defects, precipitates, etc. contained in the support is small. The number of the above fine particles and foreign matter and defect diameter 1μm is preferably 50/10 mm 2 or less, more preferably 10/10 mm 2 or less, further preferably 3/10 mm 2 or less , 0 pieces / 10 mm 2 is particularly preferable.
 支持体の好ましい態様としては、例えば、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0017~段落0018、特開2016-27363号公報の段落0019~0026、国際公開第2012/081680号の段落0041~0057、国際公開第2018/179370号の段落0029~0040、特開2019-101405号公報の段落0012~段落0032に記載があり、これらの公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Preferred embodiments of the support include, for example, paragraphs 0017 to 0018 of JP2014-85643, paragraphs 0019 to 0026 of JP2016-27363, and paragraphs 0041 to 0057 of International Publication No. 2012/081680. It is described in paragraphs 0029 to 0040 of International Publication No. 2018/179370 and paragraphs 0012 to 0032 of JP-A-2019-101405, and the contents of these publications are incorporated in the present specification.
 また、支持体の感光性層側の面の算術平均粗さRa値は、本開示における効果をより発揮する観点から、0.3μm以下であることが好ましく、0.1μm以下であることがより好ましく、0.05μm以下であることが特に好ましい。
 支持体の感光性層に接する面のRa値の下限は特に制限されないが、0.001μm以上が好ましい。
Further, the arithmetic mean roughness Ra value of the surface of the support on the photosensitive layer side is preferably 0.3 μm or less, and more preferably 0.1 μm or less, from the viewpoint of more exerting the effect in the present disclosure. It is preferably 0.05 μm or less, and particularly preferably 0.05 μm or less.
The lower limit of the Ra value of the surface of the support in contact with the photosensitive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.001 μm or more.
 支持体及びカバーフィルムの表面のRa値は、以下の方法で測定される。
 3次元光学プロファイラー(New View7300、Zygo社製)を用いて、以下の条件にて支持体又はカバーフィルムの表面を測定し、光学フィルムの表面プロファイルを得る。
 測定・解析ソフトとしては、MetroPro ver8.3.2のMicroscope Applicationを用いる。次に、上記解析ソフトにてSurface Map画面を表示し、Surface Map画面中でヒストグラムデータを得る。得られたヒストグラムデータから、算術平均粗さを算出し、支持体又はカバーフィルムの表面のRa値を得る。
 支持体又はカバーフィルムが感光性層等に貼り合わされている場合は、感光性層から支持体又はカバーフィルムを剥離して、剥離した側の表面のRa値を測定すればよい。
The Ra value on the surface of the support and the cover film is measured by the following method.
Using a three-dimensional optical profiler (New View7300, manufactured by Zygo), the surface of the support or cover film is measured under the following conditions to obtain a surface profile of the optical film.
As the measurement / analysis software, Microscope Application of MetroPro ver 8.3.2 is used. Next, the Surface Map screen is displayed with the above analysis software, and histogram data is obtained in the Surface Map screen. From the obtained histogram data, the arithmetic mean roughness is calculated, and the Ra value of the surface of the support or the cover film is obtained.
When the support or cover film is attached to the photosensitive layer or the like, the support or cover film may be peeled from the photosensitive layer, and the Ra value of the surface on the peeled side may be measured.
 ハンドリング性を付与する観点から、支持体の表面に、微小な粒子を含む層(「滑剤層」ともいう。)を設けてもよい。滑剤層は、支持体の片面に設けてもよいし、両面に設けてもよい。滑剤層に含まれる粒子の直径は、0.05μm~0.8μmが好ましい。
 また、滑剤層の厚みは、0.05μm~1.0μmが好ましい。
From the viewpoint of imparting handleability, a layer containing fine particles (also referred to as “lubricant layer”) may be provided on the surface of the support. The lubricant layer may be provided on one side of the support or on both sides. The diameter of the particles contained in the lubricant layer is preferably 0.05 μm to 0.8 μm.
The thickness of the lubricant layer is preferably 0.05 μm to 1.0 μm.
〔感光性層〕
 本開示に用いられる上記積層体は、感光性層を有する。
 本開示に用いられる感光性転写部材は、感光性層を有する。
[Photosensitive layer]
The laminate used in the present disclosure has a photosensitive layer.
The photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure has a photosensitive layer.
 感光性層は、露光により露光部の現像液に対する溶解性が低下し、非露光部が現像により除去されるネガ型感光性層であることが好ましい。しかしながら、感光性層はネガ型感光性層に制限されず、露光により露光部の現像液に対する溶解性が向上し、露光部が現像により除去されるポジ型感光性層であってもよい。 The photosensitive layer is preferably a negative photosensitive layer in which the solubility of the exposed portion in the developing solution is reduced by exposure and the non-exposed portion is removed by development. However, the photosensitive layer is not limited to the negative photosensitive layer, and may be a positive photosensitive layer in which the solubility of the exposed portion in the developing solution is improved by exposure and the exposed portion is removed by development.
 感光性層は、重合性化合物、及び、バインダーポリマーを含むことが好ましく、重合性化合物、バインダーポリマー、及び、光重合開始剤を含むことがより好ましく、重合体A、重合性化合物、及び、光重合開始剤を含むことが特に好ましい。感光性層は、上記感光性層の全質量基準で、バインダーポリマー:10質量%~90質量%;重合性化合物:5質量%~70質量%;及び光重合開始剤:0.01質量%~20質量%を含むことが好ましい。
 以下、各成分を順に説明する。
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound and a binder polymer, more preferably contains a polymerizable compound, a binder polymer, and a photopolymerization initiator, and contains the polymer A, the polymerizable compound, and light. It is particularly preferable to include a polymerization initiator. The photosensitive layer is based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer, and the binder polymer: 10% by mass to 90% by mass; the polymerizable compound: 5% by mass to 70% by mass; and the photopolymerization initiator: 0.01% by mass to It preferably contains 20% by mass.
Hereinafter, each component will be described in order.
(バインダーポリマー)
 感光性層は、バインダーポリマーを含むことが好ましい。
 バインダーポリマーとしては、特に制限はなく、例えば、エッチングレジストに用いられる公知のバインダーポリマーが好適に挙げられる。
 また、バインダーポリマーとしては、アルカリ可溶性高分子が挙げられる。
 アルカリ可溶性高分子としては、酸基を有するアルカリ可溶性高分子であることが好ましい。
 中でも、バインダーポリマーとしては、後述する重合体Aが好ましい。
(Binder polymer)
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a binder polymer.
The binder polymer is not particularly limited, and for example, a known binder polymer used for an etching resist is preferably used.
Moreover, as a binder polymer, an alkali-soluble polymer can be mentioned.
The alkali-soluble polymer is preferably an alkali-soluble polymer having an acid group.
Among them, as the binder polymer, the polymer A described later is preferable.
-重合体A-
 バインダーポリマーとしては、重合体Aを含むことが好ましい。
 重合体Aは、アルカリ可溶性高分子であることが好ましい。アルカリ可溶性高分子は、アルカリ物質に溶け易い高分子を包含する。
-Polymer A-
The binder polymer preferably contains the polymer A.
The polymer A is preferably an alkali-soluble polymer. Alkali-soluble polymers include polymers that are easily soluble in alkaline substances.
 重合体Aの酸価は、現像液による感光性層の膨潤を抑制することにより、解像性がより優れる点から、220mgKOH/g以下が好ましく、200mgKOH/g未満がより好ましく、190mgKOH/g未満が更に好ましい。
 重合体Aの酸価の下限は特に制限されないが、現像性がより優れる点から、60mgKOH/g以上が好ましく、120mgKOH/g以上がより好ましく、150mgKOH/g以上が更に好ましく、170mgKOH/g以上が特に好ましい。
The acid value of the polymer A is preferably 220 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably less than 200 mgKOH / g, and less than 190 mgKOH / g, from the viewpoint of better resolution by suppressing the swelling of the photosensitive layer due to the developing solution. Is more preferable.
The lower limit of the acid value of the polymer A is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of better developability, 60 mgKOH / g or more is preferable, 120 mgKOH / g or more is more preferable, 150 mgKOH / g or more is further preferable, and 170 mgKOH / g or more is preferable. Especially preferable.
 なお、酸価は、試料1gを中和するのに必要な水酸化カリウムの質量[mg]であり、
本明細書においては、単位をmgKOH/gと記載する。酸価は、例えば、化合物中における酸基の平均含有量から算出できる。
 重合体Aの酸価は、重合体Aを構成する構成単位の種類及び酸基を含有する構成単位の含有量により調整すればよい。
The acid value is the mass [mg] of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize 1 g of the sample.
In the present specification, the unit is described as mgKOH / g. The acid value can be calculated, for example, from the average content of acid groups in the compound.
The acid value of the polymer A may be adjusted according to the type of the structural unit constituting the polymer A and the content of the structural unit containing an acid group.
 重合体Aの重量平均分子量は、5,000~500,000であることが好ましい。重量平均分子量を500,000以下にすることは、解像性及び現像性を向上させる観点から好ましい。重量平均分子量を100,000以下にすることがより好ましく、60,000以下にすることが更に好ましく、50,000以下にすることが特に好ましい。一方で、重量平均分子量を5,000以上にすることは、現像凝集物の性状、並びに、エッジフューズ性及びカットチップ性等の未露光膜の性状を制御する観点から好ましい。重量平均分子量を10,000以上にすることがより好ましく、20,000以上にすることが更に好ましく、30,000以上にすることが特に好ましい。エッジフューズ性とは、感光性転写部材をロール状に巻き取った場合に、ロールの端面からの、感光性層のはみ出し易さの程度をいう。カットチップ性とは、未露光膜をカッターで切断した場合に、チップの飛び易さの程度をいう。このチップが感光性転写部材の上面等に付着すると、後の露光工程等でマスクに転写して、不良品の原因となる。重合体Aの分散度は、1.0~6.0であることが好ましく、1.0~5.0であることがより好ましく、1.0~4.0であることが更に好ましく、1.0~3.0であることが更に好ましい。本開示で、分子量は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィーを用いて測定される値である。また分散度は、数平均分子量に対する重量平均分子量の比(重量平均分子量/数平均分子量)である。 The weight average molecular weight of the polymer A is preferably 5,000 to 500,000. It is preferable that the weight average molecular weight is 500,000 or less from the viewpoint of improving the resolution and developability. The weight average molecular weight is more preferably 100,000 or less, further preferably 60,000 or less, and particularly preferably 50,000 or less. On the other hand, setting the weight average molecular weight to 5,000 or more is preferable from the viewpoint of controlling the properties of the developed aggregate and the properties of the unexposed film such as edge fuse property and cut chip property. The weight average molecular weight is more preferably 10,000 or more, further preferably 20,000 or more, and particularly preferably 30,000 or more. The edge fuse property refers to the degree to which the photosensitive layer easily protrudes from the end face of the roll when the photosensitive transfer member is wound in a roll shape. The cut chip property refers to the degree of ease with which the chip flies when the unexposed film is cut with a cutter. If this chip adheres to the upper surface of the photosensitive transfer member or the like, it will be transferred to the mask in a later exposure step or the like, causing a defective product. The dispersity of the polymer A is preferably 1.0 to 6.0, more preferably 1.0 to 5.0, and even more preferably 1.0 to 4.0. It is more preferably 0.0 to 3.0. In the present disclosure, the molecular weight is a value measured using gel permeation chromatography. The degree of dispersion is the ratio of the weight average molecular weight to the number average molecular weight (weight average molecular weight / number average molecular weight).
 重合体Aは、露光時の焦点位置がずれたときの線幅太り及び解像度の悪化を抑制する観点から、芳香族炭化水素基を有することが好ましく、芳香族炭化水素基を有する構成単位を有することがより好ましい。なお、このような芳香族炭化水素基としては、例えば、置換又は非置換のフェニル基や、置換又は非置換のアラルキル基が挙げられる。重合体Aにおける芳香族炭化水素基を有する構成単位の含有割合は、重合体Aの全質量を基準として、20質量%以上であることが好ましく、30質量%以上であることがより好ましく、40質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、45質量%以上であることが特に好ましく、50質量%以上であることが最も好ましい。上限としては特に限定されないが、好ましくは95質量%以下、より好ましくは85質量%以下である。なお、重合体Aを複数種類含有する場合における、芳香族炭化水素基を有する構成単位の含有割合は、重量平均値として求める。 The polymer A preferably has an aromatic hydrocarbon group, and has a structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, from the viewpoint of suppressing line width thickening and deterioration of resolution when the focal position is deviated during exposure. Is more preferable. Examples of such an aromatic hydrocarbon group include a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group and a substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl group. The content ratio of the structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group in the polymer A is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymer A, and is 40%. It is more preferably mass% or more, particularly preferably 45 mass% or more, and most preferably 50 mass% or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 95% by mass or less, and more preferably 85% by mass or less. When a plurality of types of the polymer A are contained, the content ratio of the structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is determined as a weight average value.
 芳香族炭化水素基を有する構成単位を形成する単量体としては、例えば、アラルキル基を有するモノマー、スチレン、及び、重合可能なスチレン誘導体(例えば、メチルスチレン、ビニルトルエン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、アセトキシスチレン、4-ビニル安息香酸、スチレンダイマー、スチレントリマー等)が挙げられる。中でも、アラルキル基を有するモノマー、又はスチレンが好ましい。一態様において、重合体Aにおける芳香族炭化水素基を有する構成単位を形成する単量体がスチレンである場合、スチレン由来の構成単位の含有割合は、重合体Aの全質量を基準として、20質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、25質量%~45質量%であることがより好ましく、30質量%~40質量%であることが更に好ましく、30質量%~35質量%であることが特に好ましい。なお、感光性層が複数の種類の重合体Aを含む場合、芳香族炭化水素基を有する構成単位の含有率は、重量平均値として求められる。 Examples of the monomer forming the structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group include a monomer having an aralkyl group, styrene, and a polymerizable styrene derivative (for example, methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, tert-butoxystyrene, acetoxy). Styrene, 4-vinyl benzoic acid, styrene dimer, styrene trimer, etc.) can be mentioned. Of these, a monomer having an aralkyl group or styrene is preferable. In one embodiment, when the monomer forming the structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group in the polymer A is styrene, the content ratio of the structural unit derived from styrene is 20 based on the total mass of the polymer A. It is preferably mass% to 50% by mass, more preferably 25% by mass to 45% by mass, further preferably 30% by mass to 40% by mass, and 30% by mass to 35% by mass. Is particularly preferable. When the photosensitive layer contains a plurality of types of polymers A, the content of the structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is determined as a weight average value.
 アラルキル基としては、置換又は非置換のフェニルアルキル基等が挙げられ、置換又は非置換のベンジル基が好ましい。 Examples of the aralkyl group include a substituted or unsubstituted phenylalkyl group, and a substituted or unsubstituted benzyl group is preferable.
 置換又は非置換のベンジル基以外のフェニルアルキル基を有する単量体としては、フェニルエチル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。 Examples of the monomer having a phenylalkyl group other than the substituted or unsubstituted benzyl group include phenylethyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
 置換又は非置換のベンジル基を有する単量体としては、置換又は非置換のベンジル基を有する(メタ)アクリレート(例えば、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、クロロベンジル(メタ)アクリレート等);ベンジル基を有するビニルモノマー(例えば、ビニルベンジルクロライド、ビニルベンジルアルコール等)が挙げられる。中でもベンジル(メタ)アクリレートが好ましい。一態様において、重合体Aにおける芳香族炭化水素基を有する構成単位を形成する単量体がベンジル(メタ)アクリレートである場合、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位の含有割合は、重合体Aの全質量を基準として、50質量%~95質量%であることが好ましく、60質量%~90質量%であることがより好ましく、70質量%~90質量%であることが更に好ましく、75質量%~90質量%であることが特に好ましい。  As the monomer having a substituted or unsubstituted benzyl group, a (meth) acrylate having a substituted or unsubstituted benzyl group (for example, benzyl (meth) acrylate, chlorobenzyl (meth) acrylate, etc.); having a benzyl group. Vinyl monomers (eg, vinylbenzyl chloride, vinylbenzyl alcohol, etc.) can be mentioned. Of these, benzyl (meth) acrylate is preferable. In one embodiment, when the monomer forming the structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group in the polymer A is benzyl (meth) acrylate, the content ratio of the structural unit derived from the benzyl (meth) acrylate is the polymer A. It is preferably 50% by mass to 95% by mass, more preferably 60% by mass to 90% by mass, further preferably 70% by mass to 90% by mass, and 75% by mass, based on the total mass of the above. It is particularly preferably% to 90% by mass.
 芳香族炭化水素基を有する構成単位を有する重合体Aは、芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体と、後述する第一の単量体の少なくとも1種及び/又は後述する第二の単量体の少なくとも1種とを重合することにより得られることが好ましい。    The polymer A having a structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, at least one of the first monomers described later, and / or a second single amount described later. It is preferably obtained by polymerizing with at least one of the bodies.
 芳香族炭化水素基を有する構成単位を有しない重合体Aは、後述する第一の単量体の少なくとも1種を重合することにより得られることが好ましく、第一の単量体の少なくとも1種と後述する第二の単量体の少なくとも1種とを共重合することにより得られることがより好ましい。    The polymer A having no structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably obtained by polymerizing at least one of the first monomers described later, and at least one of the first monomers. It is more preferable to obtain it by copolymerizing with at least one of the second monomers described later.
 第一の単量体は、分子中にカルボキシ基を有する単量体である。第一の単量体としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、フマル酸、ケイ皮酸、クロトン酸、イタコン酸、4-ビニル安息香酸、マレイン酸無水物、マレイン酸半エステル等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、(メタ)アクリル酸が好ましい。
 重合体Aにおける第一の単量体由来の構成単位の含有割合は、重合体Aの全質量を基準として、5質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、10質量%~40質量%であることがより好ましく、15質量%~30質量%であることが更に好ましい。
The first monomer is a monomer having a carboxy group in the molecule. Examples of the first monomer include (meth) acrylic acid, fumaric acid, cinnamic acid, crotonic acid, itaconic acid, 4-vinylbenzoic acid, maleic anhydride, maleic acid semiester and the like. Among these, (meth) acrylic acid is preferable.
The content ratio of the structural unit derived from the first monomer in the polymer A is preferably 5% by mass to 50% by mass, preferably 10% by mass to 40% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymer A. It is more preferable, and it is further preferable that it is 15% by mass to 30% by mass.
 第一の単量体由来の構成単位の含有割合は、重合体Aの全質量を基準として、10質量%~50質量%であることが好ましい。上記共重合割合を10質量%以上にすることは、良好な現像性を発現させる観点、エッジフューズ性を制御するなどの観点から好ましく、15質量%以上がより好ましく、20質量%以上が更に好ましい。上記含有割合を50質量%以下にすることは、レジストパターンの高解像性及びスソ形状の観点から、更にはレジストパターンの耐薬品性の観点から好ましく、これらの観点においては、35質量%以下がより好ましく、30質量%以下が更に好ましく、27質量%以下が特に好ましい。 The content ratio of the structural unit derived from the first monomer is preferably 10% by mass to 50% by mass based on the total mass of the polymer A. The copolymerization ratio of 10% by mass or more is preferable from the viewpoint of exhibiting good developability and controlling edge fuseability, more preferably 15% by mass or more, still more preferably 20% by mass or more. .. It is preferable that the content ratio is 50% by mass or less from the viewpoint of high resolution of the resist pattern and the shape of the resist pattern, and further from the viewpoint of chemical resistance of the resist pattern, and from these viewpoints, it is 35% by mass or less. Is more preferable, 30% by mass or less is further preferable, and 27% by mass or less is particularly preferable.
 第二の単量体は、非酸性であり、かつ分子中にエチレン性不飽和基を少なくとも1個有する単量体である。第二の単量体としては、例えば、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、n-プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、イソプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソブチル(メタ)アクリレート、tert-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート等の(メタ)アクリレート類;酢酸ビニル等のビニルアルコールのエステル類;並びに(メタ)アクリロニトリル等が挙げられる。中でも、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、及びn-ブチル(メタ)アクリレートが好ましく、メチル(メタ)アクリレートが特に好ましい。
 重合体Aにおける第二の単量体由来の構成単位の含有割合は、重合体Aの全質量を基準として、5質量%~60質量%であることが好ましく、15質量%~50質量%であることがより好ましく、20質量%~45質量%であることが更に好ましい。
The second monomer is a monomer that is non-acidic and has at least one ethylenically unsaturated group in the molecule. Examples of the second monomer include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and isobutyl (meth) acrylate. , Tart-butyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate and other (meth) acrylates; vinyl acetate Such as vinyl alcohol esters; as well as (meth) acrylonitrile and the like. Of these, methyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, and n-butyl (meth) acrylate are preferable, and methyl (meth) acrylate is particularly preferable.
The content ratio of the constituent unit derived from the second monomer in the polymer A is preferably 5% by mass to 60% by mass, preferably 15% by mass to 50% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymer A. It is more preferably 20% by mass to 45% by mass.
 また、重合体Aは、アラルキル基を有する構成単位、及び、スチレン由来の構成単位よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の構成単位を含有することが、露光時の焦点位置がずれたときの線幅太り、及び、解像度の悪化を抑制する観点から好ましい。重合体Aとしては、例えば、メタクリル酸とベンジルメタクリレートとスチレンを含む共重合体、メタクリル酸とメチルメタクリレートとベンジルメタクリレートとスチレンを含む共重合体等が好ましい。
 一態様において、重合体Aは、芳香族炭化水素基を有する構成単位を25質量%~40質量%、第一の単量体由来の構成単位を20質量%~35質量%、及び、第二の単量体由来の構成単位を30質量%~45質量%含む重合体であることが好ましい。また、別の態様において、芳香族炭化水素基を有する構成単位を70質量%~90質量%、及び、第一の単量体由来の構成単位を10質量%~25質量%含む重合体であることが好ましい。
Further, the polymer A contains at least one structural unit selected from the group consisting of a structural unit having an aralkyl group and a structural unit derived from styrene, when the focal position at the time of exposure is deviated. It is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing the line width thickening and the deterioration of the resolution. As the polymer A, for example, a copolymer containing methacrylic acid, benzyl methacrylate and styrene, a copolymer containing methacrylic acid, methyl methacrylate, benzyl methacrylate and styrene and the like are preferable.
In one embodiment, the polymer A contains 25% by mass to 40% by mass of a structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, 20% by mass to 35% by mass of a structural unit derived from the first monomer, and a second. It is preferable that the polymer contains 30% by mass to 45% by mass of the structural unit derived from the monomer of. In another embodiment, the polymer contains 70% by mass to 90% by mass of a structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group and 10% by mass to 25% by mass of a structural unit derived from the first monomer. Is preferable.
 重合体Aは、側鎖に直鎖構造、分岐構造、及び、脂環構造のいずれかを有してもよい。側鎖に分岐構造を有する基を含むモノマー、又は側鎖に脂環構造を有する基を含むモノマーを使用することによって、重合体Aの側鎖に分岐構造又は脂環構造を導入することができる。脂環構造は、単環構造であっても、多環構造であってもよい。
 側鎖に分岐構造を有する基を含むモノマーの具体例としては、(メタ)アクリル酸i-プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸i-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸s-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸t-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸i-アミル、(メタ)アクリル酸t-アミル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソアミル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-オクチル、(メタ)アクリル酸3-オクチル、及び(メタ)アクリル酸t-オクチル等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、(メタ)アクリル酸i-プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸i-ブチル、又はメタクリル酸t-ブチルが好ましく、メタクリル酸i-プロピル又はメタクリル酸t-ブチルがより好ましい。
 側鎖に脂環構造を有する基を含むモノマーの具体例としては、単環の脂肪族炭化水素基を有するモノマー、及び、多環の脂肪族炭化水素基を有するモノマーが挙げられる。また、炭素数(炭素原子数)5個~20個の脂環式炭化水素基を有する(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。より具体的な例としては、(メタ)アクリル酸(ビシクロ[2.2.1]ヘプチル-2)、(メタ)アクリル酸-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3-メチル-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3,5-ジメチル-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3-エチルアダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3-メチル-5-エチル-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3,5,8-トリエチル-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3,5-ジメチル-8-エチル-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-メチル-2-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチル-2-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸3-ヒドロキシ-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸オクタヒドロ-4,7-メンタノインデン-5-イル、(メタ)アクリル酸オクタヒドロ-4,7-メンタノインデン-1-イルメチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-1-メンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸トリシクロデカン、(メタ)アクリル酸-3-ヒドロキシ-2,6,6-トリメチル-ビシクロ[3.1.1]ヘプチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3,7,7-トリメチル-4-ヒドロキシ-ビシクロ[4.1.0]ヘプチル、(メタ)アクリル酸(ノル)ボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸フェンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2,2,5-トリメチルシクロヘキシル、及び(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル等が挙げられる。
 これら(メタ)アクリル酸エステルの中でも、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸(ノル)ボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸フェンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-1-メンチル又は(メタ)アクリル酸トリシクロデカンが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸(ノル)ボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-アダマンチル又は(メタ)アクリル酸トリシクロデカンがより好ましい。
The polymer A may have any of a linear structure, a branched structure, and an alicyclic structure in the side chain. A branched structure or an alicyclic structure can be introduced into the side chain of the polymer A by using a monomer having a group having a branched structure in the side chain or a monomer containing a group having an alicyclic structure in the side chain. .. The alicyclic structure may be a monocyclic structure or a polycyclic structure.
Specific examples of the monomer containing a group having a branched structure in the side chain include i-propyl (meth) acrylate, i-butyl (meth) acrylate, s-butyl (meth) acrylate, and t (meth) acrylate. -Butyl, i-amyl (meth) acrylate, t-amyl (meth) acrylate, isoamyl (meth) acrylate, 2-octyl (meth) acrylate, 3-octyl (meth) acrylate, and (meth) Examples thereof include t-octyl acrylate. Among these, i-propyl (meth) acrylate, i-butyl (meth) acrylate, or t-butyl methacrylate are preferable, and i-propyl methacrylate or t-butyl methacrylate are more preferable.
Specific examples of the monomer having a group having an alicyclic structure in the side chain include a monomer having a monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and a monomer having a polycyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group. Further, a (meth) acrylate having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms (carbon atoms) can be mentioned. More specific examples include (meth) acrylic acid (bicyclo [2.2.1] heptyl-2), (meth) acrylic acid-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid-2-adamantyl, (meth). -3-Methyl-1-adamantyl acrylate, -3,5-dimethyl-1-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, -3-ethyladamantyl (meth) acrylate, -3-methyl-5-methyl (meth) acrylate Ethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid-3,5,8-triethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid-3,5-dimethyl-8-ethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid 2 -Methyl-2-adamantyl, 2-ethyl-2-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, 3-hydroxy-1-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, octahydro-4,7-mentanoindene (meth) acrylate-5- Il, Octahydro-4,7-mentanoinden-1-ylmethyl (meth) acrylate, -1-mentyl (meth) acrylate, tricyclodecane (meth) acrylate, -3-hydroxy- (meth) acrylate 2,6,6-trimethyl-bicyclo [3.1.1] heptyl, (meth) acrylic acid-3,7,7-trimethyl-4-hydroxy-bicyclo [4.1.0] heptyl, (meth) acrylic Examples thereof include acid (nor) bornyl, (meth) acrylate isobornyl, (meth) acrylate fentyl, (meth) acrylate-2,2,5-trimethylcyclohexyl, and (meth) acrylate cyclohexyl.
Among these (meth) acrylic acid esters, (meth) acrylic acid cyclohexyl, (meth) acrylic acid (nor) boronyl, (meth) acrylic acid isobornyl, (meth) acrylic acid-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid- 2-adamantyl, fentyl (meth) acrylate, -1-mentyl (meth) acrylate or tricyclodecane (meth) acrylate are preferred, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, (nor) bornyl (nor) acrylate, ( More preferred are isobornyl acrylate, -2-adamantyl (meth) acrylate or tricyclodecane (meth) acrylate.
 感光性層は、重合体Aを、1種単独で含有しても、2種以上を含有してもよい。2種以上を含有する場合には、芳香族炭化水素基を有する重合体Aを2種類混合使用すること、又は、芳香族炭化水素基を有する重合体Aと、芳香族炭化水素基を有しない重合体Aと、を混合使用することが好ましい。後者の場合、芳香族炭化水素基を有する重合体Aの含有割合は、重合体Aの全質量に対して、50質量%以上であることが好ましく、70質量%以上であることがより好ましく、80質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、90質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。 The photosensitive layer may contain the polymer A alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more kinds are contained, two kinds of the polymer A having an aromatic hydrocarbon group are mixed and used, or the polymer A having an aromatic hydrocarbon group and the polymer A having no aromatic hydrocarbon group are not used. It is preferable to use the polymer A in combination. In the latter case, the content ratio of the polymer A having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymer A. It is more preferably 80% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 90% by mass or more.
 重合体Aの合成は、上記で説明された単数又は複数の単量体を、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、イソプロパノール等の溶剤で希釈した溶液に、過酸化ベンゾイル、アゾイソブチロニトリル等のラジカル重合開始剤を適量添加し、加熱撹拌することにより行われることが好ましい。混合物の一部を反応液に滴下しながら合成を行う場合もある。反応終了後、さらに溶剤を加えて、所望の濃度に調整する場合もある。合成手段としては、溶液重合以外に、塊状重合、懸濁重合、又は乳化重合を用いてもよい。 In the synthesis of polymer A, a radical polymerization initiator such as benzoyl peroxide or azoisobutyronitrile is prepared by diluting the one or more monomers described above with a solvent such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone or isopropanol. Is preferably added in an appropriate amount and heated and stirred. In some cases, the synthesis is carried out while dropping a part of the mixture into the reaction solution. After completion of the reaction, a solvent may be further added to adjust the concentration to a desired level. As the synthesis means, bulk polymerization, suspension polymerization, or emulsion polymerization may be used in addition to solution polymerization.
 重合体Aのガラス転移温度Tgは、30℃以上135℃以下であることが好ましい。感光性層において、135℃以下のTgを有する重合体Aを使用することによって、露光時の焦点位置がずれたときの線幅太りや解像度の悪化を抑制することができる。この観点から、重合体AのTgは、130℃以下であることがより好ましく、120℃以下であることが更に好ましく、110℃以下であることが特に好ましい。また、30℃以上のTgを有する重合体Aを使用することは、耐エッジフューズ性を向上させる観点から好ましい。この観点から、重合体AのTgは、40℃以上であることがより好ましく、50℃以上であることが更に好ましく、60℃以上であることが特に好ましく、70℃以上であることが最も好ましい。 The glass transition temperature Tg of the polymer A is preferably 30 ° C. or higher and 135 ° C. or lower. By using the polymer A having a Tg of 135 ° C. or lower in the photosensitive layer, it is possible to suppress the line width thickening and the deterioration of the resolution when the focal position at the time of exposure is deviated. From this viewpoint, the Tg of the polymer A is more preferably 130 ° C. or lower, further preferably 120 ° C. or lower, and particularly preferably 110 ° C. or lower. Further, it is preferable to use the polymer A having a Tg of 30 ° C. or higher from the viewpoint of improving the edge fuse resistance. From this viewpoint, the Tg of the polymer A is more preferably 40 ° C. or higher, further preferably 50 ° C. or higher, particularly preferably 60 ° C. or higher, and most preferably 70 ° C. or higher. ..
 感光性層は、重合体A以外の樹脂を含有してもよい。
 重合体A以外の樹脂としては、アクリル樹脂、スチレン-アクリル共重合体(但し、スチレン含有率が40質量%以下であるもの)、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール、ポリビニルホルマール、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、ポリアセタール樹脂、ポリヒドロキシスチレン樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリベンゾオキサゾール樹脂、ポリシロキサン樹脂、ポリエチレンイミン、ポリアリルアミン、及び、ポリアルキレングリコールが挙げられる。
The photosensitive layer may contain a resin other than the polymer A.
Resins other than polymer A include acrylic resins, styrene-acrylic copolymers (however, those having a styrene content of 40% by mass or less), polyurethane resins, polyvinyl alcohols, polyvinyl formal, polyamide resins, polyester resins, and polyamides. Examples thereof include resins, epoxy resins, polyacetal resins, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polyimide resins, polybenzoxazole resins, polysiloxane resins, polyethyleneimines, polyallylamines, and polyalkylene glycols.
 また、上記バインダーポリマーにおけるメタクリル酸より形成される構成単位の含有量は、得られるエッチングパターンの解像度、及び、現像時の残渣抑制性の観点から、上記バインダーポリマーの全質量に対し、40質量%以下であることが好ましく、5質量%以上40質量%以下であることがより好ましく、10質量%以上35質量%以下であることが更に好ましく、15質量%以上30質量%以下であることが特に好ましい。
 また更に、上記バインダーポリマーの酸価は、得られるエッチングパターンの解像度、及び、現像時の残渣抑制性の観点からは、100mgKOH/g~200mgKOH/gであることが好ましい。
The content of the structural unit formed from methacrylic acid in the binder polymer is 40% by mass with respect to the total mass of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of the resolution of the obtained etching pattern and the residue suppression property during development. It is preferably 5% by mass or more and 40% by mass or less, more preferably 10% by mass or more and 35% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 15% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less. preferable.
Furthermore, the acid value of the binder polymer is preferably 100 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g from the viewpoint of the resolution of the obtained etching pattern and the residue inhibitory property during development.
 バインダーポリマーは、1種単独で使用することができ、或いは2種以上を混合して使用してもよい。
 バインダーポリマーの、感光性層の全質量に対する割合は、好ましくは10質量%~90質量%の範囲であり、より好ましくは30質量%~70質量%であり、更に好ましくは40質量%~60質量%である。感光性層に対するバインダーポリマーの割合を90質量%以下にすることは、現像時間を制御する観点から好ましい。一方で、感光性層に対するバインダーポリマーの割合を10質量%以上にすることは、耐エッジフューズ性を向上させる観点から好ましい。
The binder polymer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The ratio of the binder polymer to the total mass of the photosensitive layer is preferably in the range of 10% by mass to 90% by mass, more preferably 30% by mass to 70% by mass, and further preferably 40% by mass to 60% by mass. %. It is preferable that the ratio of the binder polymer to the photosensitive layer is 90% by mass or less from the viewpoint of controlling the developing time. On the other hand, it is preferable that the ratio of the binder polymer to the photosensitive layer is 10% by mass or more from the viewpoint of improving the edge fuse resistance.
(重合性化合物)
 感光性層は、重合性化合物を含有することが好ましい。
 本明細書において「重合性化合物」とは、後述する重合開始剤の作用を受けて重合する化合物であって、上述したバインダーポリマーとは異なる化合物を意味する。
(Polymerizable compound)
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
As used herein, the term "polymerizable compound" means a compound that polymerizes under the action of a polymerization initiator described later, and is different from the binder polymer described above.
 重合性化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和化合物が好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和化合物は、ネガ型感光性層の感光性(すなわち、光硬化性)及び硬化膜の強度に寄与する成分である。
 また、エチレン性不飽和化合物は、1つ以上のエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物である。
 感光性層は、エチレン性不飽和化合物として、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 ここで、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物とは、一分子中にエチレン性不飽和基を2つ以上有する化合物を意味する。
 エチレン性不飽和基としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基がより好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、(メタ)アクリレート化合物が好ましい。
As the polymerizable compound, an ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferable.
The ethylenically unsaturated compound is a component that contributes to the photosensitivity (that is, photocurability) of the negative photosensitive layer and the strength of the cured film.
The ethylenically unsaturated compound is a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated groups.
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound as the ethylenically unsaturated compound.
Here, the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound means a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule.
As the ethylenically unsaturated group, a (meth) acryloyl group is more preferable.
As the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a (meth) acrylate compound is preferable.
 感光性層は、重合性基を有する重合性化合物を含有することが好ましい。
 重合性化合物が有する重合性基としては、重合反応に関与する基であれば特に制限されず、例えば、ビニル基、アクリロイル基、メタクリロイル基、スチリル基及びマレイミド基等のエチレン性不飽和基を有する基;並びに、エポキシ基及びオキセタン基等のカチオン性重合性基を有する基が挙げられる。
 重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和基を有する基が好ましく、アクリロイル基又はメタアクリロイル基がより好ましい。
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound having a polymerizable group.
The polymerizable group contained in the polymerizable compound is not particularly limited as long as it is a group involved in the polymerization reaction, and has, for example, an ethylenically unsaturated group such as a vinyl group, an acryloyl group, a methacryloyl group, a styryl group and a maleimide group. Groups; and groups having a cationically polymerizable group such as an epoxy group and an oxetane group can be mentioned.
As the polymerizable group, a group having an ethylenically unsaturated group is preferable, and an acryloyl group or a metaacryloyl group is more preferable.
 重合性化合物としては、感光性層の感光性がより優れる点で、1つ以上のエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物(エチレン性不飽和化合物)が好ましく、一分子中に2つ以上のエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物(多官能エチレン性不飽和化合物)がより好ましい。
 また、解像性及び剥離性により優れる点で、エチレン性不飽和化合物が一分子中に有するエチレン性不飽和基の数は、6つ以下が好ましく、3つ以下がより好ましく、2つ以下が更に好ましい。
As the polymerizable compound, a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated groups (ethylenically unsaturated compound) is preferable in that the photosensitive layer is more photosensitive, and two or more ethylenically in one molecule. A compound having an unsaturated group (polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound) is more preferable.
Further, the number of ethylenically unsaturated groups contained in one molecule of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 6 or less, more preferably 3 or less, and 2 or less in terms of excellent resolution and peelability. More preferred.
 感光性層は、感光性層の感光性と解像性及び剥離性とのバランスがより優れる点で、一分子中に2つ又は3つのエチレン性不飽和基を有する2官能又は3官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含有することが好ましく、一分子中に2つのエチレン性不飽和基を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含有することがより好ましい。
 感光性層における、重合性化合物の含有量に対する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、剥離性に優れる点から、60質量%以上が好ましく、70質量%超がより好ましく、90質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は特に制限されず、100質量%であってもよい。即ち、感光性層に含まれる重合性化合物が全て2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物であってもよい。
 また、エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、重合性基として(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物が好ましい。
The photosensitive layer is bifunctional or trifunctional ethylenically having two or three ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule in that the photosensitive layer has a better balance of photosensitivity, resolution and peelability. It is preferable to contain an unsaturated compound, and more preferably to contain a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having two ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule.
The content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound in the photosensitive layer with respect to the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 60% by mass or more, more preferably more than 70% by mass, and more preferably 90% by mass or more from the viewpoint of excellent peelability. Is more preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited and may be 100% by mass. That is, all the polymerizable compounds contained in the photosensitive layer may be bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds.
Further, as the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a (meth) acrylate compound having a (meth) acryloyl group as a polymerizable group is preferable.
-重合性化合物B1-
 感光性層は、芳香環及び2つのエチレン性不飽和基を有する重合性化合物B1を含有することが好ましい。重合性化合物B1は、上述した重合性化合物のうち、一分子中に1つ以上の芳香環を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物である。
-Polymerizable compound B1-
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound B1 having an aromatic ring and two ethylenically unsaturated groups. The polymerizable compound B1 is a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having one or more aromatic rings in one molecule among the above-mentioned polymerizable compounds.
 感光性層中、重合性化合物の含有量に対する重合性化合物B1の含有量の質量比は、解像性がより優れる点から、40質量%以上であることが好ましく、50質量%以上であることがより好ましく、55質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、60質量%以上であることが特に好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、剥離性の点から、99質量%以下が好ましく、95質量%以下がより好ましく、90質量%以下が更に好ましく、85質量%以下が特に好ましい。 The mass ratio of the content of the polymerizable compound B1 to the content of the polymerizable compound in the photosensitive layer is preferably 40% by mass or more, preferably 50% by mass or more, from the viewpoint of better resolution. Is more preferable, 55% by mass or more is further preferable, and 60% by mass or more is particularly preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of peelability, 99% by mass or less is preferable, 95% by mass or less is more preferable, 90% by mass or less is further preferable, and 85% by mass or less is particularly preferable.
 重合性化合物B1が有する芳香環としては、例えば、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環及びアントラセン環等の芳香族炭化水素環、チオフェン環、フラン環、ピロール環、イミダゾール環、トリアゾール環及びピリジン環等の芳香族複素環、並びに、それらの縮合環が挙げられ、芳香族炭化水素環が好ましく、ベンゼン環がより好ましい。なお、上記芳香環は、置換基を有してもよい。
 重合性化合物B1は、芳香環を1つのみ有してもよく、2つ以上の芳香環を有してもよい。
Examples of the aromatic ring contained in the polymerizable compound B1 include aromatic hydrocarbon rings such as benzene ring, naphthalene ring and anthracene ring, thiophene ring, furan ring, pyrrole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring and pyridine ring. Heterocycles and fused rings thereof are mentioned, and aromatic hydrocarbon rings are preferable, and benzene rings are more preferable. The aromatic ring may have a substituent.
The polymerizable compound B1 may have only one aromatic ring, or may have two or more aromatic rings.
 重合性化合物B1は、現像液による感光性層の膨潤を抑制することにより、解像性が向上する点から、ビスフェノール構造を有することが好ましい。
 ビスフェノール構造としては、例えば、ビスフェノールA(2,2-ビス(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン)に由来するビスフェノールA構造、ビスフェノールF(2,2-ビス(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)メタン)に由来するビスフェノールF構造、及び、ビスフェノールB(2,2-ビス(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ブタン)に由来するビスフェノールB構造が挙げられ、ビスフェノールA構造が好ましい。
The polymerizable compound B1 preferably has a bisphenol structure from the viewpoint of improving the resolution by suppressing the swelling of the photosensitive layer due to the developing solution.
Examples of the bisphenol structure include a bisphenol A structure derived from bisphenol A (2,2-bis (4-hydroxyphenyl) propane) and a bisphenol derived from bisphenol F (2,2-bis (4-hydroxyphenyl) methane). Examples thereof include an F structure and a bisphenol B structure derived from bisphenol B (2,2-bis (4-hydroxyphenyl) butane), and a bisphenol A structure is preferable.
 ビスフェノール構造を有する重合性化合物B1としては、例えば、ビスフェノール構造と、そのビスフェノール構造の両端に結合した2つの重合性基(好ましくは(メタ)アクリロイル基)とを有する化合物が挙げられる。
 ビスフェノール構造の両端と2つの重合性基とは、直接結合してもよく、1つ以上のアルキレンオキシ基を介して結合してもよい。ビスフェノール構造の両端に付加するアルキレンオキシ基としては、エチレンオキシ基又はプロピレンオキシ基が好ましく、エチレンオキシ基がより好ましい。ビスフェノール構造に付加するアルキレンオキシ基の付加数は特に制限されないが、1分子あたり4~16個が好ましく、6~14個がより好ましい。
 ビスフェノール構造を有する重合性化合物B1については、特開2016-224162号公報の段落0072~0080に記載されており、この公報に記載の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
Examples of the polymerizable compound B1 having a bisphenol structure include a compound having a bisphenol structure and two polymerizable groups (preferably (meth) acryloyl groups) bonded to both ends of the bisphenol structure.
Both ends of the bisphenol structure and the two polymerizable groups may be directly bonded or may be bonded via one or more alkyleneoxy groups. As the alkyleneoxy group added to both ends of the bisphenol structure, an ethyleneoxy group or a propyleneoxy group is preferable, and an ethyleneoxy group is more preferable. The number of alkyleneoxy groups added to the bisphenol structure is not particularly limited, but 4 to 16 per molecule is preferable, and 6 to 14 is more preferable.
The polymerizable compound B1 having a bisphenol structure is described in paragraphs 0072 to 0080 of JP-A-2016-224162, and the contents described in this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
 重合性化合物B1としては、ビスフェノールA構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物が好ましく、2,2-ビス(4-((メタ)アクリロキシポリアルコキシ)フェニル)プロパンがより好ましい。
 2,2-ビス(4-((メタ)アクリロキシポリアルコキシ)フェニル)プロパンとしては、例えば、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシジエトキシ)フェニル)プロパン(FA-324M、日立化成(株)製)、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシエトキシプロポキシ)フェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシペンタエトキシ)フェニル)プロパン(BPE-500、新中村化学工業(株)製)、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシドデカエトキシテトラプロポキシ)フェニル)プロパン(FA-3200MY、日立化成(株)製)、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシペンタデカエトキシ)フェニル)プロパン(BPE-1300、新中村化学工業(株)製)、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシジエトキシ)フェニル)プロパン(BPE-200、新中村化学工業(株)製)、及び、エトキシ化(10)ビスフェノールAジアクリレート(NKエステルA-BPE-10、新中村化学工業(株)製)が挙げられる。
As the polymerizable compound B1, a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a bisphenol A structure is preferable, and 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acryloxypolyalkoxy) phenyl) propane is more preferable.
Examples of the 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acryloxipolyalkoxy) phenyl) propane include 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxydiethoxy) phenyl) propane (FA-324M, Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.). Co., Ltd.), 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxyethoxypropoxy) phenyl) propane, 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxypentethoxy) phenyl) propane (BPE-500, Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) (Manufactured by Co., Ltd.), 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxidodecaethoxytetrapropoxy) phenyl) propane (FA-3200MY, manufactured by Hitachi Kasei Co., Ltd.), 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxypentadeca) Ethoxy) phenyl) propane (BPE-1300, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxydiethoxy) phenyl) propane (BPE-200, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) ), And ethoxylated (10) bisphenol A diacrylate (NK ester A-BPE-10, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
 重合性化合物B1としては、下記一般式(I): The polymerizable compound B1 has the following general formula (I):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
{式中、R及びRはそれぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表し、AはCであり、BはCであり、n及びnはそれぞれ独立に、1~39の整数であり、かつn+nは2~40の整数であり、n2及びn4はそれぞれ独立に、0~29の整数であり、かつn2+nは0~30の整数であり、-(A-O)-及び-(B-O)-の繰り返し単位の配列は、ランダムであってもブロックであってもよい。そして、ブロックの場合、-(A-O)-と-(B-O)-とのいずれがビスフェニル基側でもよい。}
 で表される化合物を使用することができる。
 一態様において、n+n+n+nは、2~20が好ましく、2~16がより好ましく、4~12が更に好ましい。また、n+nは、0~10が好ましく、0~4がより好ましく、0~2が更に好ましく、0が特に好ましい。
{In the equation, R 1 and R 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, A is C 2 H 4 , B is C 3 H 6 , and n 1 and n 3 are independent, respectively. An integer of 1 to 39, n 1 + n 3 is an integer of 2 to 40, n 2 and n 4 are independently integers of 0 to 29, and n 2 + n 4 is an integer of 0 to 30. The sequence of repeating units of-(AO)-and-(BO)-may be random or block. In the case of a block, either − (A—O) − or − (BO) − may be on the bisphenyl group side. }
The compound represented by is used.
In one embodiment, n 1 + n 2 + n 3 + n 4 is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 16, and even more preferably 4 to 12. Further, n 2 + n 4 is preferably 0 to 10, more preferably 0 to 4, further preferably 0 to 2, and particularly preferably 0.
 重合性化合物B1は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 感光性層における、重合性化合物B1の含有量は、解像性がより優れる点から、感光性層の総質量に対して、10質量%以上が好ましく、20質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、転写性及びエッジフュージョン(転写部材の端部から感光性層中の成分、特にバインダーポリマー等が滲み出す現象)の点から、70質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%以下がより好ましい。
The polymerizable compound B1 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the polymerizable compound B1 in the photosensitive layer is preferably 10% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of more excellent resolution. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 70% by mass or less, preferably 60% by mass or less, from the viewpoint of transferability and edge fusion (a phenomenon in which components in the photosensitive layer, particularly binder polymer, etc., exude from the end of the transfer member). Is more preferable.
 感光性層は、上述した重合性化合物B1以外の重合性化合物を含有してもよい。
 重合性化合物B1以外の重合性化合物は、特に制限されず、公知の化合物の中から適宜選択できる。例えば、一分子中に1つのエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物(単官能エチレン性不飽和化合物)、芳香環を有さない2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物、及び、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物が挙げられる。
The photosensitive layer may contain a polymerizable compound other than the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1.
The polymerizable compound other than the polymerizable compound B1 is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from known compounds. For example, a compound having one ethylenically unsaturated group in one molecule (monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound), a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having no aromatic ring, and a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound. Examples include compounds.
 単官能エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、2-(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチルサクシネート、ポリエチレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。 Examples of the monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound include ethyl (meth) acrylate, ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl succinate, polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, and polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate. , And phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate.
 芳香環を有さない2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、アルキレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリアルキレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、トリメチロールプロパンジアクリレートが挙げられる。
 アルキレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレート(A-DCP、新中村化学工業(株)製)、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジメタクリレート(DCP、新中村化学工業(株)製)、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート(A-NOD-N、新中村化学工業(株)製)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(A-HD-N、新中村化学工業(株)製)、エチレングリコールジメタクリレート、1,10-デカンジオールジアクリレート、及び、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
 ポリアルキレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、ポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ジプロピレングリコールジアクリレート、トリプロピレングリコールジアクリレート、及び、ポリプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
 ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、プロピレンオキサイド変性ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレート、並びに、エチレンオキサイド及びプロピレンオキサイド変性ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。の市販品としては、例えば、8UX-015A(大成ファインケミカル(株)製)、UA-32P(新中村化学工業(株)製)、及び、UA-1100H(新中村化学工業(株)製)が挙げられる。
Examples of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having no aromatic ring include alkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polyalkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, urethane di (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane diacrylate. Be done.
Examples of the alkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate include tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate (A-DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and tricyclodecanedimethanol dimethacrylate (DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). ), 1,9-Nonandiol diacrylate (A-NOD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), 1,6-Hexanediol diacrylate (A-HD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) ), Ethylene glycol dimethacrylate, 1,10-decanediol diacrylate, and neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate.
Examples of the polyalkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate include polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, dipropylene glycol diacrylate, tripropylene glycol diacrylate, and polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate.
Examples of the urethane di (meth) acrylate include propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate, and ethylene oxide and propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate. 8UX-015A (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), UA-32P (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and UA-1100H (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) Can be mentioned.
 3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、ジペンタエリスリトール(トリ/テトラ/ペンタ/ヘキサ)(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトール(トリ/テトラ)(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールエタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、イソシアヌル酸トリ(メタ)アクリレート、グリセリントリ(メタ)アクリレート、並びに、これらのアルキレンオキサイド変性物が挙げられる。
 ここで、「(トリ/テトラ/ペンタ/ヘキサ)(メタ)アクリレート」は、トリ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、及びヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートを包含する概念であり、「(トリ/テトラ)(メタ)アクリレート」は、トリ(メタ)アクリレート及びテトラ(メタ)アクリレートを包含する概念である。一態様において、感光性層は、上述した重合性化合物B1及び3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましく、上述した重合性化合物B1及び2種以上の3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことがより好ましい。この場合、重合性化合物B1と3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の質量比は、(重合性化合物B1の合計質量):(3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の合計質量)=1:1~5:1が好ましく、1.2:1~4:1がより好ましく、1.5:1~3:1が更に好ましい。
 また、一態様において、感光性層は、上述した重合性化合物B1及び2種以上の3官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましい。
Examples of trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compounds include dipentaerythritol (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol (tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane tri (meth). Examples thereof include acrylates, ditrimethylolpropane tetra (meth) acrylates, trimethylolethanetri (meth) acrylates, tri (meth) acrylates of isocyanurates, glycerintri (meth) acrylates, and modified alkylene oxides thereof.
Here, "(tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate" is a concept including tri (meth) acrylate, tetra (meth) acrylate, penta (meth) acrylate, and hexa (meth) acrylate. , "(Tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate" is a concept that includes tri (meth) acrylate and tetra (meth) acrylate. In one embodiment, the photosensitive layer preferably contains the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1 and a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound, and the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1 and two or more trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compounds. More preferably, it contains a compound. In this case, the mass ratio of the polymerizable compound B1 to the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound is (total mass of the polymerizable compound B1): (total mass of the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound) = 1: 1. It is preferably ~ 5: 1, more preferably 1.2: 1 to 4: 1, and even more preferably 1.5: 1 to 3: 1.
In one embodiment, the photosensitive layer preferably contains the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1 and two or more trifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds.
 3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物のアルキレンオキサイド変性物としては、カプロラクトン変性(メタ)アクリレート化合物(日本化薬(株)製KAYARAD(登録商標)DPCA-20、新中村化学工業(株)製A-9300-1CL等)、アルキレンオキサイド変性(メタ)アクリレート化合物(日本化薬(株)製KAYARAD RP-1040、新中村化学工業(株)製ATM-35E及びA-9300、ダイセル・オルネクス社製EBECRYL(登録商標) 135等)、エトキシル化グリセリントリアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製A-GLY-9E等)、アロニックス(登録商標)TO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)、アロニックスM-520(東亞合成(株)製)、並びに、アロニックスM-510(東亞合成(株)製)が挙げられる。 Examples of the alkylene oxide-modified product of the trifunctional or higher-functional ethylenically unsaturated compound include caprolactone-modified (meth) acrylate compound (KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. and A manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). -9300-1CL, etc.), alkylene oxide-modified (meth) acrylate compound (KAYARAD RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ATM-35E and A-9300 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., EBECRYL manufactured by Daicel Ornex Co., Ltd. (Registered trademark) 135, etc.), ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate (A-GLY-9E, etc. manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Aronix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.), Aronix M- 520 (manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.) and Aronix M-510 (manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.) can be mentioned.
 また、重合性化合物B1以外の重合性化合物としては、特開2004-239942号公報の段落0025~0030に記載の酸基を有する重合性化合物を用いてもよい。 Further, as the polymerizable compound other than the polymerizable compound B1, the polymerizable compound having an acid group described in paragraphs 0025 to 0030 of JP-A-2004-239942 may be used.
 感光性層における重合性化合物の含有量Mmとバインダーポリマーの含有量Mbとの比Mm/Mbの値は、得られるエッチングパターンの解像度、及び、現像時の残渣抑制性の観点から、1.0以下であることが好ましく、0.9以下であることがより好ましく、0.5以上0.9以下であることが特に好ましい。
 また、感光性層における重合性化合物は、硬化性、及び、得られるエッチングパターンの解像度の観点から、(メタ)アクリル化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 更に、感光性層における重合性化合物は、硬化性、並びに、得られるエッチングパターンの解像度、及び、現像時の残渣抑制性の観点から、(メタ)アクリル化合物を含み、かつ感光性層に含まれる上記(メタ)アクリル化合物の全質量に対するアクリル化合物の含有量が、60質量%以下であることがより好ましい。
The value of the ratio Mm / Mb of the content Mm of the polymerizable compound and the content Mb of the binder polymer in the photosensitive layer is 1.0 from the viewpoint of the resolution of the obtained etching pattern and the residue suppression property during development. It is preferably less than or equal to, more preferably 0.9 or less, and particularly preferably 0.5 or more and 0.9 or less.
Further, the polymerizable compound in the photosensitive layer preferably contains a (meth) acrylic compound from the viewpoint of curability and the resolution of the obtained etching pattern.
Further, the polymerizable compound in the photosensitive layer contains a (meth) acrylic compound and is contained in the photosensitive layer from the viewpoint of curability, resolution of the obtained etching pattern, and residue suppression during development. It is more preferable that the content of the acrylic compound with respect to the total mass of the (meth) acrylic compound is 60% by mass or less.
 重合性化合物は、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 感光性層における重合性化合物の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対し、10質量%~70質量%が好ましく、20質量%~60質量%がより好ましく、20質量%~50質量%が更に好ましい。
The polymerizable compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the polymerizable compound in the photosensitive layer is preferably 10% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 20% by mass to 60% by mass, and 20% by mass to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. More preferred.
 重合性化合物B1を含む重合性化合物の重量平均分子量(Mw)としては、200~3,000が好ましく、280~2,200がより好ましく、300~2,200が更に好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymerizable compound containing the polymerizable compound B1 is preferably 200 to 3,000, more preferably 280 to 2,200, and even more preferably 300 to 2,200.
(その他の成分)
 感光性層は、バインダーポリマー及び重合性化合物以外の成分を含有してもよい。
(Other ingredients)
The photosensitive layer may contain components other than the binder polymer and the polymerizable compound.
-光重合開始剤-
 感光性層は、光重合開始剤を含有することが好ましい。
 光重合開始剤は、紫外線、可視光線及びX線等の活性光線を受けて、重合性化合物の重合を開始する化合物である。光重合開始剤としては、特に制限されず、公知の光重合開始剤を用いることができる。
 光重合開始剤としては、例えば、光ラジカル重合開始剤及び光カチオン重合開始剤が挙げられ、光ラジカル重合開始剤が好ましい。
-Photopolymerization initiator-
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator.
The photopolymerization initiator is a compound that initiates the polymerization of a polymerizable compound by receiving active rays such as ultraviolet rays, visible rays and X-rays. The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, and a known photopolymerization initiator can be used.
Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include a photoradical polymerization initiator and a photocationic polymerization initiator, and a photoradical polymerization initiator is preferable.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、例えば、オキシムエステル構造を有する光重合開始剤、α-アミノアルキルフェノン構造を有する光重合開始剤、α-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン構造を有する光重合開始剤、アシルフォスフィンオキサイド構造を有する光重合開始剤、及び、N-フェニルグリシン構造を有する光重合開始剤が挙げられる。 Examples of the photoradical polymerization initiator include a photopolymerization initiator having an oxime ester structure, a photopolymerization initiator having an α-aminoalkylphenone structure, a photopolymerization initiator having an α-hydroxyalkylphenone structure, and an acylphosphine oxide. Examples thereof include a photopolymerization initiator having a structure and a photopolymerization initiator having an N-phenylglycine structure.
 また、感光性層は、感光性、露光部及び非露光部の視認性、及び、解像性の観点から、光ラジカル重合開始剤として、2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール二量体及びその誘導体よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましい。なお、2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール二量体及びその誘導体における2つの2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール構造は、同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール二量体の誘導体としては、例えば、2-(o-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体、2-(o-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジ(メトキシフェニル)イミダゾール二量体、2-(o-フルオロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体、2-(o-メトキシフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体、及び、2-(p-メトキシフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体が挙げられる。
Further, the photosensitive layer is a 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer as a photoradical polymerization initiator from the viewpoints of photosensitivity, visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, and resolvability, and a dimer thereof. It preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of derivatives. The two 2,4,5-triarylimidazole structures in the 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer and its derivatives may be the same or different.
Derivatives of the 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer include, for example, 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-di. (Methoxyphenyl) imidazole dimer, 2- (o-fluorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2- (o-methoxyphenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, and 2 -(P-Methenylphenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer can be mentioned.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、例えば、特開2011-95716号公報の段落0031~0042、特開2015-14783号公報の段落0064~0081に記載された重合開始剤を用いてもよい。 As the photoradical polymerization initiator, for example, the polymerization initiator described in paragraphs 0031 to 0042 of JP2011-95716A and paragraphs 0064 to 0081 of JP2015-14783 may be used.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、例えば、ジメチルアミノ安息香酸エチル(DBE、CAS No.10287-53-3)、ベンゾインメチルエーテル、アニシル(p,p’-ジメトキシベンジル)、TAZ-110(商品名:みどり化学(株)製)、ベンゾフェノン、TAZ-111(商品名:みどり化学(株)製)、IrgacureOXE01、OXE02、OXE03、OXE04(BASF社製)、Omnirad651及び369(商品名:IGM Resins B.V.社製)、及び、2,2’-ビス(2-クロロフェニル)-4,4’,5,5’-テトラフェニル-1,2’-ビイミダゾール(東京化成工業(株)製)が挙げられる。 Examples of the photoradical polymerization initiator include ethyl dimethylaminobenzoate (DBE, CAS No. 10287-53-3), benzoin methyl ether, anisyl (p, p'-dimethoxybenzyl), and TAZ-110 (trade name:). Midori Kagaku Co., Ltd., Benzoinone, TAZ-111 (trade name: Midori Kagaku Co., Ltd.), IrgacureOXE01, OXE02, OXE03, OXE04 (BASF), Omnirad 651 and 369 (trade name: IGM Resins B.V.) , And 2,2'-bis (2-chlorophenyl) -4,4', 5,5'-tetraphenyl-1,2'-biimidazole (manufactured by Tokyo Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.) Be done.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤の市販品としては、例えば、1-[4-(フェニルチオ)フェニル]-1,2-オクタンジオン-2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)(商品名:IRGACURE(登録商標) OXE-01、BASF社製)、1-[9-エチル-6-(2-メチルベンゾイル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]エタノン-1-(O-アセチルオキシム)(商品名:IRGACURE OXE-02、BASF社製)、IRGACURE OXE-03(BASF社製)、2-(ジメチルアミノ)-2-[(4-メチルフェニル)メチル]-1-[4-(4-モルフォリニル)フェニル]-1-ブタノン(商品名:Omnirad 379EG、IGM Resins B.V.製)、2-メチル-1-(4-メチルチオフェニル)-2-モルフォリノプロパン-1-オン(商品名:Omnirad 907、IGM Resins B.V.製)、2-ヒドロキシ-1-{4-[4-(2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチルプロピオニル)ベンジル]フェニル}-2-メチルプロパン-1-オン(商品名:Omnirad 127、IGM Resins B.V.製)、2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルフォリノフェニル)ブタノン-1(商品名:Omnirad 369、IGM Resins B.V.製)、2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチル-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン(商品名:Omnirad 1173、IGM Resins B.V.製)、1-ヒドロキシシクロヘキシルフェニルケトン(商品名:Omnirad 184、IGM Resins B.V.製)、2,2-ジメトキシ-1,2-ジフェニルエタン-1-オン(商品名:Omnirad 651、IGM Resins B.V.製)、2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾリル-ジフェニルフォスフィンオキサイド(商品名:Omnirad TPO H、IGM Resins B.V.製)、ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾリル)フェニルフォスフィンオキサイド(商品名:Omnirad 819、IGM Resins B.V.製)、オキシムエステル系の光重合開始剤(商品名:Lunar 6、DKSHジャパン(株)製)、2,2’-ビス(2-クロロフェニル)-4,4’,5,5’-テトラフェニルビスイミダゾール(2-(2-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体)(商品名:B-CIM、Hampford社製)、及び、2-(o-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体(商品名:BCTB、東京化成工業(株)製)が挙げられる。 Examples of commercially available photoradical polymerization initiators include 1- [4- (phenylthio) phenyl] -1,2-octanedione-2- (O-benzoyloxime) (trade name: IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE-. 01, manufactured by BASF), 1- [9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazole-3-yl] etanone-1- (O-acetyloxime) (trade name: IRGACURE OXE-02, BASF), IRGACURE OXE-03 (BASF), 2- (dimethylamino) -2-[(4-methylphenyl) methyl] -1- [4- (4-morpholinyl) phenyl] -1-butanone (Product name: Omnirad 379EG, IGM Resins BV), 2-Methyl-1- (4-methylthiophenyl) -2-morpholinopropane-1-one (Product name: Omnirad 907, IGM Resins BV) , 2-Hydroxy-1- {4- [4- (2-hydroxy-2-methylpropionyl) benzyl] phenyl} -2-methylpropan-1-one (trade name: Omnirad 127, IGM Resins B. V.), 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) butanone-1 (trade name: Omnirad 369, IGM Resins B.V.), 2-hydroxy-2-methyl- 1-Phenylpropan-1-one (trade name: Omnirad 1173, manufactured by IGM Resins VV), 1-hydroxycyclohexylphenylketone (trade name: Omnirad 184, manufactured by IGM Resins VV), 2,2- Dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethane-1-one (trade name: Omnirad 651, manufactured by IGM Resins VV), 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl-diphenylphosphine oxide (trade name: Omnirad TPO H,) IGM Resins B.V.), Bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) phenylphosphine oxide (trade name: Omnirad 819, IGM Resins B.V.), Oxime ester-based photopolymerization initiator ( Product name: Lunar 6, manufactured by DKSH Japan Co., Ltd., 2,2'-bis (2-chlorophenyl) -4,4', 5,5'-tetraphenylbisimidazole (2- (2-chlorophenyl) -4) , 5-Diphenylimidazole dimer ) (Product name: B-CIM, manufactured by Hampford) and 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer (trade name: BCTB, manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). ..
 光カチオン重合開始剤(光酸発生剤)は、活性光線を受けて酸を発生する化合物である。光カチオン重合開始剤としては、波長300nm以上、好ましくは波長300~450nmの活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物が好ましいが、その化学構造は制限されない。また、波長300nm以上の活性光線に直接感応しない光カチオン重合開始剤についても、増感剤と併用することによって波長300nm以上の活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物であれば、増感剤と組み合わせて好ましく用いることができる。
 光カチオン重合開始剤としては、pKaが4以下の酸を発生する光カチオン重合開始剤が好ましく、pKaが3以下の酸を発生する光カチオン重合開始剤がより好ましく、pKaが2以下の酸を発生する光カチオン重合開始剤が特に好ましい。pKaの下限値は特に定めないが、例えば、-10.0以上が好ましい。
A photocationic polymerization initiator (photoacid generator) is a compound that generates an acid by receiving active light. As the photocationic polymerization initiator, a compound that is sensitive to active light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably a wavelength of 300 to 450 nm and generates an acid is preferable, but its chemical structure is not limited. In addition, a photocationic polymerization initiator that is not directly sensitive to active light with a wavelength of 300 nm or more is also a sensitizer if it is a compound that is sensitive to active light with a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. Can be preferably used in combination with.
As the photocationic polymerization initiator, a photocationic polymerization initiator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less is preferable, a photocationic polymerization initiator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less is more preferable, and an acid having a pKa of 2 or less is used. The generated photocationic polymerization initiator is particularly preferable. The lower limit of pKa is not particularly defined, but is preferably -10.0 or higher, for example.
 光カチオン重合開始剤としては、イオン性光カチオン重合開始剤及び非イオン性光カチオン重合開始剤が挙げられる。
 イオン性光カチオン重合開始剤として、例えば、ジアリールヨードニウム塩類及びトリアリールスルホニウム塩類等のオニウム塩化合物、並びに、第4級アンモニウム塩類が挙げられる。
 イオン性光カチオン重合開始剤としては、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0114~0133に記載のイオン性光カチオン重合開始剤を用いてもよい。
Examples of the photocationic polymerization initiator include an ionic photocationic polymerization initiator and a nonionic photocationic polymerization initiator.
Examples of the ionic photocationic polymerization initiator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts.
As the ionic photocationic polymerization initiator, the ionic photocationic polymerization initiator described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 may be used.
 非イオン性光カチオン重合開始剤としては、例えば、トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物、イミドスルホネート化合物、及び、オキシムスルホネート化合物が挙げられる。トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物及びイミドスルホネート化合物としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0083~0088に記載の化合物を用いてもよい。また、オキシムスルホネート化合物としては、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0084~0088に記載された化合物を用いてもよい。 Examples of the nonionic photocationic polymerization initiator include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds. As the trichloromethyl-s-triazines, the diazomethane compound and the imide sulfonate compound, the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP2011-221494 may be used. Further, as the oxime sulfonate compound, the compounds described in paragraphs 0084 to 0088 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 may be used.
 感光性層は、光ラジカル重合開始剤を含有することが好ましく、2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール二量体及びその誘導体よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有することがより好ましい。 The photosensitive layer preferably contains a photoradical polymerization initiator, and more preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimers and derivatives thereof.
 感光性層は、光重合開始剤を、1種単独で含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。
 感光性層における光重合開始剤の含有量は、特に制限されないが、感光性層の全質量に対し、0.1質量%以上が好ましく、0.5質量%以上がより好ましく、1.0質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、感光性層の全質量に対し、10質量%以下が好ましく、5質量%以下がより好ましい。
The photosensitive layer may contain one type of photopolymerization initiator alone, or may contain two or more types of photopolymerization initiators.
The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the photosensitive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and 1.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. % Or more is more preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
-色素-
 感光性層は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性、現像後のパターン視認性、及び、解像性の観点から、発色時の波長範囲400nm~780nmにおける最大吸収波長が450nm以上であり、かつ、酸、塩基、又はラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素(単に「色素N」ともいう。)を含有することが好ましい。色素Nを含有すると、詳細なメカニズムは不明であるが、隣接する層(例えば支持体及び中間層)との密着性が向上し、解像性により優れる。
-Dye-
The photosensitive layer has a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development from the viewpoints of visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, pattern visibility after development, and resolution. , It is preferable to contain a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base, or a radical (also simply referred to as "dye N"). When the dye N is contained, the detailed mechanism is unknown, but the adhesion to the adjacent layer (for example, the support and the intermediate layer) is improved, and the resolution is more excellent.
 本明細書において、色素が「酸、塩基又はラジカルにより極大吸収波長が変化する」とは、発色状態にある色素が酸、塩基又はラジカルにより消色する態様、消色状態にある色素が酸、塩基又はラジカルにより発色する態様、及び、発色状態にある色素が他の色相の発色状態に変化する態様のいずれの態様を意味してもよい。
 具体的には、色素Nは、露光により消色状態から変化して発色する化合物であってもよいし、露光により発色状態から変化して消色する化合物であってもよい。この場合、露光により酸、塩基又はラジカルが感光性層内において発生し作用することにより、発色又は消色の状態が変化する色素でもよく、酸、塩基又はラジカルにより感光性層内の状態(例えばpH)が変化することで発色又は消色の状態が変化する色素でもよい。また、露光を介さずに、酸、塩基又はラジカルを刺激として直接受けて発色又は消色の状態が変化する色素でもよい。
In the present specification, the term "the maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base or a radical" means that the dye in a color-developing state is decolorized by an acid, a base or a radical, and the dye in a decolorized state is an acid. It may mean any aspect of a mode in which a color is developed by a base or a radical, or a mode in which a dye in a color-developing state changes to a color-developing state of another hue.
Specifically, the dye N may be a compound that changes from the decolorized state by exposure to develop a color, or may be a compound that changes from the decolorized state by exposure to decolorize. In this case, the dye may change the state of color development or decolorization by generating and acting on the acid, base or radical in the photosensitive layer by exposure, and the state in the photosensitive layer by the acid, base or radical (for example). It may be a dye whose color development or decolorization state changes by changing pH). Further, it may be a dye that changes the state of color development or decolorization by directly receiving an acid, a base or a radical as a stimulus without exposure.
 中でも、露光部及び非露光部の視認性並びに解像性の観点から、色素Nは、酸又はラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素が好ましく、ラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素がより好ましい。
 感光性層は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性並びに解像性の観点から、色素Nとしてラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素、及び、光ラジカル重合開始剤の両者を含有することが好ましい。
 また、露光部及び非露光部の視認性の観点から、色素Nは、酸、塩基、又はラジカルにより発色する色素であることが好ましい。
Among them, from the viewpoint of visibility and resolution of the exposed and non-exposed areas, the dye N is preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid or a radical, and more preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by a radical.
From the viewpoint of visibility and resolution of the exposed and non-exposed areas, the photosensitive layer preferably contains both a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by radicals as dye N and a photoradical polymerization initiator. ..
Further, from the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion, the dye N is preferably a dye that develops color by an acid, a base, or a radical.
 本開示における色素Nの発色機構の例としては、感光性層に光ラジカル重合開始剤、光カチオン重合開始剤(光酸発生剤)又は光塩基発生剤を添加して、露光後に光ラジカル重合開始剤、光カチオン重合開始剤又は光塩基発生剤から発生するラジカル、酸又は塩基によって、ラジカル反応性色素、酸反応性色素又は塩基反応性色素(例えばロイコ色素)が発色する態様が挙げられる。 As an example of the color development mechanism of the dye N in the present disclosure, a photoradical polymerization initiator, a photocationic polymerization initiator (photoacid generator) or a photobase generator is added to the photosensitive layer, and photoradical polymerization is started after exposure. Examples thereof include an embodiment in which a radical-reactive dye, an acid-reactive dye or a base-reactive dye (for example, a leuco dye) is colored by a radical, acid or base generated from an agent, a photocationic polymerization initiator or a photobase generator.
 色素Nは、露光部及び非露光部の視認性の観点から、発色時の波長範囲400nm~780nmにおける極大吸収波長が、550nm以上であることが好ましく、550nm~700nmであることがより好ましく、550nm~650nmであることが更に好ましい。
 また、色素Nは、発色時の波長範囲400nm~780nmにおける極大吸収波長を1つのみ有していてもよく、2つ以上有していてもよい。色素Nが発色時の波長範囲400nm~780nmにおける極大吸収波長を2つ以上有する場合は、2つ以上の極大吸収波長のうち吸光度が最も高い極大吸収波長が450nm以上であればよい。
From the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed and unexposed areas, the dye N preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength of 550 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, more preferably 550 nm to 700 nm. It is more preferably about 650 nm.
Further, the dye N may have only one maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, or may have two or more. When the dye N has two or more maximum absorption wavelengths in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, the maximum absorption wavelength having the highest absorbance among the two or more maximum absorption wavelengths may be 450 nm or more.
 色素Nの極大吸収波長は、大気雰囲気下で、分光光度計:UV3100((株)島津製作所製)を用いて、400nm~780nmの範囲で色素Nを含有する溶液(液温25℃)の透過スペクトルを測定し、光の強度が極小となる波長(極大吸収波長)を検出することにより、得られる。 The maximum absorption wavelength of the dye N is transmitted by a solution containing the dye N (liquid temperature 25 ° C.) in the range of 400 nm to 780 nm using a spectrophotometer: UV3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) in an atmospheric atmosphere. It is obtained by measuring the spectrum and detecting the wavelength at which the light intensity becomes the minimum (maximum absorption wavelength).
 露光により発色又は消色する色素としては、例えば、ロイコ化合物が挙げられる。
 露光により消色する色素としては、例えば、ロイコ化合物、ジアリールメタン系色素、オキザジン系色素、キサンテン系色素、イミノナフトキノン系色素、アゾメチン系色素及びアントラキノン系色素が挙げられる。
 色素Nとしては、露光部及び非露光部の視認性の観点から、ロイコ化合物が好ましい。
Examples of the dye that develops or decolorizes by exposure include leuco compounds.
Examples of dyes that are decolorized by exposure include leuco compounds, diarylmethane dyes, oxazine dyes, xanthene dyes, iminonaphthoquinone dyes, azomethine dyes and anthraquinone dyes.
As the dye N, a leuco compound is preferable from the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion.
 ロイコ化合物としては、例えば、トリアリールメタン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(トリアリールメタン系色素)、スピロピラン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(スピロピラン系色素)、フルオラン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(フルオラン系色素)、ジアリールメタン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(ジアリールメタン系色素)、ローダミンラクタム骨格を有するロイコ化合物(ローダミンラクタム系色素)、インドリルフタリド骨格を有するロイコ化合物(インドリルフタリド系色素)、及び、ロイコオーラミン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(ロイコオーラミン系色素)が挙げられる。
 中でも、トリアリールメタン系色素又はフルオラン系色素が好ましく、トリフェニルメタン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(トリフェニルメタン系色素)又はフルオラン系色素がより好ましい。
Examples of the leuco compound include a leuco compound having a triarylmethane skeleton (triarylmethane dye), a leuco compound having a spiropylan skeleton (spiropylan dye), a leuco compound having a fluorane skeleton (fluorane dye), and a diarylmethane skeleton. Leuco compounds (diarylmethane dyes), leuco compounds having a rhodamine lactam skeleton (rodamine lactam dyes), leuco compounds having an indolylphthalide skeleton (indolylphthalide dyes), and leukooramine skeletons. Examples thereof include leuco compounds having leuco compounds (leuco auramine dyes).
Among them, a triarylmethane dye or a fluorane dye is preferable, and a leuco compound having a triphenylmethane skeleton (triphenylmethane dye) or a fluorane dye is more preferable.
 ロイコ化合物としては、露光部及び非露光部の視認性の観点から、ラクトン環、スルチン環又はスルトン環を有することが好ましい。これにより、ロイコ化合物が有するラクトン環、スルチン環又はスルトン環を、光ラジカル重合開始剤から発生するラジカル又は光カチオン重合開始剤から発生する酸と反応させて、ロイコ化合物を閉環状態に変化させて消色させるか、又は、ロイコ化合物を開環状態に変化させて発色させることができる。ロイコ化合物としては、ラクトン環、スルチン環又はスルトン環を有し、ラジカル又は酸によりラクトン環、スルチン環又はスルトン環が開環して発色する化合物が好ましく、ラクトン環を有し、ラジカル又は酸によりラクトン環が開環して発色する化合物がより好ましい。 The leuco compound preferably has a lactone ring, a surujin ring, or a sultone ring from the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion. As a result, the lactone ring, sultin ring, or sulton ring of the leuco compound is reacted with the radical generated from the photoradical polymerization initiator or the acid generated from the photocationic polymerization initiator to change the leuco compound into a ring-closed state. The color can be decolorized or the leuco compound can be changed to an open ring state to develop a color. The leuco compound preferably has a lactone ring, a sultone ring or a sultone ring, and the lactone ring, the sultone ring or the sultone ring is opened by a radical or an acid to develop a color. A compound in which the lactone ring is opened to develop color is more preferable.
 色素Nとしては、例えば、以下の染料及びロイコ化合物が挙げられる。
 色素Nのうち染料の具体例としては、ブリリアントグリーン、エチルバイオレット、メチルグリーン、クリスタルバイオレット、ベイシックフクシン、メチルバイオレット2B、キナルジンレッド、ローズベンガル、メタニルイエロー、チモールスルホフタレイン、キシレノールブルー、メチルオレンジ、パラメチルレッド、コンゴーフレッド、ベンゾプルプリン4B、α-ナフチルレッド、ナイルブルー2B、ナイルブルーA、メチルバイオレット、マラカイトグリーン、パラフクシン、ビクトリアピュアブルー-ナフタレンスルホン酸塩、ビクトリアピュアブルーBOH(保土谷化学工業(株)製)、オイルブルー#603(オリヱント化学工業(株)製)、オイルピンク#312(オリヱント化学工業(株)製)、オイルレッド5B(オリヱント化学工業(株)製)、オイルスカーレット#308(オリヱント化学工業(株)製)、オイルレッドOG(オリヱント化学工業(株)製)、オイルレッドRR(オリヱント化学工業(株)製)、オイルグリーン#502(オリヱント化学工業(株)製)、スピロンレッドBEHスペシャル(保土谷化学工業(株)製)、m-クレゾールパープル、クレゾールレッド、ローダミンB、ローダミン6G、スルホローダミンB、オーラミン、4-p-ジエチルアミノフェニルイミノナフトキノン、2-カルボキシアニリノ-4-p-ジエチルアミノフェニルイミノナフトキノン、2-カルボキシステアリルアミノ-4-p-N,N-ビス(ヒドロキシエチル)アミノ-フェニルイミノナフトキノン、1-フェニル-3-メチル-4-p-ジエチルアミノフェニルイミノ-5-ピラゾロン、及び、1-β-ナフチル-4-p-ジエチルアミノフェニルイミノ-5-ピラゾロンが挙げられる。
Examples of the dye N include the following dyes and leuco compounds.
Specific examples of dyes among dyes N include brilliant green, ethyl violet, methyl green, crystal violet, basic fuxin, methyl violet 2B, quinaldine red, rose bengal, methanyl yellow, timol sulfophthalein, xylenol blue, and methyl. Orange, paramethyl red, congofred, benzopurpurin 4B, α-naphthyl red, nile blue 2B, nile blue A, methyl violet, malakite green, parafuxin, Victoria pure blue-naphthalene sulfonate, Victoria pure blue BOH Tsuchiya Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Blue # 603 (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Pink # 312 (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Red 5B (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Scarlet # 308 (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Red OG (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Red RR (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Green # 502 (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) ), Spiron Red BEH Special (manufactured by Hodoya Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), m-cresol purple, cresol red, rodamine B, rodamine 6G, sulfolodamine B, auramine, 4-p-diethylaminophenyliminonaphthoquinone, 2-carboxy Anilino-4-p-diethylaminophenyliminonaphthoquinone, 2-carboxystearylamino-4-p-N, N-bis (hydroxyethyl) amino-phenyliminonaphthoquinone, 1-phenyl-3-methyl-4-p-diethylamino Examples thereof include phenylimino-5-pyrazolone and 1-β-naphthyl-4-p-diethylaminophenylimino-5-pyrazolone.
 色素Nのうちロイコ化合物の具体例としては、p,p’,p”-ヘキサメチルトリアミノトリフェニルメタン(ロイコクリスタルバイオレット)、Pergascript Blue SRB(チバガイギー社製)、クリスタルバイオレットラクトン、マラカイトグリーンラクトン、ベンゾイルロイコメチレンブルー、2-(N-フェニル-N-メチルアミノ)-6-(N-p-トリル-N-エチル)アミノフルオラン、2-アニリノ-3-メチル-6-(N-エチル-p-トルイジノ)フルオラン、3,6-ジメトキシフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-5-メチル-7-(N,N-ジベンジルアミノ)フルオラン、3-(N-シクロヘキシル-N-メチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-アニリノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-アニリノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-キシリジノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-クロロフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-6-メトキシ-7-アミノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-7-(4-クロロアニリノ)フルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-7-クロロフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-7-ベンジルアミノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-7,8-ベンゾフロオラン、3-(N,N-ジブチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-アニリノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジブチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-キシリジノフルオラン、3-ピペリジノ-6-メチル-7-アニリノフルオラン、3-ピロリジノ-6-メチル-7-アニリノフルオラン、3,3-ビス(1-エチル-2-メチルインドール-3-イル)フタリド、3,3-ビス(1-n-ブチル-2-メチルインドール-3-イル)フタリド、3,3-ビス(p-ジメチルアミノフェニル)-6-ジメチルアミノフタリド、3-(4-ジエチルアミノ-2-エトキシフェニル)-3-(1-エチル-2-メチルインドール-3-イル)-4-ザフタリド、3-(4-ジエチルアミノフェニル)-3-(1-エチル-2-メチルインドール-3-イル)フタリド、及び、3’,6’-ビス(ジフェニルアミノ)スピロイソベンゾフラン-1(3H),9’-[9H]キサンテン-3-オンが挙げられる。 Specific examples of the leuco compound among the dyes N include p, p', p "-hexamethyltriaminotriphenylmethane (leucocrystal violet), Pergascript Blue SRB (manufactured by Ciba Geigy), crystal violet lactone, and malakite green lactone. Benzoyl leucomethylene blue, 2- (N-phenyl-N-methylamino) -6- (Np-tolyl-N-ethyl) aminofluorane, 2-anilino-3-methyl-6- (N-ethyl-p) -Truizino) fluorane, 3,6-dimethoxyfluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -5-methyl-7- (N, N-dibenzylamino) fluorane, 3- (N-cyclohexyl-N-methyl) Amino) -6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -6-methyl-7 -Xylidinofluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -6-methyl-7-chlorofluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -6-methoxy-7-aminofluorane, 3- (N) , N-diethylamino) -7- (4-chloroanilino) fluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -7-chlorofluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -7-benzylaminofluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -7,8-benzofluorolane, 3- (N, N-dibutylamino) -6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3- (N, N-dibutylamino) -6 -Methyl-7-xylidinofluorane, 3-piperidino-6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3-pyrrolidino-6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3,3-bis (1-ethyl- 2-Methylindole-3-yl) phthalide, 3,3-bis (1-n-butyl-2-methylindole-3-yl) phthalide, 3,3-bis (p-dimethylaminophenyl) -6-dimethyl Aminophthalide, 3- (4-diethylamino-2-ethoxyphenyl) -3- (1-ethyl-2-methylindole-3-yl) -4-zaphthalide, 3- (4-diethylaminophenyl) -3-( 1-ethyl-2-methylindole-3-yl) phthalide and 3', 6'-bis (diphenylamino) spirisobenzofuran-1 (3H), 9'-[9H] xanthen-3-one. Be done.
 色素Nは、露光部及び非露光部の視認性、現像後のパターン視認性、及び、解像性の観点から、ラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素であることが好ましく、ラジカルにより発色する色素であることがより好ましい。
 色素Nとしては、ロイコクリスタルバイオレット、クリスタルバイオレットラクトン、ブリリアントグリーン、又は、ビクトリアピュアブルー-ナフタレンスルホン酸塩が好ましい。
The dye N is preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by radicals from the viewpoints of visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, pattern visibility after development, and resolution, and is a dye that develops color by radicals. Is more preferable.
As the dye N, leuco crystal violet, crystal violet lactone, brilliant green, or Victoria pure blue-naphthalene sulfonate is preferable.
 色素Nは、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 色素Nの含有量は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性、現像後のパターン視認性、及び、解像性の観点から、感光性層の全質量に対し、0.1質量%以上が好ましく、0.1質量%~10質量%がより好ましく、0.1質量%~5質量%が更に好ましく、0.1質量%~1質量%が特に好ましい。
The dye N may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the dye N is preferably 0.1% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer from the viewpoints of visibility of the exposed and non-exposed areas, pattern visibility after development, and resolution. , 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1% by mass to 5% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.1% by mass to 1% by mass.
 色素Nの含有量は、感光性層に含まれる色素Nの全てを発色状態にした場合の色素の含有量を意味する。以下に、ラジカルにより発色する色素を例に、色素Nの含有量の定量方法を説明する。
 メチルエチルケトン100mLに、色素0.001g及び0.01gを溶かした2種類の溶液を調製する。得られた各溶液に、光ラジカル重合開始剤Irgacure OXE01(商品名、BASFジャパン株式会社)を加え、365nmの光を照射することによりラジカルを発生させ、全ての色素を発色状態にする。その後、大気雰囲気下で、分光光度計(UV3100、(株)島津製作所製)を用いて、液温が25℃である各溶液の吸光度を測定し、検量線を作成する。
 次に、色素に代えて感光性層3gをメチルエチルケトンに溶かすこと以外は上記と同様の方法で、色素を全て発色させた溶液の吸光度を測定する。得られた感光性層を含有する溶液の吸光度から、検量線に基づいて感光性層に含まれる色素の含有量を算出する。
The content of the dye N means the content of the dye when all of the dye N contained in the photosensitive layer is in a colored state. Hereinafter, a method for quantifying the content of dye N will be described by taking a dye that develops color by radicals as an example.
Two kinds of solutions in which 0.001 g and 0.01 g of the dye are dissolved in 100 mL of methyl ethyl ketone are prepared. A photoradical polymerization initiator Irgacure OXE01 (trade name, BASF Japan Co., Ltd.) is added to each of the obtained solutions, and radicals are generated by irradiating with light of 365 nm to bring all the dyes into a colored state. Then, in an atmospheric atmosphere, the absorbance of each solution having a liquid temperature of 25 ° C. is measured using a spectrophotometer (UV3100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation), and a calibration curve is prepared.
Next, the absorbance of the solution in which all the dyes are colored is measured by the same method as above except that 3 g of the photosensitive layer is dissolved in methyl ethyl ketone instead of the dye. From the absorbance of the obtained solution containing the photosensitive layer, the content of the dye contained in the photosensitive layer is calculated based on the calibration curve.
-熱架橋性化合物-
 感光性層は、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、熱架橋性化合物を含むことが好ましい。なお、本明細書においては、後述する重合性基を有する熱架橋性化合物は、重合性化合物としては扱わず、熱架橋性化合物として扱うものとする。
 熱架橋性化合物としては、メチロール化合物、及びブロックイソシアネート化合物が挙げられる。中でも、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、ブロックイソシアネート化合物が好ましい。
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物は、ヒドロキシ基及びカルボキシ基と反応するため、例えば、バインダーポリマー及び/又は重合性化合物等が、ヒドロキシ基及びカルボキシ基の少なくとも一方を有する場合には、形成される膜の親水性が下がり、感光性層を硬化した膜を保護膜として使用する場合の機能が強化される傾向がある。
 なお、ブロックイソシアネート化合物とは、「イソシアネートのイソシアネート基をブロック剤で保護(いわゆる、マスク)した構造を有する化合物」を指す。
-Thermal crosslinkable compound-
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a heat-crosslinkable compound from the viewpoint of the strength of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film. In this specification, the heat-crosslinkable compound having a polymerizable group described later is not treated as a polymerizable compound, but is treated as a heat-crosslinkable compound.
Examples of the heat-crosslinkable compound include a methylol compound and a blocked isocyanate compound. Of these, a blocked isocyanate compound is preferable from the viewpoint of the strength of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film.
Since the blocked isocyanate compound reacts with a hydroxy group and a carboxy group, for example, when the binder polymer and / or the polymerizable compound has at least one of the hydroxy group and the carboxy group, the hydrophilicity of the formed film becomes There is a tendency for the function to be enhanced when a film obtained by lowering and curing the photosensitive layer is used as a protective film.
The blocked isocyanate compound refers to "a compound having a structure in which the isocyanate group of isocyanate is protected (so-called masked) with a blocking agent".
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物の解離温度は、特に制限されないが、100℃~160℃が好ましく、130℃~150℃がより好ましい。
 ブロックイソシアネートの解離温度とは、「示差走査熱量計を用いて、DSC(Differential scanning calorimetry)分析にて測定した場合における、ブロックイソシアネートの脱保護反応に伴う吸熱ピークの温度」を意味する。
 示差走査熱量計としては、例えば、セイコーインスツルメンツ(株)製の示差走査熱量計(型式:DSC6200)を好適に使用できる。但し、示差走査熱量計は、これに限定されない。
The dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 ° C. to 160 ° C., more preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
The dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate means "the temperature of the endothermic peak associated with the deprotection reaction of the blocked isocyanate when measured by DSC (Differential scanning calorimetry) analysis using a differential scanning calorimeter".
As the differential scanning calorimeter, for example, a differential scanning calorimeter (model: DSC6200) manufactured by Seiko Instruments Inc. can be preferably used. However, the differential scanning calorimeter is not limited to this.
 解離温度が100℃~160℃であるブロック剤としては、活性メチレン化合物〔マロン酸ジエステル(マロン酸ジメチル、マロン酸ジエチル、マロン酸ジn-ブチル、マロン酸ジ2-エチルヘキシル等)〕、オキシム化合物(ホルムアルドオキシム、アセトアルドオキシム、アセトオキシム、メチルエチルケトオキシム、及びシクロヘキサノンオキシム等の分子内に-C(=N-OH)-で表される構造を有する化合物)が挙げられる。
 これらの中でも、解離温度が100℃~160℃であるブロック剤としては、例えば、保存安定性の観点から、オキシム化合物を含むことが好ましい。
Examples of the blocking agent having a dissociation temperature of 100 ° C. to 160 ° C. include active methylene compounds [malonic acid diester (dimethyl malonate, diethyl malonate, din-butyl malonate, di2-ethylhexyl malonate, etc.)] and oxime compounds. (A compound having a structure represented by -C (= N-OH)-in the molecule such as formaldehyde, acetaldoxime, acetoxime, methylethylketooxime, and cyclohexanoneoxime) can be mentioned.
Among these, the blocking agent having a dissociation temperature of 100 ° C. to 160 ° C. preferably contains, for example, an oxime compound from the viewpoint of storage stability.
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物は、例えば、膜の脆性改良、被転写体との密着力向上等の観点から、イソシアヌレート構造を有することが好ましい。
 イソシアヌレート構造を有するブロックイソシアネート化合物は、例えば、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネートをイソシアヌレート化して保護することにより得られる。
 イソシアヌレート構造を有するブロックイソシアネート化合物の中でも、オキシム化合物をブロック剤として用いたオキシム構造を有する化合物が、オキシム構造を有さない化合物よりも解離温度を好ましい範囲にしやすく、且つ、現像残渣を少なくしやすいという観点から好ましい。
The blocked isocyanate compound preferably has an isocyanurate structure, for example, from the viewpoint of improving the brittleness of the membrane and improving the adhesion to the transferred material.
The blocked isocyanate compound having an isocyanurate structure can be obtained, for example, by isocyanurate-forming and protecting hexamethylene diisocyanate.
Among the blocked isocyanate compounds having an isocyanurate structure, a compound having an oxime structure using an oxime compound as a blocking agent is more likely to have a dissociation temperature in a preferable range than a compound having no oxime structure, and has a smaller development residue. It is preferable from the viewpoint of ease.
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物は、重合性基を有していてもよい。
 重合性基としては、特に制限はなく、公知の重合性基を用いることができ、ラジカル重合性基が好ましい。
 重合性基としては、(メタ)アクリロキシ基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、スチリル基等のエチレン性不飽和基、並びに、グリシジル基等のエポキシ基を有する基が挙げられる。
 中でも、重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和基が好ましく、(メタ)アクリロキシ基がより好ましく、アクリロキシ基が更に好ましい。
The blocked isocyanate compound may have a polymerizable group.
The polymerizable group is not particularly limited, and a known polymerizable group can be used, and a radical polymerizable group is preferable.
Examples of the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated group such as a (meth) acryloxy group, a (meth) acrylamide group and a styryl group, and a group having an epoxy group such as a glycidyl group.
Among them, as the polymerizable group, an ethylenically unsaturated group is preferable, a (meth) acryloxy group is more preferable, and an acryloxy group is further preferable.
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物としては、市販品を使用できる。
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物の市販品の例としては、カレンズ(登録商標) AOI-BM、カレンズ(登録商標) MOI-BM、カレンズ(登録商標) MOI-BP等(以上、昭和電工(株)製)、ブロック型のデュラネートシリーズ(例えば、デュラネート(登録商標) TPA-B80E、デュラネート(登録商標) WT32-B75P等、旭化成ケミカルズ(株)製)が挙げられる。
 また、ブロックイソシアネート化合物として、下記の構造の化合物を用いることもできる。
As the blocked isocyanate compound, a commercially available product can be used.
Examples of commercially available blocked isocyanate compounds include Karenz (registered trademark) AOI-BM, Karenz (registered trademark) MOI-BM, Karenz (registered trademark) MOI-BP (all manufactured by Showa Denko KK), and block. Duranate series of types (for example, Duranate (registered trademark) TPA-B80E, Duranate (registered trademark) WT32-B75P, etc., manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemicals Co., Ltd.) can be mentioned.
Further, as the blocked isocyanate compound, a compound having the following structure can also be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 熱架橋性化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 感光性層が熱架橋性化合物を含む場合、熱架橋性化合物の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、1質量%~50質量%が好ましく、5質量%~30質量%がより好ましい。
The heat-crosslinkable compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the photosensitive layer contains a heat-crosslinkable compound, the content of the heat-crosslinkable compound is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. preferable.
-界面活性剤-
 感光性層は、厚さ均一性の観点から、界面活性剤を含有することが好ましい。
 界面活性剤としては、例えば、アニオン性界面活性剤、カチオン性界面活性剤、ノニオン性(非イオン性)界面活性剤、及び、両性界面活性剤が挙げられ、ノニオン性界面活性剤が好ましい。
-Surfactant-
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity.
Examples of the surfactant include anionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, nonionic (nonionic) surfactants, and amphoteric surfactants, and nonionic surfactants are preferable.
 ノニオン性界面活性剤としては、例えば、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルフェニルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレングリコールの高級脂肪酸ジエステル類、シリコーン系ノニオン性界面活性剤、及び、フッ素系ノニオン性界面活性剤が挙げられる。
 感光性層は、解像性がより優れる点から、フッ素系ノニオン性界面活性剤を含有することが好ましい。感光性層がフッ素系ノニオン性界面活性剤を含有することにより、エッチング液の感光性層への浸透を抑制してサイドエッチングを低減するためと考えられる。
 フッ素系ノニオン性界面活性剤の市販品としては、例えば、メガファックF-551-A、F-552及びF-554(いずれもDIC(株)製)が挙げられる。
Examples of the nonionic surfactant include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkylphenyl ethers, polyoxyethylene glycol higher fatty acid diesters, silicone-based nonionic surfactants, and fluorine-based nonionics. Examples include sex surfactants.
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a fluorine-based nonionic surfactant from the viewpoint of being more excellent in resolution. It is considered that the photosensitive layer contains a fluorine-based nonionic surfactant to suppress the penetration of the etching solution into the photosensitive layer and reduce the side etching.
Examples of commercially available fluorine-based nonionic surfactants include Megafuck F-551-A, F-552 and F-554 (all manufactured by DIC Corporation).
 界面活性剤としては、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0120~0125に記載の界面活性剤、特許第4502784号公報の段落0017に記載の界面活性剤、及び、特開2009-237362号公報の段落0060~0071に記載の界面活性剤を用いることもできる。
 また、界面活性剤としては、ノニオン系界面活性剤、フッ素系界面活性剤又はシリコーン系界面活性剤が好ましい。
Examples of the surfactant include the surfactant described in paragraphs 0120 to 0125 of International Publication No. 2018/179640, the surfactant described in paragraph 0017 of Japanese Patent No. 45027884, and JP-A-2009-237362. The surfactants described in paragraphs 0060 to 0071 can also be used.
Further, as the surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a fluorine-based surfactant or a silicone-based surfactant is preferable.
 フッ素系界面活性剤の市販品としては、例えば、メガファック(商品名)F-171、F-172、F-173、F-176、F-177、F-141、F-142、F-143、F-144、F-437、F-444、F-475、F-477、F-479、F-482、F-551-A、F-552、F-554、F-555-A、F-556、F-557、F-558、F-559、F-560、F-561、F-565、F-563、F-568、F-575、F-780、EXP、MFS-330、MFS-578、MFS-579、MFS-586、MFS-587、R-41、R-41-LM、R-01、R-40、R-40-LM、RS-43、TF-1956、RS-90、R-94、RS-72-K、DS-21(以上、DIC(株)製)、フロラード(商品名)FC430、FC431、FC171(以上、住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロン(商品名)S-382、SC-101、SC-103、SC-104、SC-105、SC-1068、SC-381、SC-383、S-393、KH-40(以上、AGC(株)製)、PolyFox(商品名)PF636、PF656、PF6320、PF6520、PF7002(以上、OMNOVA社製)、フタージェント(商品名)710FL、710FM、610FM、601AD、601ADH2、602A、215M、245F、251、212M、250、209F、222F、208G、710LA、710FS、730LM、650AC、681、683(以上、(株)ネオス製)等が挙げられる。
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を含有する官能基を持つ分子構造を有し、熱を加えるとフッ素原子を含有する官能基の部分が切断されてフッ素原子が揮発するアクリル系化合物も好適に使用できる。このようなフッ素系界面活性剤としては、DIC(株)製のメガファック(商品名)DSシリーズ(化学工業日報(2016年2月22日)、日経産業新聞(2016年2月23日))、例えばメガファック(商品名)DS-21が挙げられる。
Commercially available products of fluorine-based surfactants include, for example, Megafuck (trade names) F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, F-143. , F-144, F-437, F-444, F-475, F-477, F-479, F-482, F-551-A, F-552, F-554, F-555-A, F -556, F-557, F-558, F-559, F-560, F-561, F-565, F-563, F-568, F-575, F-780, EXP, MFS-330, MFS -578, MFS-579, MFS-586, MFS-587, R-41, R-41-LM, R-01, R-40, R-40-LM, RS-43, TF-1956, RS-90 , R-94, RS-72-K, DS-21 (above, manufactured by DIC Co., Ltd.), Florard (trade name) FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.), Surflon (trade name) S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC-1068, SC-381, SC-383, S-393, KH-40 (all manufactured by AGC Co., Ltd.), PolyFox (Product Name) PF636, PF656, PF6320, PF6520, PF7002 (above, manufactured by OMNOVA), Futagent (Product Name) 710FL, 710FM, 610FM, 601AD, 601ADH2, 602A, 215M, 245F, 251, 212M, 250, 209F , 222F, 208G, 710LA, 710FS, 730LM, 650AC, 681, 683 (all manufactured by Neos Co., Ltd.) and the like.
In addition, the fluorine-based surfactant has a molecular structure having a functional group containing a fluorine atom, and when heat is applied, the portion of the functional group containing the fluorine atom is cut and the fluorine atom is volatilized. Can be preferably used. Examples of such fluorine-based surfactants include Megafuck (trade name) DS series manufactured by DIC Corporation (The Chemical Daily (February 22, 2016), Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun (February 23, 2016)). For example, Megafuck (trade name) DS-21 can be mentioned.
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤としては、フッ素化アルキル基又はフッ素化アルキレンエーテル基を有するフッ素原子含有ビニルエーテル化合物と、親水性のビニルエーテル化合物との重合体を用いることも好ましい。
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、ブロックポリマーを用いることもできる。フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する構成単位と、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基)を2以上(好ましくは5以上)有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する構成単位と、を含む含フッ素高分子化合物も好ましく用いることができる。
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、エチレン性不飽和基を側鎖に有する含フッ素重合体を用いることもできる。メガファック(商品名)RS-101、RS-102、RS-718K、RS-72-K(以上、DIC(株)製)等が挙げられる。
 フッ素系界面活性剤として、例えば、炭素数が7以上の直鎖状パーフルオロアルキル基を有する化合物が使用されてもよい。ただし、環境適性向上の観点から、フッ素系界面活性剤として、ペルフルオロオクタン酸(PFOA)又はペルフルオロオクタンスルホン酸(PFOS)の代替材料が使用されることが好ましい。
Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, it is also preferable to use a polymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound.
A block polymer can also be used as the fluorine-based surfactant. The fluorine-based surfactant has a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and two or more (preferably five or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups) (meth). A fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a structural unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used.
As the fluorine-based surfactant, a fluorine-containing polymer having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain can also be used. Megafuck (trade name) RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K, RS-72-K (all manufactured by DIC Corporation) and the like can be mentioned.
As the fluorine-based surfactant, for example, a compound having a linear perfluoroalkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms may be used. However, from the viewpoint of improving environmental suitability, it is preferable to use a substitute material of perfluorooctanoic acid (PFOA) or perfluorooctanesulfonic acid (PFOS) as the fluorine-based surfactant.
 ノニオン系界面活性剤としては、グリセロール、トリメチロールプロパン、トリメチロールエタン並びにそれらのエトキシレート及びプロポキシレート(例えば、グリセロールプロポキシレート、グリセロールエトキシレート等)、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル、プルロニック(商品名)L10、L31、L61、L62、10R5、17R2、25R2(以上、BASF社製)、テトロニック(商品名)304、701、704、901、904、150R1(以上、BASF社製)、ソルスパース(商品名)20000(以上、日本ルーブリゾール(株)製)、NCW-101、NCW-1001、NCW-1002(以上、富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)、パイオニン(商品名)D-6112、D-6112-W、D-6315(以上、竹本油脂(株)製)、オルフィンE1010、サーフィノール104、400、440(以上、日信化学工業(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, and their ethoxylates and propoxylates (eg, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, and the like. Polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester, Pluronic (trade name) L10, L31, L61, L62, 10R5, 17R2 , 25R2 (above, manufactured by BASF), Tetronic (trade name) 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1 (above, manufactured by BASF), Solspers (trade name) 20000 (above, Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.) , NCW-101, NCW-1001, NCW-1002 (above, manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Junyaku Co., Ltd.), Pionin (trade name) D-6112, D-6112-W, D-6315 (above, Takemoto) Oils and fats (manufactured by Nissin Co., Ltd.), Orphine E1010, Surfinol 104, 400, 440 (all manufactured by Nissin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and the like can be mentioned.
 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、シロキサン結合からなる直鎖状ポリマー、及び、側鎖や末端に有機基を導入した変性シロキサンポリマーが挙げられる。
 シリコーン系界面活性剤の具体例としては、DOWSIL(商品名)8032 ADDITIVE、トーレシリコーンDC3PA、トーレシリコーンSH7PA、トーレシリコーンDC11PA、トーレシリコーンSH21PA、トーレシリコーンSH28PA、トーレシリコーンSH29PA、トーレシリコーンSH30PA、トーレシリコーンSH8400(以上、東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製)並びに、X-22-4952、X-22-4272、X-22-6266、KF-351A、K354L、KF-355A、KF-945、KF-640、KF-642、KF-643、X-22-6191、X-22-4515、KF-6004、KP-341、KF-6001、KF-6002(以上、信越化学工業(株)製)、F-4440、TSF-4300、TSF-4445、TSF-4460、TSF-4452(以上、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製)、BYK307、BYK323、BYK330(以上、ビックケミー社製)等が挙げられる。
Examples of the silicone-based surfactant include a linear polymer composed of a siloxane bond and a modified siloxane polymer in which an organic group is introduced into a side chain or a terminal.
Specific examples of silicone-based surfactants include DOWNSIL (trade name) 8032 ADDITIVE, Torre Silicone DC3PA, Torre Silicone SH7PA, Torre Silicone DC11PA, Torre Silicone SH21PA, Torre Silicone SH28PA, Torre Silicone SH29PA, Torre Silicone SH30PA, Torre Silicone SH8400. (The above is manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.), X-22-4952, X-22-2272, X-22-6266, KF-351A, K354L, KF-355A, KF-945, KF-640, KF-642, KF-643, X-22-6191, X-22-4515, KF-6004, KP-341, KF-6001, KF-6002 (all manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), F-4440 , TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 (above, manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), BYK307, BYK323, BYK330 (above, manufactured by Big Chemie) and the like.
 感光性層は、界面活性剤を、1種単独で含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。
 界面活性剤の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対し、0.001質量%~10質量%が好ましく、0.01質量%~3質量%がより好ましい。
The photosensitive layer may contain one type of surfactant alone or two or more types.
The content of the surfactant is preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
-添加剤-
 感光性層は、上記成分以外に、必要に応じて公知の添加剤を含有してもよい。
 添加剤としては、例えば、ラジカル重合禁止剤、増感剤、可塑剤、ヘテロ環状化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール類、カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール類、重合体A以外の樹脂、及び、溶剤が挙げられる。感光性層は、各添加剤を1種単独で含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。
-Additive-
In addition to the above components, the photosensitive layer may contain a known additive, if necessary.
Examples of the additive include a radical polymerization inhibitor, a sensitizer, a plasticizer, a heterocyclic compound, benzotriazoles, carboxybenzotriazoles, a resin other than polymer A, and a solvent. The photosensitive layer may contain each additive alone or in combination of two or more.
 感光性層は、ラジカル重合禁止剤を含有してもよい。
 ラジカル重合禁止剤としては、例えば、特許第4502784号公報の段落0018に記載された熱重合防止剤が挙げられる。中でも、フェノチアジン、フェノキサジン又は4-メトキシフェノールが好ましい。その他のラジカル重合禁止剤としては、ナフチルアミン、塩化第一銅、ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミンアルミニウム塩、ジフェニルニトロソアミン等が挙げられる。感光性層の感度を損なわないために、ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミンアルミニウム塩をラジカル重合禁止剤として使用することが好ましい。
The photosensitive layer may contain a radical polymerization inhibitor.
Examples of the radical polymerization inhibitor include the thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0018 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784. Of these, phenothiazine, phenothiazine or 4-methoxyphenol is preferable. Examples of other radical polymerization inhibitors include naphthylamine, cuprous chloride, nitrosophenylhydroxyamine aluminum salt, diphenylnitrosamine and the like. It is preferable to use a nitrosophenylhydroxyamine aluminum salt as a radical polymerization inhibitor so as not to impair the sensitivity of the photosensitive layer.
 ベンゾトリアゾール類としては、例えば、1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-クロロ-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、ビス(N-2-エチルヘキシル)アミノメチレン-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、ビス(N-2-エチルヘキシル)アミノメチレン-1,2,3-トリルトリアゾール、ビス(N-2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノメチレン-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール等が挙げられる。 Examples of benzotriazoles include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 1-chloro-1,2,3-benzotriazole, bis (N-2-ethylhexyl) aminomethylene-1,2,3-benzotriazole, and the like. Examples thereof include bis (N-2-ethylhexyl) aminomethylene-1,2,3-tolyltriazole and bis (N-2-hydroxyethyl) aminomethylene-1,2,3-benzotriazole.
 カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール類としては、例えば、4-カルボキシ-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、5-カルボキシ-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、N-(N,N-ジ-2-エチルヘキシル)アミノメチレンカルボキシベンゾトリアゾール、N-(N,N-ジ-2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノメチレンカルボキシベンゾトリアゾール、N-(N,N-ジ-2-エチルヘキシル)アミノエチレンカルボキシベンゾトリアゾール等が挙げられる。カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール類としては、例えば、CBT-1(城北化学工業株式会社、商品名)などの市販品を用いることができる。 Examples of carboxybenzotriazoles include 4-carboxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole, 5-carboxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole, and N- (N, N-di-2-ethylhexyl) aminomethylene. Examples thereof include carboxybenzotriazole, N- (N, N-di-2-hydroxyethyl) aminomethylene carboxybenzotriazole, N- (N, N-di-2-ethylhexyl) aminoethylene carboxybenzotriazole and the like. As the carboxybenzotriazoles, for example, a commercially available product such as CBT-1 (Johoku Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., trade name) can be used.
 ラジカル重合禁止剤、ベンゾトリアゾ-ル類、及びカルボキシベンゾトリアゾ-ル類の合計含有量は、感光性層の全質量を100質量%としたとき、好ましくは0.01質量%~3質量%であり、より好ましくは0.05質量%~1質量%である。上記含有量を0.01質量%以上にすることは、感光性層に保存安定性を付与するという観点から好ましい。一方で、上記含有量を3質量%以下にすることは、感度を維持し、染料の脱色を抑える観点から好ましい。 The total content of the radical polymerization inhibitor, benzotriazols, and carboxybenzotriazols is preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass when the total mass of the photosensitive layer is 100% by mass. Yes, more preferably 0.05% by mass to 1% by mass. It is preferable that the content is 0.01% by mass or more from the viewpoint of imparting storage stability to the photosensitive layer. On the other hand, it is preferable to set the content to 3% by mass or less from the viewpoint of maintaining the sensitivity and suppressing the decolorization of the dye.
 感光性層は、増感剤を含有してもよい。
 増感剤は、特に制限されず、公知の増感剤、染料及び顔料を用いることができる。増感剤としては、例えば、ジアルキルアミノベンゾフェノン化合物、ピラゾリン化合物、アントラセン化合物、クマリン化合物、キサントン化合物、チオキサントン化合物、アクリドン化合物、オキサゾール化合物、ベンゾオキサゾール化合物、チアゾール化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、トリアゾール化合物(例えば、1,2,4-トリアゾール)、スチルベン化合物、トリアジン化合物、チオフェン化合物、ナフタルイミド化合物、トリアリールアミン化合物、及び、アミノアクリジン化合物が挙げられる。
The photosensitive layer may contain a sensitizer.
The sensitizer is not particularly limited, and known sensitizers, dyes and pigments can be used. Examples of the sensitizer include dialkylaminobenzophenone compounds, pyrazoline compounds, anthracene compounds, coumarin compounds, xanthone compounds, thioxanthone compounds, acridone compounds, oxazole compounds, benzoxazole compounds, thiazole compounds, benzothiazole compounds, and triazole compounds (for example, 1,2,4-triazole), stillben compounds, triazine compounds, thiophene compounds, naphthalimide compounds, triarylamine compounds, and aminoaclydin compounds.
 感光性層は、増感剤を1種単独で含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。
 感光性層が増感剤を含有する場合、増感剤の含有量は、目的により適宜選択できるが、光源に対する感度の向上、及び、重合速度と連鎖移動のバランスによる硬化速度の向上の観点から、感光性層の全質量に対して、0.01質量%~5質量%が好ましく、0.05質量%~1質量%がより好ましい。
The photosensitive layer may contain one kind of sensitizer alone or two or more kinds.
When the photosensitive layer contains a sensitizer, the content of the sensitizer can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, but from the viewpoint of improving the sensitivity to the light source and improving the curing rate by balancing the polymerization rate and the chain transfer. , 0.01% by mass to 5% by mass is preferable, and 0.05% by mass to 1% by mass is more preferable with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
 感光性層は、可塑剤及びヘテロ環状化合物よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有してもよい。
 可塑剤及びヘテロ環状化合物としては、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0097~0103及び0111~0118に記載された化合物が挙げられる。
The photosensitive layer may contain at least one selected from the group consisting of a plasticizer and a heterocyclic compound.
Examples of the plasticizer and the heterocyclic compound include the compounds described in paragraphs 097 to 0103 and 0111 to 0118 of International Publication No. 2018/179640.
 感光性層は、溶剤を含有してもよい。溶剤を含む感光性組成物により感光性層を形成した場合、感光性層に溶剤が残留することがある。 The photosensitive layer may contain a solvent. When the photosensitive layer is formed by a photosensitive composition containing a solvent, the solvent may remain in the photosensitive layer.
 また、感光性層は、金属酸化物粒子、酸化防止剤、分散剤、酸増殖剤、現像促進剤、導電性繊維、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、熱酸発生剤、紫外線吸収剤、増粘剤、架橋剤、及び、有機又は無機の沈殿防止剤等の公知の添加剤を更に含有してもよい。
 感光性層に含有される添加剤については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0165~0184に記載されており、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
In addition, the photosensitive layer includes metal oxide particles, antioxidants, dispersants, acid growth agents, development accelerators, conductive fibers, thermal radical polymerization initiators, thermal acid generators, ultraviolet absorbers, thickeners, etc. It may further contain known additives such as cross-linking agents and organic or inorganic anti-precipitation agents.
Additives contained in the photosensitive layer are described in paragraphs 0165 to 0184 of JP-A-2014-85643, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
(物性等)
 感光性層の厚さ(層厚)は、0.1μm~300μmが好ましく、0.2μm~100μmがより好ましく、0.5μm~50μmが更に好ましく、0.5μm~30μmがより更に好ましく、1μm~20μmが特に好ましく、2μm~10μmが最も好ましい。これにより、感光性層の現像性が向上し、解像性を向上させることができる。
 感光性転写部材が備える各層の層厚は、上記積層体又は感光性転写部材の主面に対し垂直な方向の断面を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM:Scanning Electron Microscope)により観察し、得られた観察画像に基づいて各層の厚さを10点以上計測し、その平均値を算出することにより、測定される。
(Physical characteristics, etc.)
The thickness (layer thickness) of the photosensitive layer is preferably 0.1 μm to 300 μm, more preferably 0.2 μm to 100 μm, further preferably 0.5 μm to 50 μm, further preferably 0.5 μm to 30 μm, and 1 μm to 1 μm. 20 μm is particularly preferable, and 2 μm to 10 μm is most preferable. As a result, the developability of the photosensitive layer can be improved, and the resolvability can be improved.
The thickness of each layer included in the photosensitive transfer member was obtained by observing a cross section in a direction perpendicular to the main surface of the laminate or the photosensitive transfer member with a scanning electron microscope (SEM). It is measured by measuring the thickness of each layer at 10 points or more based on the image and calculating the average value thereof.
 また、密着性により優れる点から、感光性層の波長365nmの光の透過率は、10%以上が好ましく、30%以上が好ましく、50%以上がより好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、99.9%以下が好ましい。 Further, from the viewpoint of excellent adhesion, the transmittance of light having a wavelength of 365 nm in the photosensitive layer is preferably 10% or more, preferably 30% or more, and more preferably 50% or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 99.9% or less.
(不純物等)
 感光性層は、所定量の不純物を含んでいてもよい。
 不純物の具体例としては、ナトリウム、カリウム、マグネシウム、カルシウム、鉄、マンガン、銅、アルミニウム、チタン、クロム、コバルト、ニッケル、亜鉛、スズ、ハロゲン及びこれらのイオンが挙げられる。中でも、ハロゲン化物イオン、ナトリウムイオン、及び、カリウムイオンは不純物として混入し易いため、下記の含有量にすることが好ましい。
(Impurities, etc.)
The photosensitive layer may contain a predetermined amount of impurities.
Specific examples of impurities include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, manganese, copper, aluminum, titanium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, zinc, tin, halogen and ions thereof. Of these, halide ions, sodium ions, and potassium ions are likely to be mixed as impurities, so the content is preferably as follows.
 感光性層における不純物の含有量は、質量基準で、80ppm以下が好ましく、10ppm以下がより好ましく、2ppm以下が更に好ましい。感光性層における不純物の含有量は、質量基準で、1ppb以上又は0.1ppm以上とすることができる。 The content of impurities in the photosensitive layer is preferably 80 ppm or less, more preferably 10 ppm or less, still more preferably 2 ppm or less on a mass basis. The content of impurities in the photosensitive layer can be 1 ppb or more or 0.1 ppm or more on a mass basis.
 不純物を上記範囲にする方法としては、感光性層の原料として不純物の含有量が少ないものを
選択すること、及び、感光性層の形成時に不純物の混入を防ぐこと、洗浄して除去することが挙げ
られる。このような方法により、不純物量を上記範囲内とすることができる。
As a method of setting impurities in the above range, it is possible to select a material having a low content of impurities as a raw material of the photosensitive layer, prevent impurities from being mixed in when forming the photosensitive layer, and wash and remove the impurities. Can be mentioned. By such a method, the amount of impurities can be kept within the above range.
 不純物は、例えば、ICP(Inductively Coupled Plasma)発光分光分析法、原子吸光分光法、及び、イ
オンクロマトグラフィー法等の公知の方法で定量できる。
The impurities can be quantified by known methods such as ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) emission spectroscopy, atomic absorption spectroscopy, and ion chromatography.
 感光性層における、ベンゼン、ホルムアルデヒド、トリクロロエチレン、1,3-ブタジエン、四塩化炭素、クロロホルム、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、及び、ヘキサン等の化合物の含有量は、少ないことが好ましい。これら化合物の感光性層中における含有量としては、質量基準で、100ppm以下が好ましく、20ppm以下がより好ましく、4ppm以下が更に好ましい。下限は質量基準で、10ppb以上とすることができ、100ppb以上とすることができる。これら化合物は、上記の金属の不純物と同様の方法で含有量を抑制できる。また、公知の測定法により定量できる。 The content of compounds such as benzene, formaldehyde, trichlorethylene, 1,3-butadiene, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, and hexane in the photosensitive layer should be low. Is preferable. The content of these compounds in the photosensitive layer is preferably 100 ppm or less, more preferably 20 ppm or less, still more preferably 4 ppm or less on a mass basis. The lower limit is based on mass and can be 10 ppb or more, and can be 100 ppb or more. The content of these compounds can be suppressed in the same manner as the above-mentioned metal impurities. Moreover, it can be quantified by a known measurement method.
 感光性層における水の含有量は、信頼性及びラミネート性を向上させる点から、0.01質量%~1.0質量%が好ましく、0.05質量%~0.5質量%がより好ましい。 The water content in the photosensitive layer is preferably 0.01% by mass to 1.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05% by mass to 0.5% by mass, from the viewpoint of improving reliability and laminateability.
(残存モノマー)
 感光性層は、上述したバインダーポリマーの各構成単位に対応する残存モノマーを含む場合がある。
 残存モノマーの含有量は、パターニング性、及び、信頼性の点から、バインダーポリマーの全質量に対して、5,000質量ppm以下が好ましく、2,000質量ppm以下がより好ましく、500質量ppm以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、1質量ppm以上が好ましく、10質量ppm以上がより好ましい。
 バインダーポリマーの各構成単位の残存モノマーは、パターニング性、及び、信頼性の点から、感光性層の全質量に対して、3,000質量ppm以下が好ましく、600質量ppm以下がより好ましく、100質量ppm以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、0.1質量ppm以上が好ましく、1質量ppm以上がより好ましい。
(Residual monomer)
The photosensitive layer may contain residual monomers corresponding to each structural unit of the binder polymer described above.
The content of the residual monomer is preferably 5,000 mass ppm or less, more preferably 2,000 mass ppm or less, and 500 mass ppm or less, based on the total mass of the binder polymer, from the viewpoint of patterning property and reliability. Is more preferable. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but 1 mass ppm or more is preferable, and 10 mass ppm or more is more preferable.
The residual monomer of each structural unit of the binder polymer is preferably 3,000 mass ppm or less, more preferably 600 mass ppm or less, and more preferably 100 mass ppm or less, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of patterning property and reliability. More preferably, the mass is ppm or less. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 mass ppm or more, and more preferably 1 mass ppm or more.
 高分子反応でバインダーポリマーを合成する際のモノマーの残存モノマー量も、上記範囲とすることが好ましい。例えば、カルボン酸側鎖にアクリル酸グリシジルを反応させてバインダーポリマーを合成する場合には、アクリル酸グリシジルの含有量を上記範囲にすることが好ましい。
 残存モノマーの量は、液体クロマトグラフィー、及び、ガスクロマトグラフィー等の公知の方法で測定できる。
The amount of residual monomer of the monomer when synthesizing the binder polymer by the polymer reaction is also preferably in the above range. For example, when glycidyl acrylate is reacted with the carboxylic acid side chain to synthesize a binder polymer, the content of glycidyl acrylate is preferably in the above range.
The amount of residual monomer can be measured by a known method such as liquid chromatography and gas chromatography.
(形成方法)
 感光性層の形成方法は、上記の成分を含有する層を形成可能な方法であれば特に制限されない。
 感光性層の形成方法としては、例えば、バインダーポリマー、重合性化合物及び溶剤を含有する感光性組成物を調製し、支持体等の表面に感光性組成物を塗布し、感光性組成物の塗膜を乾燥することにより形成する方法が挙げられる。
(Formation method)
The method for forming the photosensitive layer is not particularly limited as long as it is a method capable of forming a layer containing the above components.
As a method for forming the photosensitive layer, for example, a photosensitive composition containing a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound and a solvent is prepared, the photosensitive composition is applied to the surface of a support or the like, and the photosensitive composition is applied. Examples thereof include a method of forming the film by drying it.
 感光性層の形成に使用される感光性組成物としては、例えば、バインダーポリマー、重合性化合物、上記の任意成分及び溶剤を含有する組成物が挙げられる。
 感光性組成物は、感光性組成物の粘度を調節し、感光性層の形成を容易にするため、溶剤を含有することが好ましい。
Examples of the photosensitive composition used for forming the photosensitive layer include a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound, and a composition containing the above-mentioned optional components and a solvent.
The photosensitive composition preferably contains a solvent in order to adjust the viscosity of the photosensitive composition and facilitate the formation of the photosensitive layer.
-溶剤-
 感光性組成物に含有される溶剤としては、バインダーポリマー、重合性化合物及び上記の任意成分を溶解又は分散可能であれば特に制限されず、公知の溶剤を使用できる。
 溶剤としては、例えば、アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤、アルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤、アルコール溶剤(メタノール及びエタノール等)、ケトン溶剤(アセトン及びメチルエチルケトン等)、芳香族炭化水素溶剤(トルエン等)、非プロトン性極性溶剤(N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド等)、環状エーテル溶剤(テトラヒドロフラン等)、エステル溶剤、アミド溶剤、ラクトン溶剤、並びにこれらの2種以上を含む混合溶剤が挙げられる。
 支持体、熱可塑性樹脂層、中間層及び感光性層を備える感光性転写部材を作製する場合、感光性組成物は、アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤及びアルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有することが好ましい。中でも、アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤及びアルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種と、ケトン溶剤及び環状エーテル溶剤よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種とを含む混合溶剤がより好ましく、アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤及びアルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種、ケトン溶剤、並びに環状エーテル溶剤の3種を少なくとも含む混合溶剤が更に好ましい。
-solvent-
The solvent contained in the photosensitive composition is not particularly limited as long as the binder polymer, the polymerizable compound and the above optional components can be dissolved or dispersed, and known solvents can be used.
Examples of the solvent include an alkylene glycol ether solvent, an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent, an alcohol solvent (methanol, ethanol, etc.), a ketone solvent (acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, etc.), an aromatic hydrocarbon solvent (toluene, etc.), and an aprotonic polar solvent. Examples thereof include (N, N-dimethylformamide, etc.), a cyclic ether solvent (tetrahydrofuran, etc.), an ester solvent, an amide solvent, a lactone solvent, and a mixed solvent containing two or more of these.
When producing a photosensitive transfer member including a support, a thermoplastic resin layer, an intermediate layer and a photosensitive layer, the photosensitive composition is at least one selected from the group consisting of an alkylene glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent. It preferably contains seeds. Among them, a mixed solvent containing at least one selected from the group consisting of an alkylene glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent and at least one selected from the group consisting of a ketone solvent and a cyclic ether solvent is more preferable. A mixed solvent containing at least one selected from the group consisting of a glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent, a ketone solvent, and at least three cyclic ether solvents is more preferable.
 アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤としては、例えば、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル、エチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル、プロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル及びジプロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテルが挙げられる。
 アルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤としては、例えば、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート及びジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテートが挙げられる。
 溶剤としては、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0092~0094に記載された溶剤、及び、特開2018-177889公報の段落0014に記載された溶剤を用いてもよく、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
Examples of the alkylene glycol ether solvent include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether, ethylene glycol dialkyl ether, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether, propylene glycol dialkyl ether, diethylene glycol dialkyl ether, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether and dipropylene glycol dialkyl ether. ..
Examples of the alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate and dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate.
As the solvent, the solvent described in paragraphs 0092 to 0094 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 and the solvent described in paragraph 0014 of JP-A-2018-177789 may be used, and the contents thereof are described in the present specification. Incorporated into the book.
 感光性組成物は、溶剤を1種単独で含有してもよく、2種以上を含有してもよい。
 感光性組成物を塗布する際における溶剤の含有量は、感光性組成物中の全固形分100質量部に対し、50質量部~1,900質量部が好ましく、100質量部~900質量部がより好ましい。 
The photosensitive composition may contain one type of solvent alone, or may contain two or more types of solvent.
The content of the solvent when the photosensitive composition is applied is preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass, preferably 100 parts by mass to 900 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive composition. More preferred.
 感光性組成物の調製方法は特に制限されず、例えば、各成分を上記溶剤に溶解させた溶液を予め調製し、得られた溶液を所定の割合で混合することにより、感光性組成物を調製する方法が挙げられる。
 感光性組成物は、感光性層を形成する前に、孔径0.2μm~30μmのフィルターを用いてろ過することが好ましい。
The method for preparing the photosensitive composition is not particularly limited. For example, a photosensitive composition is prepared by preparing a solution in which each component is dissolved in the above solvent in advance and mixing the obtained solution in a predetermined ratio. There is a way to do it.
The photosensitive composition is preferably filtered using a filter having a pore size of 0.2 μm to 30 μm before forming the photosensitive layer.
 感光性組成物の塗布方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法で塗布すればよい。塗布方法としては、例えば、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布及びインクジェット塗布が挙げられる。
 また、感光性層は、感光性組成物を後述するカバーフィルム上に塗布し、乾燥することにより形成してもよい。
The method for applying the photosensitive composition is not particularly limited, and the photosensitive composition may be applied by a known method. Examples of the coating method include slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating and inkjet coating.
Further, the photosensitive layer may be formed by applying the photosensitive composition on a cover film described later and drying it.
〔熱可塑性樹脂層〕
 上記積層体は、熱可塑性樹脂層を有していてもよい。
 感光性転写部材は、熱可塑性樹脂層を有していてもよい。
 感光性転写部材は、支持体と感光性層との間に熱可塑性樹脂層を備えることが好ましい。感光性転写部材が支持体と感光性層との間に熱可塑性樹脂層を備えることにより、基板との貼り合わせ時における基板への追従性が向上して、基板と感光性転写部材との間の気泡の混入が抑制され、隣接する層(例えば支持体)との密着性が向上するためである。
[Thermoplastic resin layer]
The laminate may have a thermoplastic resin layer.
The photosensitive transfer member may have a thermoplastic resin layer.
The photosensitive transfer member preferably includes a thermoplastic resin layer between the support and the photosensitive layer. By providing the photosensitive transfer member with a thermoplastic resin layer between the support and the photosensitive layer, the followability to the substrate at the time of bonding to the substrate is improved, and the space between the substrate and the photosensitive transfer member is improved. This is because the mixing of air bubbles is suppressed and the adhesion to the adjacent layer (for example, the support) is improved.
(アルカリ可溶性樹脂)
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、熱可塑性樹脂として、アルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有する。
 なお、本明細書において、「アルカリ可溶性」とは、22℃において炭酸ナトリウムの1質量%水溶液100gへの溶解度が0.1g以上であることを意味する。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、例えば、アクリル樹脂、ポリスチレン樹脂、スチレン-アクリル共重合体、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール、ポリビニルホルマール、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、ポリアセタール樹脂、ポリヒドロキシスチレン樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリベンゾオキサゾール樹脂、ポリシロキサン樹脂、ポリエチレンイミン、ポリアリルアミン及びポリアルキレングリコールが挙げられる。
(Alkali-soluble resin)
The thermoplastic resin layer contains an alkali-soluble resin as the thermoplastic resin.
In the present specification, "alkali-soluble" means that the solubility of sodium carbonate in 100 g of a 1% by mass aqueous solution at 22 ° C. is 0.1 g or more.
Examples of the alkali-soluble resin include acrylic resin, polystyrene resin, styrene-acrylic copolymer, polyurethane resin, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl formal, polyamide resin, polyester resin, polyamide resin, epoxy resin, polyacetal resin, and polyhydroxystyrene resin. Examples thereof include polyimide resins, polybenzoxazole resins, polysiloxane resins, polyethyleneimines, polyallylamines and polyalkylene glycols.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、現像性及び隣接する層との密着性の観点から、アクリル樹脂が好ましい。
 ここで、アクリル樹脂は、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位、(メタ)アクリル酸エステルに由来する構成単位、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸アミドに由来する構成単位よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の構成単位を有する樹脂を意味する。
 アクリル樹脂としては、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位、(メタ)アクリル酸エステルに由来する構成単位、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸アミドに由来する構成単位の合計含有量が、アクリル樹脂の全質量に対して50質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 中でも、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位及び(メタ)アクリル酸エステルに由来する構成単位の合計含有量が、アクリル樹脂の全質量に対して30質量%~100質量%であることが好ましく、50質量%~100質量%であることがより好ましい。
As the alkali-soluble resin, an acrylic resin is preferable from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to an adjacent layer.
Here, the acrylic resin was selected from the group consisting of a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid, a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester, and a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid amide. It means a resin having at least one structural unit.
As the acrylic resin, the total content of the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid, the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester, and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid amide is that of the acrylic resin. It is preferably 50% by mass or more with respect to the total mass.
Above all, the total content of the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester is preferably 30% by mass to 100% by mass with respect to the total mass of the acrylic resin. , 50% by mass to 100% by mass, more preferably.
 また、アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、酸基を有する重合体であることが好ましい。
 酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基及びホスホン酸基が挙げられ、カルボキシ基が好ましい。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、現像性の観点から、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のアルカリ可溶性樹脂がより好ましく、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂が更に好ましい。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の酸価の上限は、特に制限されないが、200mgKOH/g以下が好ましく、150mgKOH/g以下がより好ましい。
Further, the alkali-soluble resin is preferably a polymer having an acid group.
Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group and a phosphonic acid group, and a carboxy group is preferable.
From the viewpoint of developability, the alkali-soluble resin is more preferably an alkali-soluble resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more, and further preferably a carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more.
The upper limit of the acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is not particularly limited, but is preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, and more preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less.
 酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂としては、特に制限されず、公知の樹脂から適宜選択して用いることができる。
 例えば、特開2011-95716号公報の段落0025に記載のポリマーのうち酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂であるアルカリ可溶性樹脂、特開2010-237589号公報の段落0033~0052に記載のポリマーのうちの酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂、及び、特開2016-224162号公報の段落0053~0068に記載のバインダーポリマーのうちの酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂が挙げられる。
 上記カルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂におけるカルボキシ基を有する構成単位の共重合比は、アクリル樹脂の全質量に対して、5質量%~50質量%が好ましく、10質量%~40質量%がより好ましく、12質量%~30質量%が更に好ましい。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、現像性及び隣接する層との密着性の観点から、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位を有するアクリル樹脂が特に好ましい。
The carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately selected from known resins and used.
For example, among the polymers described in paragraphs 0025 of JP2011-95716A, an alkali-soluble resin which is a carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more, described in paragraphs 0033 to 0052 of JP2010-237589. Acrylic resin containing a carboxy group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more, and a carboxy group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more among the binder polymers described in paragraphs 0053 to 0068 of JP2016-224162A. Acrylic resin can be mentioned.
The copolymerization ratio of the structural unit having a carboxy group in the carboxy group-containing acrylic resin is preferably 5% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 10% by mass to 40% by mass, and 12 by mass, based on the total mass of the acrylic resin. More preferably, it is by mass% to 30% by mass.
As the alkali-soluble resin, an acrylic resin having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to an adjacent layer.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、反応性基を有していてもよい。反応性基としては、付加重合可能な基であればよく、エチレン性不飽和基;ヒドロキシ基及びカルボキシ基等の重縮合性基;エポキシ基、(ブロック)イソシアネート基等の重付加反応性基が挙げられる。 The alkali-soluble resin may have a reactive group. The reactive group may be any addition-polymerizable group, and an ethylenically unsaturated group; a polycondensable group such as a hydroxy group and a carboxy group; and a polyadditive reactive group such as an epoxy group and a (block) isocyanate group are used. Can be mentioned.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、1,000以上が好ましく、1万~10万がより好ましく、2万~5万が更に好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 1,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 to 100,000, and even more preferably 20,000 to 50,000.
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、アルカリ可溶性樹脂を1種単独で含有してもよく、2種以上を含有してもよい。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の含有量は、現像性及び隣接する層との密着性の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂層の全質量に対して、10質量%~99質量%が好ましく、20質量%~90質量%がより好ましく、40質量%~80質量%が更に好ましく、50質量%~70質量%が特に好ましい。
The thermoplastic resin layer may contain one kind of alkali-soluble resin alone or two or more kinds.
The content of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 10% by mass to 99% by mass, preferably 20% by mass to 90% by mass, based on the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to the adjacent layer. Is more preferable, 40% by mass to 80% by mass is further preferable, and 50% by mass to 70% by mass is particularly preferable.
(色素)
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、発色時の波長範囲400nm~780nmにおける最大吸収波長が450nm以上であり、酸、塩基、又はラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素(単に「色素B」ともいう。)を含有することが好ましい。
 色素Bの好ましい態様は、後述する点以外は、色素Nの好ましい態様と同様である。
(Dye)
The thermoplastic resin layer contains a dye (also simply referred to as "dye B") having a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development and whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base, or a radical. It is preferable to do so.
The preferred embodiment of the dye B is the same as the preferred embodiment of the dye N except for the points described later.
 色素Bは、露光部及び非露光部の視認性並びに解像性の観点から、酸又はラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素が好ましく、酸により最大吸収波長が変化する色素であることがより好ましい。
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性並びに解像性の観点から、色素Bとしての酸により最大吸収波長が変化する色素、及び、後述する光により酸を発生する化合物の両者を含有することが好ましい。
From the viewpoint of visibility and resolution of the exposed and unexposed areas, the dye B is preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid or a radical, and more preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid. ..
The thermoplastic resin layer is both a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength changes depending on the acid as the dye B and a compound that generates an acid by light, which will be described later, from the viewpoint of visibility and resolution of the exposed part and the non-exposed part. Is preferably contained.
 色素Bは、1種単独で使用しても、2種以上を使用してもよい。
 色素Bの含有量は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.2質量%以上が好ましく、0.2質量%~6質量%がより好ましく、0.2質量%~5質量%が更に好ましく、0.25質量%~3.0質量%が特に好ましい。
The dye B may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the dye B is preferably 0.2% by mass or more, preferably 0.2% by mass to 6% by mass, based on the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed part and the non-exposed part. More preferably, 0.2% by mass to 5% by mass is further preferable, and 0.25% by mass to 3.0% by mass is particularly preferable.
 ここで、色素Bの含有量は、熱可塑性樹脂層に含まれる色素Bの全てを発色状態にした場合の色素の含有量を意味する。以下に、ラジカルにより発色する色素を例に、色素Bの含有量の定量方法を説明する。
 メチルエチルケトン100mLに、色素0.001g及び0.01gを溶かした溶液を調製する。得られた各溶液に、光ラジカル重合開始剤Irgacure OXE01(商品名、BASFジャパン株式会社)を加え、365nmの光を照射することによりラジカルを発生させ、全ての色素を発色状態にする。その後、大気雰囲気下で、分光光度計(UV3100、(株)島津製作所製)を用いて、液温が25℃である各溶液の吸光度を測定し、検量線を作成する。
 次に、色素に代えて熱可塑性樹脂層0.1gをメチルエチルケトンに溶かすこと以外は上記と同様の方法で、色素を全て発色させた溶液の吸光度を測定する。得られた熱可塑性樹脂層を含有する溶液の吸光度から、検量線に基づいて熱可塑性樹脂層に含まれる色素の量を算出する。
Here, the content of the dye B means the content of the dye when all the dyes B contained in the thermoplastic resin layer are in a colored state. Hereinafter, a method for quantifying the content of dye B will be described by taking a dye that develops color by radicals as an example.
A solution in which 0.001 g and 0.01 g of the dye are dissolved in 100 mL of methyl ethyl ketone is prepared. A photoradical polymerization initiator Irgacure OXE01 (trade name, BASF Japan Co., Ltd.) is added to each of the obtained solutions, and radicals are generated by irradiating with light of 365 nm to bring all the dyes into a colored state. Then, in an atmospheric atmosphere, the absorbance of each solution having a liquid temperature of 25 ° C. is measured using a spectrophotometer (UV3100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation), and a calibration curve is prepared.
Next, the absorbance of the solution in which all the dyes are colored is measured by the same method as above except that 0.1 g of the thermoplastic resin layer is dissolved in methyl ethyl ketone instead of the dye. From the absorbance of the obtained solution containing the thermoplastic resin layer, the amount of the dye contained in the thermoplastic resin layer is calculated based on the calibration curve.
(光により酸、塩基又はラジカルを発生する化合物)
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、光により酸、塩基又はラジカルを発生する化合物(単に「化合物C」ともいう。)を含有してもよい。
 化合物Cとしては、紫外線及び可視光線等の活性光線を受けて、酸、塩基、又はラジカルを発生する化合物が好ましい。
 化合物Cとしては、公知の、光酸発生剤、光塩基発生剤、及び、光ラジカル重合開始剤(光ラジカル発生剤)を用いることができる。中でも、光酸発生剤が好ましい。
(Compounds that generate acids, bases or radicals with light)
The thermoplastic resin layer may contain a compound that generates an acid, a base, or a radical by light (also simply referred to as “Compound C”).
As the compound C, a compound that generates an acid, a base, or a radical by receiving active rays such as ultraviolet rays and visible rays is preferable.
As the compound C, a known photoacid generator, photobase generator, and photoradical polymerization initiator (photoradical generator) can be used. Of these, a photoacid generator is preferred.
-光酸発生剤-
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、解像性の観点から、光酸発生剤を含有することが好ましい。
 光酸発生剤としては、上述した感光性層が含有してもよい光カチオン重合開始剤が挙げられ、後述する点以外は好ましい態様も同じである。
-Photoacid generator-
The thermoplastic resin layer preferably contains a photoacid generator from the viewpoint of resolution.
Examples of the photoacid generator include a photocationic polymerization initiator that may be contained in the above-mentioned photosensitive layer, and the preferred embodiments are the same except for the points described below.
 光酸発生剤としては、感度及び解像性の観点から、オニウム塩化合物、及び、オキシムスルホネート化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含有することが好ましく、感度、解像性及び密着性の観点から、オキシムスルホネート化合物を含有することがより好ましい。
 また、光酸発生剤としては、以下の構造を有する光酸発生剤も好ましい。
The photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound and an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and preferably contains sensitivity, resolution and resolution. From the viewpoint of adhesion, it is more preferable to contain an oxime sulfonate compound.
Further, as the photoacid generator, a photoacid generator having the following structure is also preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
-光ラジカル重合開始剤-
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、光ラジカル重合開始剤(光ラジカル重合開始剤)を含有してもよい。
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、上述した感光性層が含有してもよい光ラジカル重合開始剤が挙げられ、好ましい態様も同じである。
-Photoradical polymerization initiator-
The thermoplastic resin layer may contain a photoradical polymerization initiator (photoradical polymerization initiator).
Examples of the photoradical polymerization initiator include a photoradical polymerization initiator that may be contained in the photosensitive layer described above, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
-光塩基発生剤-
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、光塩基発生剤を含有してもよい。
 光塩基発生剤としては、公知の光塩基発生剤であれば特に制限されず、例えば、2-ニトロベンジルシクロヘキシルカルバメート、トリフェニルメタノール、O-カルバモイルヒドロキシルアミド、O-カルバモイルオキシム、[[(2,6-ジニトロベンジル)オキシ]カルボニル]シクロヘキシルアミン、ビス[[(2-ニトロベンジル)オキシ]カルボニル]ヘキサン1,6-ジアミン、4-(メチルチオベンゾイル)-1-メチル-1-モルホリノエタン、(4-モルホリノベンゾイル)-1-ベンジル-1-ジメチルアミノプロパン、N-(2-ニトロベンジルオキシカルボニル)ピロリジン、ヘキサアンミンコバルト(III)トリス(トリフェニルメチルボレート)、2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルホリノフェニル)ブタノン、2,6-ジメチル-3,5-ジアセチル-4-(2-ニトロフェニル)-1,4-ジヒドロピリジン、及び、2,6-ジメチル-3,5-ジアセチル-4-(2,4-ジニトロフェニル)-1,4-ジヒドロピリジンが挙げられる。
-Photobase generator-
The thermoplastic resin layer may contain a photobase generator.
The photobase generator is not particularly limited as long as it is a known photobase generator, and for example, 2-nitrobenzylcyclohexylcarbamate, triphenylmethanol, O-carbamoyl hydroxylamide, O-carbamoyloxime, [[(2,2). 6-Dinitrobenzyl) oxy] carbonyl] cyclohexylamine, bis [[(2-nitrobenzyl) oxy] carbonyl] hexane 1,6-diamine, 4- (methylthiobenzoyl) -1-methyl-1-morpholinoetan, (4) -Morphorinobenzoyl) -1-benzyl-1-dimethylaminopropane, N- (2-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl) pyrrolidine, hexaammine cobalt (III) tris (triphenylmethylborate), 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino- 1- (4-morpholinophenyl) butanone, 2,6-dimethyl-3,5-diacetyl-4- (2-nitrophenyl) -1,4-dihydropyridine, and 2,6-dimethyl-3,5-diacetyl -4- (2,4-dinitrophenyl) -1,4-dihydropyridine can be mentioned.
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、化合物Cを、1種単独で含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。
 化合物Cの含有量は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性並びに解像性の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.1質量%~10質量%が好ましく、0.5質量%~5質量%がより好ましい。
The thermoplastic resin layer may contain the compound C alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of compound C is preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass, preferably 0.5% by mass, based on the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of visibility and resolution of the exposed and unexposed areas. More preferably, it is by mass% to 5% by mass.
(可塑剤)
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、解像性、隣接する層との密着性及び現像性の観点から、可塑剤を含有することが好ましい。
 可塑剤は、アルカリ可溶性樹脂よりも分子量(オリゴマー又はポリマーである場合は重量平均分子量(Mw))が小さいことが好ましい。可塑剤の分子量(重量平均分子量(Mw))は、200~2,000が好ましい。
 可塑剤は、アルカリ可溶性樹脂と相溶して可塑性を発現する化合物であれば特に制限されないが、可塑性付与の観点から、可塑剤は、分子中にアルキレンオキシ基を有することが好ましく、ポリアルキレングリコール化合物がより好ましい。可塑剤に含まれるアルキレンオキシ基は、ポリエチレンオキシ構造又はポリプロピレンオキシ構造を有することがより好ましい。
(Plasticizer)
The thermoplastic resin layer preferably contains a plasticizer from the viewpoints of resolution, adhesion to adjacent layers, and developability.
The plasticizer preferably has a smaller molecular weight (weight average molecular weight (Mw) in the case of an oligomer or polymer) than the alkali-soluble resin. The molecular weight of the plasticizer (weight average molecular weight (Mw)) is preferably 200 to 2,000.
The plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with the alkali-soluble resin and exhibits plasticity, but from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity, the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule, and is a polyalkylene glycol. Compounds are more preferred. The alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer more preferably has a polyethyleneoxy structure or a polypropyleneoxy structure.
 また、可塑剤は、解像性及び保存安定性の観点から、(メタ)アクリレート化合物を含有することが好ましい。相溶性、解像性及び隣接する層との密着性の観点から、アルカリ可溶性樹脂がアクリル樹脂であり、かつ、可塑剤が(メタ)アクリレート化合物を含有することがより好ましい。
 可塑剤として用いられる(メタ)アクリレート化合物としては、上述した感光性層に含有される重合性化合物として記載した(メタ)アクリレート化合物が挙げられる。
 感光性転写部材において、熱可塑性樹脂層と感光性層とが直接接触して積層される場合、熱可塑性樹脂層及び感光性層がいずれも同じ(メタ)アクリレート化合物を含有することが好ましい。同じ(メタ)アクリレート化合物を熱可塑性樹脂層及び感光性層がそれぞれ含有することで、層間の成分拡散が抑制され、保存安定性が向上するためである。
Further, the plasticizer preferably contains a (meth) acrylate compound from the viewpoint of resolution and storage stability. From the viewpoint of compatibility, resolution and adhesion to the adjacent layer, it is more preferable that the alkali-soluble resin is an acrylic resin and the plasticizer contains a (meth) acrylate compound.
Examples of the (meth) acrylate compound used as a plasticizer include the (meth) acrylate compound described as the polymerizable compound contained in the photosensitive layer described above.
In the photosensitive transfer member, when the thermoplastic resin layer and the photosensitive layer are directly contacted and laminated, it is preferable that both the thermoplastic resin layer and the photosensitive layer contain the same (meth) acrylate compound. This is because the thermoplastic resin layer and the photosensitive layer contain the same (meth) acrylate compound, respectively, so that the diffusion of components between the layers is suppressed and the storage stability is improved.
 熱可塑性樹脂層が可塑剤として(メタ)アクリレート化合物を含有する場合、隣接する層との密着性の観点から、露光後の露光部においても(メタ)アクリレート化合物が重合しないことが好ましい。
 また、可塑剤として用いられる(メタ)アクリレート化合物としては、解像性、隣接する層との密着性及び現像性の観点から、一分子中に2つ以上の(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する多官能(メタ)アクリレート化合物が好ましい。
 更に、可塑剤として用いられる(メタ)アクリレート化合物としては、酸基を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物、又は、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレート化合物も好ましい。
When the thermoplastic resin layer contains a (meth) acrylate compound as a plasticizer, it is preferable that the (meth) acrylate compound does not polymerize even in the exposed portion after exposure from the viewpoint of adhesion to the adjacent layer.
The (meth) acrylate compound used as a plasticizer is a polyfunctional compound having two or more (meth) acryloyl groups in one molecule from the viewpoints of resolution, adhesion to adjacent layers, and developability. A (meth) acrylate compound is preferred.
Further, as the (meth) acrylate compound used as a plasticizer, a (meth) acrylate compound having an acid group or a urethane (meth) acrylate compound is also preferable.
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、可塑剤を1種単独で含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。
 可塑剤の含有量は、解像性、隣接する層との密着性及び現像性の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂層の全質量に対し、1質量%~70質量%が好ましく、10質量%~60質量%がより好ましく、20質量%~50質量%が特に好ましい。
The thermoplastic resin layer may contain one type of plasticizer alone, or may contain two or more types of plasticizer.
The content of the plasticizer is preferably 1% by mass to 70% by mass and 10% by mass to 60% by mass with respect to the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of resolution, adhesion to adjacent layers and developability. By mass% is more preferable, and 20% by mass to 50% by mass is particularly preferable.
(界面活性剤)
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、厚さ均一性の観点から、界面活性剤を含有することが好ましい。
 界面活性剤としては、上述した感光性層が含有してもよい界面活性剤が挙げられ、好ましい態様も同じである。
(Surfactant)
The thermoplastic resin layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity.
Examples of the surfactant include surfactants that may be contained in the above-mentioned photosensitive layer, and the preferred embodiment is the same.
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、界面活性剤を1種単独で含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。
 界面活性剤の含有量は、熱可塑性樹脂層の全質量に対し、0.001質量%~10質量%が好ましく、0.01質量%~3質量%がより好ましい。
The thermoplastic resin layer may contain one type of surfactant alone or two or more types.
The content of the surfactant is preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass, based on the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer.
(増感剤)
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、増感剤を含有してもよい。
 増感剤としては、特に制限されず、上述した感光性層が含有してもよい増感剤が挙げられる。
(Sensitizer)
The thermoplastic resin layer may contain a sensitizer.
The sensitizer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a sensitizer that may be contained in the above-mentioned photosensitive layer.
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、増感剤を、1種単独で含有してもよいし、2種以上を含有してもよい。
 増感剤の含有量は、目的により適宜選択できるが、光源に対する感度の向上、及び、露光部及び非露光部の視認性の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂層の全質量に対し、0.01質量%~5質量%の範囲が好ましく、0.05質量%~1質量%の範囲がより好ましい。
The thermoplastic resin layer may contain one type of sensitizer alone or two or more types.
The content of the sensitizer can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, but from the viewpoint of improving the sensitivity to the light source and the visibility of the exposed and non-exposed areas, 0.01 mass with respect to the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer. The range of% to 5% by mass is preferable, and the range of 0.05% by mass to 1% by mass is more preferable.
(添加剤等)
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、上記成分以外に、必要に応じて公知の添加剤を含有してもよい。
 また、熱可塑性樹脂層については、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0189~0193に記載されており、この公報に記載の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
(Additives, etc.)
In addition to the above components, the thermoplastic resin layer may contain known additives, if necessary.
Further, the thermoplastic resin layer is described in paragraphs 0189 to 0193 of JP-A-2014-85643, and the contents described in this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
(物性等)
 熱可塑性樹脂層の層厚は、特に制限されないが、隣接する層との密着性の観点から、1μm以上が好ましく、2μm以上がより好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、現像性及び解像性の観点から、20μm以下が好ましく、10μm以下がより好ましく、5μm以下が更に好ましい。
(Physical characteristics, etc.)
The layer thickness of the thermoplastic resin layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 μm or more, more preferably 2 μm or more, from the viewpoint of adhesion to adjacent layers. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of developability and resolution, 20 μm or less is preferable, 10 μm or less is more preferable, and 5 μm or less is further preferable.
(形成方法)
 熱可塑性樹脂層の形成方法は、上記の成分を含有する層を形成可能な方法であれば特に制限されない。
 熱可塑性樹脂層の形成方法としては、例えば、上記の成分と溶剤とを含有する熱可塑性樹脂組成物を調製し、支持体等の表面に熱可塑性樹脂組成物を塗布し、熱可塑性樹脂組成物の塗膜を乾燥することにより形成する方法が挙げられる。
 熱可塑性樹脂組成物は、熱可塑性樹脂組成物の粘度を調節し、熱可塑性樹脂層の形成を容易にするため、溶剤を含有することが好ましい。
(Formation method)
The method for forming the thermoplastic resin layer is not particularly limited as long as it is a method capable of forming a layer containing the above components.
As a method for forming the thermoplastic resin layer, for example, a thermoplastic resin composition containing the above components and a solvent is prepared, the thermoplastic resin composition is applied to the surface of a support or the like, and the thermoplastic resin composition is formed. Examples thereof include a method of forming the coating film by drying.
The thermoplastic resin composition preferably contains a solvent in order to adjust the viscosity of the thermoplastic resin composition and facilitate the formation of the thermoplastic resin layer.
-溶剤-
 熱可塑性樹脂組成物に含有される溶剤としては、熱可塑性樹脂層に含有される上記成分を溶解又は分散可能であれば特に制限されない。
 熱可塑性樹脂組成物に含有される溶剤としては、上述した感光性組成物が含有してもよい溶剤が挙げられ、好ましい態様も同じである。
-solvent-
The solvent contained in the thermoplastic resin composition is not particularly limited as long as the above-mentioned components contained in the thermoplastic resin layer can be dissolved or dispersed.
Examples of the solvent contained in the thermoplastic resin composition include solvents that may be contained in the above-mentioned photosensitive composition, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
 熱可塑性樹脂組成物に含有される溶剤は、1種単独であってもよく、2種以上であってもよい。
 熱可塑性樹脂組成物を塗布する際における溶剤の含有量は、熱可塑性樹脂組成物中の全固形分100質量部に対し、50質量部~1,900質量部が好ましく、100質量部~900質量部がより好ましい。
The solvent contained in the thermoplastic resin composition may be one kind alone or two or more kinds.
The content of the solvent when the thermoplastic resin composition is applied is preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass, preferably 100 parts by mass to 900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the thermoplastic resin composition. The portion is more preferable.
 熱可塑性樹脂組成物の調製及び熱可塑性樹脂層の形成は、上述した感光性組成物の調製方法及び感光性層の形成方法に準じて行えばよい。
 例えば、熱可塑性樹脂層に含有される各成分を上記溶剤に溶解させた溶液を予め調製し、得られた溶液を所定の割合で混合することにより、熱可塑性樹脂組成物が調製した後、
得られた熱可塑性樹脂組成物を支持体の表面に塗布し、熱可塑性樹脂組成物の塗膜を乾燥させることにより、熱可塑性樹脂層が形成される。
 また、後述するカバーフィルム上に、感光性層及び中間層を形成した後、中間層の表面に熱可塑性樹脂層を形成してもよい。
The preparation of the thermoplastic resin composition and the formation of the thermoplastic resin layer may be carried out according to the method for preparing the photosensitive composition and the method for forming the photosensitive layer described above.
For example, a solution in which each component contained in the thermoplastic resin layer is dissolved in the above solvent is prepared in advance, and the obtained solution is mixed at a predetermined ratio to prepare a thermoplastic resin composition.
The thermoplastic resin layer is formed by applying the obtained thermoplastic resin composition to the surface of the support and drying the coating film of the thermoplastic resin composition.
Further, after forming the photosensitive layer and the intermediate layer on the cover film described later, the thermoplastic resin layer may be formed on the surface of the intermediate layer.
〔中間層〕
 上記積層体は、熱可塑性樹脂層と感光性層との間に、中間層を有していてもよい
 感光性転写部材は、熱可塑性樹脂層と感光性層との間に、中間層を有することが好ましい。中間層を有することにより、複数層を塗布する際及び塗布後の保存の際における成分の混合を抑制できる。
 中間層は、現像性、並びに、複数層を塗布する際及び塗布後の保存の際における成分の混合を抑制する観点から、水溶性の層であることが好ましい。
 なお、本明細書において「水溶性」とは、液温が22℃であるpH7.0の水100gへの溶解度が0.1g以上であることを意味する。
[Middle layer]
The laminate may have an intermediate layer between the thermoplastic resin layer and the photosensitive layer. The photosensitive transfer member has an intermediate layer between the thermoplastic resin layer and the photosensitive layer. Is preferable. By having the intermediate layer, it is possible to suppress the mixing of the components when the plurality of layers are applied and when the layers are stored after application.
The intermediate layer is preferably a water-soluble layer from the viewpoint of developability and suppressing mixing of components during application of the plurality of layers and storage after application.
In the present specification, "water-soluble" means that the solubility in 100 g of water having a liquid temperature of 22 ° C. and a pH of 7.0 is 0.1 g or more.
 中間層としては、特開平5-72724号公報に「分離層」として記載されている、酸素遮断機能のある酸素遮断層が挙げられる。中間層が酸素遮断層であると、露光時の感度が向上し、露光機の時間負荷が低減し、生産性が向上するため、好ましい。
 中間層として用いられる酸素遮断層は、上記公報等に記載された公知の層から適宜選択すればよい。中でも、低い酸素透過性を示し、水又はアルカリ水溶液(22℃の炭酸ナトリウムの1質量%水溶液)に分散又は溶解する酸素遮断層が好ましい。
Examples of the intermediate layer include an oxygen blocking layer having an oxygen blocking function, which is described as a “separation layer” in JP-A-5-72724. When the intermediate layer is an oxygen blocking layer, the sensitivity at the time of exposure is improved, the time load of the exposure machine is reduced, and the productivity is improved, which is preferable.
The oxygen blocking layer used as the intermediate layer may be appropriately selected from the known layers described in the above publications and the like. Of these, an oxygen blocking layer that exhibits low oxygen permeability and is dispersed or dissolved in water or an alkaline aqueous solution (1% by mass aqueous solution of sodium carbonate at 22 ° C.) is preferable.
 中間層は、樹脂を含有することが好ましい。
 中間層に含有される樹脂としては、例えば、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂、ポリビニルピロリドン系樹脂、セルロース系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、ポリエチレンオキサイド系樹脂、ゼラチン、ビニルエーテル系樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、及び、これらの共重合体等の樹脂が挙げられる。
 中間層に含有される樹脂としては、水溶性樹脂が好ましい。
 また、中間層に含有される樹脂は、複数層間の成分の混合を抑制する観点から、感光性層に含有される重合体A、及び、熱可塑性樹脂層に含有され熱可塑性樹脂(アルカリ可溶性樹脂)のいずれとも異なる樹脂であることが好ましい。
The intermediate layer preferably contains a resin.
Examples of the resin contained in the intermediate layer include polyvinyl alcohol-based resin, polyvinylpyrrolidone-based resin, cellulose-based resin, acrylamide-based resin, polyethylene oxide-based resin, gelatin, vinyl ether-based resin, polyamide resin, and their common weights. Examples include resins such as coalescence.
As the resin contained in the intermediate layer, a water-soluble resin is preferable.
Further, the resin contained in the intermediate layer includes the polymer A contained in the photosensitive layer and the thermoplastic resin (alkali-soluble resin) contained in the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of suppressing the mixing of the components between the plurality of layers. ), It is preferable that the resin is different from any of the above.
 中間層は、酸素遮断性、並びに、複数層を塗布する際及び塗布後の保存の際における成分の混合を抑制する観点から、ポリビニルアルコールを含有することが好ましく、ポリビニルアルコール及びポリビニルピロリドンの両者を含有することがより好ましい。 The intermediate layer preferably contains polyvinyl alcohol from the viewpoint of oxygen blocking property and suppressing mixing of components during application of the plurality of layers and storage after application, and contains both polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinylpyrrolidone. It is more preferable to contain it.
 中間層は、上記樹脂を1種単独で含有してもよく、2種以上を含有してもよい。
 中間層における樹脂の含有量は、特に制限されないが、酸素遮断性、並びに、複数層を塗布する際及び塗布後の保存の際における成分の混合を抑制する観点から、中間層の全質量に対し、50質量%~100質量%が好ましく、70質量%~100質量%がより好ましく、80質量%~100質量%が更に好ましく、90質量%~100質量%が特に好ましい。
 また、中間層は、必要に応じて界面活性剤等の添加剤を含有してもよい。
The intermediate layer may contain the above resin alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the resin in the intermediate layer is not particularly limited, but is based on the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of oxygen blocking property and suppressing the mixing of components during application of the plurality of layers and storage after application. , 50% by mass to 100% by mass, more preferably 70% by mass to 100% by mass, further preferably 80% by mass to 100% by mass, and particularly preferably 90% by mass to 100% by mass.
Further, the intermediate layer may contain an additive such as a surfactant, if necessary.
 中間層の層厚は、特に制限されないが、0.1μm~5μmが好ましく、0.5μm~3μmがより好ましい。
 中間層の厚みが上記の範囲内であると、酸素遮断性を低下させることがなく、複数層を塗布する際及び塗布後の保存の際における成分の混合を抑制でき、また、現像時の中間層除去時間の増大を抑制できるためである。
The layer thickness of the intermediate layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 μm to 5 μm, and more preferably 0.5 μm to 3 μm.
When the thickness of the intermediate layer is within the above range, the oxygen blocking property is not lowered, the mixing of the components at the time of applying the plurality of layers and at the time of storage after application can be suppressed, and the intermediate during development. This is because an increase in layer removal time can be suppressed.
 中間層の形成方法は、特に制限されず、例えば、上記樹脂及び任意の添加剤を含有する中間層組成物を調製し、熱可塑性樹脂層又は感光性層の表面に塗布し、中間層組成物の塗膜を乾燥することにより、中間層を形成する方法が挙げられる。
 中間層組成物は、中間層組成物の粘度を調節し、中間層の形成を容易にするため、溶剤を含有することが好ましい。
The method for forming the intermediate layer is not particularly limited, and for example, an intermediate layer composition containing the above resin and any additive is prepared and applied to the surface of the thermoplastic resin layer or the photosensitive layer to form the intermediate layer composition. A method of forming an intermediate layer by drying the coating film of the above can be mentioned.
The intermediate layer composition preferably contains a solvent in order to adjust the viscosity of the intermediate layer composition and facilitate the formation of the intermediate layer.
 中間層組成物に含有される溶剤としては、上記樹脂を溶解又は分散可能であれば特に制限されず、水及び水混和性の有機溶剤よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種が好ましく、水又は水と水混和性の有機溶剤との混合溶剤がより好ましい。
 水混和性の有機溶剤としては、例えば、炭素数1~3のアルコール、アセトン、エチレングリコール及びグリセリンが挙げられ、炭素数1~3のアルコールが好ましく、メタノール又はエタノールがより好ましい。
The solvent contained in the intermediate layer composition is not particularly limited as long as the above resin can be dissolved or dispersed, and at least one selected from the group consisting of water and a water-miscible organic solvent is preferable, and water or water or water is preferable. A mixed solvent of water and a water-miscible organic solvent is more preferable.
Examples of the water-miscible organic solvent include alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, acetone, ethylene glycol and glycerin, and alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms are preferable, and methanol or ethanol is more preferable.
〔カバーフィルム〕
 上記積層体は、感光性層の支持体に対向していない面に接するカバーフィルムを有することが好ましい。
 感光性転写部材は、感光性層の支持体に対向していない面に接するカバーフィルムを有することが好ましい。
 以下、本明細書において、感光性層の支持体に対向する面を「第1面」ともいい、第1面とは反対側の面を「第2面」ともいう。
[Cover film]
The laminate preferably has a cover film in contact with a surface of the photosensitive layer that does not face the support.
The photosensitive transfer member preferably has a cover film in contact with a surface of the photosensitive layer that does not face the support.
Hereinafter, in the present specification, the surface of the photosensitive layer facing the support is also referred to as a "first surface", and the surface opposite to the first surface is also referred to as a "second surface".
 カバーフィルムを構成する材料としては、樹脂フィルム及び紙が挙げられ、強度及び可撓性の観点から、樹脂フィルムが好ましい。
 樹脂フィルムとしては、ポリエチレンフィルム、ポリプロピレンフィルム、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、及び、ポリカーボネートフィルムが挙げられる。中でも、ポリエチレンフィルム、ポリプロピレンフィルム、又は、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが好ましい。
Examples of the material constituting the cover film include a resin film and paper, and a resin film is preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility.
Examples of the resin film include a polyethylene film, a polypropylene film, a polyethylene terephthalate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, and a polycarbonate film. Of these, a polyethylene film, a polypropylene film, or a polyethylene terephthalate film is preferable.
 カバーフィルムの厚さ(層厚)は、特に制限されないが、5μm~100μmが好ましく、10μm~50μmがより好ましく、10μm~20μmが特に好ましい。
 また、カバーフィルムの感光性層に接する面(以下単に「カバーフィルムの表面」ともいう)の算術平均粗さRa値は、解像性により優れる点から、0.3μm以下であることが好ましく、0.1μm以下であることがより好ましく、0.05μm以下であることが特に好ましい。カバーフィルムの表面のRa値が上記範囲であることにより、感光性層及び形成される樹脂パターンの層厚の均一性が向上するためと考えられる。
 カバーフィルムの表面のRa値の下限は特に制限されないが、0.001μm以上が好ましい。
The thickness (layer thickness) of the cover film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 μm to 100 μm, more preferably 10 μm to 50 μm, and particularly preferably 10 μm to 20 μm.
Further, the arithmetic mean roughness Ra value of the surface of the cover film in contact with the photosensitive layer (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “the surface of the cover film”) is preferably 0.3 μm or less from the viewpoint of excellent resolution. It is more preferably 0.1 μm or less, and particularly preferably 0.05 μm or less. It is considered that when the Ra value on the surface of the cover film is within the above range, the uniformity of the layer thickness of the photosensitive layer and the formed resin pattern is improved.
The lower limit of the Ra value on the surface of the cover film is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.001 μm or more.
 感光性転写部材は、上述した層以外の層(以下「その他の層」ともいう。)を備えてもよい。その他の層としては、例えば、コントラストエンハンスメント層が挙げられる。
 コントラストエンハンスメント層については、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0134に記載されている。また、その他の層については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0194~0196に記載されている。これらの公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
The photosensitive transfer member may include a layer other than the above-mentioned layer (hereinafter, also referred to as “other layer”). Other layers include, for example, a contrast enhancement layer.
The contrast enhancement layer is described in paragraph 0134 of WO 2018/179640. Further, other layers are described in paragraphs 0194 to 0196 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-85643. The contents of these publications are incorporated herein by reference.
 感光性転写部材における支持体及びカバーフィルムを除く各層の総厚さは、本開示における効果をより発揮する観点から、20μm以下であることが好ましく、10μm以下であることがより好ましく、8μm以下であることが更に好ましく、2μm以上8μm以下であることが特に好ましい。
 また、感光性転写部材における感光性層、中間層及び熱可塑性樹脂層の総厚さは、本開示における効果をより発揮する観点から、20μm以下であることが好ましく、10μm以下であることがより好ましく、8μm以下であることが更に好ましく、2μm以上8μm以下であることが特に好ましい。
The total thickness of each layer of the photosensitive transfer member excluding the support and the cover film is preferably 20 μm or less, more preferably 10 μm or less, and 8 μm or less from the viewpoint of further exerting the effects in the present disclosure. It is more preferably 2 μm or more and 8 μm or less.
Further, the total thickness of the photosensitive layer, the intermediate layer and the thermoplastic resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member is preferably 20 μm or less, and more preferably 10 μm or less, from the viewpoint of further exerting the effects in the present disclosure. It is more preferably 8 μm or less, and particularly preferably 2 μm or more and 8 μm or less.
(支持体、感光性層及びカバーフィルムの関係)
 本開示に用いられる感光性層を有する積層体は、
 感光性層を硬化した硬化膜の120℃における破断伸びが15%以上であり、
 支持体の感光性層側の表面の算術平均粗さRaが50nm以下であり、
 カバーフィルムの感光性層側の表面の算術平均粗さRaが150nm以下であることが好ましい。
(Relationship between support, photosensitive layer and cover film)
The laminate having a photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure is
The breaking elongation of the cured film obtained by curing the photosensitive layer at 120 ° C. is 15% or more.
The arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the support on the photosensitive layer side is 50 nm or less.
The arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the cover film on the photosensitive layer side is preferably 150 nm or less.
 また、本開示に用いられる感光性層を有する積層体は、下記式(R1)を満たすことが好ましい。
  X×Y<1,500   式(R1)
 ここで、上記式(R1)中、Xは、感光性層を硬化した硬化膜の120℃における破断伸びの値(%)を表し、Yは、支持体の感光性層側の表面の算術平均粗さRaの値(nm)を表す。
 X×Yは、750以下がより好ましい。
Further, the laminate having a photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure preferably satisfies the following formula (R1).
X × Y <1,500 formula (R1)
Here, in the above formula (R1), X represents the value (%) of the elongation at break at 120 ° C. of the cured film obtained by curing the photosensitive layer, and Y is the arithmetic mean of the surface of the support on the photosensitive layer side. Represents the value of roughness Ra (nm).
X × Y is more preferably 750 or less.
 感光性層を硬化した硬化膜の23℃での破断伸びに対し、120℃での破断伸びが2倍以上大きいことが好ましい。
 破断伸びは、厚み20μmの感光性層を超高圧水銀ランプにより120mJ/cmで露光して硬化した後、高圧水銀ランプで400mJ/cmで更に追加露光し、145℃で30分間加熱した後の硬化膜を用い、引っ張り試験によって測定する。
It is preferable that the breaking elongation at 120 ° C. is twice or more larger than the breaking elongation at 23 ° C. of the cured film obtained by curing the photosensitive layer.
The elongation at break was determined by exposing a photosensitive layer having a thickness of 20 μm to 120 mJ / cm 2 with an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp and curing it, then further exposing it to 400 mJ / cm 2 with a high pressure mercury lamp and heating it at 145 ° C. for 30 minutes. Measured by a tensile test using the cured film of.
 また、本開示に用いられる感光性層を有する積層体は、下記式(R2)を満たすことが好ましい。
  Y≦Z   式(R2)
 ここで、上記式(R2)中、Yは、支持体の感光性層側の表面の算術平均粗さRaの値(nm)を表し、Zは、カバーフィルムの感光性層側の表面の算術平均粗さRaの値(nm)を表す。
Further, the laminate having a photosensitive layer used in the present disclosure preferably satisfies the following formula (R2).
Y ≦ Z formula (R2)
Here, in the above formula (R2), Y represents the arithmetic mean roughness Ra value (nm) of the surface of the support on the photosensitive layer side, and Z is the arithmetic of the surface of the cover film on the photosensitive layer side. It represents the value (nm) of the average roughness Ra.
〔感光性転写部材の製造方法〕
 本開示に用いられる感光性転写部材(感光性層を有する積層体)の製造方法は、特に制限されず、公知の製造方法、例えば、公知の各層の形成方法を用いることができる。
 以下、図2を参照しながら、本開示に用いられる感光性転写部材の製造方法について説明する。但し、本開示に用いられる感光性転写部材は、図2に示す構成を有するものに制限されない。
 図2は、本開示に用いられる感光性転写部材の構成の一例を示す概略図である。図2に示す感光性転写部材100は、支持体10と、熱可塑性樹脂層12と、中間層14と、感光性層16と、カバーフィルム18とがこの順に積層された構成を有する。
[Manufacturing method of photosensitive transfer member]
The method for producing the photosensitive transfer member (laminate having the photosensitive layer) used in the present disclosure is not particularly limited, and a known production method, for example, a known method for forming each layer can be used.
Hereinafter, a method for manufacturing the photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIG. However, the photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure is not limited to the one having the configuration shown in FIG.
FIG. 2 is a schematic view showing an example of the configuration of the photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure. The photosensitive transfer member 100 shown in FIG. 2 has a structure in which a support 10, a thermoplastic resin layer 12, an intermediate layer 14, a photosensitive layer 16, and a cover film 18 are laminated in this order.
 上記の感光性転写部材100の製造方法としては、例えば、支持体10の表面に熱可塑性樹脂組成物を塗布した後、熱可塑性樹脂組成物の塗膜を乾燥させることにより、熱可塑性樹脂層12を形成する工程と、熱可塑性樹脂層12の表面に中間層組成物を塗布した後、中間層組成物の塗膜を乾燥させて中間層14を形成する工程と、中間層14の表面にバインダーポリマー及び重合性化合物を含有する感光性組成物を塗布した後、感光性組成物の塗膜を乾燥させて感光性層16を形成する工程とを含む方法が挙げられる。
 上記の製造方法において、アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤及びアルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有する熱可塑性樹脂組成物と、水及び水混和性の有機溶剤よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有する中間層組成物と、バインダーポリマー、重合性化合物、並びに、アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤及びアルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有する感光性組成物とを使用することが好ましい。これにより、熱可塑性樹脂層12の表面への中間層組成物の塗布、及び/又は、中間層組成物の塗膜を有する積層体の保存期間における、熱可塑性樹脂層12に含有される成分と中間層14に含有される成分との混合を抑制でき、なお且つ、中間層14の表面への感光性組成物の塗布、及び/又は、感光性組成物の塗膜を有する積層体の保存期間における、中間層14に含有される成分と感光性層16に含有される成分との混合を抑制できる。
As a method for producing the photosensitive transfer member 100, for example, the thermoplastic resin layer 12 is formed by applying the thermoplastic resin composition to the surface of the support 10 and then drying the coating film of the thermoplastic resin composition. And the step of applying the intermediate layer composition to the surface of the thermoplastic resin layer 12 and then drying the coating film of the intermediate layer composition to form the intermediate layer 14, and the step of forming the intermediate layer 14 and the binder on the surface of the intermediate layer 14. Examples thereof include a method including a step of applying a photosensitive composition containing a polymer and a polymerizable compound, and then drying a coating film of the photosensitive composition to form a photosensitive layer 16.
In the above production method, it is selected from the group consisting of a thermoplastic resin composition containing at least one selected from the group consisting of an alkylene glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent, and a water- and water-mixable organic solvent. An intermediate layer composition containing at least one of the above, and a photosensitive composition containing at least one selected from the group consisting of a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound, and an alkylene glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent. It is preferable to use. As a result, the components contained in the thermoplastic resin layer 12 during the application of the intermediate layer composition to the surface of the thermoplastic resin layer 12 and / or the storage period of the laminate having the coating film of the intermediate layer composition. Mixing with the components contained in the intermediate layer 14 can be suppressed, and the coating of the photosensitive composition on the surface of the intermediate layer 14 and / or the storage period of the laminate having the coating film of the photosensitive composition. In, the mixing of the component contained in the intermediate layer 14 and the component contained in the photosensitive layer 16 can be suppressed.
 上記の製造方法により製造された積層体の感光性層16に、カバーフィルム18を圧着させることにより、感光性転写部材100が製造される。
 本開示に用いられる感光性転写部材の製造方法としては、感光性層16の第2面に接するようにカバーフィルム18を設ける工程を含むことにより、支持体10、熱可塑性樹脂層12、中間層14、感光性層16及びカバーフィルム18を備える感光性転写部材100を製造することが好ましい。
 上記の製造方法により感光性転写部材100を製造した後、感光性転写部材100を巻き取ることにより、ロール形態の感光性転写部材を作製及び保管してもよい。ロール形態の感光性転写部材は、ロールツーロール方式での基板との貼り合わせにそのままの形態で提供できる。
The photosensitive transfer member 100 is manufactured by pressing the cover film 18 onto the photosensitive layer 16 of the laminate manufactured by the above manufacturing method.
The method for manufacturing the photosensitive transfer member used in the present disclosure includes a step of providing a cover film 18 so as to be in contact with the second surface of the photosensitive layer 16, thereby including a support 10, a thermoplastic resin layer 12, and an intermediate layer. 14. It is preferable to manufacture the photosensitive transfer member 100 including the photosensitive layer 16 and the cover film 18.
After manufacturing the photosensitive transfer member 100 by the above manufacturing method, the photosensitive transfer member 100 in the form of a roll may be manufactured and stored by winding the photosensitive transfer member 100. The roll-type photosensitive transfer member can be provided as it is for bonding with a substrate in a roll-to-roll method.
 また、本開示に係る切断物の製造方法により得られた感光性転写部材は、回路配線の製造、及び、タッチパネル等の表示装置の製造に好適に用いることができる。 Further, the photosensitive transfer member obtained by the method for manufacturing a cut product according to the present disclosure can be suitably used for manufacturing a circuit wiring and a display device such as a touch panel.
 また、本開示に係る切断物の製造方法により得られた感光性転写部材は、フォトリソグラフィによる精密微細加工が必要な各種用途に好適に用いることができる。感光性層をパターニング後に、感光性層を被膜としてエッチングをしてもよいし、電気めっきを主体とするエレクトロフォーミングを行ってもよい。また、パターニングによって得られた硬化膜は、永久膜として使用してもよく、例えば、層間絶縁膜、配線保護膜、インデックスマッチング層を有する配線保護膜などとして用いてもよい。また、本開示に係る切断物の製造方法により得られた感光性転写部材は、半導体パッケージ、プリント基板、センサー基板の各種配線形成用途、タッチパネル、電磁波シールド材、フィルムヒーターのような導電性フィルム、液晶シール材、マイクロマシン又はマイクロエレクトロニクス分野における構造物の形成等の用途に好適に使用し得る。 Further, the photosensitive transfer member obtained by the method for producing a cut product according to the present disclosure can be suitably used for various applications requiring precision microfabrication by photolithography. After patterning the photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer may be used as a coating for etching, or electroforming may be performed mainly by electroplating. Further, the cured film obtained by patterning may be used as a permanent film, or may be used as, for example, an interlayer insulating film, a wiring protective film, a wiring protective film having an index matching layer, or the like. Further, the photosensitive transfer member obtained by the method for manufacturing a cut product according to the present disclosure includes various wiring forming applications for semiconductor packages, printed circuit boards, sensor substrates, touch panels, electromagnetic wave shielding materials, conductive films such as film heaters, and the like. It can be suitably used for applications such as formation of structures in the fields of liquid crystal sealing materials, micromachines or microelectronics.
 また、実施形態Aの積層体は、感光性層が顔料を含む着色樹脂層である態様も好ましく挙げられる。
 着色樹脂層の用途としては、上述した以外に、例えば、液晶表示装置(LCD)、並びに、固体撮像素子〔例えば、CCD(charge-coupled device)及びCMOS(complementary metal oxide semiconductor)〕に用いられるカラーフィルタ等の着色画素又はブラックマトリクスを形成する用途に好適である。
 近年の電子機器が有する液晶表示窓には、液晶表示窓を保護するために、透明なガラス基板等の裏面周縁部に黒色の枠状遮光層が形成されたカバーガラスが取り付けられている場合がある。このような遮光層を形成するために着色樹脂層が使用し得る。
 着色樹脂層における顔料以外の態様については、上述した態様と同様である。
Further, as the laminate of the embodiment A, an embodiment in which the photosensitive layer is a colored resin layer containing a pigment is also preferably mentioned.
In addition to the above, the colored resin layer is used for, for example, a liquid crystal display (LCD) and a color used for a solid-state image sensor [for example, a CCD (charge-coupled device) and a CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor)]. It is suitable for forming colored pixels such as filters or a black matrix.
In recent years, the liquid crystal display window of an electronic device may be provided with a cover glass having a black frame-shaped light-shielding layer formed on the peripheral edge of the back surface of a transparent glass substrate or the like in order to protect the liquid crystal display window. be. A colored resin layer can be used to form such a light-shielding layer.
Aspects other than the pigment in the colored resin layer are the same as those described above.
<顔料>
 着色樹脂層に用いられる顔料としては、所望とする色相に合わせて適宜選択すればよく、黒色顔料、白色顔料、黒色及び白色以外の有彩色の顔料の中から選択できる。中でも、黒色系のパターンを形成する場合には、顔料として黒色顔料が好適に選択される。
<Pigment>
The pigment used for the colored resin layer may be appropriately selected according to a desired hue, and can be selected from black pigments, white pigments, and chromatic pigments other than black and white. Above all, when forming a black pattern, a black pigment is preferably selected as the pigment.
 黒色顔料としては、本開示における効果を損なわない範囲であれば、公知の黒色顔料(有機顔料又は無機顔料等)を適宜選択することができる。中でも、光学濃度の観点から、黒色顔料としては、例えば、カーボンブラック、酸化チタン、チタンカーバイド、酸化鉄、酸化チタン及び黒鉛等が好適に挙げられ、カーボンブラックが特に好ましい。カーボンブラックとしては、表面抵抗の観点から、表面の少なくとも一部が樹脂で被覆されたカーボンブラックが好ましい。 As the black pigment, a known black pigment (organic pigment, inorganic pigment, etc.) can be appropriately selected as long as the effect in the present disclosure is not impaired. Among them, from the viewpoint of optical density, examples of the black pigment include carbon black, titanium oxide, titanium carbide, iron oxide, titanium oxide and graphite, and carbon black is particularly preferable. As the carbon black, from the viewpoint of surface resistance, carbon black in which at least a part of the surface is coated with a resin is preferable.
 黒色顔料の粒径は、分散安定性の観点から、数平均粒径で0.001μm~0.1μmが好ましく、0.01μm~0.08μmがより好ましい。
 ここで、粒径とは、電子顕微鏡で撮影した顔料粒子の写真像から顔料粒子の面積を求め、顔料粒子の面積と同面積の円を考えた場合の円の直径を指し、数平均粒径は、任意の100個の粒子について上記の粒径を求め、求められた100個の粒径を平均して得られる平均値である。
From the viewpoint of dispersion stability, the particle size of the black pigment is preferably 0.001 μm to 0.1 μm, more preferably 0.01 μm to 0.08 μm in terms of number average particle size.
Here, the particle size refers to the diameter of a circle when the area of the pigment particles is obtained from a photographic image of the pigment particles taken with an electron microscope and a circle having the same area as the area of the pigment particles is considered, and the number average particle size. Is an average value obtained by obtaining the above particle size for any 100 particles and averaging the obtained 100 particle sizes.
 黒色顔料以外の顔料として、白色顔料については、特開2005-007765号公報の段落0015及び0114に記載の白色顔料を使用できる。具体的には、白色顔料のうち、無機顔料としては、酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、リトポン、軽質炭酸カルシウム、ホワイトカーボン、酸化アルミニウム、水酸化アルミニウム、又は硫酸バリウムが好ましく、酸化チタン又は酸化亜鉛がより好ましく、酸化チタンが更に好ましい。無機顔料としては、ルチル型又はアナターゼ型の酸化チタンが更に好ましく、ルチル型の酸化チタンが特に好ましい。
 また、酸化チタンの表面は、シリカ処理、アルミナ処理、チタニア処理、ジルコニア処理、又は有機物処理が施されていてもよく、二つ以上の処理が施されてもよい。これにより、酸化チタンの触媒活性が抑制され、耐熱性及び褪光性等が改善される。
 加熱後の感光性層の厚みを薄くする観点から、酸化チタンの表面への表面処理としては、アルミナ処理及びジルコニア処理の少なくとも一方が好ましく、アルミナ処理及びジルコニア処理の両方が特に好ましい。
As the pigment other than the black pigment, the white pigment described in paragraphs 0015 and 0114 of JP-A-2005-007765 can be used as the white pigment. Specifically, among the white pigments, as the inorganic pigment, titanium oxide, zinc oxide, lithopone, light calcium carbonate, white carbon, aluminum oxide, aluminum hydroxide, or barium sulfate is preferable, and titanium oxide or zinc oxide is more preferable. Preferably, titanium oxide is even more preferred. As the inorganic pigment, rutile-type or anatase-type titanium oxide is more preferable, and rutile-type titanium oxide is particularly preferable.
Further, the surface of titanium oxide may be subjected to silica treatment, alumina treatment, titania treatment, zirconia treatment, or organic matter treatment, or may be subjected to two or more treatments. As a result, the catalytic activity of titanium oxide is suppressed, and heat resistance, fading property, etc. are improved.
From the viewpoint of reducing the thickness of the photosensitive layer after heating, at least one of alumina treatment and zirconia treatment is preferable as the surface treatment of the surface of titanium oxide, and both alumina treatment and zirconia treatment are particularly preferable.
 また、感光性層が着色樹脂層である場合、転写性の観点から、感光性層は、黒色顔料及び白色顔料以外の有彩色の顔料を更に含んでいることも好ましい。有彩色の顔料を含む場合、有彩色の顔料の粒径としては、分散性がより優れる点で、0.1μm以下が好ましく、0.08μm以下がより好ましい。
 有彩色の顔料としては、例えば、ビクトリア・ピュアーブルーBO(Color Index(以下C.I.)42595)、オーラミン(C.I.41000)、ファット・ブラックHB(C.I.26150)、モノライト・エローGT(C.I.ピグメント・エロー12)、パーマネント・エローGR(C.I.ピグメント・エロー17)、パーマネント・エローHR(C.I.ピグメント・エロー83)、パーマネント・カーミンFBB(C.I.ピグメント・レッド146)、ホスターバームレッドESB(C.I.ピグメント・バイオレット19)、パーマネント・ルビーFBH(C.I.ピグメント・レッド11)、ファステル・ピンクBスプラ(C.I.ピグメント・レッド81)、モナストラル・ファースト・ブルー(C.I.ピグメント・ブルー15)、モノライト・ファースト・ブラックB(C.I.ピグメント・ブラック1)及びカーボン、C.I.ピグメント・レッド97、C.I.ピグメント・レッド122、C.I.ピグメント・レッド149、C.I.ピグメント・レッド168、C.I.ピグメント・レッド177、C.I.ピグメント・レッド180、C.I.ピグメント・レッド192、C.I.ピグメント・レッド215、C.I.ピグメント・グリーン7、C.I.ピグメント・ブルー15:1、C.I.ピグメント・ブルー15:4、C.I.ピグメント・ブルー22、C.I.ピグメント・ブルー60、C.I.ピグメント・ブルー64、及びC.I.ピグメント・バイオレット23等が挙げられる。中でも、C.I.ピグメント・レッド177が好ましい。
When the photosensitive layer is a colored resin layer, it is also preferable that the photosensitive layer further contains a chromatic pigment other than the black pigment and the white pigment from the viewpoint of transferability. When a chromatic pigment is contained, the particle size of the chromatic pigment is preferably 0.1 μm or less, more preferably 0.08 μm or less, in that the dispersibility is more excellent.
Examples of chromatic pigments include Victoria Pure Blue BO (Color Index (hereinafter CI) 42595), Auramine (CI41000), Fat Black HB (CI26150), and Monolite. -Errow GT (CI Pigment Yellow 12), Permanent Yellow GR (CI Pigment Yellow 17), Permanent Yellow HR (CI Pigment Yellow 83), Permanent Carmine FBB (C) I. Pigment Red 146), Hoster Balm Red ESB (CI Pigment Violet 19), Permanent Ruby FBH (CI Pigment Red 11), Fastel Pink B Supra (CI Pigment) Red 81), Monastral First Blue (CI Pigment Blue 15), Monolite First Black B (CI Pigment Black 1) and Carbon, C.I. I. Pigment Red 97, C.I. I. Pigment Red 122, C.I. I. Pigment Red 149, C.I. I. Pigment Red 168, C.I. I. Pigment Red 177, C.I. I. Pigment Red 180, C.I. I. Pigment Red 192, C.I. I. Pigment Red 215, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 1, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 4, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 22, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 60, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 64, and C.I. I. Pigment Violet 23 and the like. Above all, C.I. I. Pigment Red 177 is preferred.
 感光性層が顔料を含む場合、顔料の含有量としては、感光性層の全質量に対して、3質量%を超え40質量%以下が好ましく、3質量%を超え35質量%以下がより好ましく、5質量%を超え35質量%以下が更に好ましく、10質量%以上35質量%以下が特に好ましい。 When the photosensitive layer contains a pigment, the content of the pigment is preferably more than 3% by mass and 40% by mass or less, more preferably more than 3% by mass and 35% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. It is more preferably more than 5% by mass and 35% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 10% by mass or more and 35% by mass or less.
 感光性層が黒色顔料以外の顔料(白色顔料及び有彩色の顔料)を含む場合、黒色顔料以外の顔料の含有量は、黒色顔料に対して、30質量%以下が好ましく、1質量%~20質量%がより好ましく、3質量%~15質量%が更に好ましい。 When the photosensitive layer contains a pigment other than the black pigment (white pigment and chromatic pigment), the content of the pigment other than the black pigment is preferably 30% by mass or less, preferably 1% by mass to 20% by mass, based on the black pigment. The mass% is more preferable, and 3% by mass to 15% by mass is further preferable.
 なお、感光性層が黒色顔料を含み、且つ、感光性層が感光性組成物で形成される場合、黒色顔料(好ましくはカーボンブラック)は、顔料分散液の形態で感光性組成物に導入されることが好ましい。
 分散液は、黒色顔料と顔料分散剤とをあらかじめ混合して得られる混合物を、有機溶剤(又はビヒクル)に加えて分散機で分散させることによって調製されるものでもよい。顔料分散剤は、顔料及び溶剤に応じて選択すればよく、例えば市販の分散剤を使用することができる。なお、ビヒクルとは、顔料分散液とした場合に顔料を分散させている媒質の部分を指し、液状であり、黒色顔料を分散状態で保持するバインダー成分と、バインダー成分を溶解及び希釈する溶剤成分(有機溶剤)と、を含む。
When the photosensitive layer contains a black pigment and the photosensitive layer is formed of a photosensitive composition, the black pigment (preferably carbon black) is introduced into the photosensitive composition in the form of a pigment dispersion. Is preferable.
The dispersion liquid may be prepared by adding a mixture obtained by premixing a black pigment and a pigment dispersant to an organic solvent (or vehicle) and dispersing it with a disperser. The pigment dispersant may be selected according to the pigment and the solvent, and for example, a commercially available dispersant can be used. The vehicle refers to the portion of the medium in which the pigment is dispersed when the pigment is dispersed, and is a liquid, a binder component that holds the black pigment in a dispersed state, and a solvent component that dissolves and dilutes the binder component. (Organic solvent) and.
 分散機としては、特に制限はなく、例えば、ニーダー、ロールミル、アトライター、スーパーミル、ディゾルバ、ホモミキサー、及びサンドミル等の公知の分散機が挙げられる。更に、機械的摩砕により摩擦力を利用して微粉砕してもよい。分散機及び微粉砕については、「顔料の事典」(朝倉邦造著、第一版、朝倉書店、2000年、438頁、310頁)の記載を参照することができる。 The disperser is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include known dispersers such as a kneader, a roll mill, an attritor, a super mill, a dissolver, a homomixer, and a sand mill. Further, it may be finely pulverized by mechanical grinding using frictional force. For the disperser and fine pulverization, the description in "Encyclopedia of Pigments" (Kunizo Asakura, First Edition, Asakura Shoten, 2000, 438, 310) can be referred to.
〔〔実施形態Bの積層体〕〕
 以下において、実施形態Bの積層体について、一例を挙げて説明する。
 以下において、実施形態Bの積層体を構成する各要素について説明する。
 実施形態Bの積層体に用いられる支持体及びカバーフィルムは、実施形態Aの積層体における支持体及びカバーフィルムと同様であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
[[Laminate of Embodiment B]]
Hereinafter, the laminated body of the embodiment B will be described with an example.
Hereinafter, each element constituting the laminated body of the embodiment B will be described.
The support and cover film used for the laminate of Embodiment B are the same as the support and cover film of the laminate of Embodiment A, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
〔感光性層〕
 感光性転写部材は、感光性層を有する。
 感光性層を被転写体上に転写した後、露光及び現像を行うことにより、被転写体上にパターンを形成できる。
 以下、感光性層に含まれ得る成分について詳述する。
[Photosensitive layer]
The photosensitive transfer member has a photosensitive layer.
A pattern can be formed on the transfer target by transferring the photosensitive layer onto the transfer target and then exposing and developing the photosensitive layer.
Hereinafter, the components that can be contained in the photosensitive layer will be described in detail.
(バインダーポリマー)
 感光性層は、バインダーポリマーを含むことが好ましい。
 バインダーポリマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、アミド樹脂、アミドエポキシ樹脂、アルキド樹脂、フェノール樹脂、エステル樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、エポキシ樹脂と(メタ)アクリル酸との反応で得られるエポキシアクリレート樹脂、及び、エポキシアクリレート樹脂と酸無水物との反応で得られる酸変性エポキシアクリレート樹脂が挙げられる。
 また、バインダーポリマーは、アルカリ可溶性樹脂であることが好ましい。
(Binder polymer)
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a binder polymer.
Examples of the binder polymer include (meth) acrylic resin, styrene resin, epoxy resin, amide resin, amide epoxy resin, alkyd resin, phenol resin, ester resin, urethane resin, and the reaction of epoxy resin with (meth) acrylic acid. Examples thereof include the obtained epoxy acrylate resin and the acid-modified epoxy acrylate resin obtained by reacting the epoxy acrylate resin with the acid anhydride.
Further, the binder polymer is preferably an alkali-soluble resin.
 バインダーポリマーの好適態様の一つとして、アルカリ現像性及びフィルム形成性に優れる点で、(メタ)アクリル樹脂が挙げられる。
 なお、本明細書において、(メタ)アクリル樹脂とは、(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位を有する樹脂を意味する。(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位の含有量は、(メタ)アクリル樹脂の全構成単位に対して、50質量%以上が好ましく、70質量%以上がより好ましく、90質量%以上が更に好ましい。
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂は、(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位のみで構成されていてもよく、(メタ)アクリル化合物以外の重合性単量体に由来する構成単位を有していてもよい。すなわち、(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位の含有量の上限は、(メタ)アクリル樹脂の全構成単位に対して、100質量%以下である。
One of the preferred embodiments of the binder polymer is a (meth) acrylic resin in that it is excellent in alkali developability and film forming property.
In the present specification, the (meth) acrylic resin means a resin having a structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound. The content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, still more preferably 90% by mass or more, based on all the structural units of the (meth) acrylic resin. ..
The (meth) acrylic resin may be composed of only structural units derived from the (meth) acrylic compound, or may have structural units derived from a polymerizable monomer other than the (meth) acrylic compound. .. That is, the upper limit of the content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is 100% by mass or less with respect to all the structural units of the (meth) acrylic resin.
 (メタ)アクリル化合物としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、(メタ)アクリル酸エステル、(メタ)アクリルアミド、及び、(メタ)アクリロニトリルが挙げられる。
 (メタ)アクリル酸エステルとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸テトラヒドロフルフリルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸ジメチルアミノエチルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸ジエチルアミノエチルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸グリシジルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジルエステル、2,2,2-トリフルオロエチル(メタ)アクリレート、及び、2,2,3,3-テトラフルオロプロピル(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられ、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが好ましい。
 (メタ)アクリルアミドとしては、例えば、ジアセトンアクリルアミド等のアクリルアミドが挙げられる。
Examples of the (meth) acrylic compound include (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid ester, (meth) acrylamide, and (meth) acrylonitrile.
Examples of the (meth) acrylic acid ester include (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid tetrahydrofurfuryl ester, (meth) acrylic acid dimethylaminoethyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid diethylaminoethyl ester, and (meth) acrylic acid ester. ) Acrylic acid glycidyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid benzyl ester, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl (meth) acrylate, and 2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropyl (meth) acrylate. Meta) Acrylic acid alkyl esters are preferred.
Examples of (meth) acrylamide include acrylamide such as diacetone acrylamide.
 (メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸ペンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸ヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ヘプチル、(メタ)アクリル酸オクチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ノニル、(メタ)アクリル酸デシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ウンデシル、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸ドデシル等の炭素数が1~12のアルキル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが挙げられる。
 (メタ)アクリル酸エステルとしては、炭素数1~4のアルキル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル又は(メタ)アクリル酸エチルがより好ましい。
Examples of the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate, and (meth). Hexyl acrylate, heptyl (meth) acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, nonyl (meth) acrylate, decyl (meth) acrylate, undecyl (meth) acrylate, and Examples thereof include (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters having an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, such as dodecyl (meth) acrylic acid.
As the (meth) acrylic acid ester, a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable, and methyl (meth) acrylate or ethyl (meth) acrylate is more preferable.
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂は、(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位以外の構成単位を有していてもよい。
 上記構成単位を形成する重合性単量体としては、(メタ)アクリル化合物と共重合可能な(メタ)アクリル化合物以外の化合物であれば特に制限されず、例えば、スチレン、ビニルトルエン、及び、α-メチルスチレン等のα位又は芳香族環に置換基を有してもよいスチレン化合物、アクリロニトリル及びビニル-n-ブチルエーテル等のビニルアルコールエステル、マレイン酸、マレイン酸無水物、マレイン酸モノメチル、マレイン酸モノエチル、及び、マレイン酸モノイソプロピル等のマレイン酸モノエステル、フマル酸、ケイ皮酸、α-シアノケイ皮酸、イタコン酸、並びに、クロトン酸が挙げられる。
 これらの重合性単量体は、1種又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
The (meth) acrylic resin may have a structural unit other than the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound.
The polymerizable monomer forming the above-mentioned structural unit is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound other than the (meth) acrylic compound that is copolymerizable with the (meth) acrylic compound, and is, for example, styrene, vinyltoluene, and α. -Styrene compounds such as methylstyrene which may have a substituent at the α-position or aromatic ring, vinyl alcohol esters such as acrylonitrile and vinyl-n-butyl ether, maleic acid, maleic acid anhydride, monomethyl maleate, maleic acid Examples thereof include monoethyl and maleic acid monoesters such as monoisopropyl maleate, fumaric acid, silicic acid, α-cyanosilicic acid, itaconic acid, and crotonic acid.
These polymerizable monomers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 また、(メタ)アクリル樹脂は、アルカリ現像性をより良好にする点から、酸基を有する構成単位を有することが好ましい。酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基、及び、ホスホン酸基が挙げられる。
 中でも、(メタ)アクリル樹脂は、カルボキシ基を有する構成単位を有することがより好ましく、上記の(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位を有することが更に好ましい。
Further, the (meth) acrylic resin preferably has a structural unit having an acid group from the viewpoint of improving the alkali developability. Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, and a phosphonic acid group.
Among them, the (meth) acrylic resin more preferably has a structural unit having a carboxy group, and further preferably has a structural unit derived from the above-mentioned (meth) acrylic acid.
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂における酸基を有する構成単位(好ましくは(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位)の含有量は、現像性に優れる点で、(メタ)アクリル樹脂の全質量に対して、10質量%以上が好ましい。また、上限値は特に制限されないが、アルカリ耐性に優れる点で、50質量%以下が好ましく、40質量%以下がより好ましい。 The content of the constituent unit having an acid group (preferably the constituent unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid) in the (meth) acrylic resin is excellent in developability with respect to the total mass of the (meth) acrylic resin. 10% by mass or more is preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less, in terms of excellent alkali resistance.
 また、(メタ)アクリル樹脂は、上述した(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位を有することがより好ましい。
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂における(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位の含有量は、(メタ)アクリル樹脂の全構成単位に対して、50質量%~90質量%が好ましく、60質量%~90質量%がより好ましく、65質量%~90質量%が更に好ましい。
Further, it is more preferable that the (meth) acrylic resin has a structural unit derived from the above-mentioned (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester.
The content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester in the (meth) acrylic resin is preferably 50% by mass to 90% by mass, preferably 60% by mass or more, based on all the structural units of the (meth) acrylic resin. 90% by mass is more preferable, and 65% by mass to 90% by mass is further preferable.
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂としては、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位及び(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位の両者を有する樹脂が好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位及び(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位のみで構成されている樹脂がより好ましい。
 また、(メタ)アクリル樹脂としては、メタクリル酸に由来する構成単位、メタクリル酸メチルに由来する構成単位、及び、アクリル酸エチルに由来する構成単位を有するアクリル樹脂も好ましい。
As the (meth) acrylic resin, a resin having both a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable, and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid are preferable. A resin composed only of structural units derived from the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is more preferable.
Further, as the (meth) acrylic resin, an acrylic resin having a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid, a structural unit derived from methyl methacrylate, and a structural unit derived from ethyl acrylate is also preferable.
 また、(メタ)アクリル樹脂は、解像性の観点から、メタクリル酸に由来する構成単位及びメタクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を有することが好ましく、メタクリル酸に由来する構成単位及びメタクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位の両者を有することが好ましい。
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂におけるメタクリル酸に由来する構成単位及びメタクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位の合計含有量は、解像性の観点から、(メタ)アクリル樹脂の全構成単位に対して、40質量%以上が好ましく、60質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は特に制限されず、100質量%以下であってもよく、80質量%以下が好ましい。
Further, the (meth) acrylic resin preferably has at least one selected from the group consisting of a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid alkyl ester from the viewpoint of resolvability, and methacrylic acid. It is preferable to have both a structural unit derived from an acid and a structural unit derived from an alkyl methacrylate ester.
The total content of the methacrylic acid-derived structural unit and the methacrylic acid alkyl ester-derived structural unit in the (meth) acrylic resin is 40 with respect to all the structural units of the (meth) acrylic resin from the viewpoint of resolution. It is preferably mass% or more, and more preferably 60% by mass or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, and may be 100% by mass or less, preferably 80% by mass or less.
 また、(メタ)アクリル樹脂は、解像性の観点から、メタクリル酸に由来する構成単位及びメタクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種と、アクリル酸に由来する構成単位及びアクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種とを有することも好ましい。
 解像性の観点から、メタクリル酸に由来する構成単位及びメタクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位の合計含有量は、アクリル酸に由来する構成単位及びアクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位の合計含有量に対して、質量比で60/40~80/20が好ましい。
Further, the (meth) acrylic resin is derived from at least one selected from the group consisting of a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid alkyl ester from the viewpoint of resolution, and acrylic acid. It is also preferable to have at least one selected from the group consisting of a structural unit and a structural unit derived from an acrylic acid alkyl ester.
From the viewpoint of resolution, the total content of the structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and the structural unit derived from methacrylic acid alkyl ester is the total content of the structural unit derived from acrylic acid and the structural unit derived from acrylic acid alkyl ester. The mass ratio is preferably 60/40 to 80/20 with respect to the amount.
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂は、転写後の感光性層の現像性に優れる点で、末端にエステル基を有することが好ましい。
 なお、(メタ)アクリル樹脂の末端部は、合成に用いた重合開始剤に由来する部位により構成される。末端にエステル基を有する(メタ)アクリル樹脂は、エステル基を有するラジカルを発生する重合開始剤を用いることにより合成できる。
The (meth) acrylic resin preferably has an ester group at the terminal because it is excellent in the developability of the photosensitive layer after transfer.
The terminal portion of the (meth) acrylic resin is composed of a site derived from the polymerization initiator used in the synthesis. A (meth) acrylic resin having an ester group at the terminal can be synthesized by using a polymerization initiator that generates a radical having an ester group.
 また、バインダーポリマーは、例えば、現像性の点から、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のバインダーポリマーであることが好ましい。
 また、バインダーポリマーは、例えば、加熱により架橋成分と熱架橋し、強固な膜を形成しやすいという点から、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基を有する樹脂(いわゆる、カルボキシ基含有樹脂)であることがより好ましく、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基を有する(メタ)アクリル樹脂(いわゆる、カルボキシ基含有(メタ)アクリル樹脂)であることが更に好ましい。
 バインダーポリマーがカルボキシ基を有する樹脂であると、例えば、ブロックイソシアネート化合物等の熱架橋性化合物を添加して熱架橋することで、3次元架橋密度を高めることができる。また、カルボキシ基を有する樹脂のカルボキシ基が無水化され、疎水化すると、湿熱耐性が改善し得る。
Further, the binder polymer is preferably, for example, a binder polymer having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more from the viewpoint of developability.
Further, the binder polymer is, for example, a resin having a carboxy group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more (so-called carboxy group-containing resin) from the viewpoint that it is easily crosslinked with a crosslinked component by heating to form a strong film. More preferably, it is a (meth) acrylic resin having a carboxy group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more (so-called carboxy group-containing (meth) acrylic resin).
When the binder polymer is a resin having a carboxy group, the three-dimensional crosslink density can be increased by adding a thermally crosslinkable compound such as a blocked isocyanate compound and thermally crosslinking the binder polymer. Further, when the carboxy group of the resin having a carboxy group is anhydrous and hydrophobized, the wet heat resistance can be improved.
 酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有(メタ)アクリル樹脂としては、上記酸価の条件を満たす限りにおいて、特に制限はなく、公知の(メタ)アクリル樹脂から適宜選択できる。
 例えば、特開2011-095716号公報の段落0025に記載のポリマーのうち、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂、特開2010-237589号公報の段落0033~0052に記載のポリマーのうち、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂等を好ましく使用できる。
The carboxy group-containing (meth) acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more is not particularly limited as long as the above acid value conditions are satisfied, and can be appropriately selected from known (meth) acrylic resins.
For example, among the polymers described in paragraphs 0025 of JP2011-095716A, carboxy group-containing acrylic resins having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more, and the polymers described in paragraphs 0033 to 0052 of JP2010-237589A. , A carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more can be preferably used.
 バインダーポリマーの他の好適態様としては、スチレン-アクリル共重合体が挙げられる。なお、本明細書において、スチレン-アクリル共重合体とは、スチレン化合物に由来する構成単位と、(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位とを有する樹脂を指し、上記スチレン化合物に由来する構成単位、及び、上記(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位の合計含有量は、上記共重合体の全構成単位に対して、30質量%以上が好ましく、50質量%以上がより好ましい。
 また、スチレン化合物に由来する構成単位の含有量は、上記共重合体の全構成単位に対して、1質量%以上が好ましく、5質量%以上がより好ましく、5質量%~80質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、上記(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位の含有量は、上記共重合体の全構成単位に対して、5質量%以上が好ましく、10質量%以上がより好ましく、20質量%~95質量%が更に好ましい。
Another preferred embodiment of the binder polymer is a styrene-acrylic copolymer. In the present specification, the styrene-acrylic copolymer refers to a resin having a structural unit derived from a styrene compound and a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylic compound, and a structural unit derived from the styrene compound. The total content of the structural units derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, based on all the structural units of the copolymer.
The content of the structural unit derived from the styrene compound is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and further preferably 5% by mass to 80% by mass, based on all the structural units of the copolymer. preferable.
The content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, and 20% by mass to 95% by mass, based on all the structural units of the copolymer. Mass% is more preferred.
 バインダーポリマーは、得られる硬化膜の透湿度及び強度の観点から、芳香環構造を有することが好ましく、芳香環構造を有する構成単位を有することがより好ましい。
 芳香環構造を有する構成単位を形成するモノマーとしては、スチレン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、メチルスチレン、及び、α-メチルスチレン等のスチレン化合物、並びに、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。
 中でも、スチレン化合物が好ましく、スチレンがより好ましい。
 また、バインダーポリマーは、得られる硬化膜の透湿度及び強度の観点から、下記式(S)で表される構成単位(スチレンに由来する構成単位)を有することがより好ましい。
The binder polymer preferably has an aromatic ring structure, and more preferably has a structural unit having an aromatic ring structure, from the viewpoint of moisture permeability and strength of the obtained cured film.
Examples of the monomer forming a structural unit having an aromatic ring structure include styrene compounds such as styrene, tert-butoxystyrene, methylstyrene, and α-methylstyrene, and benzyl (meth) acrylate.
Of these, styrene compounds are preferable, and styrene is more preferable.
Further, the binder polymer more preferably has a structural unit (constituent unit derived from styrene) represented by the following formula (S) from the viewpoint of moisture permeability and strength of the obtained cured film.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 バインダーポリマーが芳香環構造を有する構成単位を有する場合、芳香環構造を有する構成単位の含有量は、得られる硬化膜の透湿度及び強度の観点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5質量%~90質量%が好ましく、10質量%~70質量%より好ましく、20質量%~60質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、バインダーポリマーにおける芳香環構造を有する構成単位の含有量は、得られる硬化膜の透湿度及び強度の観点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5モル%~70モル%が好ましく、10モル%~60モル%がより好ましく、20モル%~60モル%が更に好ましい。
 更に、バインダーポリマーにおける上記式(S)で表される構成単位の含有量は、得られる硬化膜の透湿度及び強度の観点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5モル%~70モル%が好ましく、10モル%~60モル%がより好ましく、20モル%~60モル%が更に好ましく、20モル%~50モル%が特に好ましい。
 なお、本明細書において、「構成単位」の含有量をモル比で規定する場合、上記「構成単位」は「モノマー単位」と同義であるものとする。また、本明細書において、上記「モノマー単位」は、高分子反応等により重合後に修飾されていてもよい。以下においても同様である。
When the binder polymer has a structural unit having an aromatic ring structure, the content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure is 5 with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of the moisture permeability and strength of the obtained cured film. It is preferably from mass% to 90% by mass, more preferably from 10% by mass to 70% by mass, and even more preferably from 20% by mass to 60% by mass.
The content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure in the binder polymer is preferably 5 mol% to 70 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of the moisture permeability and strength of the obtained cured film. 10 mol% to 60 mol% is more preferable, and 20 mol% to 60 mol% is further preferable.
Further, the content of the structural unit represented by the above formula (S) in the binder polymer is 5 mol% to 70 mol with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of the moisture permeability and strength of the obtained cured film. % Is preferable, 10 mol% to 60 mol% is more preferable, 20 mol% to 60 mol% is further preferable, and 20 mol% to 50 mol% is particularly preferable.
In the present specification, when the content of the "constituent unit" is defined by the molar ratio, the above "constituent unit" is synonymous with the "monomer unit". Further, in the present specification, the above-mentioned "monomer unit" may be modified after polymerization by a polymer reaction or the like. The same applies to the following.
 バインダーポリマーは、現像残渣抑制性、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有することが好ましい。つまり、バインダーポリマーは、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位を有することが好ましい。中でも、バインダーポリマーは、2環以上の脂肪族炭化水素環が縮環した環構造を有することがより好ましい。 The binder polymer preferably has an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure from the viewpoint of suppressing development residue, strength of the obtained cured film, and adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film. That is, the binder polymer preferably has a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure. Above all, it is more preferable that the binder polymer has a ring structure in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused.
 脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位における脂肪族炭化水素環構造を構成する環としては、トリシクロデカン環、シクロヘキサン環、シクロペンタン環、ノルボルナン環、及び、イソボロン環が挙げられる。
 中でも、現像残渣抑制性、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、2環以上の脂肪族炭化水素環が縮環した環が好ましく、テトラヒドロジシクロペンタジエン環(トリシクロ[5.2.1.02,6]デカン環)がより好ましい。
 脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位を形成するモノマーとしては、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、及び、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
 また、バインダーポリマーは、現像残渣抑制性、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、下記式(Cy)で表される構成単位を有することがより好ましく、上記式(S)で表される構成単位、及び、下記式(Cy)で表される構成単位を有することがより好ましい。
Examples of the ring constituting the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in the structural unit having the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure include a tricyclodecane ring, a cyclohexane ring, a cyclopentane ring, a norbornane ring, and an isoborone ring.
Among them, a ring in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused is preferable, and a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring is preferable, from the viewpoints of suppressing the development residue, the strength of the obtained cured film, and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film. (Tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] decan ring) is more preferable.
Examples of the monomer forming a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure include dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, and isobornyl (meth) acrylate.
Further, the binder polymer more preferably has a structural unit represented by the following formula (Cy) from the viewpoint of suppressing development residue, strength of the obtained cured film, and adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film. It is more preferable to have a structural unit represented by the above formula (S) and a structural unit represented by the following formula (Cy).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 式(Cy)中、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、RCyは脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する一価の基を表す。 Wherein (Cy), R M represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R Cy represents a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure.
 式(Cy)におけるRは、メチル基であることが好ましい。
 式(Cy)におけるRCyは、現像残渣抑制性、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、炭素数5~20の脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する一価の基であることが好ましく、炭素数6~16の脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する一価の基であることがより好ましく、炭素数8~14の脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する一価の基であることが更に好ましい。
 式(Cy)のRCyにおける脂肪族炭化水素環構造は、単環構造であっても、多環構造であってもよい。
 また、式(Cy)のRCyにおける脂肪族炭化水素環構造は、現像残渣抑制性、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、シクロペンタン環構造、シクロヘキサン環構造、テトラヒドロジシクロペンタジエン環構造、ノルボルナン環構造、又は、イソボロン環構造であることが好ましく、シクロヘキサン環構造、又は、テトラヒドロジシクロペンタジエン環構造であることがより好ましく、テトラヒドロジシクロペンタジエン環構造であることが更に好ましい。
 更に、式(Cy)のRCyにおける脂肪族炭化水素環構造は、現像残渣抑制性、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、2環以上の脂肪族炭化水素環が縮環した環構造であることが好ましく、2~4環の脂肪族炭化水素環が縮環した環であることがより好ましい。
 更に、式(Cy)におけるRCyは、現像残渣抑制性、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、式(Cy)における-C(=O)O-の酸素原子と脂肪族炭化水素環構造とが直接結合する基、すなわち、脂肪族炭化水素環基であることが好ましく、シクロヘキシル基、又は、ジシクロペンタニル基であることがより好ましく、ジシクロペンタニル基であることが更に好ましい。
R M in the formula (Cy) is preferably a methyl group.
One R Cy in Formula (Cy), which has developed residual渣抑system, strength of the obtained cured film, and, in view of the tackiness of the uncured film obtained, an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure having 5 to 20 carbon atoms It is preferably a valent group, more preferably a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure having 6 to 16 carbon atoms, and more preferably a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure having 8 to 14 carbon atoms. It is more preferable that it is a group of.
Aliphatic hydrocarbon cyclic structure in the R Cy of formula (Cy) can be a single ring structure or may be a polycyclic structure.
Further, the aliphatic hydrocarbon cyclic structure in the R Cy of formula (Cy), the development residue渣抑system, strength of the obtained cured film, and, in view of the tackiness of the uncured film obtained, a cyclopentane ring, cyclohexane It is preferably a ring structure, a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring structure, a norbornane ring structure, or an isoborone ring structure, more preferably a cyclohexane ring structure or a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring structure, and a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring structure. Is more preferable.
Moreover, aliphatic hydrocarbon cyclic structure in the R Cy of formula (Cy), the development residue渣抑system, strength of the obtained cured film, and, in view of the tackiness of the uncured film obtained, bicyclic or more aliphatic A ring structure in which the hydrocarbon ring is fused is preferable, and a ring in which 2 to 4 aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused is more preferable.
Furthermore, R Cy in the formula (Cy), the intensity of the development residual渣抑system resistance, the resulting cured film, and, in view of the tackiness of the uncured film obtained, -C in the formula (Cy) (= O) O- The group in which the oxygen atom of the above and the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure are directly bonded, that is, an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group is preferable, and a cyclohexyl group or a dicyclopentanyl group is more preferable. It is more preferably a pentanyl group.
 バインダーポリマーは、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位を1種単独で有していても、2種以上有していてもよい。
 バインダーポリマーが脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位を有する場合、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位の含有量は、現像残渣抑制性、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5質量%~90質量%が好ましく、10質量%~80質量%がより好ましく、20質量%~70質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、バインダーポリマーにおける脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位の含有量は、現像残渣抑制性、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5モル%~70モル%が好ましく、10モル%~60モル%がより好ましく、20モル%~50モル%が更に好ましい。
 更に、バインダーポリマーにおける上記式(Cy)で表される構成単位の含有量は、現像残渣抑制性、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5モル%~70モル%が好ましく、10モル%~60モル%がより好ましく、20モル%~50モル%が更に好ましい。
The binder polymer may have one type of structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure alone, or may have two or more types.
When the binder polymer has a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, the content of the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure is the development residue inhibitory property, the strength of the obtained cured film, and the obtained uncured film. From the viewpoint of film adhesiveness, 5% by mass to 90% by mass is preferable, 10% by mass to 80% by mass is more preferable, and 20% by mass to 70% by mass is further preferable, based on all the constituent units of the binder polymer.
In addition, the content of the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in the binder polymer is the total of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of suppressing the development residue, the strength of the obtained cured film, and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film. With respect to the constituent unit, 5 mol% to 70 mol% is preferable, 10 mol% to 60 mol% is more preferable, and 20 mol% to 50 mol% is further preferable.
Further, the content of the structural unit represented by the above formula (Cy) in the binder polymer is determined from the viewpoint of the inhibitory property of developing residue, the strength of the obtained cured film, and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film. With respect to all the constituent units, 5 mol% to 70 mol% is preferable, 10 mol% to 60 mol% is more preferable, and 20 mol% to 50 mol% is further preferable.
 バインダーポリマーが芳香環構造を有する構成単位及び脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位を有する場合、芳香環構造を有する構成単位及び脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位の総含有量は、現像残渣抑制性、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、10質量%~90質量%が好ましく、20質量%~80質量%がより好ましく、40質量%~75質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、バインダーポリマーにおける芳香環構造を有する構成単位及び脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位の総含有量は、現像残渣抑制性、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、10モル%~80モル%が好ましく、20モル%~70モル%がより好ましく、40モル%~60モル%が更に好ましい。
 更に、バインダーポリマーにおける上記式(S)で表される構成単位及び上記式(Cy)で表される構成単位の総含有量は、本現像残渣抑制性、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、10モル%~80モル%が好ましく、20モル%~70モル%がより好ましく、40モル%~60モル%が更に好ましい。
 また、バインダーポリマーにおける上記式(S)で表される構成単位のモル量nSと上記式(Cy)で表される構成単位のモル量nCyは、現像残渣抑制性、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、下記式(SCy)に示す関係を満たすことが好ましく、下記式(SCy-1)を満たすことがより好ましく、下記式(SCy-2)を満たすことが更に好ましい。
  0.2≦nS/(nS+nCy)≦0.8   式(SCy)
  0.30≦nS/(nS+nCy)≦0.75   式(SCy-1)
  0.40≦nS/(nS+nCy)≦0.70   式(SCy-2)
When the binder polymer has a structural unit having an aromatic ring structure and a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, the total content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure and the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure is developed. From the viewpoint of residue suppression, the strength of the obtained cured film, and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film, 10% by mass to 90% by mass is preferable, and 20% by mass to 80% by mass, based on all the constituent units of the binder polymer. The mass% is more preferable, and 40% by mass to 75% by mass is further preferable.
Further, the total content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure and the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in the binder polymer is the development residue inhibitory property, the strength of the obtained cured film, and the adhesion of the obtained uncured film. From the viewpoint of properties, 10 mol% to 80 mol% is preferable, 20 mol% to 70 mol% is more preferable, and 40 mol% to 60 mol% is further preferable with respect to all the constituent units of the binder polymer.
Further, the total content of the structural unit represented by the above formula (S) and the structural unit represented by the above formula (Cy) in the binder polymer is the present development residue inhibitory property, the strength of the obtained cured film, and the obtained. From the viewpoint of the adhesiveness of the uncured film, 10 mol% to 80 mol% is preferable, 20 mol% to 70 mol% is more preferable, and 40 mol% to 60 mol% is preferable with respect to all the constituent units of the binder polymer. More preferred.
Further, the molar amount nS of the structural unit represented by the above formula (S) and the molar amount nCy of the structural unit represented by the above formula (Cy) in the binder polymer are the development residue inhibitory property and the strength of the obtained cured film. From the viewpoint of the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film, it is preferable to satisfy the relationship shown in the following formula (SCy), more preferably the following formula (SCy-1) is satisfied, and the following formula (SCy-2) is used. It is more preferable to meet.
0.2 ≦ nS / (nS + nCy) ≦ 0.8 formula (SCy)
0.30 ≤ nS / (nS + nCy) ≤ 0.75 Equation (SCy-1)
0.40 ≤ nS / (nS + nCy) ≤ 0.70 equation (SCy-2)
 バインダーポリマーは、現像性、及び、基板との密着性の観点から、酸基を有する構成単位を有することが好ましい。
 上記酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、ホスホン酸基、及び、リン酸基が挙げられ、カルボキシ基が好ましい。
 上記酸基を有する構成単位としては、下記に示す、(メタ)アクリル酸由来の構成単位が好ましく、メタクリル酸由来の構成単位がより好ましい。
The binder polymer preferably has a structural unit having an acid group from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to the substrate.
Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group, and a carboxy group is preferable.
As the structural unit having the acid group, the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid, which is shown below, is preferable, and the structural unit derived from methacrylic acid is more preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 バインダーポリマーは、酸基を有する構成単位を1種単独で有していても、2種以上有していてもよい。
 バインダーポリマーが酸基を有する構成単位を有する場合、酸基を有する構成単位の含有量は、現像性、及び、基板との密着性の観点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5質量%~50質量%が好ましく、5質量%~40質量%がより好ましく、10質量%~30質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、バインダーポリマーにおける酸基を有する構成単位の含有量は、現像性、及び、基板との密着性の観点、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5モル%~70モル%が好ましく、10モル%~50モル%がより好ましく、20モル%~40モル%が更に好ましい。
 更に、バインダーポリマーにおける(メタ)アクリル酸由来の構成単位の含有量は、現像性、及び、基板との密着性の観点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5モル%~70モル%が好ましく、10モル%~50モル%がより好ましく、20モル%~40モル%が更に好ましい。
The binder polymer may have one type of structural unit having an acid group alone or two or more types.
When the binder polymer has a structural unit having an acid group, the content of the structural unit having an acid group is 5% by mass with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to the substrate. % To 50% by mass is preferable, 5% by mass to 40% by mass is more preferable, and 10% by mass to 30% by mass is further preferable.
The content of the constituent unit having an acid group in the binder polymer is preferably 5 mol% to 70 mol% with respect to all the constituent units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to the substrate. More preferably, mol% to 50 mol%, still more preferably 20 mol% to 40 mol%.
Further, the content of the (meth) acrylic acid-derived structural unit in the binder polymer is 5 mol% to 70 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to the substrate. Is preferable, 10 mol% to 50 mol% is more preferable, and 20 mol% to 40 mol% is further preferable.
 バインダーポリマーは、硬化性、及び、得られる硬化膜の強度の観点から、反応性基を有することが好ましく、反応性基を有する構成単位を有することがより好ましい。
 反応性基としては、ラジカル重合性基が好ましく、エチレン性不飽和基がより好ましい。また、バインダーポリマーがエチレン性不飽和基を有している場合、バインダーポリマーは、側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基を有する構成単位を有することが好ましい。
 本明細書において、「主鎖」とは、樹脂を構成する高分子化合物の分子中で相対的に最も長い結合鎖を表し、「側鎖」とは、主鎖から枝分かれしている原子団を表す。
 エチレン性不飽和基としては、アリル基又は(メタ)アクリロキシ基がより好ましい。
 反応性基を有する構成単位の一例としては、下記に示すものが挙げられるが、これらに限定されない。
The binder polymer preferably has a reactive group, and more preferably has a structural unit having a reactive group, from the viewpoint of curability and the strength of the obtained cured film.
As the reactive group, a radically polymerizable group is preferable, and an ethylenically unsaturated group is more preferable. When the binder polymer has an ethylenically unsaturated group, the binder polymer preferably has a structural unit having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain.
In the present specification, the "main chain" represents a relatively longest binding chain among the molecules of the polymer compound constituting the resin, and the "side chain" refers to an atomic group branched from the main chain. show.
As the ethylenically unsaturated group, an allyl group or a (meth) acryloxy group is more preferable.
Examples of the structural unit having a reactive group include, but are not limited to, those shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 バインダーポリマーは、反応性基を有する構成単位を1種単独で有していても、2種以上有していてもよい。
 バインダーポリマーが反応性基を有する構成単位を有する場合、反応性基を有する構成単位の含有量は、硬化性、及び、得られる硬化膜の強度の観点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5質量%~70質量%が好ましく、10質量%~50質量%がより好ましく、20質量%~40質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、バインダーポリマーにおける反応性基を有する構成単位の含有量は、硬化性、及び、得られる硬化膜の強度の観点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5モル%~70モル%が好ましく、10モル%~60モル%がより好ましく、20モル%~50モル%が更に好ましい。
The binder polymer may have one type of structural unit having a reactive group alone or two or more types.
When the binder polymer has a structural unit having a reactive group, the content of the structural unit having a reactive group is relative to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of curability and the strength of the obtained cured film. 5, 70% by mass is preferable, 10% by mass to 50% by mass is more preferable, and 20% by mass to 40% by mass is further preferable.
The content of the structural unit having a reactive group in the binder polymer is 5 mol% to 70 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of curability and the strength of the obtained cured film. Preferably, 10 mol% to 60 mol% is more preferable, and 20 mol% to 50 mol% is further preferable.
 反応性基をバインダーポリマーに導入する手段としては、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、第一級アミノ基、第二級アミノ基、アセトアセチル基、及び、スルホ基等の官能基に、エポキシ化合物、ブロックイソシアネート化合物、イソシアネート化合物、ビニルスルホン化合物、アルデヒド化合物、メチロール化合物、及び、カルボン酸無水物等の化合物を反応させる方法が挙げられる。
 反応性基をバインダーポリマーに導入する手段の好ましい例としては、カルボキシ基を有するポリマーを重合反応により合成した後、高分子反応により、得られた樹脂のカルボキシ基の一部にグリシジル(メタ)アクリレートを反応させて、(メタ)アクリロキシ基をポリマーに導入する手段が挙げられる。この手段により、側鎖に(メタ)アクリロキシ基を有するバインダーポリマーを得ることができる。
 上記重合反応は、70℃~100℃の温度条件で行うことが好ましく、80℃~90℃の温度条件で行うことがより好ましい。上記重合反応に用いる重合開始剤としては、アゾ系開始剤が好ましく、例えば、富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製のV-601(商品名)又はV-65(商品名)がより好ましい。上記高分子反応は、80℃~110℃の温度条件で行うことが好ましい。上記高分子反応においては、アンモニウム塩等の触媒を用いることが好ましい。
As a means for introducing a reactive group into a binder polymer, functional groups such as a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, an acetoacetyl group, and a sulfo group, an epoxy compound, and a blocked isocyanate are used. Examples thereof include a method of reacting a compound such as a compound, an isocyanate compound, a vinyl sulfone compound, an aldehyde compound, a methylol compound, and a carboxylic acid anhydride.
A preferable example of the means for introducing a reactive group into a binder polymer is that a polymer having a carboxy group is synthesized by a polymerization reaction and then glycidyl (meth) acrylate is added to a part of the carboxy groups of the obtained resin by the polymer reaction. Can be mentioned as a means for introducing a (meth) acryloxy group into a polymer by reacting. By this means, a binder polymer having a (meth) acryloxy group in the side chain can be obtained.
The polymerization reaction is preferably carried out under a temperature condition of 70 ° C. to 100 ° C., and more preferably carried out under a temperature condition of 80 ° C. to 90 ° C. As the polymerization initiator used in the above polymerization reaction, an azo-based initiator is preferable, and for example, V-601 (trade name) or V-65 (trade name) manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd. is more preferable. The polymer reaction is preferably carried out under temperature conditions of 80 ° C. to 110 ° C. In the above polymer reaction, it is preferable to use a catalyst such as an ammonium salt.
 バインダーポリマーとしては、現像性、硬化性、及び、得られる硬化膜の強度の観点から、以下に示す樹脂が好ましい。なお、以下に示す各構成単位の含有比率(a~d)及び重量平均分子量Mw等は目的に応じて適宜変更できる。 As the binder polymer, the following resins are preferable from the viewpoints of developability, curability, and strength of the obtained cured film. The content ratios (a to d) and the weight average molecular weight Mw of each of the structural units shown below can be appropriately changed according to the purpose.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 上記樹脂において、aは20質量%~60質量%、bは10質量%~50質量%、cは5.0質量%~25質量%、dは10質量%~50質量%であることが好ましい。 In the above resin, a is preferably 20% by mass to 60% by mass, b is preferably 10% by mass to 50% by mass, c is preferably 5.0% by mass to 25% by mass, and d is preferably 10% by mass to 50% by mass. ..
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 上記樹脂において、aは20質量%~60質量%、bは10質量%~50質量%、cは5.0質量%~25質量%、dは10質量%~50質量%であることが好ましい。 In the above resin, a is preferably 20% by mass to 60% by mass, b is preferably 10% by mass to 50% by mass, c is preferably 5.0% by mass to 25% by mass, and d is preferably 10% by mass to 50% by mass. ..
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 上記樹脂において、aは30質量%~65質量%、bは1.0質量%~20質量%、cは5.0質量%~25質量%、dは10質量%~50質量%であることが好ましい。 In the above resin, a is 30% by mass to 65% by mass, b is 1.0% by mass to 20% by mass, c is 5.0% by mass to 25% by mass, and d is 10% by mass to 50% by mass. Is preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 上記化合物において、aは1.0質量%~20質量%、bは20質量%~60質量%、cは5.0質量%~25質量%、dは10質量%~50質量%であることが好ましい。 In the above compound, a is 1.0% by mass to 20% by mass, b is 20% by mass to 60% by mass, c is 5.0% by mass to 25% by mass, and d is 10% by mass to 50% by mass. Is preferable.
 また、バインダーポリマーは、カルボン酸無水物構造を有する構成単位を有する重合体(以下、「重合体X」ともいう。)を含んでいてもよい。
 カルボン酸無水物構造は、鎖状カルボン酸無水物構造、及び、環状カルボン酸無水物構造のいずれであってもよいが、環状カルボン酸無水物構造であることが好ましい。
 環状カルボン酸無水物構造の環としては、5員環~7員環が好ましく、5員環又は6員環がより好ましく、5員環が更に好ましい。
Further, the binder polymer may contain a polymer having a structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure (hereinafter, also referred to as “polymer X”).
The carboxylic acid anhydride structure may be either a chain carboxylic acid anhydride structure or a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure, but a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure is preferable.
As the ring having a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure, a 5-membered ring to a 7-membered ring is preferable, a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring is more preferable, and a 5-membered ring is further preferable.
 カルボン酸無水物構造を有する構成単位は、下記式P-1で表される化合物から水素原子を2つ除いた2価の基を主鎖中に含む構成単位、又は、下記式P-1で表される化合物から水素原子を1つ除いた1価の基が主鎖に対して直接又は2価の連結基を介して結合している構成単位であることが好ましい。 The structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure is a structural unit containing a divalent group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the compound represented by the following formula P-1 in the main chain, or the following formula P-1. It is preferable that the monovalent group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the represented compound is a structural unit bonded to the main chain directly or via a divalent linking group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 式P-1中、RA1aは、置換基を表し、n1a個のRA1aは、同一でも異なっていてもよく、Z1aは、-C(=O)-O-C(=O)-を含む環を形成する2価の基を表し、n1aは、0以上の整数を表す。 In the formula P-1, R A1a represents a substituent, n 1a R A1a may be the same or different, and Z 1a is −C (= O) −OC (= O) −. Represents a divalent group forming a ring containing, and n 1a represents an integer of 0 or more.
 RA1aで表される置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基が挙げられる。
 Z1aとしては、炭素数2~4のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数2又は3のアルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数2のアルキレン基が更に好ましい。
 n1aは、0以上の整数を表す。Z1aが炭素数2~4のアルキレン基を表す場合、n1aは、0~4の整数であることが好ましく、0~2の整数であることがより好ましく、0であることが更に好ましい。
 n1aが2以上の整数を表す場合、複数存在するRA1aは、同一でも異なっていてもよい。また、複数存在するRA1aは、互いに結合して環を形成してもよいが、互いに結合して環を形成していないことが好ましい。
Examples of the substituent represented by RA1a include an alkyl group.
As Z 1a , an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable, an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkylene group having 2 carbon atoms is further preferable.
n 1a represents an integer of 0 or more. When Z 1a represents an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms, n 1a is preferably an integer of 0 to 4, more preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and even more preferably 0.
When n 1a represents an integer of 2 or more, a plurality of RA1a may be the same or different. Further, the plurality of RA1a may be bonded to each other to form a ring, but it is preferable that they are not bonded to each other to form a ring.
 カルボン酸無水物構造を有する構成単位としては、不飽和カルボン酸無水物に由来する構成単位が好ましく、不飽和環式カルボン酸無水物に由来する構成単位がより好ましく、不飽和脂肪族環式カルボン酸無水物に由来する構成単位が更に好ましく、無水マレイン酸又は無水イタコン酸に由来する構成単位が特に好ましく、無水マレイン酸に由来する構成単位が最も好ましい。 As the structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure, a structural unit derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid anhydride is preferable, a structural unit derived from an unsaturated cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride is more preferable, and an unsaturated aliphatic cyclic carboxylic acid is preferable. A structural unit derived from an acid anhydride is more preferable, a structural unit derived from maleic anhydride or itaconic anhydride is particularly preferable, and a structural unit derived from maleic anhydride is most preferable.
 以下、カルボン酸無水物構造を有する構成単位の具体例を挙げるが、カルボン酸無水物構造を有する構成単位は、これらの具体例に限定されるものではない。下記の構成単位中、Rxは、水素原子、メチル基、CHOH基、又は、CF基を表し、Meは、メチル基を表す。 Hereinafter, specific examples of the structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure will be given, but the structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure is not limited to these specific examples. In the following structural units, Rx represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a CH 2 OH group, or CF 3 groups, and Me represents a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 重合体Xにおけるカルボン酸無水物構造を有する構成単位は、1種単独であってもよく、2種以上であってもよい。 The structural unit having the carboxylic acid anhydride structure in the polymer X may be one kind alone or two or more kinds.
 カルボン酸無水物構造を有する構成単位の総含有量は、重合体Xの全構成単位に対して、0モル%~60モル%が好ましく、5モル%~40モル%がより好ましく、10モル%~35モル%が更に好ましい。 The total content of the structural units having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure is preferably 0 mol% to 60 mol%, more preferably 5 mol% to 40 mol%, and 10 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the polymer X. It is more preferably ~ 35 mol%.
 感光性層は、重合体Xを1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
 感光性層が重合体Xを含む場合、解像性及び現像性の観点から、重合体Xの含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、0.1質量%~30質量%が好ましく、0.2質量%~20質量%がより好ましく、0.5質量%~20質量%が更に好ましく、1質量%~20質量%が更に好ましい。
The photosensitive layer may contain only one type of polymer X, or may contain two or more types of polymer X.
When the photosensitive layer contains the polymer X, the content of the polymer X is preferably 0.1% by mass to 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer from the viewpoint of resolution and developability. , 0.2% by mass to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.5% by mass to 20% by mass, further preferably 1% by mass to 20% by mass.
 バインダーポリマーの重量平均分子量(Mw)は、解像性及び現像性を向上させる観点から5,000以上が好ましく、10,000以上がより好ましく、10,000~50,000が更に好ましく、20,000~30,000が特に好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the binder polymer is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 or more, further preferably 10,000 to 50,000, and 20, from the viewpoint of improving resolution and developability. 000 to 30,000 is particularly preferable.
 バインダーポリマーの酸価は、10mgKOH/g~200mgKOH/gが好ましく、60mgKOH/g~200mgKOH/gがより好ましく、60mgKOH/g~150mgKOH/gが更に好ましく、60mgKOH/g~110mgKOH/gが特に好ましい。
 なお、バインダーポリマーの酸価は、JIS K0070:1992に記載の方法に従って、測定される値である。
 バインダーポリマーの分散度(重量平均分子量/数平均分子量)は、現像性の観点から、1.0~6.0が好ましく、1.0~5.0がより好ましく、1.0~4.0が更に好ましく、1.0~3.0が特に好ましい。
The acid value of the binder polymer is preferably 10 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 60 mgKOH / g to 200 mgKOH / g, further preferably 60 mgKOH / g to 150 mgKOH / g, and particularly preferably 60 mgKOH / g to 110 mgKOH / g.
The acid value of the binder polymer is a value measured according to the method described in JIS K0070: 1992.
The dispersity (weight average molecular weight / number average molecular weight) of the binder polymer is preferably 1.0 to 6.0, more preferably 1.0 to 5.0, and 1.0 to 4.0 from the viewpoint of developability. Is more preferable, and 1.0 to 3.0 is particularly preferable.
 感光性層は、バインダーポリマーを1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
 バインダーポリマーの含有量は、感光性、解像性及び現像性の観点から、感光性層の全質量に対して、10質量%~90質量%が好ましく、20質量%~80質量%がより好ましく、30質量%~70質量%が更に好ましい。
The photosensitive layer may contain only one kind of binder polymer, or may contain two or more kinds of binder polymers.
The content of the binder polymer is preferably 10% by mass to 90% by mass, more preferably 20% by mass to 80% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer from the viewpoint of photosensitivity, resolution and developability. , 30% by mass to 70% by mass is more preferable.
(重合性化合物)
 感光性層は、重合性化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 重合性化合物は、重合性基を有する化合物である。重合性基としては、例えば、ラジカル重合性基、及び、カチオン重合性基が挙げられ、ラジカル重合性基が好ましい。
(Polymerizable compound)
The photosensitive layer may contain a polymerizable compound.
A polymerizable compound is a compound having a polymerizable group. Examples of the polymerizable group include a radically polymerizable group and a cationically polymerizable group, and a radically polymerizable group is preferable.
 重合性化合物は、エチレン性不飽和基を有する重合性化合物(以下、単に「エチレン性不飽和化合物」ともいう。)を含むことが好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和基としては、(メタ)アクリロキシ基が好ましい。
 なお、本明細書におけるエチレン性不飽和化合物は、上記バインダーポリマー以外の化合物であり、分子量5,000未満であることが好ましい。
 また、第2の実施形態に用いられるエチレン性不飽和化合物の好ましい態様としては、上述した第1の実施形態に用いられるエチレン性不飽和化合物の好ましい態様が挙げられる。
The polymerizable compound preferably contains a polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “ethylenically unsaturated compound”).
As the ethylenically unsaturated group, a (meth) acryloxy group is preferable.
The ethylenically unsaturated compound in the present specification is a compound other than the binder polymer, and preferably has a molecular weight of less than 5,000.
In addition, preferred embodiments of the ethylenically unsaturated compound used in the second embodiment include preferred embodiments of the ethylenically unsaturated compound used in the first embodiment described above.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物の好適態様の一つとして、下記式(M)で表される化合物(単に、「化合物M」ともいう。)が挙げられる。
  Q-R-Q   式(M)
 式(M)中、Q及びQはそれぞれ独立に、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基を表し、Rは鎖状構造を有する二価の連結基を表す。
As one of the preferred embodiments of the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a compound represented by the following formula (M) (simply also referred to as “Compound M”) can be mentioned.
Q 2 -R 1 -Q 1 formula (M)
In formula (M), Q 1 and Q 2 each independently represent a (meth) acryloyloxy group, and R 1 represents a divalent linking group having a chain structure.
 式(M)におけるQ及びQは、合成容易性の点から、Q及びQは同じ基であることが好ましい。
 また、式(M)におけるQ及びQは、反応性の点から、アクリロイルオキシ基であることが好ましい。
 式(M)におけるRとしては、現像残渣抑制性、防錆性、得られる硬化膜の曲げ耐性の観点から、アルキレン基、アルキレンオキシアルキレン基(-L-O-L-)、又は、ポリアルキレンオキシアルキレン基(-(L-O)-L-)が好ましく、炭素数2~20の炭化水素基、又は、ポリアルキレンオキシアルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数4~20のアルキレン基が更に好ましく、炭素数6~18の直鎖アルキレン基が特に好ましい。
 上記炭化水素基は、少なくとも一部に鎖状構造を有していればよく、上記鎖状構造以外の部分としては、特に制限はなく、例えば、分岐鎖状、環状、又は、炭素数1~5の直鎖状アルキレン基、アリーレン基、エーテル結合、及び、それらの組み合わせのいずれであってもよく、アルキレン基、又は、2以上のアルキレン基と1以上のアリーレン基とを組み合わせた基が好ましく、アルキレン基がより好ましく、直鎖アルキレン基が更に好ましい。
 なお、上記Lはそれぞれ独立に、アルキレン基を表し、エチレン基、プロピレン基、又は、ブチレン基が好ましく、エチレン基又は1,2-プロピレン基がより好ましい。
pは2以上の整数を表し、2~10の整数であることが好ましい。
Q 1 and Q 2 in the formula (M), from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis, it is preferred that Q 1 and Q 2 are the same group.
Further, Q 1 and Q 2 in the formula (M) are preferably acryloyloxy groups from the viewpoint of reactivity.
The R 1 in the formula (M), the development residue渣抑system resistance, rust resistance, from the viewpoint of bending resistance of the obtained cured film, an alkylene group, an alkylene oxyalkylene group (-L 1 -O-L 1 - ), or , Polyalkyleneoxyalkylene group (-(L 1- O) p- L 1- ) is preferable, hydrocarbon group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms or polyalkyleneoxyalkylene group is more preferable, and polyalkyleneoxyalkylene group has 4 to 20 carbon atoms. An alkylene group is more preferable, and a linear alkylene group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms is particularly preferable.
The hydrocarbon group may have a chain structure at least in part, and the portion other than the chain structure is not particularly limited, and is, for example, branched chain, cyclic, or having 1 to 1 to carbon atoms. It may be any of 5 linear alkylene groups, arylene groups, ether bonds, and combinations thereof, and alkylene groups or groups in which two or more alkylene groups and one or more arylene groups are combined are preferable. , The alkylene group is more preferable, and the linear alkylene group is further preferable.
The above L 1 independently represents an alkylene group, preferably an ethylene group, a propylene group, or a butylene group, and more preferably an ethylene group or a 1,2-propylene group.
p represents an integer of 2 or more, and is preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
 また、化合物MにおけるQとQとの間を連結する最短の連結鎖の原子数は、現像残渣抑制性、防錆性、得られる硬化膜の曲げ耐性の観点から、3個~50個が好ましく、4個~40個がより好ましく、6個~20個が更に好ましく、8個~12個が特に好ましい。
 本明細書において、「QとQの間を連結する最短の連結鎖の原子数」とは、Qに連結するRにおける原子からQに連結するRにおける原子までを連結する最短の原子数である。
The atomic number of the connecting chain of the shortest for connecting the Q 1, Q 2 in the compound M is developing residual渣抑system resistance, rust resistance, from the viewpoint of bending resistance of the obtained cured film, 3 to 50 Is preferable, 4 to 40 pieces are more preferable, 6 to 20 pieces are further preferable, and 8 to 12 pieces are particularly preferable.
In the present specification, the "Q 1, Q atoms linking chain shortest connecting between the 2", connecting the atoms in R 1 be linked to Q 1 to atom in R 1 be linked to Q 2 It is the shortest number of atoms.
 化合物Mの具体例としては、1,3-ブタンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラメチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,7-ヘプタンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,8-オクタンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,10-デカンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、水添ビスフェノールAのジ(メタ)アクリレート、水添ビスフェノールFのジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレンレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリ(エチレングリコール/プロピレングリコール)ジ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、ポリブチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。上記エステルモノマーは混合物としても使用できる。
 上記化合物の中でも、現像残渣抑制性、防錆性、得られる硬化膜の曲げ耐性の観点から、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,10-デカンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートよりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物であることが好ましく、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、1,10-デカンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレートよりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物であることがより好ましく、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、1,10-デカンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレートよりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物であることが更に好ましい。
Specific examples of the compound M include 1,3-butanediol di (meth) acrylate, tetramethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, and 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate. 1,7-Heptanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,8-octanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate, hydrogenated Di (meth) acrylate of bisphenol A, di (meth) acrylate of hydrogenated bisphenol F, polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polypropylenelen glycol di (meth) acrylate, poly (ethylene glycol / propylene glycol) di (meth) acrylate , And polybutylene glycol di (meth) acrylate. The ester monomer can also be used as a mixture.
Among the above compounds, 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1 , 10-Decandiol di (meth) acrylate, and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, preferably 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate. , 1,9-Nonandiol di (meth) acrylate, and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate, more preferably 1,9-nonane. More preferably, it is at least one compound selected from the group consisting of diol di (meth) acrylate and 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate.
 また、エチレン性不飽和化合物の好適態様の一つとして、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物が挙げられる。
 本明細書において、「2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物」とは、一分子中にエチレン性不飽和基を2つ以上有する化合物を意味する。
 エチレン性不飽和化合物におけるエチレン性不飽和基としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基が好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、(メタ)アクリレート化合物が好ましい。
Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound can be mentioned.
As used herein, the term "bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound" means a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule.
As the ethylenically unsaturated group in the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable.
As the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a (meth) acrylate compound is preferable.
 2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、特に制限はなく、公知の化合物の中から適宜選択できる。
 上記化合物M以外の2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、1,4-シクロヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
The bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known compounds.
Examples of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound other than the compound M include tricyclodecanedimethanol di (meth) acrylate and 1,4-cyclohexanediol di (meth) acrylate.
 2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物の市販品としては、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレート(商品名:NKエステル A-DCP、新中村化学工業(株)製)、トリシクロデカンジメナノールジメタクリレート(商品名:NKエステル DCP、新中村化学工業(株)製)、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート(商品名:NKエステル A-NOD-N、新中村化学工業(株)製)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(商品名:NKエステル A-HD-N、新中村化学工業(株)製)が挙げられる。 Commercially available products of bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds include tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate (trade name: NK ester A-DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and tricyclodecanedimenanol dimethacrylate (trade name: NK ester A-DCP). Product name: NK ester DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate (trade name: NK ester A-NOD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), 1,6 -Hexanediol diacrylate (trade name: NK ester A-HD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) can be mentioned.
 3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、特に制限はなく、公知の化合物の中から適宜選択できる。
 3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、ジペンタエリスリトール(トリ/テトラ/ペンタ/ヘキサ)(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトール(トリ/テトラ)(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、イソシアヌル酸(メタ)アクリレート、及び、グリセリントリ(メタ)アクリレート骨格の(メタ)アクリレート化合物が挙げられる。
The trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known compounds.
Examples of trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compounds include dipentaerythritol (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol (tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate. Examples thereof include ditrimethylolpropane tetra (meth) acrylate, isocyanuric acid (meth) acrylate, and (meth) acrylate compound having a glycerin tri (meth) acrylate skeleton.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、(メタ)アクリレート化合物のカプロラクトン変性化合物(日本化薬(株)製KAYARAD(登録商標) DPCA-20、新中村化学工業(株)製A-9300-1CL等)、(メタ)アクリレート化合物のアルキレンオキサイド変性化合物(日本化薬(株)製KAYARAD(登録商標) RP-1040、新中村化学工業(株)製ATM-35E、A-9300、ダイセル・オルネクス社のEBECRYL(登録商標) 135等)、エトキシル化グリセリントリアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製NKエステル A-GLY-9E等)も挙げられる。 Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include caprolactone-modified compounds of (meth) acrylate compounds (KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., etc.). (Meta) acrylate compound alkylene oxide-modified compound (KAYARAD (registered trademark) RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ATM-35E, A-9300 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., EBECRYL manufactured by Daicel Ornex Co., Ltd. (Registered trademark) 135, etc.), ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate (NK ester A-GLY-9E, etc. manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) can also be mentioned.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレート化合物も挙げられる。
 ウレタン(メタ)アクリレートとしては、ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられ、例えば、プロピレンオキサイド変性ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレート、並びに、エチレンオキサイド及びプロピレンオキサイド変性ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
 また、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレートとしては、3官能以上のウレタン(メタ)アクリレートも挙げられる。官能基数の下限としては、6官能以上がより好ましく、8官能以上が更に好ましい。なお、官能基数の上限としては、20官能以下が好ましい。3官能以上のウレタン(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、8UX-015A(大成ファインケミカル(株)製)、UA-32P(新中村化学工業(株)製)、U-15HA(新中村化学工業(株)製)、UA-1100H(新中村化学工業(株)製)、共栄社化学(株)製のAH-600(商品名)、並びに、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、UA-510H、及びUX-5000(いずれも日本化薬(株)製)等が挙げられる。
Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include urethane (meth) acrylate compounds.
Examples of the urethane (meth) acrylate include urethane di (meth) acrylate, and examples thereof include propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate, and ethylene oxide and propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate.
Further, as the urethane (meth) acrylate, a urethane (meth) acrylate having trifunctionality or higher can also be mentioned. As the lower limit of the number of functional groups, 6-functionality or more is more preferable, and 8-functionality or more is further preferable. The upper limit of the number of functional groups is preferably 20 functional or less. Examples of trifunctional or higher functional urethane (meth) acrylates include 8UX-015A (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), UA-32P (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and U-15HA (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). ), UA-1100H (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), AH-600 (trade name) manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd., and UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, UA-510H. , And UX-5000 (both manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物の好適態様の一つとして、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物が挙げられる。
 酸基としては、リン酸基、スルホ基、及び、カルボキシ基が挙げられる。
 これらの中でも、酸基としては、カルボキシ基が好ましい。
 酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、酸基を有する3官能~4官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物〔ペンタエリスリトールトリ及びテトラアクリレート(PETA)骨格にカルボキシ基を導入したもの(酸価:80mgKOH/g~120mgKOH/g)〕、酸基を有する5官能~6官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物(ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ及びヘキサアクリレート(DPHA)骨格にカルボキシ基を導入したもの〔酸価:25mgKOH/g~70mgKOH/g)〕等が挙げられる。
 これら酸基を有する3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物は、必要に応じ、酸基を有する2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物と併用してもよい。
One of the preferred embodiments of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group.
Examples of the acid group include a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, and a carboxy group.
Among these, the carboxy group is preferable as the acid group.
As the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, a trifunctional to tetrafunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group [pentaerythritol tri and tetraacrylate (PETA) having a carboxy group introduced into the skeleton (acid value: 80 mgKOH) / G to 120 mgKOH / g)], a pentafunctional to hexafunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group (dipentaerythritol penta and hexaacrylate (DPHA)) with a carboxy group introduced into the skeleton [acid value: 25 mgKOH / g] ~ 70 mgKOH / g)] and the like.
These trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compounds having an acid group may be used in combination with a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, if necessary.
 酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、カルボキシ基を有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物及びそのカルボン酸無水物よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましい。
 酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物が、カルボキシ基を有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物及びそのカルボン酸無水物よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種であると、現像性及び膜強度がより高まる。
 カルボキシ基を有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物は、特に制限されず、公知の化合物の中から適宜選択できる。
 カルボキシ基を有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、アロニックス(登録商標)TO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)、アロニックス(登録商標)M-520(東亞合成(株)製)、アロニックス(登録商標)M-510(東亞合成(株)製)が挙げられる。
As the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, at least one selected from the group consisting of a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxy group and a carboxylic acid anhydride thereof is preferable.
When the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group is at least one selected from the group consisting of a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxy group and a carboxylic acid anhydride thereof, the developability and film strength are higher. Increase.
The bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxy group is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known compounds.
Examples of the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxy group include Aronix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Aronix (registered trademark) M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and the like. Aronix (registered trademark) M-510 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) can be mentioned.
 酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、特開2004-239942号公報の段落0025~0030に記載の酸基を有する重合性化合物が好ましく、この公報に記載の内容は、本明細書に組み込まれる。 As the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, the polymerizable compound having an acid group described in paragraphs 0025 to 0030 of JP-A-2004-239942 is preferable, and the contents described in this publication are incorporated in the present specification. Is done.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、多価アルコールにα,β-不飽和カルボン酸を反応させて得られる化合物、グリシジル基含有化合物にα,β-不飽和カルボン酸を反応させて得られる化合物、ウレタン結合を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物等のウレタンモノマー、γ-クロロ-β-ヒドロキシプロピル-β’-(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチル-o-フタレート、β-ヒドロキシエチル-β’-(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチル-o-フタレート、及び、β-ヒドロキシプロピル-β’-(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチル-o-フタレート等のフタル酸系化合物、並びに、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルも挙げられる。
 これらは単独で又は2種類以上を組み合わせて使用される。
Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include a compound obtained by reacting a polyhydric alcohol with an α, β-unsaturated carboxylic acid, and a compound obtained by reacting a glycidyl group-containing compound with an α, β-unsaturated carboxylic acid. , Urethane monomers such as (meth) acrylate compounds with urethane bonds, γ-chloro-β-hydroxypropyl-β'-(meth) acryloyloxyethyl-o-phthalate, β-hydroxyethyl-β'-(meth) acryloyl Examples thereof include phthalic acid compounds such as oxyethyl-o-phthalate and β-hydroxypropyl-β'-(meth) acryloyloxyethyl-o-phthalate, and (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters.
These are used alone or in combination of two or more.
 多価アルコールにα,β-不飽和カルボン酸を反応させて得られる化合物としては、例えば、2,2-ビス(4-((メタ)アクリロキシポリエトキシ)フェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(4-((メタ)アクリロキシポリプロポキシ)フェニル)プロパン、及び、2,2-ビス(4-((メタ)アクリロキシポリエトキシポリプロポキシ)フェニル)プロパン等のビスフェノールA系(メタ)アクリレート化合物、エチレンオキサイド基の数が2~14であるポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、プロピレンオキサイド基の数が2~14であるポリプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、エチレンオキサイド基の数が2~14であり、かつ、プロピレンオキサイド基の数が2~14であるポリエチレンポリプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンエトキシトリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンジエトキシトリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリエトキシトリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンテトラエトキシトリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンペンタエトキシトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジ(トリメチロールプロパン)テトラアクリレート、テトラメチロールメタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラメチロールメタンテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、並びに、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
 中でも、テトラメチロールメタン構造又はトリメチロールプロパン構造を有するエチレン不飽和化合物が好ましく、テトラメチロールメタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラメチロールメタンテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、又は、ジ(トリメチロールプロパン)テトラアクリレートがより好ましい。
Examples of the compound obtained by reacting a polyvalent alcohol with α, β-unsaturated carboxylic acid include 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acryloxypolyethoxy) phenyl) propane and 2,2-bis. Bisphenol A-based (meth) acrylate compounds such as (4-((meth) acryloxypolypropoxy) phenyl) propane and 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acryloxypolyethoxypolypropoxy) phenyl) propane , Polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate having 2 to 14 ethylene oxide groups, polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate having 2 to 14 propylene oxide groups, and 2 to 14 ethylene oxide groups. , Polyethylenepolypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane ethoxytri (meth) acrylate having 2 to 14 propylene oxide groups. , Trimethylolpropane diethoxytri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane triethoxytri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tetraethoxytri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane pentaethoxytri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane ) Tetraacrylate, tetramethylolmethanetri (meth) acrylate, tetramethylolmethanetetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, and dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate. Can be mentioned.
Among them, an ethylene unsaturated compound having a tetramethylolmethane structure or a trimethylolpropane structure is preferable, and a tetramethylolmethanetri (meth) acrylate, a tetramethylolmethanetetra (meth) acrylate, a trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, or a di (Trimethylolpropane) Tetraacrylate is more preferable.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和化合物のカプロラクトン変性化合物(例えば、日本化薬(株)製KAYARAD(登録商標)DPCA-20、新中村化学工業(株)製A-9300-1CL等)、エチレン性不飽和化合物のアルキレンオキサイド変性化合物(例えば、日本化薬(株)製KAYARAD RP-1040、新中村化学工業(株)製ATM-35E、A-9300、ダイセル・オルネクス社製EBECRYL(登録商標)135等)、エトキシル化グリセリントリアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製A-GLY-9E等)等も挙げられる。 Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include caprolactone-modified compounds of ethylenically unsaturated compounds (for example, KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., etc. ), Ethylene unsaturated compound alkylene oxide-modified compound (for example, KAYARAD RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ATM-35E, A-9300 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., EBECRYL manufactured by Daicel Ornex Co., Ltd. (Registered trademark) 135, etc.), ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate (A-GLY-9E, etc. manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and the like can also be mentioned.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、現像性に優れる観点から、エステル結合を含むものも好ましい。
 エステル結合を含むエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、分子内にエステル結合を含むものであれば特に制限されないが、硬化性及び現像性に優れる観点から、テトラメチロールメタン構造又はトリメチロールプロパン構造を有するエチレン不飽和化合物が好ましく、テトラメチロールメタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラメチロールメタンテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、又は、ジ(トリメチロールプロパン)テトラアクリレートがより好ましい。
 信頼性付与の点からは、エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、炭素数6~20の脂肪族基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物と、上記のテトラメチロールメタン構造又はトリメチロールプロパン構造を有するエチレン不飽和化合物と、を含むことが好ましい。
 炭素数6以上の脂肪族構造を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,10-デカンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
As the ethylenically unsaturated compound, those containing an ester bond are also preferable from the viewpoint of excellent developability.
The ethylenically unsaturated compound containing an ester bond is not particularly limited as long as it contains an ester bond in the molecule, but from the viewpoint of excellent curability and developability, ethylene having a tetramethylolmethane structure or a trimethylolpropane structure is used. Unsaturated compounds are preferred, and tetramethylolmethanetri (meth) acrylates, tetramethylolmethanetetra (meth) acrylates, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylates, or di (trimethylolpropane) tetraacrylates are more preferred.
From the viewpoint of imparting reliability, the ethylenically unsaturated compound includes an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms and the above-mentioned ethylene unsaturated compound having a tetramethylol methane structure or a trimethylol propane structure. It preferably contains a compound.
Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic structure having 6 or more carbon atoms include 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate, and tricyclodecanedimethanoldi. Examples include (meth) acrylate.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物の好適態様の一つとしては、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物(好ましくは、2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物)が挙げられる。
 上記エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、2環以上の脂肪族炭化水素環が縮環した環構造(好ましくは、トリシクロデカン構造及びトリシクロデセン構造よりなる群から選択される構造)を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物が好ましく、2環以上の脂肪族炭化水素環が縮環した環構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物がより好ましく、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジ(メタ)アクリレートが更に好ましい。
 上記脂肪族炭化水素環構造としては、得られる硬化膜の透湿度及び曲げ耐性、並びに、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、シクロペンタン構造、シクロヘキサン構造、トリシクロデカン構造、トリシクロデセン構造、ノルボルナン構造、又は、イソボロン構造が好ましい。
One of the preferred embodiments of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure (preferably a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound).
The ethylenically unsaturated compound is ethylenically having a ring structure in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused (preferably a structure selected from the group consisting of a tricyclodecane structure and a tricyclodecene structure). Unsaturated compounds are preferable, bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds having a ring structure in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused are more preferable, and tricyclodecanedimethanol di (meth) acrylate is further preferable.
The aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure includes a cyclopentane structure, a cyclohexane structure, a tricyclodecane structure, and a tricyclodecene from the viewpoints of the moisture permeability and bending resistance of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film. A structure, a norbornane structure, or an isoborone structure is preferable.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物の分子量は、200~3,000が好ましく、250~2,600がより好ましく、280~2,200が更に好ましく、300~2,200が特に好ましい。
 感光性層に含まれるエチレン性不飽和化合物のうち、分子量300以下のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量の割合は、感光性層に含まれる全てのエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量に対して、30質量%以下が好ましく、25質量%以下がより好ましく、20質量%以下が更に好ましい。
The molecular weight of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 200 to 3,000, more preferably 250 to 2,600, further preferably 280 to 2,200, and particularly preferably 300 to 2,200.
The ratio of the content of the ethylenically unsaturated compound having a molecular weight of 300 or less to the content of all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the photosensitive layer is based on the content of all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the photosensitive layer. It is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 25% by mass or less, and even more preferably 20% by mass or less.
 感光性層の好適態様の一つとして、感光性層は、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましく、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことがより好ましく、3官能又は4官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが更に好ましい。 As one of the preferred embodiments of the photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer preferably contains a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound, and more preferably contains a trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound. It is more preferable to contain a tetrafunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound.
 また、感光性層の好適態様の一つとして、感光性層は、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物と、脂肪族炭化水素環を有する構成単位を有するバインダーポリマーとを含むことが好ましい。 Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer comprises a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure and a binder polymer having a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring. It is preferable to include it.
 また、感光性層の好適態様の一つとして、感光性層は、式(M)で表される化合物と、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物とを含むことが好ましく、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレートと、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレートと、カルボン酸基を有する多官能エチレン性不飽和化合物とを含むことがより好ましく、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレートと、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレートと、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタアクリレートのコハク酸変性体とを含むことが更に好ましい。 Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer preferably contains a compound represented by the formula (M) and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and 1,9-nonane. It is more preferable to contain a diol diacrylate, a tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, and a polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group, and 1,9-nonane diol diacrylate and a tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate. More preferably, it contains an acrylate and a succinic acid-modified form of dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate.
 また、感光性層の好適態様の一つとして、感光性層は、式(M)で表される化合物と、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物と、後述する熱架橋性化合物とを含むことが好ましく、式(M)で表される化合物と、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物と、後述するブロックイソシアネート化合物とを含むことがより好ましい。 Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer contains a compound represented by the formula (M), an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and a thermally crosslinkable compound described later. It is more preferable to contain the compound represented by the formula (M), an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and a blocked isocyanate compound described later.
 また、感光性層の好適態様の一つとして、感光性層は、現像残渣抑制性、及び、防錆性の点から、2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物(好ましくは、2官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物)と、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物(好ましくは、3官能以上の(メタ)アクリレート化合物)と、を含むことが好ましい。
 2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物と、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量の質量比は10:90~90:10が好ましく、30:70~70:30がより好ましい。
 全てのエチレン性不飽和化合物の合計量に対する、2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、20質量%~80質量%が好ましく、30質量%~70質量%がより好ましい。
 感光性層における2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対し、10質量%~60質量%が好ましく、15質量%~40質量%がより好ましい。
Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer is a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound (preferably a bifunctional (meth)) from the viewpoint of suppressing development residue and preventing rust. It is preferable to contain an acrylate compound) and a trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound (preferably a trifunctional or higher (meth) acrylate compound).
The mass ratio of the contents of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound and the trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 10:90 to 90:10, more preferably 30:70 to 70:30.
The content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 20% by mass to 80% by mass, more preferably 30% by mass to 70% by mass, based on the total amount of all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds.
The content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound in the photosensitive layer is preferably 10% by mass to 60% by mass, more preferably 15% by mass to 40% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
 また、感光性層の好適態様の一つとして、感光性層は、防錆性の点から、化合物M、及び、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 また、感光性層の好適態様の一つとして、感光性層は、基板密着性、現像残渣抑制性、及び、防錆性の点から、化合物M、及び、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましく、化合物M、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物、及び、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことがより好ましく、化合物M、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物、及び、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが更に好ましく、化合物M、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物、及び、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレート化合物を含むことが特に好ましい。
 また、感光性層の好適態様の一つとして、感光性層は、感光性層は、基板密着性、現像残渣抑制性、及び、防錆性の点から、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート、及び、カルボン酸基を有する多官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましく、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレート、及び、カルボン酸基を有する多官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましく、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート、及び、カルボン酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが更に好ましく、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレート、カルボン酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物、及び、ウレタンアクリレート化合物を含むことが特に好ましい。
Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer preferably contains compound M and a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure from the viewpoint of rust prevention. ..
Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer is composed of compound M and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group from the viewpoints of substrate adhesion, development residue inhibitory property, and rust prevention property. It is more preferable to contain compound M, a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and more preferably compound M, an aliphatic hydrocarbon. It is more preferable to contain a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a ring structure, a trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound, and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and the compound M has an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure. It is particularly preferable to contain a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound, an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and a urethane (meth) acrylate compound.
Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer is composed of 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate, from the viewpoints of substrate adhesion, development residue inhibitory property, and rust prevention. And, it is preferable to contain a polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group, 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate, tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, and a polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group. It preferably contains a compound, more preferably 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate, tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group. , 9-Nonandiol diacrylate, tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, an ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group, and a urethane acrylate compound are particularly preferable.
 感光性層は、エチレン性不飽和化合物として、単官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 上記エチレン性不飽和化合物における2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、感光性層に含まれる全てのエチレン性不飽和化合物の総含有量に対し、60質量%~100質量%が好ましく、80質量%~100質量%がより好ましく、90質量%~100質量%が更に好ましい。
The photosensitive layer may contain a monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound as the ethylenically unsaturated compound.
The content of the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound in the ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 60% by mass to 100% by mass with respect to the total content of all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the photosensitive layer. , 80% by mass to 100% by mass, more preferably 90% by mass to 100% by mass.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用することもできる。
 感光性層におけるエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、1質量%~70質量%が好ましく、5質量%~70質量%がより好ましく、5質量%~60質量%が更に好ましく、5質量%~50質量%が特に好ましい。
The ethylenically unsaturated compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the ethylenically unsaturated compound in the photosensitive layer is preferably 1% by mass to 70% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 70% by mass, and 5% by mass to 60% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. The mass% is more preferable, and 5% by mass to 50% by mass is particularly preferable.
(重合開始剤)
 感光性層は、重合開始剤を含むことが好ましい。
 重合開始剤としては、光重合開始剤が好ましい。
 実施形態Bに用いられる重合開始剤の好ましい態様としては、上述した実施形態Aに用いられる重合開始剤の好ましい態様が挙げられる。
 重合開始剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用することもできる。
 重合開始剤の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、0.1質量%以上であることが好ましく、0.5質量%以上であることがより好ましく、1.0質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。また、その上限値としては、感光性層の全質量に対して、10質量%以下であることが好ましく、5質量%以下であることより好ましい。
(Initiator)
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a polymerization initiator.
As the polymerization initiator, a photopolymerization initiator is preferable.
Preferred embodiments of the polymerization initiator used in the B embodiment include preferred embodiments of the polymerization initiator used in the above-described embodiment A.
The polymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the polymerization initiator is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 1.0% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. It is more preferable to have. The upper limit of the value is preferably 10% by mass or less, and more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
(複素環化合物)
 感光性層は、複素環化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 複素環化合物が有する複素環は、単環及び多環のいずれの複素環でもよい。
 複素環化合物が有するヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、酸素原子及び硫黄原子が挙げられる。複素環化合物は、窒素原子、酸素原子及び硫黄原子よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の原子を有することが好ましく、窒素原子を有することがより好ましい。
(Heterocyclic compound)
The photosensitive layer may contain a heterocyclic compound.
The heterocycle contained in the heterocyclic compound may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic heterocycle.
Examples of the hetero atom contained in the heterocyclic compound include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom. The heterocyclic compound preferably has at least one atom selected from the group consisting of a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom, and more preferably has a nitrogen atom.
 複素環化合物としては、例えば、トリアゾール化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、テトラゾール化合物、チアジアゾール化合物、トリアジン化合物、ローダニン化合物、チアゾール化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾイミダゾール化合物、ベンゾオキサゾール化合物、及び、ピリミジン化合物が挙げられる。
 上記の中でも、複素環化合物としては、トリアゾール化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、テトラゾール化合物、チアジアゾール化合物、トリアジン化合物、ローダニン化合物、チアゾール化合物、ベンゾイミダゾール化合物、及び、ベンゾオキサゾール化合物よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の化合物が好ましく、トリアゾール化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、テトラゾール化合物、チアジアゾール化合物、チアゾール化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾイミダゾール化合物、及び、ベンゾオキサゾール化合物よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の化合物がより好ましい。
Examples of the heterocyclic compound include a triazole compound, a benzotriazole compound, a tetrazole compound, a thiadiazol compound, a triazine compound, a rhonin compound, a thiazole compound, a benzothiazole compound, a benzoimidazole compound, a benzoxazole compound, and a pyrimidine compound.
Among the above, as the heterocyclic compound, at least one selected from the group consisting of a triazole compound, a benzotriazole compound, a tetrazole compound, a thiadiazol compound, a triazine compound, a rhonin compound, a thiazole compound, a benzoimidazole compound, and a benzoxazole compound. Is preferable, and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a triazole compound, a benzotriazole compound, a tetrazole compound, a thiadiazol compound, a thiazole compound, a benzothiazole compound, a benzoimidazole compound, and a benzoxazole compound is more preferable.
 複素環化合物の好ましい具体例を以下に示す。トリアゾール化合物及びベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が例示できる。 A preferable specific example of the heterocyclic compound is shown below. Examples of the triazole compound and the benzotriazole compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 テトラゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が例示できる。 Examples of the tetrazole compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 チアジアゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が例示できる。 Examples of thiadiazole compounds include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 トリアジン化合物としては、以下の化合物が例示できる。 Examples of the triazine compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 ローダニン化合物としては、以下の化合物が例示できる。 Examples of the loadonine compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 チアゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が例示できる。 Examples of the thiazole compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 ベンゾチアゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が例示できる。 Examples of the benzothiazole compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 ベンゾイミダゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が例示できる。 Examples of the benzimidazole compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 ベンゾオキサゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が例示できる。 Examples of the benzoxazole compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 複素環化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用することもできる。
 感光性層が複素環化合物を含む場合、複素環化合物の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、0.01質量%~20.0質量%が好ましく、0.10質量%~10.0質量%がより好ましく、0.30質量%~8.0質量%が更に好ましく、0.50質量%~5.0質量%が特に好ましい。
The heterocyclic compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the photosensitive layer contains a heterocyclic compound, the content of the heterocyclic compound is preferably 0.01% by mass to 20.0% by mass, preferably 0.10% by mass to 10% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. 0.0% by mass is more preferable, 0.30% by mass to 8.0% by mass is further preferable, and 0.50% by mass to 5.0% by mass is particularly preferable.
(脂肪族チオール化合物)
 感光性層は、脂肪族チオール化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 感光性層が脂肪族チオール化合物を含むことで、脂肪族チオール化合物がエチレン性不飽和化合物との間でエン-チオール反応することで、形成される膜の硬化収縮が抑えられ、応力が緩和される。
(Aliphatic thiol compound)
The photosensitive layer may contain an aliphatic thiol compound.
When the photosensitive layer contains an aliphatic thiol compound, the aliphatic thiol compound undergoes an en-thiol reaction with an ethylenically unsaturated compound, so that the curing shrinkage of the formed film is suppressed and the stress is relaxed. NS.
 脂肪族チオール化合物としては、単官能の脂肪族チオール化合物、又は、多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物(すなわち、2官能以上の脂肪族チオール化合物)が好ましい。
 上記の中でも、脂肪族チオール化合物としては、形成されるパターンの密着性(特に、露光後における密着性)の点から、多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物がより好ましい。
 本明細書において、「多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物」とは、チオール基(「メルカプト基」ともいう。)を分子内に2個以上有する脂肪族化合物を意味する。
As the aliphatic thiol compound, a monofunctional aliphatic thiol compound or a polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound (that is, a bifunctional or higher functional aliphatic thiol compound) is preferable.
Among the above, as the aliphatic thiol compound, a polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion of the formed pattern (particularly, adhesion after exposure).
As used herein, the term "polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound" means an aliphatic compound having two or more thiol groups (also referred to as "mercapto groups") in the molecule.
 多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物としては、分子量が100以上の低分子化合物が好ましい。具体的には、多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物の分子量は、100~1,500がより好ましく、150~1,000が更に好ましい。 As the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound, a low molecular weight compound having a molecular weight of 100 or more is preferable. Specifically, the molecular weight of the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound is more preferably 100 to 1,500, and even more preferably 150 to 1,000.
 多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物の官能基数としては、例えば、形成されるパターンの密着性の点から、2官能~10官能が好ましく、2官能~8官能がより好ましく、2官能~6官能が更に好ましい。 The number of functional groups of the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound is, for example, preferably bifunctional to 10 functional, more preferably bifunctional to 8 functional, and further preferably bifunctional to 6 functional, from the viewpoint of adhesion of the formed pattern. preferable.
 多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物としては、例えば、トリメチロールプロパントリス(3-メルカプトブチレート)、1,4-ビス(3-メルカプトブチリルオキシ)ブタン、ペンタエリスリトールテトラキス(3-メルカプトブチレート)、1,3,5-トリス(3-メルカプトブチリルオキシエチル)-1,3,5-トリアジン-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-トリオン、トリメチロールエタントリス(3-メルカプトブチレート)、トリス[(3-メルカプトプロピオニルオキシ)エチル]イソシアヌレート、トリメチロールプロパントリス(3-メルカプトプロピオネート)、ペンタエリスリトールテトラキス(3-メルカプトプロピオネート)、テトラエチレングリコールビス(3-メルカプトプロピオネート)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサキス(3-メルカプトプロピオネート)、エチレングリコールビスチオプロピオネート、1,4-ビス(3-メルカプトブチリルオキシ)ブタン、1,2-エタンジチオール、1,3-プロパンジチオール、1,6-ヘキサメチレンジチオール、2,2’-(エチレンジチオ)ジエタンチオール、meso-2,3-ジメルカプトコハク酸、及び、ジ(メルカプトエチル)エーテルが挙げられる。 Examples of the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound include trimethylolpropanthris (3-mercaptobutyrate), 1,4-bis (3-mercaptobutyryloxy) butane, pentaerythritol tetrakis (3-mercaptobutyrate), and the like. 1,3,5-Tris (3-mercaptobutylyloxyethyl) -1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6 (1H, 3H, 5H) -trione, trimethylolethanetris (3-mercaptobutyrate) ), Tris [(3-mercaptopropionyloxy) ethyl] isocyanurate, trimethylpropanthris (3-mercaptopropionate), pentaerythritol tetrakis (3-mercaptopropionate), tetraethylene glycol bis (3-mercaptopropionate) Pionate), dipentaerythritol hexakis (3-mercaptopropionate), ethylene glycol bisthiopropionate, 1,4-bis (3-mercaptobutylyloxy) butane, 1,2-ethanedithiol, 1, Examples thereof include 3-propanedithiol, 1,6-hexamethylenedithiol, 2,2'-(ethylenedithio) diethanethiol, meso-2,3-dimercaptosuccinic acid, and di (mercaptoethyl) ether.
 上記の中でも、多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物としては、トリメチロールプロパントリス(3-メルカプトブチレート)、1,4-ビス(3-メルカプトブチリルオキシ)ブタン、及び、1,3,5-トリス(3-メルカプトブチリルオキシエチル)-1,3,5-トリアジン-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-トリオンよりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の化合物が好ましい。 Among the above, the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compounds include trimethylolpropane tris (3-mercaptobutyrate), 1,4-bis (3-mercaptobutyryloxy) butane, and 1,3,5-tris. At least one compound selected from the group consisting of (3-mercaptobutyryloxyethyl) -1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6 (1H, 3H, 5H) -trione is preferred.
 単官能の脂肪族チオール化合物としては、例えば、1-オクタンチオール、1-ドデカンチオール、β-メルカプトプロピオン酸、メチル-3-メルカプトプロピオネート、2-エチルヘキシル-3-メルカプトプロピオネート、n-オクチル-3-メルカプトプロピオネート、メトキシブチル-3-メルカプトプロピオネート、及び、ステアリル-3-メルカプトプロピオネートが挙げられる。 Examples of the monofunctional aliphatic thiol compound include 1-octanethiol, 1-dodecanethiol, β-mercaptopropionic acid, methyl-3-mercaptopropionate, 2-ethylhexyl-3-mercaptopropionate, and n-. Examples thereof include octyl-3-mercaptopropionate, methoxybutyl-3-mercaptopropionate, and stearyl-3-mercaptopropionate.
 感光性層は、1種単独の脂肪族チオール化合物を含んでいてもよく、2種以上の脂肪族チオール化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 感光性層が脂肪族チオール化合物を含む場合、脂肪族チオール化合物の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、5質量%以上が好ましく、5質量%~50質量%がより好ましく、5質量%~30質量%が更に好ましく、8質量%~20質量%が特に好ましい。
The photosensitive layer may contain one type of aliphatic thiol compound alone, or may contain two or more types of aliphatic thiol compounds.
When the photosensitive layer contains an aliphatic thiol compound, the content of the aliphatic thiol compound is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass to 50% by mass, 5% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. It is more preferably from mass% to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably from 8% by mass to 20% by mass.
(熱架橋性化合物)
 感光性層は、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の点から、熱架橋性化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 実施形態Bの感光性層に用いられる熱架橋性化合物としては、実施形態Aの感光性層において上述した熱架橋性化合物が好適に用いられる。
 熱架橋性化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用することもできる。
 感光性層が熱架橋性化合物を含む場合、熱架橋性化合物の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、1質量%~50質量%が好ましく、5質量%~30質量%がより好ましい。
(Thermal crosslinkable compound)
The photosensitive layer preferably contains a heat-crosslinkable compound from the viewpoint of the strength of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film.
As the heat-crosslinkable compound used in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment B, the above-mentioned heat-crosslinkable compound is preferably used in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment A.
The heat-crosslinkable compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the photosensitive layer contains a heat-crosslinkable compound, the content of the heat-crosslinkable compound is preferably 1% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 30% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. preferable.
(界面活性剤)
 感光性層は、界面活性剤を含んでいてもよい。
 実施形態Bの感光性層に用いられる界面活性剤としては、実施形態Aの感光性層において上述した界面活性剤が好適に用いられる。
 界面活性剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用することもできる。
 感光性層が界面活性剤を含む場合、界面活性剤の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、0.01質量%~3.0質量%が好ましく、0.01質量%~1.0質量%がより好ましく、0.05質量%~0.80質量%が更に好ましい。
(Surfactant)
The photosensitive layer may contain a surfactant.
As the surfactant used in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment B, the above-mentioned surfactant is preferably used in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment A.
The surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the photosensitive layer contains a surfactant, the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.01% by mass to 3.0% by mass, preferably 0.01% by mass to 1% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. .0% by mass is more preferable, and 0.05% by mass to 0.80% by mass is further preferable.
(ラジカル重合禁止剤)
 感光性層は、ラジカル重合禁止剤を含んでいてもよい。
 実施形態Bの感光性層に用いられるラジカル重合禁止剤としては、実施形態Aの感光性層において上述したラジカル重合禁止剤が好適に用いられる。
 ラジカル重合禁止剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用することもできる。
 感光性層がラジカル重合禁止剤を含む場合、ラジカル重合禁止剤の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、0.01質量%~3質量%が好ましく、0.05質量%~1質量%がより好ましい。含有量が0.01質量%以上の場合、感光性層の保存安定性がより優れる。一方、含有量が3質量%以下である場合、感度の維持及び染料の脱色を抑制がより優れる。
(Radical polymerization inhibitor)
The photosensitive layer may contain a radical polymerization inhibitor.
As the radical polymerization inhibitor used in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment B, the radical polymerization inhibitor described above is preferably used in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment A.
The radical polymerization inhibitor may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the photosensitive layer contains a radical polymerization inhibitor, the content of the radical polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01% by mass to 3% by mass, preferably 0.05% by mass to 1% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. More preferably by mass. When the content is 0.01% by mass or more, the storage stability of the photosensitive layer is more excellent. On the other hand, when the content is 3% by mass or less, the maintenance of sensitivity and the suppression of dye decolorization are more excellent.
(水素供与性化合物)
 感光性層は、水素供与性化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 水素供与性化合物は、光重合開始剤の活性光線に対する感度を一層向上させる、及び、酸素による重合性化合物の重合阻害を抑制する等の作用を有する。
 水素供与性化合物としては、例えば、アミン類、及び、アミノ酸化合物が挙げられる。
(Hydrogen donating compound)
The photosensitive layer may contain a hydrogen donating compound.
The hydrogen-donating compound has actions such as further improving the sensitivity of the photopolymerization initiator to active light and suppressing inhibition of polymerization of the polymerizable compound by oxygen.
Examples of the hydrogen donating compound include amines and amino acid compounds.
 アミン類としては、例えば、M.R.Sanderら著「Journal of Polymer Society」第10巻3173頁(1972)、特公昭44-020189号公報、特開昭51-082102号公報、特開昭52-134692号公報、特開昭59-138205号公報、特開昭60-084305号公報、特開昭62-018537号公報、特開昭64-033104号公報、及び、Research Disclosure 33825号等に記載の化合物が挙げられる。より具体的には、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、トリス(4-ジメチルアミノフェニル)メタン(別名:ロイコクリスタルバイオレット)、トリエタノールアミン、p-ジメチルアミノ安息香酸エチルエステル、p-ホルミルジメチルアニリン、及び、p-メチルチオジメチルアニリンが挙げられる。
 中でも、感度、硬化速度、及び、硬化性の観点から、アミン類としては、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、及び、トリス(4-ジメチルアミノフェニル)メタンよりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましい。
Examples of amines include M.I. R. "Journal of Polymer Society" by Sander et al., Vol. 10, p. 3173 (1972), Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 44-020189, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-082102, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 52-134692, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 59-138205 Examples thereof include the compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 60-084305, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 62-018537, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 64-033104, Research Disclosure No. 33825, and the like. More specifically, 4,4'-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone, tris (4-dimethylaminophenyl) methane (also known as leucocrystal violet), triethanolamine, p-dimethylaminobenzoic acid ethyl ester, p-formyl. Examples thereof include dimethylaniline and p-methylthiodimethylaniline.
Among them, from the viewpoint of sensitivity, curing rate, and curability, the amines are at least one selected from the group consisting of 4,4'-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone and tris (4-dimethylaminophenyl) methane. Seeds are preferred.
 アミノ酸化合物としては、例えば、N-フェニルグリシン、N-メチル-N-フェニルグリシン、N-エチル-N-フェニルグリシンが挙げられる。
 中でも、感度、硬化速度、及び、硬化性の観点から、アミノ酸化合物としては、N-フェニルグリシンが好ましい。
Examples of the amino acid compound include N-phenylglycine, N-methyl-N-phenylglycine, and N-ethyl-N-phenylglycine.
Among them, N-phenylglycine is preferable as the amino acid compound from the viewpoint of sensitivity, curing rate, and curability.
 また、水素供与性化合物としては、例えば、特公昭48-042965号公報に記載の有機金属化合物(トリブチル錫アセテート等)、特公昭55-034414号公報に記載の水素供与体、及び、特開平6-308727号公報に記載のイオウ化合物(トリチアン等)も挙げられる。 Examples of the hydrogen donating compound include an organometallic compound (tributyltin acetate, etc.) described in JP-A-48-042465, a hydrogen donor described in JP-A-55-0344414, and JP-A-6. Sulfur compounds (Tritian and the like) described in JP-A-308727 are also mentioned.
 水素供与性化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用することもできる。
 感光性層が水素供与性化合物を含む場合、水素供与性化合物の含有量は、重合成長速度と連鎖移動のバランスとによる硬化速度の向上の点から、感光性層の全質量に対して、0.01質量%~10.0質量%が好ましく、0.01質量%~8.0質量%がより好ましく、0.03質量%~5.0質量%が更に好ましい。
The hydrogen donating compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the photosensitive layer contains a hydrogen donating compound, the content of the hydrogen donating compound is 0 with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer in terms of improving the curing rate due to the balance between the polymerization growth rate and the chain transfer. It is preferably 0.01% by mass to 10.0% by mass, more preferably 0.01% by mass to 8.0% by mass, and even more preferably 0.03% by mass to 5.0% by mass.
(不純物等)
 感光性層は、所定量の不純物を含んでいてもよい。
 実施形態Bの感光性層における不純物については、実施形態Aの感光性層において上述した不純物の好ましい態様と同様である。
(Impurities, etc.)
The photosensitive layer may contain a predetermined amount of impurities.
The impurities in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment B are the same as in the preferred embodiment of the impurities described above in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment A.
(残存モノマー)
 感光性層は、上述したバインダーポリマーの各構成単位に対応する残存モノマーを含む場合がある。
 実施形態Bの感光性層におけるバインダーポリマーの各構成単位に対応する残存モノマーについては、実施形態Aの感光性層において上述したバインダーポリマーの各構成単位に対応する残存モノマーの好ましい態様と同様である。
(Residual monomer)
The photosensitive layer may contain residual monomers corresponding to each structural unit of the binder polymer described above.
The residual monomer corresponding to each structural unit of the binder polymer in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment B is the same as the preferred embodiment of the residual monomer corresponding to each structural unit of the binder polymer described above in the photosensitive layer of the embodiment A. ..
(他の成分)
 感光性層は、既述の成分以外の成分(以下、「他の成分」ともいう。)を含んでいてもよい。他の成分としては、例えば、着色剤、酸化防止剤、及び、粒子(例えば、金属酸化物粒子)が挙げられる。また、他の成分としては、特開2000-310706号公報の段落0058~0071に記載のその他の添加剤も挙げられる。
(Other ingredients)
The photosensitive layer may contain components other than the components described above (hereinafter, also referred to as “other components”). Other components include, for example, colorants, antioxidants, and particles (eg, metal oxide particles). In addition, as other components, other additives described in paragraphs 0058 to 0071 of JP-A-2000-310706 can also be mentioned.
-粒子-
 粒子としては、金属酸化物粒子が好ましい。
 金属酸化物粒子における金属には、B、Si、Ge、As、Sb、及び、Te等の半金属も含まれる。
 粒子の平均一次粒子径は、例えば、硬化膜の透明性の点から、1nm~200nmが好ましく、3nm~80nmがより好ましい。
 粒子の平均一次粒子径は、電子顕微鏡を用いて任意の粒子200個の粒子径を測定し、測定結果を算術平均することにより算出される。なお、粒子の形状が球形でない場合には、最も長い辺を粒子径とする。
-particle-
As the particles, metal oxide particles are preferable.
The metal in the metal oxide particles also includes metalloids such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
The average primary particle size of the particles is preferably 1 nm to 200 nm, more preferably 3 nm to 80 nm, for example, from the viewpoint of transparency of the cured film.
The average primary particle size of the particles is calculated by measuring the particle size of 200 arbitrary particles using an electron microscope and arithmetically averaging the measurement results. When the shape of the particle is not spherical, the longest side is the particle diameter.
 感光性層が粒子を含む場合、金属種、及び、大きさ等の異なる粒子を1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
 感光性層は、粒子を含まないか、あるいは、感光性層が粒子を含む場合には、粒子の含有量が感光性層の全質量に対して、0質量%超35質量%以下が好ましく、粒子を含まないか、あるいは、粒子の含有量が感光性層の全質量に対して、0質量%超10質量%以下がより好ましく、粒子を含まないか、あるいは、粒子の含有量が感光性層の全質量に対して0質量%超5質量%以下が更に好ましく、粒子を含まないか、あるいは、粒子の含有量が感光性層の全質量に対して0質量%超1質量%以下が更に好ましく、粒子を含まないことが特に好ましい。
When the photosensitive layer contains particles, it may contain only one type of metal type and particles having different sizes and the like, or may contain two or more types.
The photosensitive layer does not contain particles, or when the photosensitive layer contains particles, the content of the particles is preferably more than 0% by mass and 35% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. It is more preferable that the particles are not contained or the content of the particles is more than 0% by mass and 10% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive layer, and the particles are not contained or the content of the particles is photosensitive. More than 0% by mass and 5% by mass or less is more preferable with respect to the total mass of the layer, and particles are not contained or the content of particles is more than 0% by mass and 1% by mass or less based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. It is more preferable, and it is particularly preferable that it does not contain particles.
-着色剤-
 感光性層は、着色剤(顔料、染料等)を含んでいてもよいが、例えば、透明性の点からは、着色剤を実質的に含まないことが好ましい。
 感光性層が着色剤を含む場合、着色剤の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、1質量%未満が好ましく、0.1質量%未満がより好ましい。
-Colorant-
The photosensitive layer may contain a colorant (pigment, dye, etc.), but for example, from the viewpoint of transparency, it is preferable that the photosensitive layer contains substantially no colorant.
When the photosensitive layer contains a colorant, the content of the colorant is preferably less than 1% by mass, more preferably less than 0.1% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer.
-酸化防止剤-
 酸化防止剤としては、例えば、1-フェニル-3-ピラゾリドン(別名:フェニドン)、1-フェニル-4,4-ジメチル-3-ピラゾリドン、及び、1-フェニル-4-メチル-4-ヒドロキシメチル-3-ピラゾリドン等の3-ピラゾリドン類;ハイドロキノン、カテコール、ピロガロール、メチルハイドロキノン、及び、クロルハイドロキノン等のポリヒドロキシベンゼン類;パラメチルアミノフェノール、パラアミノフェノール、パラヒドロキシフェニルグリシン、及び、パラフェニレンジアミンが挙げられる。
 中でも、保存安定性、及び、硬化性の観点から、酸化防止剤としては、3-ピラゾリドン類が好ましく、1-フェニル-3-ピラゾリドンがより好ましい。
-Antioxidant-
Examples of the antioxidant include 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidone (also known as phenidone), 1-phenyl-4,4-dimethyl-3-pyrazolidone, and 1-phenyl-4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-. 3-Pyrazoridones such as 3-pyrazolidone; polyhydroxybenzenes such as hydroquinone, catechol, pyrogallol, methylhydroquinone, and chlorhydroquinone; paramethylaminophenol, paraaminophenol, parahydroxyphenylglycine, and paraphenylenediamine. Be done.
Among them, 3-pyrazolidones are preferable, and 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidone is more preferable as the antioxidant from the viewpoint of storage stability and curability.
 感光性層が酸化防止剤を含む場合、酸化防止剤の含有量は、感光性層の全質量に対して、0.001質量%以上が好ましく、0.005質量%以上がより好ましく、0.01質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、1質量%以下が好ましい。 When the photosensitive layer contains an antioxidant, the content of the antioxidant is preferably 0.001% by mass or more, more preferably 0.005% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. 01% by mass or more is more preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1% by mass or less.
(感光性層の厚み)
 感光性層の厚み(層厚)は、特に制限されないが、現像性及び解像性の観点から、30μm以下が好ましく、20μm以下がより好ましく、15μm以下が更に好ましく、10μm以下が特に好ましく、5.0μm以下が最も好ましい。下限としては、感光性層を硬化して得られる膜の強度が優れる点で、0.60μm以上が好ましく、1.5μm以上がより好ましい。
(Thickness of photosensitive layer)
The thickness (layer thickness) of the photosensitive layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 30 μm or less, more preferably 20 μm or less, further preferably 15 μm or less, particularly preferably 10 μm or less, from the viewpoint of developability and resolvability. Most preferably, it is 0.0 μm or less. As the lower limit, 0.60 μm or more is preferable, and 1.5 μm or more is more preferable, because the strength of the film obtained by curing the photosensitive layer is excellent.
(感光性層の屈折率)
 感光性層の屈折率は、1.47~1.56が好ましく、1.49~1.54がより好ましい。
(Refractive index of photosensitive layer)
The refractive index of the photosensitive layer is preferably 1.47 to 1.56, more preferably 1.49 to 1.54.
(感光性層の色)
 感光性層は無彩色であることが好ましい。具体的には、全反射(入射角8°、光源:D-65(2°視野))が、CIE1976(L,a,b)色空間において、L値は10~90であることが好ましく、a値は-1.0~1.0であることが好ましく、b値は-1.0~1.0であることが好ましい。
(Color of photosensitive layer)
The photosensitive layer is preferably achromatic. Specifically, the total reflection (incident angle 8 °, light source: D-65 (2 ° field of view)) has an L * value of 10 to 90 in the CIE1976 (L * , a * , b * ) color space. The a * value is preferably −1.0 to 1.0, and the b * value is preferably −1.0 to 1.0.
 なお、感光性層を硬化して得られるパターン(感光性層の硬化膜)は、無彩色であることが好ましい。
 具体的には、全反射(入射角8°、光源:D-65(2°視野))が、CIE1976(L,a,b)色空間において、パターンのL値は10~90であることが好ましく、パターンのa値は-1.0~1.0であることが好ましく、パターンのb値は-1.0~1.0であることが好ましい。
The pattern (cured film of the photosensitive layer) obtained by curing the photosensitive layer is preferably achromatic.
Specifically, the total reflection (incident angle 8 °, light source: D-65 (2 ° field of view)) has a pattern L * value of 10 to 90 in the CIE1976 (L * , a * , b * ) color space. The a * value of the pattern is preferably −1.0 to 1.0, and the b * value of the pattern is preferably −1.0 to 1.0.
(感光性層の透湿度)
 感光性層を硬化して得られるパターン(感光性層の硬化膜)の層厚40μmでの透湿度は、防錆性の観点から、500g/(m・24hr)以下であることが好ましく、300g/(m・24hr)以下であることがより好ましく、100g/(m・24hr)以下であることが更に好ましい。
 なお、透湿度は、感光性層を、i線によって露光量300mJ/cmにて露光した後、145℃、30分間のポストベークを行うことにより、感光性層を硬化させた硬化膜で測定する。
(Humidity permeability of photosensitive layer)
Moisture permeability in the layer thickness 40μm pattern obtained by curing the photosensitive layer (cured film of the photosensitive layer), from the viewpoint of corrosion resistance, is preferably 500g / (m 2 · 24hr) or less, more preferably 300g / (m 2 · 24hr) or less, still more preferably 100g / (m 2 · 24hr) or less.
The moisture permeability is measured with a cured film obtained by curing the photosensitive layer by exposing the photosensitive layer with an i-line at an exposure amount of 300 mJ / cm 2 and then performing post-baking at 145 ° C. for 30 minutes. do.
〔屈折率調整層〕
 上記積層体は、屈折率調整層を有していることが好ましい。
 屈折率調整層としては、公知の屈折率調整層を適用できる。屈折率調整層に含まれる材料としては、例えば、バインダーポリマー、重合性化合物、金属塩、及び、粒子が挙げられる。
 屈折率調整層の屈折率を制御する方法は、特に制限されず、例えば、所定の屈折率の樹脂を単独で用いる方法、樹脂と粒子とを用いる方法、及び、金属塩と樹脂との複合体を用いる方法が挙げられる。
[Refractive index adjustment layer]
The laminate preferably has a refractive index adjusting layer.
As the refractive index adjusting layer, a known refractive index adjusting layer can be applied. Examples of the material contained in the refractive index adjusting layer include a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound, a metal salt, and particles.
The method of controlling the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is not particularly limited, and for example, a method of using a resin having a predetermined refractive index alone, a method of using a resin and particles, and a method of using a composite of a metal salt and a resin. There is a method using.
 バインダーポリマー及び重合性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、上記「感光性層」の項において説明したバインダーポリマー及び重合性不飽和化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the binder polymer and the polymerizable unsaturated compound include the binder polymer and the polymerizable unsaturated compound described in the above section "Photosensitive layer".
 粒子としては、例えば、金属酸化物粒子、及び、金属粒子が挙げられる。
 金属酸化物粒子の種類は特に制限はなく、公知の金属酸化物粒子が挙げられる。金属酸化物粒子における金属には、B、Si、Ge、As、Sb、及び、Te等の半金属も含まれる。
Examples of the particles include metal oxide particles and metal particles.
The type of the metal oxide particles is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include known metal oxide particles. The metal in the metal oxide particles also includes metalloids such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
 粒子の平均一次粒子径は、例えば、硬化膜の透明性の点から、1nm~200nmが好ましく、3nm~80nmがより好ましい。
 粒子の平均一次粒子径は、電子顕微鏡を用いて任意の粒子200個の粒子径を測定し、測定結果を算術平均することにより算出される。なお、粒子の形状が球形でない場合には、最も長い辺を粒子径とする。
The average primary particle size of the particles is preferably 1 nm to 200 nm, more preferably 3 nm to 80 nm, for example, from the viewpoint of transparency of the cured film.
The average primary particle size of the particles is calculated by measuring the particle size of 200 arbitrary particles using an electron microscope and arithmetically averaging the measurement results. When the shape of the particle is not spherical, the longest side is the particle diameter.
 金属酸化物粒子としては、具体的には、酸化ジルコニウム粒子(ZrO粒子)、Nb粒子、酸化チタン粒子(TiO粒子)、二酸化珪素粒子(SiO粒子)、及び、これらの複合粒子よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましい。
 これらの中でも、金属酸化物粒子としては、例えば、屈折率を調整しやすいという点から、酸化ジルコニウム粒子及び酸化チタン粒子よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種がより好ましい。
Specific examples of the metal oxide particles include zirconium oxide particles (ZrO 2 particles), Nb 2 O 5 particles, titanium oxide particles (TiO 2 particles), silicon dioxide particles (SiO 2 particles), and a composite thereof. At least one selected from the group consisting of particles is preferable.
Among these, as the metal oxide particles, for example, at least one selected from the group consisting of zirconium oxide particles and titanium oxide particles is more preferable from the viewpoint that the refractive index can be easily adjusted.
 金属酸化物粒子の市販品としては、焼成酸化ジルコニウム粒子(CIKナノテック(株)製、製品名:ZRPGM15WT%-F04)、焼成酸化ジルコニウム粒子(CIKナノテック(株)製、製品名:ZRPGM15WT%-F74)、焼成酸化ジルコニウム粒子(CIKナノテック(株)製、製品名:ZRPGM15WT%-F75)、焼成酸化ジルコニウム粒子(CIKナノテック(株)製、製品名:ZRPGM15WT%-F76)、酸化ジルコニウム粒子(ナノユースOZ-S30M、日産化学工業(株)製)、及び、酸化ジルコニウム粒子(ナノユースOZ-S30K、日産化学工業(株)製)が挙げられる。 Commercially available metal oxide particles include fired zirconium oxide particles (manufactured by CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., product name: ZRPGM15WT% -F04) and fired zirconium oxide particles (manufactured by CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., product name: ZRPGM15WT% -F74). ), Calcined zirconium oxide particles (manufactured by CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., product name: ZRPGM15WT% -F75), calcined zirconium oxide particles (manufactured by CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., product name: ZRPGM15WT% -F76), zirconium oxide particles (nanouse OZ) -S30M, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and zirconium oxide particles (Nano Youth OZ-S30K, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
 粒子は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用することもできる。
 屈折率調整層における粒子の含有量は、屈折率調整層の全質量に対し、1質量%~95質量%が好ましく、20質量%~90質量%がより好ましく、40質量%~85質量%が更に好ましい。
 金属酸化物粒子として酸化チタンを用いる場合、酸化チタン粒子の含有量は、屈折率調整層の全質量に対して、1質量%~95質量%が好ましく、20質量%~90質量%がより好ましく、40質量%~85質量%が更に好ましい。
The particles may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of particles in the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 1% by mass to 95% by mass, more preferably 20% by mass to 90% by mass, and 40% by mass to 85% by mass with respect to the total mass of the refractive index adjusting layer. More preferred.
When titanium oxide is used as the metal oxide particles, the content of the titanium oxide particles is preferably 1% by mass to 95% by mass, more preferably 20% by mass to 90% by mass, based on the total mass of the refractive index adjusting layer. , 40% by mass to 85% by mass is more preferable.
 屈折率調整層の屈折率は、感光性層の屈折率よりも高いことが好ましい。
 屈折率調整層の屈折率は、1.50以上が好ましく、1.55以上がより好ましく、1.60以上が更に好ましく、1.65以上が特に好ましい。屈折率調整層の屈折率の上限は、2.10以下が好ましく、1.85以下がより好ましく、1.78以下が特に好ましい。
The refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably higher than that of the photosensitive layer.
The refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 1.50 or more, more preferably 1.55 or more, further preferably 1.60 or more, and particularly preferably 1.65 or more. The upper limit of the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 2.10 or less, more preferably 1.85 or less, and particularly preferably 1.78 or less.
 屈折率調整層の厚みは、50nm~500nmが好ましく、55nm~110nmがより好ましく、60nm~100nmが更に好ましい。 The thickness of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 50 nm to 500 nm, more preferably 55 nm to 110 nm, and even more preferably 60 nm to 100 nm.
〔支持体、感光性層及びカバーフィルムの関係〕
 実施形態Bにおいても、実施形態Aで記載した、支持体、感光性層及びカバーフィルムの関係を満たすことが好ましい。
[Relationship between support, photosensitive layer and cover film]
Also in the B embodiment, it is preferable to satisfy the relationship of the support, the photosensitive layer and the cover film described in the A embodiment.
(実施形態Bの感光性転写部材の製造方法)
 実施形態Bの感光性転写部材(感光性層を有する積層体)の製造方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法を使用できる。
 実施形態Bにおける感光性組成物及び感光性層の形成方法については、実施形態Aにおいて上述した感光性組成物及び感光性層の形成方法と同様であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 また、支持体及びカバーフィルムについても、実施形態Aにおける製造方法と同様であり、好ましい態様も同様である。
(Method for Manufacturing Photosensitive Transfer Member of Embodiment B)
The method for producing the photosensitive transfer member (laminated body having a photosensitive layer) of the embodiment B is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used.
The method for forming the photosensitive composition and the photosensitive layer in the embodiment B is the same as the method for forming the photosensitive composition and the photosensitive layer described above in the embodiment A, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
Further, the support and the cover film are the same as the manufacturing method in the A embodiment, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
-屈折率調整層形成用組成物及び屈折率調整層の形成方法-
 屈折率調整層形成用組成物としては、上述した屈折率調整層を形成する各種成分と溶剤とを含むことが好ましい。なお、屈折率調整層形成用組成物において、組成物の全固形分に対する各成分の含有量の好適範囲は、上述した屈折率調整層の全質量に対する各成分の含有量の好適範囲と同じである。
 溶剤としては、屈折率調整層に含まれる成分を溶解又は分散可能であれば特に制限されず、水及び水混和性の有機溶剤よりなる群から選択される少なくとも1種が好ましく、水又は水と水混和性の有機溶剤との混合溶剤がより好ましい。
 水混和性の有機溶剤としては、例えば、炭素数1~3のアルコール、アセトン、エチレングリコール、及びグリセリンが挙げられ、炭素数1~3のアルコールが好ましく、メタノール又はエタノールがより好ましい。
 溶剤は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 溶剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分100質量部に対して、50質量部~2,500質量部が好ましく、50質量部~1,900質量部がより好ましく、100質量部~900質量部が更に好ましい。
-Composition for forming a refractive index adjusting layer and a method for forming the refractive index adjusting layer-
The composition for forming the refractive index adjusting layer preferably contains various components forming the above-mentioned refractive index adjusting layer and a solvent. In the composition for forming a refractive index adjusting layer, the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total solid content of the composition is the same as the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total mass of the refractive index adjusting layer described above. be.
The solvent is not particularly limited as long as the components contained in the refractive index adjusting layer can be dissolved or dispersed, and at least one selected from the group consisting of water and a water-miscible organic solvent is preferable, and water or water and water. A mixed solvent with a water-miscible organic solvent is more preferable.
Examples of the water-miscible organic solvent include alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, acetone, ethylene glycol, and glycerin. Alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms are preferable, and methanol or ethanol is more preferable.
The solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the solvent is preferably 50 parts by mass to 2,500 parts by mass, more preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass, and 100 parts by mass to 900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the composition. The portion is more preferable.
 屈折率調整層の形成方法は、上記の成分を含む層を形成可能な方法であれば特に制限されず、例えば、公知の塗布方法(スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布及びインクジェット塗布等)が挙げられる。 The method for forming the refractive index adjusting layer is not particularly limited as long as it can form a layer containing the above components, and examples thereof include known coating methods (slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, inkjet coating, etc.). Be done.
 また、カバーフィルムを屈折率調整層に貼り合わせることにより、実施形態Bの感光性転写部材を製造できる。
 カバーフィルムを屈折率調整層に貼り合わせる方法は、特に制限されず、公知の方法が挙げられる。
 カバーフィルムを屈折率調整層に貼り合わせる装置としては、真空ラミネーター、及び、オートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネーターが挙げられる。
 ラミネーターはゴムローラー等の任意の加熱可能なローラーを備え、加圧及び加熱ができるものであることが好ましい。
Further, by attaching the cover film to the refractive index adjusting layer, the photosensitive transfer member of Embodiment B can be manufactured.
The method of attaching the cover film to the refractive index adjusting layer is not particularly limited, and known methods can be mentioned.
Examples of the device for attaching the cover film to the refractive index adjusting layer include a vacuum laminator and a known laminator such as an auto-cut laminator.
It is preferable that the laminator is provided with an arbitrary heatable roller such as a rubber roller and can be pressurized and heated.
[積層体]
 本開示に係る積層体の第一の実施態様は、感光性層を有する積層体であって、上記積層体が、少なくとも切断されてなる切断面を有し、上記切断面幅50μmの切断面部分10箇所あたりのクラック数が、3個以下である。
 本開示に係る積層体の第二の実施態様は、感光性層を有する積層体であって、上記積層体が、少なくとも切断されてなる切断面を有し、上記積層体におけるへこみ故障の数が、60個/m以下である。
[Laminate]
The first embodiment of the laminate according to the present disclosure is a laminate having a photosensitive layer, wherein the laminate has a cut surface formed by at least being cut, and a cut surface portion having a cut surface width of 50 μm. The number of cracks per 10 locations is 3 or less.
A second embodiment of the laminate according to the present disclosure is a laminate having a photosensitive layer, wherein the laminate has at least a cut surface formed by cutting, and the number of dent failures in the laminate is large. , 60 pieces / m 2 or less.
 なお、本明細書において、特に断りなく、単に「本開示に係る積層体」という場合は、上記第一の実施態様及び上記第二の実施態様の両方について述べるものとする。また、特に断りなく、単に「感光性層」等という場合は、上記第一の実施態様及び上記第二の実施態様の両方の感光性層等について述べるものとする。 Note that, in the present specification, unless otherwise specified, the term "laminate according to the present disclosure" refers to both the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Further, unless otherwise specified, when the term "photosensitive layer" or the like is simply used, the photosensitive layers and the like of both the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described.
 本開示に係る積層体における上記感光性層を有する積層体の好ましい態様は、後述した以外は、上述した本開示に係る切断物の製造方法に用いられる感光性層を有する積層体の好ましい態様と同様である。 A preferred embodiment of the laminate having a photosensitive layer in the laminate according to the present disclosure is a preferred embodiment of the laminate having a photosensitive layer used in the method for producing a cut product according to the present disclosure, except as described later. The same is true.
 本開示に係る積層体の第一の実施態様において、上記切断面幅50μmの切断面部分10箇所あたりのクラック数は、3個以下であり、欠陥抑制の観点から、2個以下であることが好ましく、1個以下であることがより好ましく、0.5個以下であることが更に好ましく、0.1個以下であることが特に好ましい。
 本開示に係る積層体の第二の実施態様において、上記切断面幅50μmの切断面部分10箇所あたりのクラック数は、欠陥抑制の観点から、3個以下であることが好ましく、2個以下であることがより好ましく、1個以下であることが更に好ましく、0.5個以下であることが特に好ましく、0.1個以下であることが最も好ましい。
In the first embodiment of the laminate according to the present disclosure, the number of cracks per 10 cut surface portions having a cut surface width of 50 μm is 3 or less, and from the viewpoint of defect suppression, it is 2 or less. It is preferably 1 or less, more preferably 0.5 or less, and particularly preferably 0.1 or less.
In the second embodiment of the laminate according to the present disclosure, the number of cracks per 10 cut surface portions having a cut surface width of 50 μm is preferably 3 or less, preferably 2 or less, from the viewpoint of defect suppression. The number is more preferable, the number is more preferably 1 or less, the number is particularly preferably 0.5 or less, and the number is most preferably 0.1 or less.
 図3に、積層体の切断面において生じるクラックの一例を示す。
 図3は、支持体10、感光性層16及びカバーフィルム18を有する積層体を切断した切断面の端部における拡大図であり、図3の切断面では、支持体10の一部のクラックCRが確認できる。
FIG. 3 shows an example of cracks generated on the cut surface of the laminated body.
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view at the end of a cut surface obtained by cutting the laminate having the support 10, the photosensitive layer 16 and the cover film 18, and in the cut surface of FIG. 3, a crack CR of a part of the support 10 is taken. Can be confirmed.
 本開示における上記クラック数の測定は、以下のように行うものとする。
 切断された積層体の切断面の任意の10箇所を採取し、その裁断面を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM:Scanning Electron Microscope)により切断面幅50μmの切断面部分を観察する。条件は加速電圧3kV、観察倍率は1,700倍とした。10箇所のうち、支持体、感光性層、カバーフィルムのいずれかの層で、また数に関わらずクラックが入っているものを1つとカウントし、切断面幅50μmの切断面部分10箇所中のクラック発生数(クラック数)で評価する。
The number of cracks in the present disclosure shall be measured as follows.
Arbitrary 10 points on the cut surface of the cut laminate are collected, and the cut surface portion of the cut surface is observed with a scanning electron microscope (SEM) having a cut surface width of 50 μm. The conditions were an acceleration voltage of 3 kV and an observation magnification of 1,700 times. Of the 10 locations, any layer of the support, the photosensitive layer, and the cover film, which has cracks regardless of the number, is counted as one, and among the 10 locations of the cut surface portion having a cut surface width of 50 μm. Evaluate by the number of cracks (number of cracks).
 本開示に係る積層体の第二の実施態様において、上記積層体におけるへこみ故障の数は、60個/m以下であり、欠陥抑制の観点から、45個/m以下であることが好ましく、30個/m以下であることがより好ましく、10個/m以下であることが特に好ましい。
  本開示に係る積層体の第一の実施態様において、上記積層体におけるへこみ故障の数は、欠陥抑制の観点から、60個/m以下であることが好ましく、45個/m以下であることがより好ましく、30個/m以下であることが更に好ましく、10個/m以下であることが特に好ましい。
In the second embodiment of the laminate according to the present disclosure, the number of dent failures in the laminate is 60 / m 2 or less, and preferably 45 / m 2 or less from the viewpoint of defect suppression. , 30 pieces / m 2 or less, and particularly preferably 10 pieces / m 2 or less.
In the first embodiment of the laminate according to the present disclosure, the number of dent failures in the laminate is preferably 60 / m 2 or less, and 45 / m 2 or less, from the viewpoint of defect suppression. More preferably, it is more preferably 30 pieces / m 2 or less, and particularly preferably 10 pieces / m 2 or less.
 本開示における積層体におけるへこみ故障の数の測定は、以下のように行うものとする。
 積層体の表面を目視により6m以上観察して、デント(へこみ)の個数を測定し、1mあたりのへこみ故障の数を算出する。
The number of dent failures in the laminate in the present disclosure shall be measured as follows.
Visually observe the surface of the laminate for 6 m 2 or more, measure the number of dents (dents), and calculate the number of dent failures per 1 m 2.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明の実施形態を更に具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び、処理手順等は、本発明の実施形態の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。したがって、本発明の実施形態の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「部」、「%」は質量基準である。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in more detail with reference to examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, treatment contents, treatment procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed as long as they do not deviate from the gist of the embodiment of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. Unless otherwise specified, "parts" and "%" are based on mass.
(実施例1~12、並びに、比較例1及び2)
<感光性転写部材の作製>
-感光性層の形成-
 支持体として表2に記載の厚さのポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルムを用意した。
 支持体の表面に、スリット状ノズルを用いて塗布幅が1.0m、且つ、乾燥後の層厚が表2に記載の厚さとなるように表1に記載の感光性組成物A-1を塗布した。感光性組成物A-1の塗膜を80℃で40秒間かけて乾燥し、感光性層を形成した。
(Examples 1 to 12 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2)
<Manufacturing of photosensitive transfer member>
-Formation of photosensitive layer-
As a support, a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having the thickness shown in Table 2 was prepared.
The photosensitive composition A-1 shown in Table 1 was applied to the surface of the support using a slit-shaped nozzle so that the coating width was 1.0 m and the layer thickness after drying was the thickness shown in Table 2. It was applied. The coating film of the photosensitive composition A-1 was dried at 80 ° C. for 40 seconds to form a photosensitive layer.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
 表1における「Mm/Mb」は、感光性層における重合性化合物の含有量Mmとバインダーポリマーの含有量Mbとの比Mm/Mbの値を表し、「アクリル化合物の含有量」は、感光性層に含まれる(メタ)アクリル化合物の全質量に対するアクリル化合物の含有量を表し、単位は質量%である。 “Mm / Mb” in Table 1 represents the value of the ratio Mm / Mb of the content Mm of the polymerizable compound and the content Mb of the binder polymer in the photosensitive layer, and “content of the acrylic compound” is the photosensitive layer. It represents the content of the acrylic compound with respect to the total mass of the (meth) acrylic compound contained in the layer, and the unit is mass%.
 なお、表1の略称の詳細を以下に示す。
 BPE-500:エトキシ化(10モル当量)ビスフェノールAジメタクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製)
 
 SR-502:エトキシ化(9モル当量)トリメチロールプロパントリアクリレート(アルケマ社製)
 A-9300-CL1:ε-カプロラクトン変性トリス-(2-アクリロキシエチル)イソシアヌレート(新中村化学工業(株)製)
 B-CIM:2,2’-ビス(2-クロロフェニル)-4,4’,5,5’-テトラフェニル-1,2’-ビスイミダゾール(重合開始剤、黒金化成(株)製)
 SB-PI 701:4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン(増感剤、三洋貿易(株)製)
 CBT-1:カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール(防錆剤、城北化学工業(株)製)
The details of the abbreviations in Table 1 are shown below.
BPE-500: Ethoxylation (10 molar equivalents) Bisphenol A dimethacrylate (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)

SR-502: Ethoxylation (9 molar equivalents) Trimethylolpropane triacrylate (manufactured by Arkema)
A-9300-CL1: ε-caprolactone-modified tris- (2-acryloxyethyl) isocyanurate (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
B-CIM: 2,2'-bis (2-chlorophenyl) -4,4', 5,5'-tetraphenyl-1,2'-bisimidazole (polymerization initiator, manufactured by Kurogane Kasei Co., Ltd.)
SB-PI 701: 4,4'-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone (sensitizer, manufactured by Sanyo Trading Co., Ltd.)
CBT-1: Carboxybenzotriazole (rust inhibitor, manufactured by Johoku Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
-カバーフィルムの貼り付け-
 形成された感光性層の表面に、カバーフィルムとして表2に記載の厚さのPETフィルム又はポリプロピレン(PP)フィルムを圧着し、各実施例の感光性転写部材Aを作製した。
 得られた感光性転写部材Aを巻き取って、幅1,580mm、巻き尺4,000mのロール形態の感光性転写部材Aを作製した。
-Attach cover film-
A PET film or polypropylene (PP) film having the thickness shown in Table 2 was pressure-bonded to the surface of the formed photosensitive layer as a cover film to prepare the photosensitive transfer member A of each example.
The obtained photosensitive transfer member A was wound up to prepare a roll-shaped photosensitive transfer member A having a width of 1,580 mm and a tape measure of 4,000 m.
<へこみ(デント)故障評価>
 感光性転写部材Aの大ロールの切断は、図1及び表2に示す断面の上刃102及び下刃104を有する円盤状の回転式のスリッターを使用して行った。使用した上刃102の各パラメータは、表2に記載のR1、面取り角度θ1、及び、刃先角度θ2であり、また、使用した下刃104の各パラメータは、R2は2μm、刃先角度θ3は90°で固定した。更に、切断時における下刃104に対する上刃102の侵入深さTは、0.5mmであった。更にまた、円盤状の上刃102及び下刃104の半径はそれぞれ、約100mmであり、切断速度は、100m/minであった。切断された感光性転写部材Aは、小ロールに巻きなおした。
 上記回転式スリッターにより、幅1,580mm、巻き尺4,000mの感光性転写部材Aの大ロールから幅500mm、長さ100mの感光性転写部材Aの小ロールに切断した。切断された感光性転写部材Aの小ロールから2m引き出して、目視でデント(へこみ)の個数を調査した。
 上記評価に使用した小ロールは、上記大ロールから切断された小ロールのうち、上記大ロールの幅手方向から小ロールを3本、上記大ロールの長手方向から小ロールを2本の合計6本分であり、これらを調査し、その最大数で以下の評価基準により評価した。
  A:へこみの発生数が0個~10個
  B:へこみの発生数が11個~30個
  C:へこみの発生数が31個~60個
  D:へこみの発生数が61個以上
<Dent failure evaluation>
The large roll of the photosensitive transfer member A was cut by using a disk-shaped rotary slitter having an upper blade 102 and a lower blade 104 having a cross section shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. The parameters of the upper blade 102 used are R1, the chamfer angle θ1 and the cutting edge angle θ2 shown in Table 2, and the parameters of the lower blade 104 used are R2 of 2 μm and the cutting edge angle of θ3 of 90. Fixed at °. Further, the penetration depth T of the upper blade 102 with respect to the lower blade 104 at the time of cutting was 0.5 mm. Furthermore, the radii of the disk-shaped upper blade 102 and the lower blade 104 were each about 100 mm, and the cutting speed was 100 m / min. The cut photosensitive transfer member A was rewound into a small roll.
The rotary slitter was used to cut a large roll of the photosensitive transfer member A having a width of 1,580 mm and a tape measure of 4,000 m into a small roll of the photosensitive transfer member A having a width of 500 mm and a length of 100 m. The number of dents (dents) was visually investigated by pulling out 2 m from the small roll of the cut photosensitive transfer member A.
Of the small rolls cut from the large rolls, the small rolls used in the above evaluation are three small rolls from the width direction of the large rolls and two small rolls from the longitudinal direction of the large rolls, for a total of six. This is the main part, and these were investigated and the maximum number was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria.
A: The number of dents is 0 to 10 B: The number of dents is 11 to 30 C: The number of dents is 31 to 60 D: The number of dents is 61 or more
<クラック数評価>
 回転式スリッターにより、幅1,580mm、巻き尺4,000mの感光性転写部材Aの大ロールから幅500mm、長さ100mの感光性転写部材Aの小ロールに切断した。切断された感光性転写部材Aの小ロールから2m引き出して、両サイド任意の5箇所、計10箇所を採取し、その裁断面を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM:Scanning Electron Microscope)により観察した。条件は加速電圧3kV、観察倍率は1,700倍とした。10箇所のうち、支持体、感光性層、カバーフィルムのいずれかの層で、また数に関わらずクラックが入っているものを1つとカウントし、10箇所中のクラック発生数で評価した。
<Evaluation of the number of cracks>
A large roll of the photosensitive transfer member A having a width of 1,580 mm and a tape measure of 4,000 m was cut into a small roll of the photosensitive transfer member A having a width of 500 mm and a length of 100 m by a rotary slitter. 2 m was pulled out from the small roll of the cut photosensitive transfer member A, and a total of 10 points were collected at 5 arbitrary points on both sides, and the cut surface was observed with a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The conditions were an acceleration voltage of 3 kV and an observation magnification of 1,700 times. Of the 10 locations, any layer of the support, the photosensitive layer, and the cover film, which had cracks regardless of the number, was counted as one and evaluated by the number of cracks generated in the 10 locations.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000028
 表2に記載の支持体又はカバーフィルムとして使用した基材は、以下の通りである。
 PETフィルム(厚さ16μm):東レ(株)製ルミラー16QS62
 PETフィルム(厚さ20μm):国際公開第2017/208849号の段落0119~0127の記載に従い、厚み20μmのPETフィルムを作製した。
 PETフィルム(厚さ14μm):国際公開第2017/208849号の段落0119~0127の記載に従い、厚み14μmのPETフィルムを作製した。
 PPフィルム(厚さ12μm):東レ(株)製トレファン12KW37
The base materials used as the support or cover film shown in Table 2 are as follows.
PET film (thickness 16 μm): Toray Industries, Inc. Lumirror 16QS62
PET film (thickness 20 μm): A PET film having a thickness of 20 μm was prepared according to the description in paragraphs 0119 to 0127 of International Publication No. 2017/208849.
PET film (thickness 14 μm): A PET film having a thickness of 14 μm was prepared according to the description in paragraphs 0119 to 0127 of International Publication No. 2017/208849.
PP film (thickness 12 μm): Toray Industries, Inc. Trefan 12KW37
 上記表2に示すように、実施例1~12の切断物の製造方法は、比較例の切断物の製造方法と比べ、得られる切断物におけるへこみ故障を抑制することができる。 As shown in Table 2 above, the methods for producing the cut products of Examples 1 to 12 can suppress dent failures in the obtained cut products as compared with the methods for producing the cut products of the comparative example.
(実施例13~28)
<感光性組成物の調製>
 以下の表3に示す組成となるように感光性組成物AA-1~AA-10をそれぞれ調製した。なお、表3の各成分欄の数値は、質量部を表す。
(Examples 13 to 28)
<Preparation of photosensitive composition>
The photosensitive compositions AA-1 to AA-10 were prepared so as to have the compositions shown in Table 3 below. The numerical values in each component column of Table 3 represent parts by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
 表3に記載の上述した以外の化合物の詳細を、以下に示す。
 化合物B及び化合物C:以下の化合物
Details of the compounds other than those mentioned above shown in Table 3 are shown below.
Compound B and Compound C: The following compounds
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000030
<アルカリ可溶性樹脂P-1の固形分36.3質量%溶液の準備>
 下記の構造を有する重合体P-1の固形分36.3質量%溶液(溶剤:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート)を用いた。P-1において、各構成単位の右下の数値は、各構成単位の含有比率(モル%)を示す。
 P-1の固形分36.3質量%溶液は、下記に示す重合工程及び付加工程により準備した。
<Preparation of 36.3% by mass solid content solution of alkali-soluble resin P-1>
A 36.3% by mass solution of the polymer P-1 having the following structure (solvent: propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate) was used. In P-1, the numerical value at the lower right of each structural unit indicates the content ratio (mol%) of each structural unit.
A 36.3% by mass solution of P-1 solid content was prepared by the polymerization step and addition step shown below.
-重合工程-
 2,000mLのフラスコに、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(三和化学産業製、商品名PGM-Ac)(60g)、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(三和化学産業(株)製、商品名PGM)(240g)を導入した。得られた液体を、撹拌速度250rpm(revolutions per minute)で撹拌しつつ90℃に昇温した。
 滴下液(1)の調製として、メタクリル酸(三菱レイヨン(株)製、商品名アクリエステルM)107.1g、メタクリル酸メチル(三菱ガス化学(株)製、商品名MMA)(5.46g)、及び、シクロヘキシルメタクリレート(三菱ガス化学(株)製、商品名CHMA)(231.42g)を混合し、PGM-Ac(60g)で希釈することにより、滴下液(1)を得た。
 滴下液(2)の調製として、ジメチル2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオネート)(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製、商品名V-601)(9.637g)をPGM-Ac(136.56g)で溶解させることにより、滴下液(2)を得た。
 滴下液(1)と滴下液(2)とを同時に3時間かけて、上述した2,000mLのフラスコ(詳細には、90℃に昇温された液体が入った2,000mLのフラスコ)に滴下した。
次に、滴下液(1)の容器をPGM-Ac(12g)で洗浄し、洗浄液を上記2,000mLのフラスコに滴下した。次に、滴下液(2)の容器をPGM-Ac(6g)で洗浄し、洗浄液を上記2000mLのフラスコに滴下した。これらの滴下中、上記2,000mLのフラスコ内の反応液を90℃に保ち、撹拌速度250rpmで撹拌した。更に、後反応として、90℃で1時間撹拌した。
 後反応後の反応液に、開始剤の追加添加1回目として、V-601(2.401g)を添加した。更に、V-601の容器をPGM-Ac(6g)で洗浄し、洗浄液を反応液に導入した。その後、90℃で1時間撹拌した。
 次に、開始剤の追加添加2回目として、V-601(2.401g)を反応液に添加した。更にV-601の容器をPGM-Ac(6g)で洗浄し、洗浄液を反応液に導入した。その後90℃で1時間撹拌した。
 次に、開始剤の追加添加3回目として、V-601(2.401g)を反応液に添加した。更に、V-601の容器をPGM-Ac(6g)で洗浄し、洗浄液を反応液に導入した。その後90℃で3時間撹拌した。
-Polymerization process-
Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (manufactured by Sanwa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., trade name PGM-Ac) (60 g), propylene glycol monomethyl ether (manufactured by Sanwa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., trade name PGM) (240 g) in a 2,000 mL flask. Was introduced. The obtained liquid was heated to 90 ° C. while stirring at a stirring speed of 250 rpm (revolutions per minute).
As the preparation of the dropping liquid (1), 107.1 g of methacrylic acid (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd., trade name Acryester M), methyl methacrylate (manufactured by Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Company, trade name MMA) (5.46 g). , And cyclohexyl methacrylate (manufactured by Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Company, Inc., trade name CHMA) (231.42 g) were mixed and diluted with PGM-Ac (60 g) to obtain a dropping liquid (1).
To prepare the dropping solution (2), dimethyl 2,2'-azobis (2-methylpropionate) (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd., trade name V-601) (9.637 g) was added to PGM-Ac. The dropping liquid (2) was obtained by dissolving with (136.56 g).
The dropping liquid (1) and the dropping liquid (2) are simultaneously added dropwise to the above-mentioned 2,000 mL flask (specifically, a 2,000 mL flask containing a liquid heated to 90 ° C.) over 3 hours. bottom.
Next, the container of the dropping liquid (1) was washed with PGM-Ac (12 g), and the washing liquid was dropped into the 2,000 mL flask. Next, the container of the dropping liquid (2) was washed with PGM-Ac (6 g), and the washing liquid was dropped into the above 2000 mL flask. During these droppings, the reaction solution in the 2,000 mL flask was kept at 90 ° C. and stirred at a stirring speed of 250 rpm. Further, as a post-reaction, the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. for 1 hour.
V-601 (2.401 g) was added to the reaction solution after the post-reaction as the first additional addition of the initiator. Further, the container of V-601 was washed with PGM-Ac (6 g), and the washing liquid was introduced into the reaction liquid. Then, the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. for 1 hour.
Next, V-601 (2.401 g) was added to the reaction solution as the second additional addition of the initiator. Further, the container of V-601 was washed with PGM-Ac (6 g), and the washing liquid was introduced into the reaction liquid. Then, the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. for 1 hour.
Next, V-601 (2.401 g) was added to the reaction solution as the third additional addition of the initiator. Further, the container of V-601 was washed with PGM-Ac (6 g), and the washing liquid was introduced into the reaction liquid. Then, the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. for 3 hours.
-付加工程-
 90℃で3時間撹拌後、PGM-Ac(178.66g)を反応液へ導入した。次に、テトラエチルアンモニウムブロミド(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)(1.8g)とハイドロキノンモノメチルエーテル(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)(0.8g)とを反応液に添加した。更にそれぞれの容器をPGM-Ac(6g)で洗浄し、洗浄液を反応液へ導入した。その後、反応液の温度を100℃まで昇温させた。
 次に、グリシジルメタクリレート(日油(株)製、商品名ブレンマーG)(76.03g)を1時間かけて反応液に滴下した。ブレンマーGの容器をPGM-Ac(6g)で洗浄し、洗浄液を反応液に導入した。この後、付加反応として、100℃で6時間撹拌した。
 次に、反応液を冷却し、ゴミ取り用のメッシュフィルター(100メッシュ)でろ過し、重合体Dの溶液(1,158g)を得た(固形分濃度36.3質量%)。得られた重合体P-1の重量平均分子量は27,000、数平均分子量は15,000、酸価は95mgKOH/gであった。
-Additional process-
After stirring at 90 ° C. for 3 hours, PGM-Ac (178.66 g) was introduced into the reaction solution. Next, tetraethylammonium bromide (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) (1.8 g) and hydroquinone monomethyl ether (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) (0.8 g) were added to the reaction solution. Further, each container was washed with PGM-Ac (6 g), and the washing liquid was introduced into the reaction liquid. Then, the temperature of the reaction solution was raised to 100 ° C.
Next, glycidyl methacrylate (manufactured by NOF CORPORATION, trade name Blemmer G) (76.03 g) was added dropwise to the reaction solution over 1 hour. The container of Blemmer G was washed with PGM-Ac (6 g), and the washing liquid was introduced into the reaction liquid. Then, as an addition reaction, the mixture was stirred at 100 ° C. for 6 hours.
Next, the reaction solution was cooled and filtered through a mesh filter (100 mesh) for removing dust to obtain a solution of polymer D (1,158 g) (solid content concentration: 36.3% by mass). The obtained polymer P-1 had a weight average molecular weight of 27,000, a number average molecular weight of 15,000, and an acid value of 95 mgKOH / g.
P-1(以下、式中の構成繰り返し単位のモル比は、左側の構成繰り返し単位から順に、51.5:2:26.5:20であった。) P-1 (Hereinafter, the molar ratio of the constituent repeating units in the formula was 51.5: 2: 26.5: 20 in order from the constituent repeating unit on the left side.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000031
<アルカリ可溶性樹脂P-2の固形分36.3質量%溶液の準備>
 プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル82.4gをフラスコに仕込み窒素気流下90℃に加熱した。この液にスチレン38.4g、ジシクロペンタニルメタクリレート30.1g、メタクリル酸34.0gをプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル20gに溶解させた溶液、及び、重合開始剤V-601(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)5.4gをプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート43.6gに溶解させた溶液を同時に3時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、1時間おきに3回V-601を0.75g添加した。その後更に3時間反応させた。その後プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート58.4g、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル11.7gで希釈した。空気気流下、反応液を100℃に昇温し、テトラエチルアンモニウムブロミド0.53g、p-メトキシフェノール0.26gを添加した。これにグリシジルメタクリレート(日油社製ブレンマーGH)25.5gを20分かけて滴下した。これを100℃で7時間反応させ、重合体P-2の溶液を得た。得られた溶液の固形分濃度は36.5%であった。GPCにおける標準ポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量は17,000、分散度は2.4、ポリマーの酸価は94.5mgKOH/gであった。ガスクロマトグラフィーを用いて測定した残存モノマー量はいずれのモノマーにおいてもポリマー固形分に対し0.1質量%未満であった。
<Preparation of 36.3% by mass solid content solution of alkali-soluble resin P-2>
82.4 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether was placed in a flask and heated to 90 ° C. under a nitrogen stream. A solution prepared by dissolving 38.4 g of styrene, 30.1 g of dicyclopentanyl methacrylate and 34.0 g of methacrylate in 20 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether in this solution, and a polymerization initiator V-601 (Fuji Film Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) )) A solution prepared by dissolving 5.4 g in 43.6 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate was simultaneously added dropwise over 3 hours. After completion of the dropping, 0.75 g of V-601 was added three times every hour. After that, it was reacted for another 3 hours. Then, it was diluted with 58.4 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and 11.7 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether. The temperature of the reaction solution was raised to 100 ° C. under an air flow, and 0.53 g of tetraethylammonium bromide and 0.26 g of p-methoxyphenol were added. To this, 25.5 g of glycidyl methacrylate (Blemmer GH manufactured by NOF Corporation) was added dropwise over 20 minutes. This was reacted at 100 ° C. for 7 hours to obtain a solution of the polymer P-2. The solid content concentration of the obtained solution was 36.5%. The weight average molecular weight in terms of standard polystyrene in GPC was 17,000, the dispersity was 2.4, and the acid value of the polymer was 94.5 mgKOH / g. The amount of residual monomer measured by gas chromatography was less than 0.1% by mass with respect to the polymer solid content in any of the monomers.
P-2(以下、式中の構成繰り返し単位のモル比は、左側の構成繰り返し単位から順に、41.0:15.2:23.9:19.9であった。) P-2 (Hereinafter, the molar ratio of the constituent repeating units in the formula was 41.0: 15.2: 23.9: 19.9 in order from the left constituent repeating unit.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000032
<アルカリ可溶性樹脂P-3の固形分36.2質量%溶液の準備>
 プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル113.5gをフラスコに仕込み窒素気流下90℃に加熱した。この液にスチレン172g、メタクリル酸メチル4.7g、メタクリル酸112.1gをプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル30gに溶解させた溶液、及び、重合開始剤V-601(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)27.6gをプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル57.7gに溶解させた溶液を同時に3時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、1時間おきに3回V-601を2.5g添加した。その後更に3時間反応させた。その後プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート160.7g、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル233.3gで希釈した。空気気流下、反応液を100℃に昇温し、テトラエチルアンモニウムブロミド1.8g、p-メトキシフェノール0.86gを添加した。これにグリシジルメタクリレート(日油(株)製ブレンマーG)71.9gを20分かけて滴下した。これを100℃で7時間反応させ、樹脂P-3の溶液を得た。得られた溶液の固形分濃度は36.2%であった。GPCにおける標準ポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量は18,000、分散度は2.3、ポリマーの酸価は124mgKOH/gであった。ガスクロマトグラフィーを用いて測定した残存モノマー量はいずれのモノマーにおいてもポリマー固形分に対し0.1質量%未満であった。
<Preparation of 36.2% by mass solid content solution of alkali-soluble resin P-3>
113.5 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether was placed in a flask and heated to 90 ° C. under a nitrogen stream. A solution in which 172 g of styrene, 4.7 g of methyl methacrylate, and 112.1 g of methacrylate were dissolved in 30 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether in this solution, and a polymerization initiator V-601 (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) 27. A solution prepared by dissolving 0.6 g in 57.7 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether was simultaneously added dropwise over 3 hours. After completion of the dropping, 2.5 g of V-601 was added three times every hour. After that, it was reacted for another 3 hours. Then, it was diluted with 160.7 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and 233.3 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether. The temperature of the reaction solution was raised to 100 ° C. under an air flow, and 1.8 g of tetraethylammonium bromide and 0.86 g of p-methoxyphenol were added. 71.9 g of glycidyl methacrylate (Blemmer G manufactured by NOF CORPORATION) was added dropwise thereto over 20 minutes. This was reacted at 100 ° C. for 7 hours to obtain a solution of resin P-3. The solid content concentration of the obtained solution was 36.2%. The weight average molecular weight in terms of standard polystyrene in GPC was 18,000, the dispersity was 2.3, and the acid value of the polymer was 124 mgKOH / g. The amount of residual monomer measured by gas chromatography was less than 0.1% by mass with respect to the polymer solid content in any of the monomers.
P-3(以下、式中の構成繰り返し単位のモル比は、左側の構成繰り返し単位から順に、55.1:26.5:1.6:16.8であった。) P-3 (Hereinafter, the molar ratio of the constituent repeating units in the formula was 55.1: 26.5: 1.6: 16.8 in order from the left constituent repeating unit.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000033
<アルカリ可溶性樹脂P-4の固形分36.2質量%溶液の準備>
 P-3の合成において、モノマーの種類と量を変更することにより、P-4の固形分36.2質量%溶液(溶剤:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート)を準備した。得られた重合体P-4の重量平均分子量は18,000、分散度は2.3、酸価は114mgKOH/gであった。
<Preparation of 36.2% by mass solid content solution of alkali-soluble resin P-4>
In the synthesis of P-3, a 36.2% by mass solution of P-4 (solvent: propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate) was prepared by changing the type and amount of the monomer. The obtained polymer P-4 had a weight average molecular weight of 18,000, a dispersity of 2.3, and an acid value of 114 mgKOH / g.
P-4(以下、式中の構成繰り返し単位のモル比は、左側の構成繰り返し単位から順に、55.1:24.6:1.6:17.0:1.7であった。) P-4 (Hereinafter, the molar ratio of the constituent repeating units in the formula was 55.1: 24.6: 1.6: 17.0: 1.7 in order from the left constituent repeating unit.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
<屈折率調整層形成用組成物の調製>
 次に、以下の表4に記載の組成で、屈折率調整層形成用組成物B-1~B-4を調製した。表4中の数値は、「質量部」を表す。
<Preparation of composition for forming refractive index adjusting layer>
Next, compositions B-1 to B-4 for forming a refractive index adjusting layer were prepared with the compositions shown in Table 4 below. The numerical values in Table 4 represent "parts by mass".
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000035
 表4中のポリマーAは以下のとおり合成を行った。
 1Lの三口フラスコに1-メトキシプロパノール(東京化成工業(株)製)(270.0g)を導入し、撹拌しつつ窒素気流下で70℃に昇温させた。一方、アリルメタクリレート(45.6g)(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)、及び、メタクリル酸(14.4g)(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)を1-メトキシプロパノール(東京化成工業(株)製)(270.0g)に溶解させ、更にV-65(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)を3.94g溶解させることで滴下液を作製し、フラスコ中へ2.5時間かけて滴下液の滴下を行った。そのまま2.0時間、撹拌状態を保持し反応を行った。
 その後、温度を室温まで戻し、撹拌状態のイオン交換水(2.7L)へ滴下し、再沈殿を実施し、懸濁液を得た。ろ紙を引いたヌッチェにて研濁液を導入することでろ過を行い、濾過物を更にイオン交換水で洗浄し、湿潤状態の粉体を得た。45℃の送風乾燥にかけ、恒量になったことを確認し、粉体として収率70%でポリマーAを得た。
 得られたポリマーAのメタクリル酸/メタクリル酸アリルの比率は76/24質量%であった。重量平均分子量Mwは38,000であった。
Polymer A in Table 4 was synthesized as follows.
1-Methylenepropanol (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) (270.0 g) was introduced into a 1 L three-necked flask, and the temperature was raised to 70 ° C. under a nitrogen stream while stirring. On the other hand, allyl methacrylate (45.6 g) (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) and methacrylic acid (14.4 g) (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) are 1-methoxypropanol (Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). Dissolve in (270.0 g) (manufactured by Fuji Film Co., Ltd.), and further dissolve 3.94 g of V-65 (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) to prepare a dropping solution, and put it in a flask for 2.5 hours. The dropping liquid was dropped over. The reaction was carried out while maintaining the stirred state for 2.0 hours.
Then, the temperature was returned to room temperature, and the mixture was added dropwise to ion-exchanged water (2.7 L) in a stirred state, and reprecipitation was carried out to obtain a suspension. Filtration was carried out by introducing a turbid solution in Nutche with a filter paper, and the filtered material was further washed with ion-exchanged water to obtain a wet powder. It was dried by blowing air at 45 ° C., and it was confirmed that the amount became constant, and polymer A was obtained as a powder in a yield of 70%.
The ratio of methacrylic acid / allyl methacrylate of the obtained polymer A was 76/24% by mass. The weight average molecular weight Mw was 38,000.
<転写フィルム1~16(感光性転写部材)の作製>
 厚み16μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(ルミラー16KS40、東レ(株)製)の仮支持体の上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて、塗布量を、乾燥後の膜厚が表5の厚みになる塗布量に調整し、表5に記載の感光性組成物材料AA-1~AA-10のいずれか1種を塗布し、感光性層を形成した。
 100℃の乾燥ゾーンで溶剤を揮発させた後、スリット状ノズルを用いて、表3の組み合わせにて、表5に記載の屈折率調整層形成用の材料B-1~B-4のうちの少なくとも1種を用いて、塗布量を、乾燥後の膜厚が表5に記載の膜厚になる量に調整して感光性層層の上に塗布した後、80℃の乾燥温度で乾燥させ、屈折率調整層を形成した。屈折率調整層の上に保護フィルム(ルミラー16KS40、東レ(株)製)を圧着し、転写フィルム1~16を作製した。
<Preparation of transfer films 1 to 16 (photosensitive transfer member)>
Using a slit-shaped nozzle on a temporary support of a polyethylene terephthalate film (Lumirror 16KS40, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) with a thickness of 16 μm, the coating amount was adjusted to the coating amount at which the film thickness after drying becomes the thickness shown in Table 5. After adjustment, any one of the photosensitive composition materials AA-1 to AA-10 shown in Table 5 was applied to form a photosensitive layer.
After volatilizing the solvent in the drying zone at 100 ° C., using a slit-shaped nozzle, among the materials B-1 to B-4 for forming the refractive index adjusting layer shown in Table 5, the combinations shown in Table 3 are used. Using at least one type, the coating amount is adjusted so that the film thickness after drying becomes the film thickness shown in Table 5, the film is applied onto the photosensitive layer layer, and then dried at a drying temperature of 80 ° C. , A refractive index adjusting layer was formed. A protective film (Lumirror 16KS40, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.) was pressure-bonded onto the refractive index adjusting layer to prepare transfer films 1 to 16.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000036
<評価>
 転写フィルム1~16に対しても同様にへこみの発生数とクラック数を評価した。評価結果を下記表6に示す。
<Evaluation>
Similarly, the number of dents and the number of cracks were evaluated for the transfer films 1 to 16. The evaluation results are shown in Table 6 below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000037
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000037
 上記表6に示すように、実施例13~28の切断物の製造方法は、得られる切断物におけるへこみ故障及びクラック故障を抑制することができる。 As shown in Table 6 above, the methods for producing the cut products of Examples 13 to 28 can suppress dent failures and crack failures in the obtained cut products.
 なお、2020年2月17日に出願された日本国特許出願2020-024650号、2020年10月13日に出願された日本国特許出願2020-172675号、及び2020年12月15日に出願された日本国特許出願2020-207961号の開示は、その全体が参照により本明細書に取り込まれる。また、本明細書に記載された全ての文献、特許出願および技術規格は、個々の文献、特許出願、および技術規格が参照により取り込まれることが具体的かつ個々に記された場合と同程度に、本明細書中に参照により取り込まれる。  Japanese patent application No. 2020-024650 filed on February 17, 2020, Japanese patent application No. 2020-172675 filed on October 13, 2020, and filed on December 15, 2020. The disclosure of Japanese Patent Application No. 2020-209961 is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Also, all documents, patent applications and technical standards described herein are to the same extent as if the individual documents, patent applications and technical standards were specifically and individually stated to be incorporated by reference. , Incorporated by reference herein.

Claims (12)

  1.  感光性層を有する積層体を上刃及び下刃により挟み込んで切断する工程を含み、
     前記上刃の刃先と前記下刃の刃先とのクリアランスが、5μm以下である
     切断物の製造方法。
    It includes a step of sandwiching and cutting a laminate having a photosensitive layer between an upper blade and a lower blade.
    A method for manufacturing a cut product, in which the clearance between the cutting edge of the upper blade and the cutting edge of the lower blade is 5 μm or less.
  2.  前記上刃の前記積層体の送り方向に垂直な断面において、前記上刃の刃先における前記下刃側の傾斜角度である面取り角度θ1が、3°以下である請求項1に記載の切断物の製造方法。 The cut product according to claim 1, wherein the chamfer angle θ1, which is the inclination angle of the upper blade on the lower blade side, is 3 ° or less in the cross section of the upper blade perpendicular to the feed direction of the laminated body. Production method.
  3.  前記上刃の前記積層体の送り方向に垂直な断面において、前記上刃の刃先角度θ2が、33°以下である請求項1又は請求項2に記載の切断物の製造方法。 The method for manufacturing a cut product according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the cutting edge angle θ2 of the upper blade is 33 ° or less in a cross section of the upper blade perpendicular to the feeding direction of the laminated body.
  4.  前記積層体全体の厚さが、50μm以下である請求項1~請求項3のいずれか1項に記載の切断物の製造方法。 The method for producing a cut product according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the thickness of the entire laminate is 50 μm or less.
  5.  前記感光性層の厚さが、1μm~20μmである請求項1~請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の切断物の製造方法。 The method for producing a cut product according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the thickness of the photosensitive layer is 1 μm to 20 μm.
  6.  前記積層体が、支持体、前記感光性層、及び、カバーフィルムを有する積層体である請求項1~請求項5のいずれか1項に記載の切断物の製造方法。 The method for producing a cut product according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the laminate is a laminate having a support, the photosensitive layer, and a cover film.
  7.  前記支持体及び前記カバーフィルムの厚さがそれぞれ独立に、10μm~20μmである請求項6に記載の切断物の製造方法。 The method for producing a cut product according to claim 6, wherein the thickness of the support and the cover film are independently 10 μm to 20 μm.
  8.  前記支持体の前記感光性層側の面の算術平均粗さRa値が、0.05μm以下である請求項6又は請求項7に記載の切断物の製造方法。 The method for producing a cut product according to claim 6 or 7, wherein the arithmetic average roughness Ra value of the surface of the support on the photosensitive layer side is 0.05 μm or less.
  9.  前記カバーフィルムの前記感光性層側の面の算術平均粗さRa値が、0.1μm以下である請求項6~請求項8のいずれか1項に記載の切断物の製造方法。 The method for producing a cut product according to any one of claims 6 to 8, wherein the arithmetic average roughness Ra value of the surface of the cover film on the photosensitive layer side is 0.1 μm or less.
  10.  前記切断する工程の後、得られた前記積層体の切断物の少なくとも一部を巻き取る工程を含む請求項1~請求項9のいずれか1項に記載の切断物の製造方法。 The method for producing a cut product according to any one of claims 1 to 9, which comprises a step of winding at least a part of the cut product of the obtained laminated body after the cutting step.
  11.  感光性層を有する積層体であって、
     前記積層体が、少なくとも切断されてなる切断面を有し、
     前記切断面幅50μmの切断面部分10箇所あたりのクラック数が、3個以下である
     積層体。
    A laminate having a photosensitive layer,
    The laminate has a cut surface that is at least cut.
    A laminate in which the number of cracks per 10 cut surface portions having a cut surface width of 50 μm is 3 or less.
  12.  感光性層を有する積層体であって、
     前記積層体が、少なくとも切断されてなる切断面を有し、
     前記積層体におけるへこみ故障の数が、60個/m以下である
     積層体。
    A laminate having a photosensitive layer,
    The laminate has a cut surface that is at least cut.
    A laminate in which the number of dent failures in the laminate is 60 / m 2 or less.
PCT/JP2021/004622 2020-02-17 2021-02-08 Method for manufacturing cut article, and layered body WO2021166719A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022501812A JPWO2021166719A1 (en) 2020-02-17 2021-02-08
CN202180007985.9A CN114901442A (en) 2020-02-17 2021-02-08 Method for producing dicing material, and laminate

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020024650 2020-02-17
JP2020-024650 2020-02-17
JP2020-172675 2020-10-13
JP2020172675 2020-10-13
JP2020-207961 2020-12-15
JP2020207961 2020-12-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021166719A1 true WO2021166719A1 (en) 2021-08-26

Family

ID=77391123

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/004622 WO2021166719A1 (en) 2020-02-17 2021-02-08 Method for manufacturing cut article, and layered body

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2021166719A1 (en)
CN (1) CN114901442A (en)
WO (1) WO2021166719A1 (en)

Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH05146990A (en) * 1991-11-29 1993-06-15 Ricoh Co Ltd End section cutting device for thin film circular body
JPH1051151A (en) * 1996-08-05 1998-02-20 Ibiden Co Ltd Manufacture of printed wiring board
JP2000079773A (en) * 1998-09-04 2000-03-21 Konica Corp Manufacture of photosensitive printing plate
US20030116597A1 (en) * 2001-12-21 2003-06-26 Zhanjun Gao Method of cutting a laminated web and reducing delamination
JP2006263852A (en) * 2005-03-23 2006-10-05 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Cutting method and cutting device
JP2007069324A (en) * 2005-09-08 2007-03-22 Fujifilm Corp Web cutting method and device therefor
JP2007237324A (en) * 2006-03-08 2007-09-20 Fujifilm Corp Device and method for cutting web
JP2010082760A (en) * 2008-09-30 2010-04-15 Fujifilm Corp Film slit device and film
JP2010228023A (en) * 2009-03-26 2010-10-14 Ube Ind Ltd Method for cutting film
JP2016083937A (en) * 2014-10-24 2016-05-19 富士フイルム株式会社 Transfer film and manufacturing method of the same, method for manufacturing laminate, method for manufacturing electrostatic capacitance type input device, and method for manufacturing image display device
WO2019187365A1 (en) * 2018-03-29 2019-10-03 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resist pattern, method for producing circuit wiring line, touch panel, and touch panel display device

Family Cites Families (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP5011632B2 (en) * 2004-06-29 2012-08-29 Tdk株式会社 Slitting apparatus and electrode manufacturing method
JP4921016B2 (en) * 2006-03-31 2012-04-18 ルネサスエレクトロニクス株式会社 Lead cut device and method for manufacturing semiconductor device
PL392244A1 (en) * 2008-02-19 2011-02-28 Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited Cutting device using rotating circular blades, method for manufacturing products in the form of a sheet by using the cutting device and the products in the form of a sheet obtained by this method
JP2012071374A (en) * 2010-09-28 2012-04-12 Tdk Corp Cutting blade and method for manufacturing multilayer ceramic electronic component
US20150239140A1 (en) * 2012-10-19 2015-08-27 Dow Global Technologies Llc Apparatus and method for cutting formable and/or collapsible materials
JP2015080823A (en) * 2013-10-21 2015-04-27 株式会社蔵持 Press cutting device and press cutting method of resin plate
US20180009125A1 (en) * 2015-01-26 2018-01-11 Riken Technos Corporation Process for producing resinous panel
JP6880447B2 (en) * 2017-03-28 2021-06-02 トヨタ自動車株式会社 Cutting device and rotary blade
CN106876043B (en) * 2017-04-12 2019-03-01 诸暨中澳自动化设备有限公司 Adhesive tape cutter structure and its method

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH05146990A (en) * 1991-11-29 1993-06-15 Ricoh Co Ltd End section cutting device for thin film circular body
JPH1051151A (en) * 1996-08-05 1998-02-20 Ibiden Co Ltd Manufacture of printed wiring board
JP2000079773A (en) * 1998-09-04 2000-03-21 Konica Corp Manufacture of photosensitive printing plate
US20030116597A1 (en) * 2001-12-21 2003-06-26 Zhanjun Gao Method of cutting a laminated web and reducing delamination
JP2006263852A (en) * 2005-03-23 2006-10-05 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Cutting method and cutting device
JP2007069324A (en) * 2005-09-08 2007-03-22 Fujifilm Corp Web cutting method and device therefor
JP2007237324A (en) * 2006-03-08 2007-09-20 Fujifilm Corp Device and method for cutting web
JP2010082760A (en) * 2008-09-30 2010-04-15 Fujifilm Corp Film slit device and film
JP2010228023A (en) * 2009-03-26 2010-10-14 Ube Ind Ltd Method for cutting film
JP2016083937A (en) * 2014-10-24 2016-05-19 富士フイルム株式会社 Transfer film and manufacturing method of the same, method for manufacturing laminate, method for manufacturing electrostatic capacitance type input device, and method for manufacturing image display device
WO2019187365A1 (en) * 2018-03-29 2019-10-03 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resist pattern, method for producing circuit wiring line, touch panel, and touch panel display device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2021166719A1 (en) 2021-08-26
CN114901442A (en) 2022-08-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021199996A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and temporary support body for photosensitive transfer material
WO2022045203A1 (en) Transfer film, manufacturing method for laminate, and manufacturing method for circuit wiring
WO2021220981A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern production method, circuit wiring production method, touch panel production method, and polyethylene terephthalate film
JP7342246B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
WO2022054599A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, etching method, and method for manufacturing electronic device
WO2022163778A1 (en) Method for manufacturing laminate, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, method for manufacturing electronic device, and photosensitive transfer material
WO2022092160A1 (en) Method for manufacturing laminate, method for manufacturing circuit wiring substrate, and transfer film
WO2021166719A1 (en) Method for manufacturing cut article, and layered body
WO2022075090A1 (en) Transfer film, method for producing laminate, and method for producing circuit wiring
WO2021161965A1 (en) Photosensitive film and photosensitive-film manufacturing method
WO2022138576A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing circuit wiring line, method for producing electronic device, and method for producing multilayer body
WO2022138578A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing resin pattern, method for manufacturing laminate, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing electronic device
JP7321388B2 (en) Information giving method, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP7416910B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and temporary support for photosensitive transfer material
WO2022138493A1 (en) Method for manufacturing laminate, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and transfer film
US20230094866A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material for led array, light shielding material for led array, led array, and electronic apparatus
WO2022138577A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, laminate manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and electronic device manufacturing method
WO2022138154A1 (en) Method for manufacturing laminate, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and transfer film
WO2022138630A1 (en) Transfer film, method for producing laminate, and method for producing circuit wiring
WO2022059417A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel
WO2022138246A1 (en) Transfer material and method for manufacturing laminate
US20230102758A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, light shielding material, led array, and electronic apparatus
WO2022045255A1 (en) Light-sensitive transfer material and method for manufacturing resin pattern
WO2021220980A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel
WO2022163301A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21756525

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022501812

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21756525

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1